Safety solutions using Preventa - Elmatik AS

Automation and control 

Safety solutions using Preventa 

Catalogue 

January 

04

Art. 61231 - DIA6ED2030901EN 

Art. 67341 - MKTED203111EN 

2004 

Safety solutions 

using Preventa 

2003 

Distributed I/O 

Advantys STB 

Art. 55053 - MKTED203041EN 

AS-Interface 

cabling system 

2003 

Data-processing, 

Communication 

Control and Protection, 

Detection, 


Man-Machine dialogue 

Control and Protection, 

Detection, 


Man-Machine dialogue, 

Communication 

The 

Essential guide 

Art. 54752 - MKTED203031EN 

To be issued: 1st quarter 2004 

2003 

Global Detection 

Electronic and 

electromechanical sensors 

Art. 16666 - MKTED299002EN 

2000 

Telemecanique 

Control and connection 

components 

Art. 28697 - MKTED299014EN 

2001 

Telemecanique 

Components for 

Human-Machine interfaces 

Detection 

Panel-building and cabling accessories 

Man-Machine dialogue

AUTC201108140EN 

Transparent factory 

The future of automation 

AUTC201104124EN 

2003 Momentum 

automation platform 

AUTC201384126EN 

2002 

Quantum 


2003 

2003 

AUTC201496125EN 

Premium 


2001 

AUTC101272123EN 

Nano 

programmable controllers 

and 

Micro 


FAAED202032EN 

2002 

Twido 

Telemecanique 

Programmable controller 

An overview 

of the product range 

- Safety solutions using Preventa, 

- Global Detection, 

- AS-Interface, 

- Control and connection components, 

- Motor starter solutions 

(Control and protection components), 

- Soft starters and variable speed drives 

AUTCD21124207EN 

AUTC20176206EN 

2003 

Twin Line 

Motion control 


Man-Machine dialogue, 

Communication, 

Supervision 

Art. 46753 - MKTED203011EN 

2002 

Lexium 

Motion control 

Soft starters and 

variable speed drives 

Art. 27501 - MKTED201001EN 

2003 

2001 

Motor starter solutions 

Control and protection 

components 

Control and protection

Automation solutions 

An overview of the product range 

Products listed in this catalogue 

Products listed in other catalogues (see previous pages). 

Control and 

protection 

Contactors 

from 6 to 16 A 

Contactors Contactors 

from 9 to 150 A from 115 to 800 A 

Modular 

contactors 

Mini-Vario and Vario switch disconnectors, 

open and enclosed versions 

Enclosed thermal-magnetic 

motor-circuit breakers 

Measurement and 

control relays 

Thermal overload relays 

Motor starters open version 

DIrect on-line starters, enclosed version 

Star-delta starters, 

enclosed version 

Control and 

protection 

Soft starters open and 

enclosed version 

Soft start-soft stop units for 

asynchronous motors 

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 

Ready assembled 

variable speed drives 

Power supplies 

Transformers 

Detection 

Photo-electric 

detectors 

Inductive, capacitive, magnet and 

ultrasonic proximity sensors 

Connectors 

Encoders 

Limit switches for safety applications 

Metal and plastic Lever operating head Automatic reset 

Limit switches 

Electromechanical pressure 

and vacuum switches 

Electronic pressure 

and vacuum switches 

Inductive indentification system 

Safety light curtains 

Data processing 

Zelio Logic 

smart relays 

Twido programmable Nano programmable Micro automation 

controllers 

controllers 

platform 

Premium automation 

platform 

Quantum automation 

platform 

Momentum automation 

platform 

TBX distributed I/O 

Advantys STB 

distributed I/O 

Connection 

accessories 

Interfaces 

Telefast ® 2 

pre-wired system 

Electronic 

timing relays 

Control 

relays 

Preventa Safety modules for PLCs Power supply modules 

safety modules Micro Premium 

Human-machine 

dialogue 

Emergency stop 

Ø 22 pushbuttons 

Control stations 

for Ø 22 units 

Cam switches 

Pendant 

control stations 

Operator dialogue terminals 

Industrial control 

stations 

Integrated Human- 

Machine interfaces 

Illuminated beacons 

and indicator banks 

Rotating 

beacons 

Sirens 

Foot switches 

Two-hand control stations 


trip wire switches 

Keyboards 

Communication 

Communication architecture: Ethernet network, Modbus Plus network, Fipway network, AS-Interface, Fipio bus, 

CANopen bus, Uni-Telway bus, Modbus bus, INTERBUS, Profibus DP, asynchronous serial links 

Advanced dialogue solutions 

Supervision 

Magelis IPC industrial PC 

Vijeo Look software 

Monitor PRO software 

Panel building 

and cabling 

accessories 

Wall-mounted 

enclosures 

Floor-standing 

enclosures 

Uprights, mounting plates, mounting rail, 

cable ducting and cable clips 

Prefabricated busbar systems and power 

distribution systems 

Tego Dial 

Tego Power 

Profil front panel 

Terminal blocks Cable ends Marking accessories 

Tools 

Power 

distribution 

Prefadis service poles and posts, 

lighting poles 

Canalis busbar trunking for lighting distribution 

Canalis busbar trunking for low and medium power distribution 

Canalis busbar trunking for high power distribution 

Mobile distribution: Canalis track section and cable carriers 

Services 

Product reference index 

Technical information 

Schneider Electric worldwide 

Our company’s policy is one of continuous development and improvement and we reserve the right to supply product which may differ from those illustrated in this catalogue. 

Our products are sold subject to our Standard Conditions of Sale, copies of which are available on request. 

A specific "information concerning the transition of Schneider Electric Industries SA products, equiments and applications to the year 2000 is available on request.

General contents 

Safety solutions using Preventa 

1 – Safety automation system solutions 

Selection guide Preventa safety controllers ......................page1/2 

Preventa safety controllers ....................................page1/6 

Selection guide Preventa safety modules .......................page1/48 

Safety modules for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring . . .page 1/64 

Safety modules for Emergency stop, limit switch and 

safety light curtain monitoring ................................page1/79 

Safety modules for Emergency stop, limit switch, safety mat 

and edge, or safety light curtain monitoring .....................page1/89 

Safety modules for enabling switch monitoring ..................page1/94 

Safety modules for electrical monitoring of switches combined 

in pairs. ...................................................page1/98 

Safety modules for electrical monitoring of two-hand 

control stations. ...........................................page1/102 

Safety modules for increasing the number of safety contacts .....page1/107 

Safety modules for safety time delays .........................page1/111 

Safety modules for monitoring of coded magnetic switches ......page1/115 

Safety modules for the “muting” function of type 4 

safety light curtains ........................................page1/122 

Safety modules for zero speed detection ......................page1/127 

Safety modules for lift control. ...............................page1/133 

Safety modules for amplifier relay applications .................page1/135 

Safety module for dynamic valve monitoring on linear presses ....page1/137 

Safety modules for dynamic monitoring of double-bodied 

solenoid valves. ...........................................page1/141 

Safety modules for safety stop with automatic overtravel 

monitoring and control .....................................page1/146 

SelectionguideAS-Interfacesafetysolutions ..................page1/150 

AS-i safety monitors and interfaces ...........................page1/154 

Selection guide Preventa safety modules ......................page1/160 

Safety modules for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring . .page 1/164 

2 – Safety selection solutions 

Selectionguidesafetyswitches.................................page2/2 

Safety switches : general, presentation ..........................page2/6 

Key operated safety switches .................................page2/18 

Metal safety witches, turret head ..............................page2/20 

Plastic safety switches, double insulated, fixed head .............page2/32 

Plastic safety switches, double insulated, turret head .............page2/36 

Plastic safety switches with rotary lever or spindle operator, 

double insulated, turret head .................................page2/48 

Coded magnetic switches ....................................page2/54 

Miniature design safety limit switches, metal ....................page2/60 

Compact design safety limit switches, metal or platic .............page2/62 

Limit switches with manual reset, plastic, double insulated ........page2/66 

4

Selectionguidesafetymats..................................page2/78 

Safety mats ...............................................page2/82 

Selectionguidesafetylightcurtains...........................page2/86 

Safety light curtains ........................................page2/88 

3 – Safety dialogue solutions 

Selection guide dialogue components ..........................page3/2 

Harmony® Emergency stop mushroom head Ø 22 pushbuttons ....page3/4 

XAL control stations for Ø 22 control and signalling units ........page3/12 

Enabling switches for safety circuits ..........................page3/16 

Two-hand ergonomic control stations .........................page3/18 

Emergency stop trip wire switches ............................page3/24 

Metal foot switches with positive opening operation on release ......page3/38 

Illuminated beacons and indicator banks Ø 70 mm. ..............page3/50 

4 – Safety control and protection solutions 

SelectionguideMini-VARIOandVARIOswitchdisconnectors......page4/2 

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications. .......page4/8 

Selectionguidedirectstartersforsafetyapplications............page4/26 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers model GV2-ME .........page4/28 

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control .....................page4/34 

Selectionguidecontactorsfrom6to2750A....................page4/44 

5 – General 

Industrial accidents: the hard facts .............................page5/2 

Safeoperation:aglobalconcept...............................page5/3 

Hazards,dangerousphenomena...............................page5/4 

Danger zones: definitions, examples ...........................page5/5 

Machinesafety..............................................page5/6 

Categories of parts of control systems relating to safety ..........page5/8 

Riskevaluation ............................................page5/10 

Examplesofsafetypowercircuitsoftypicalapplications.........page5/12 

TheMachineryDirective,theHealthandSafetyDirective .........page5/16 

Europeanstandards........................................page5/20 

Dangerous machines and safety components . . . ...............page5/23 

Safetytechniques..........................................page5/24 

Electricalhazards..........................................page5/28 

6 – Services 

Index. .....................................................page6/2 

Technical information ........................................page6/4 

5

Contents 

1-Safety automation system solutions 

Selection guide Preventa safety controllers ......................page1/2 

1 

b Preventa safety controllers with pre-defined functions 

v Type XPS MP ............................................page 1/6 

b Preventa safety controllers 

v Type XPS MC ...........................................page 1/19 

v Functions ..............................................page 1/20 

Selection guide Preventa safety modules .......................page1/48 

b Preventa safety modules : general .............................page 1/56 

b Preventa safety modules for Emergency stop and 

limit switch monitoring 

v Type XPS AC ...........................................page 1/64 

v Types XPS AV and XPS AT ................................page 1/68 

v Type XPS AF ...........................................page 1/75 

b Preventa safety modules for Emergency stop, limit switch and safety 

light curtain monitoring 

v Type XPS AFL ..........................................page 1/79 

v Type XPS AR ...........................................page 1/83 

b Preventa safety modules for Emergency stop, limit switch, 

safety mat and edge, or safety light curtain monitoring 

v Type XPS AK ...........................................page 1/89 

b Preventa safety modules for enabling switch monitoring 

v Type XPS VC ...........................................page 1/94 

b Preventa safety modules for electrical monitoring 

of switches combined in pairs 

v Type XPS FB ...........................................page 1/98 

b Preventa safety modules for electrical monitoring 

of two-hand control stations 

v Types XPS BA, XPS BC and XPS BF .......................page 1/102 

b Preventa safety modules for increasing the number of safety contacts 

v Types XPS ECM and XPS ECP ............................page 1/107 

b Preventa safety modules for safety time delays 

v Types XPS TSA and XPS TSW ............................page 1/111 

b Preventa safety modules for monitoring of coded magnetic switches 

v Types XPS DMB and XPS DME. ...........................page 1/115 

b Preventa safety modules for the “muting” function 

of type 4 safety light curtains 

v Types XPS LMS and XPS LMR ............................page 1/122 

b Preventa safety modules for zero speed detection 

v Type XPS VN ..........................................page 1/127 

b Preventa safety modules for lift control 

v Type XPS DA ..........................................page 1/133 

b Preventa safety modules for amplifier relay applications 

v Type XPS NS ..........................................page 1/135 

1/0 Schneider Electric

Preventa safety module for dynamic valve monitoring 

on linear presses 

v Type XPS PVT. ........................................ page 1/137 

1 

b Preventa safety modules for dynamic monitoring of double-bodied 

solenoid valves 

v Type XPS PVK ........................................ page 1/141 

b Preventa safety modules for safety stop with automatic overtravel 

monitoring and control 

v Type XPS OT. ......................................... page 1/146 

SelectionguideAS-Interfacesafetysolutions..................page1/150 

b AS-Interface safety monitors 

v Type ASI SAFEMON .................................... page 1/154 

b AS-Interface safety interfaces 

v Type ASI SSL ......................................... page 1/158 

Selection guide Preventa safety modules .....................page1/160 

b Preventa safety modules for Emergency stop and limit switch 

monitoring 

v Type TSX DPZ, integrated in Micro PLCs .................... page 1/164 

v Type TSX PAY, integrated in Premium PLCs ................. page 1/170 

Schneider Electric 

1/1

Selection guide 

0 

Safety automation system solutions 

1 

Preventa safety controllers 

1 

Applications 

Modules Controllers for 2 simultaneous safety functions independent from each other. User selection of 2 functions out of 15. 

Configuration on product front panel 

Functions 

MonItoring of Emergency stops, limit switches, enabling switches, safety mats and sensitive edges and relay-output 

light curtains, etc. 

Conformity to standards 

Product Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1, EN 1088 

EN 61496-1 (type 4), EN 1780 

EN 60947-5-3 

Machine assemblies IEC 204-1, EN 292, EN 418 

EN 60204-1 

Product certifications 

UL, CSA 

Number of circuits 

Safety 

6 N/O (3 N/O per function) 

Additional 

3 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 

Display 

Supply 

12 LEDs 

c 24 V 

Module type 

XPS MP 

Pages 1/5 

1/2

0 

1 

1 

Controllers for several independent safety functions, with selection of safety functions by configuration software running on Windows. 

16 or 32 inputs and 8 independent safety outputs. 

Monitoring of Emergency stops, limit switches, two-hand controls, light curtains with or without “muting” function, enabling switches, coded magnetic 

switches, safety mats, solenoid valves on hydraulic presses, safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric presses and zero speed detection. 

Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60947-5-3, EN 574 

IEC 204-1, EN 292, EN 418, EN 60204-1 

UL, CSA 

2 N/O + 6 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 

1 "muting" signalling output 

LED display on front face 

c 24 V 

XPS MC 

1/19 

1/3

Operating principle 

0 


1 

Preventa safety controllers type XPS MP 

With pre-defined functions 

1 


Preventa safety modules - monitors 

XPS MP are designed to conform 

with category 4 of the standard 

EN 954-1. 

They enable two independent safety 

functions (selected from a choice of 

15 pre-defined configurations) to be 

performed using the same product. 

Configuration selection is easily 

made using 3 buttons on the front 

face of the module. 

The 15 preprogrammed safety functions provide a solution for the majority of safety applications up to level 4 

conforming to the standard EN 954-1, for example monitoring Emergency stops, limit switches, safety mats and edges, 

enabling switches, monitoring type 4 safety light curtains conforming to EN 61946-1 which have relay outputs (for 

example, XUS LT type curtains, see pages 2/103 and 2/104) and monitoring magnetic switches. 

XPS MP monitors incorporate 6 safety outputs (3 per function) and 3 solid-state signalling outputs for signalling to the 

process PLC. 

To aid diagnostics, the modules have LEDs on the front face which provide information on the monitoring circuit status. 

They also indicate and assist selection of the 2 required configurations. 

Configuration 

Synchronisation 

time 

Type of start (1) Start test Notes 

Automatic or unmonitored Monitored 

Functions disabled 0 – – – – Factory setting 

Emergency stop monitoring, 

1-channel wiring (category 2) 

Emergency stop monitoring, 

2-channel wiring, or 

guard monitoring (category 4) 

Guard monitoring for injector press 

or blowing machine (category 4) 

Enabling switches with handle 

(3 position limit switch) 

(category 4) 

Safety mats and edges monitoring 

(category 3) 

Relay output safety light curtain 

monitoring (category 4) 

Monitoring of coded magnetic 

switches (category 4) 

1 – X – – – 

2 – – X – – 

3 Unlimited X – X – 

4 Unlimited – X X – 

5 1.5 s X – X – 

6 1.5 s – X X – 

7 Unlimited X – – – 

8 Unlimited – X – – 

9 1.5 s – X X Uses both safety outputs (2) 

10 – X – X The start button acts as 

start-up preparation 

11 – X – – Mats with circuit making 

12 – – X – 

contacts 

13 0.5 s – X X – 

14 1.5 s X – – Magnetic switches with 2 

15 1.5 s – X – 

contacts 1 N/O and 1 N/C 

(1) Automatic start: there is no start contact or it is shunted. 

Unmonitored start: the output is activated on closing of the start contact. 

Monitored start: the start input is monitored so that there is no start-up in the event of the start contact being shunted or the start circuit being closed for more 

than 10 seconds. 

Start-up is triggered following activation of the start button (push-release function) on opening of the contact. 

(2) Tool zone guard with 3rd limit switch. 

Additional rear guard (optional) with automatic start. The opening of the guard cuts all outputs. 

1/4

Characteristics 

0 


1 




Module type XPS MP11123 XPS MP11123P 

1 

Product designed for max. use in 

Category 4 max. 

safety related parts of control 

systems (conforming to EN 954-1) 

Supply 

- voltage V c 24 

- voltage limits - 20…+ 20 % 

Consumption W ≤ 5 

Module inputs fuse protection 

Start button monitoring 

Control unit voltage 

Between input terminals C1-I1, C2-I2, 

C3-I3, C4-I4, C5-I5 or C6-I6 

Calculation of wiring resistance RL 

between input terminals 

V 

Ω 

Internal, electronic 

Yes/No (depending on configuration selected) 

24 (at nominal supply voltage) 

100 max. 

Maximum cable length: 2000 m 

Synchronisation time between s 0.5, 1.5 or unlimited, depending on configuration selected 

inputs 

Outputs 

- voltage reference Volt-free 

- number and type of safety circuits 3 N/O per function (6 N/O total) (13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44, 53-54, 63-64) 

- number and type of additional circuits 3solid-state 

- breaking capacity in AC-15 VA C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180 

- breaking capacity in DC-13 24 V/1.25 A L/R = 50 ms 

- breaking capacity of solid-state 

24 V/20 mA 

outputs 

- max. thermal current (Ithe) for each 

group of 3 outputs 

3.3 A for all 3 outputs, or 6 A for 1 output and 2 A for the other 2 outputs, or 2 A for 1 output and 4 A for the 

other 2 outputs 

- max. total thermal current A 20 

- output fuse protection A 4 gG or 6 fast acting (conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0660 part 200) 

- minimum current mA 10 

- minimum voltage V 17 

Electrical durability See page 1/60 

Response time on input opening ms

References 

0 


1 



103248 

References 

Description 

Type of 

terminal 

block 

connection 

Number 

of safety 

circuits 

Additional 

outputs 

Supply Reference Weight 

kg 

1 

Modules for 

2 independent 

safety functions 

Integrated 

in module 

3 N/O per 3solid 

function state 

(6 N/O total) 

c 24 V XPS MP11123 0.320 

XPS MP11123 

103249 

Separate, 

can be 

removed 

from module 

3 N/O per 

function 

(6 N/O total) 

3solid 

state 

c 24 V XPS MP11123P 0.320 

XPS MP11123P 

1/6

Dimensions 

0 


1 



AM1 DP200 rail mounting 

XPS MPpppp 

XPS MPppppP 

1 

99 

99 

Key to LEDs 

114 45 

114 45 

1 

2 

3 

4 

56789101112 

F1 

F2 

OK 

1-2-3 Function 1 configuration code 

4 K1/K2 state (function 1, N/O safety outputs closed) 

5-6-7 Function 2 configuration code 

8 K3/K4 state (function 1, N/O safety outputs closed) 

9 A1-A2 supply voltage 

10 Fault 

11 Function 1 configuration 

12 Function 2 configuration 

F1, F2, OK: Configuration buttons 

1/7

Connections, 0 

functional diagrams 

0 


1 



1 

XPS MP 

Emergency stop monitoring, 1-channel wiring 

Configuration 1 (1-channel Emergency stop, automatic or unmonitored start) = function 1. 

Configuration 2 (1-channel Emergency stop, monitored start) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

Emergency 

stop 

F1 

S1 

K11 

K12 

ESC 

F1 

Start 

F1 

S3 

(1) 

To PLC 

A1 C3 C2 C1 

I1 I2 

I3 13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C5 C4 

I4 I5 

I6 14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

Emergency 

stop 1 

F2 

S4.1 

ESC 

F2 

(2) 

(3) 

Emergency 

stop 2 

F2 

S4.2 

K02 

K02 

Start 

F2 

S6 

K11 

K12 

K21 

K22 

0 V 

Function 1 Function 1 Function 2 Function 2 

(1) Automatic start. 

(2) Function 1 safety outputs. 


ESC = External start conditions. 

Functional diagrams 

Configuration 1 Configuration 1 

Automatic start 

Unmonitored start 

Key 

0 

Input 1, Emergency stop 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2, ESC 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 


C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 

Signalling output 

Y84, (Y94) 

1 

Power-up (Self-test accomplished) 


not activated 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 


not activated 

Key 

0 


C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2, ESC 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

1 



not activated 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 


not activated 

Configuration 2 

Monitored start 

Key 

0 


C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2, ESC 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

1 



not activated 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 


not activated 

1/8



(continued) 0 


1 



XPS MP 

Guard monitoring with start test 

Configuration 3 (locking of guard with start test, automatic or unmonitored start) = function 1. 

Configuration 4 (locking of guard with start test, monitored start) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

1 

Function 1 

Guard 

closed 

Open 

Start 

F1 

S3 (1) 

K11 

S1 

S2 

K12 

To PLC 

ESC 

F1 

A1 C3 C1 I1 C2 

I2 I3 

13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C4 I4 C5 

I5 I6 

14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

ESC 

F2 

(2) (3) 

S4 

S5 

K21 

K22 

0 V 

Function 2 

Guard 

closed 





Open 

Start 

F2 

S6 

K11 K12 K21 K22 







Key 0 

1 

1 

Guard closed Guard Guard closed 

Key 0 

open 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 


C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 



Key 0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

1 

No start-up (1) 


Guard closed 

Guard 

open 

t = 

Guard closed 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) No 

t = t < 10 s 

start-up (1) 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 


Guard closed 


Guard 

open 

(1) Prevention of start-up necessary: to check the sensors connected, open and 

reclose the guard. 

t = 

Guard closed 

1/9



(continued) 0 


1 



1 

XPS MP 

Guard monitoring with start test and synchronisation time = 1.5 ms 

Configuration 5 (locking of guard with start test, automatic or unmonitored start) = function 1. 

Configuration 6 (locking of guard with start test, monitored start) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

Function 1 

Guard 

closed 

Open 

Start 

F1 

S3 (1) 

K11 

S1 

S2 

K12 

To PLC 

ESC 

F1 

A1 C3 C1 I1 C2 

I2 I3 

13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C4 I4 C5 

I5 I6 

14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

ESC 

F2 

(2) (3) 

S4 

S5 

K21 

K22 

0 V 

Function 2 

Guard 

closed 





Open 

Start 

F2 

S6 

K11 K12 K21 K22 







Key 0 

1 

Guard closed Guard Guard closed 

1 

0 

open 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 


C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 



Key 

0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

1 



Guard closed 

No start-up 

(1) 

Guard 

open 

Guard closed 

Key 

End of travel 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 


C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 


Guard closed 


Guard 

open 

Guard closed 

(1) Prevention of start-up necessary: to check the sensors connected, open and 

reclose the guard. 

1/10



(continued) 0 


1 



0 

XPS MP 

Emergency stop monitoring, 2-channel wiring 

Configuration 7 (2-channel Emergency stop, automatic or unmonitored start) = function 1. 

Configuration 8 (2-channel Emergency stop, monitored start) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

1 

Start 

F1 

S3 

(1) 

Emergency 

stop 

F1 

S1 

K11 

K12 

ESC 

F1 

To PLC 

A1 C3 C2 C1 

I1 I2 

I3 13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C5 C4 

I4 I5 

I6 14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

S4.1 

Emergency 

stop 1 

F2 

ESC 

F2 

K21 

(2) 

(3) 

S4.2 

Emergency 

stop 2 

F2 

Start 

F2 

K22 

S6 

K11 

K12 

K21 

K22 

0 V 










Key 0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 


C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 



Key 

0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 


1 Emergency stop Emergency Emergency stop 

not activated stop 

not activated 

Key 0 

activated 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

1 



not activated 

No 

start-up (1) 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 


not activated 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

1 


Emergency stop Emergency 

not activated stop 

activated 


not activated 

(1) Start button control: the start button must not be activated on power-up. 

1/11



(continued) 0 


1 



1 

XPS MP 

Guard monitoring for injector press or blowing machine 

Configuration 9 (this configuration uses both functions of the monitor. Only function 1 is configured). 

+ 24 V 

F1 

S3 

Safety valve 

Tool zone guard, 

closed 

Open 

S1 

S2 

To PLC 

A1 C3 C1 I1 C2 

I2 I3 

13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C4 I4 C5 

I5 I6 

14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

(1) (1) 

ESC 

F1 

(2) 

(3) 

S4 

S5 

K11 

K12 

0 V 

Guard outside tool 

zone, closed 

Open 

S6 

Start 

K11 

(1) If sensors S4 and S5 are not used, terminals C4-I4 and C5-I5 must be linked. 

(2) Safety outputs for tool zone. 

(3) Safety outputs for rear access safety doors. 

In configuration mode 9, the N/C contacts of the relays or contactors controlled via outputs 43-44, 53-54, 63-64 cannot be monitored by the feedback loop (ESC). 


K12 

Tool zone Tool zone 

Functional diagram 


Key 

0 


C1-I1 


C2-I2 


C3-I3 


C4-I4 


C5-I5 

Start button 

C6-I6 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34 


Y84 

N/O output 

43-44/53-54/63-64 


Y94 

1 


Both guards 

closed 


Guard for 

tool zone 

open 

Both guards 

closed 

Guard outside 

tool zone open 

t < 1,5 s t < 10 s t = t < 10 s 

Both guards 

closed 

(1) Prevention of start-up necessary: to check the sensors connected, open and reclose the guard. 

1/12



(continued) 0 


1 



XPS MP 

Enabling switch, safety mat monitoring 

Configuration 10 (enabling switch, with or without start-up preparation) = function 1. 

Configuration 11 (safety mat monitoring, automatic or unmonitored start) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

1 

S12 

K11 

01 2 1 

2 

Validation F1 

5 

6 

3 

4 

K12 

To PLC 

ESC 

F1 

A1 C3 C2 C1 

I1 I2 

I3 13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C5 C4 

I4 I5 I6 

14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

S45 

ESC 

F2 

(4) (5) 

K21 

K22 

0 V 

(1) S3 = start-up preparation F1. 

(2) Without start-up preparation. 





XY2 TP 

Safety mat F2 

Start 

F2 

S6 

(3) 

K11 K12 K21 K22 




Enabling switch 

1 

Key 0 

Switching level: 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Input 3 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

Input 3 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 


1 0 1 0 

1 2 1 0 

1 

2 

1 With start-up preparation 

2 Without start-up preparation 


Safety mat with automatic start 



Safety mat with unmonitored start 


Key 

0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

1 


mat/edge 

not activated 


mat/edge 

activated 


mat/edge 

not activated 


mat/edge 

activated 

Key 

0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

1 


mat/edge 

not activated 


mat/edge 

activated 


mat/edge 

not activated 


mat/edge 

activated 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 


C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

1/13



(continued) 0 


1 



1 

XPS MP 

Safety mat monitoring, safety light curtain monitoring 

Configuration 12 (safety mat/edge monitoring, monitored start) = function 1. 

Configuration 13 (safety light curtain monitoring, monitored start ; synchronisation time = 0.5 s) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

Safety mat 

F1 

S12 

Start 

F1 

K11 

S3 

K12 

To PLC 

XY2 TP 

ESC 

F1 

A1 C3 C2 C1 

I1 I2 

I3 13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

XPS MP 

Funct. 2 

A2 

C6 C5 C4 

I4 I5 

I6 14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

Safety light 

curtain F2 

S45 

OSSD1 

ESPE 

output 

OSSD2 

ESC 

F2 

K21 

K22 

(1) (2) 

Start 

F2 

S6 

K11 

K12 

K21 

K22 

0 V 







Safety mat/edge with monitored start 

Safety light curtain with monitored start 

Power-up 

(Self-test accomplished) 

Power-up 

(Self-test accomplished) 

Key 

0 

1 

Safety mat/edge 

not activated 


mat/edge 

activated 

Safety mat/edge 

not activated 


mat/edge 

activated 

Key 

0 

1 

Light curtain 

beams made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Light curtain 

beams made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

t < 10 s 

No 

start-up (1) 

t < 10 s 


Y84, (Y94) 

No 

start-up (1) 

t < 0,5 s 

t < 10 s 

(1) Start button control: 

the start button must not be activated on power-up. 

1/14



(continued) 0 


1 



XPS MP 

Monitoring of coded magnetic switches 

Configuration 14 (automatic or unmonitored start, synchronisation time = 1.5 s) = function 1. 

Configuration 15 (monitored start, synchronisation time = 1.5 s) = function 2. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

Magnetic switch 

not activated F1 

Start 

F1 

S3 

(1) 

1 

K11 

S12 

BK WH 

BU BN 

XCS DM 

K12 

ESC 

F1 

To PLC 

A1 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 

I3 13 23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

Y+ Y74 Y84 Y94 

Logic 

channel 1 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Function 1 

(F1) 

Function 2 

(F2) 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

Funct. 1 

Funct. 2 

XPS MP 

A2 

C6 I4 

C4 C5 

I5 I6 14 24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

S45 

BK WH 

BU BN 

XCS DM 

ESC 

F2 

K21 

(2) (3) 

K22 

Coded magnetic 

switch 

Start 

F2 

S6 

K11 

K12 

K21 

K22 

0 V 










Key 0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 


C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

1 


Actuator part 

present 

Actuator part 

absent 




Key 0 

1 

Actuator part Actuator part 

present absent 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 

t < 10 s t < 1,5 s 

Actuator part 

present 

t < 1,5 s 

Actuator part 

present 

t < 10 s 

Key 0 

Input 1 

C1-I1, (C4-I4) 

Input 2 

C2-I2, (C5-I5) 

Start button 

C3-I3, (C6-I6) 

N/O output 

13-14/23-24/33-34, 

(43-44/53-54/63-64) 


Y84, (Y94) 


1 

Actuator part Actuator part 

present absent 

Actuator part 

present 

t < 1,5 s 

1/15

Presentation 1 


automation system solutions 1 


Type XPS MC 

1 

Presentation 

Safety controllers XPS MCppX are designed to meet the requirements of safety 

applications requiring conformity to category 4 of standard EN 954-1. 

b They are available in 2 versions: 

v XPS MC16X with 16 inputs and 10 independent safety outputs, 

v XPS MC32X with 32 inputs and 10 independent safety outputs. 

XPS MC16X with screw connector XPS MCTS16 

v The safety inputs are supplied by the various control outputs, in such a manner so 

as to monitor for short-circuits between the inputs, short-circuits between each input 

and earth or the presence of residual voltages. The controller, assisted by the control 

outputs, continuously tests all the connected inputs. As soon as an error is detected 

on an input, all the outputs associated with this input are disconnected. Safety 

outputs associated with other inputs remain active. 

v The 10 safety outputs comprise 4 contact guided relay outputs and 6 solid-state 

outputs. 

b Safety controllers XPS MC incorporate a Modbus communication interface for 

configuration and diagnostics. The Modbus interface enables the controller to be 

connected to a PC, PLC or an operator dialogue terminal. 

b Configuration of the safety functions is carried out using software XPS MCWIN. 

22 certified safety functions are available with this software and they are easily 

assignable to the safety outputs. The safety functions have multiple combination 

possibilities and various starting conditions. 

XPS MC32X with screw connector XPS MCTS32 

b Safety controllers XPS MCppX can be fitted as required: 

v with screw connectors XPS MCTSpp, 

v or with spring clip connectors XPS MCTCpp. 

v These connectors are to be ordered separately. 

Safety functions 

The safety functions are certified in accordance with category 4 of standard EN 9541-1 

and configurable in the XPS MC controller using software XPS MCWIN. 

Main safety functions 

Application schemes and functional diagrams, see pages: 

Emergency stop monitoring, with or without time delay, 

1/20 and 1/21 

1 or 2-channel wiring. 

Two-hand control (type III-C conforming to EN 574-1). 1/22 

Guard monitoring with 1 or 2 limit switches. 1/23 to 1/27 

Guard monitoring for injector presses and blowing machines. 1/28 to 1/29 

Magnetic switch monitoring. 1/30 

Sensing mat monitoring. 1/32 

Light curtain (type 4 conforming to EN 61496, relay or solid-state 1/34 to 1/37 

output) monitoring. 

Zero speed detection. 1/38 

Dynamic monitoring of hydraulic valves on linear presses. 1/39 

Monitoring safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric press. 1/40 to 1/43 

Safety time delays. 1/44 

"Muting" function of light curtains. 1/45 

Enabling switch monitoring, 2 or 3 contact. 1/46 and 1/47 

Characteristics: 

page 1/18 

1/16 

References, dimensions: 

page 1/19 

Functions: 

pages 1/20 to 1/47

Description 1 




Type XPS MC 

1 

2 

6 

5 

4 

Description 

Front face of controllers XPS MCppX 

1 LED display and system diagnostics. 

2 Solid-state safety output and "muting" indicator light terminals. 

3 Power supply (c 24 V) and relay safety output terminals. 

4 Control output terminals for power supply to safety inputs and safety input 

terminals. 

5 RJ45 type connector. 

6 RESET button (reinitialisation). 

1 

3 

Controller XPS MC32X with screw connector 

5 

7 9 

LED details 

1 

2 

3 

4 

PWR 

CNF 

E In 

E Ex 

RUN 

COM 

6 8 

Illuminated display 

1 PWR: green LED, power on. 

2 CNF: yellow LED, on or flashing in configuration mode. 

3 E In: red LED, internal error. 

4 E Ex: red LED, external error. 

5 Run: green LED, on or flashing depending on service mode. 

6 COM: green LED, controller communicating via TER connection. 

7 green LEDs, solid-state outputs. 

8 green LEDs, relay outputs. 

9 green LEDs, inputs. 

Operator 

dialogue 

terminal 

(Magelis) 

Modbus 

PLC 

(Premium) 

Operator 

dialogue 

terminal 

(Magelis) 

1 

2 

Network architecture 

b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate on the Modbus network for 

diagnostics using an operator dialogue terminal (Magelis) or an industrial PLC 

(Premium). 

For direct connection to a Magelis operator dialogue terminal, use the following 

connection accessories: 

1 Adaptor XPS MCCPC, 

2 Connecting cable XBT Z968. 

XPS MC XPS MC XPS MC 

PC 

2 

Profibus DP 

1 

LA9 P307 

XPS MC 

b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate with a PC, running software 

XPS MCWIN, for configuration of the safety functions. 

Connection accessories: 

1 Adaptor XPS MCCPC, 

2 Connecting cable TSX PCX 1031. 

b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate on the Profibus DP network using 

communication gateway LA9 P307. 

XPS MC 


page 1/18 


page 1/19 

Functions: 

pages 1/20 to 1/47 

1/17

Characteristics 1 




Type XPS MC 

1 


Controller type 

XPS MC16X, XPS MC32X 

Product designed for max. use in safety related parts of 

Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 

control systems 

Supply voltage V c 24 ± 20% 

Maximum consumption W 12 

Fuse protection A 16 gG (gl) max. 


Yes/No (depending on configuration selected) 

Control circuit voltage 

28.8 V/13 mA (between input terminals C1-I1 to C8-I16) 

Calculation of wiring resistance RL Ω 100 max, maximum cable length: 2000 m (Between input terminals) 

Synchronisation time between inputs s Depending on configuration selected 

Outputs Relay Voltage reference Volt-free 

Safety circuit 2 N/O per function (4 N/O total) (13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44) 

Breaking capacity in AC-15 VA C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180 

Breaking capacity in DC-13 

24 V/1.5 A L/R = 50 ms 

Thermal current (Ithe) for each 

group of 2 outputs 

A 6 for 1 output and 2 for the other, or 4 for both outputs. 

Current limit A Ith y 16 (with several relay output circuits simultaneously loaded) 

Output fuse protection A 4 gG (gl) or 6 fast acting 

Minimum current mA 10 (1) 

Minimum voltage V 17 (1) 

Solid-state Breaking capacity 24 V/2 A 

Destruction power 

c 24 V/2 A (for each safety output) 

Safety circuit 6 solid-state (O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, O6) 

Current limit A Ith y 6.5 (with several relay output circuits simultaneously loaded 


Response time on input opening ms < 20 

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 300 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC 60647-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp.) kV 4 (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC 60647-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

LED indicators 

30 (XPS MC16X), 46 (XPS MC32X) 

Temperature Operating °C -10…+55 

Storage °C -25…+85 

Degree of protection 

IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 (connector and enclosure) 

Connections Type (2) Separate plug-in screw connector 

XPS MCTSpp 

Separate plug-in spring clip connector 

XPS MCTCpp 

Power supply and relay output terminals 

1 conductor Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…2.5 mm², AWG 24-12 

With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 

mm² With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 

2 conductors Without cable end mm² Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…1.5 – 

With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5 – 

mm² Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5…1.5 Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5…1 

Tightening torque of screw contacts Nm 0.5…0.6 – 

Wire stripping length mm 10 

Other terminals 

1 conductor Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…1.5 mm², AWG 28-16 

With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5 

mm² With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…0.5 

2 conductors Without cable end mm² Solid cable: 0.14…0.5 

– 

Flexible cable: 0.14…0.75 

With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…0.34 – 

mm² Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5 – 

Enclosure fixing (conforming to DIN EN 50022) 

Metal adaptor for fixing on standard 5 35 mm rail 

(1) The controller is also capable of switching low power loads (17 V/10 mA minimum) provided that the contact has not been used for switching high power loads, 

causing possible contamination or wear of the gold layer on the contact tips. 

(2) To be ordered separately. 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

Description: 

page 1/17 


page 1/19 

Functions: 

pages 1/20 to 1/47 

1/18

References, 

dimensions 1 

Safety automation system solutions 1 


Type XPS MC 

References 

Safety controllers (connector not included) 

Number of Number of outputs Reference Weight 

inputs Relay Solid-state 

kg 

16 4 6 XPS MC16X 0.820 

1 

32 4 6 XPS MC32X 0.840 

XPS MC16X 

with screw connector 

XPS MCTS16 

XPS MC32X 

with screw connector 

XPS MCTS32 

Connector (to be ordered separately) 

Description For use with Reference Weight 

kg 

Screw 

connectors 

XPS MC16X XPS MCTS16 0.080 

XPS MC32X XPS MCTS32 0.110 

Spring clip 

connectors 

XPS MC16X XPS MCTC16 0.080 

XPS MC32X XPS MCTC32 0.110 

TSX PCX 1031 

XPS MCCPC 

Accessories (to be ordered separately) 

Description Usage Length 

From To 

(m) 

Connecting 

cables 

XPS MCppX 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

Magelis operator 2.5 XBT Z968 0.180 

dialogue terminal 

PC 2.5 TSX PCX 1031 0.170 

Adaptor Link between XPS MCppX and PC or XPS MCppX XPS MCCPC 0.011 

and Magelis operator dialogue terminal 

Configuration software CD-ROM 

XPS MCWIN 0.200 

For Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000 and XP. 

Power supply unit c 24 V ABL 7RP2410 2.200 

Dimensions, mounting 

XPS MCppX 

(1) 

59 

16 

151,5 

74 

17 

= = 

40 

74 

6 139,5 

6 

(1) With connector XPS MCTSpp: 153 mm. 

With connector XPS MCTCpp: 151.4mm. 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

Description: 

page 1/17 


page 1/18 

Functions: 

pages 1/20 to 1/47 

1/19

Functions 1 




Type XPS MC 

1 

Emergency stop monitoring, with or without time delay, 1-channel wiring, with automatic start 

Application scheme 

230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

Control 

outputs 

F1 

F2 

F3 

(1) (1) (1) 

S1 S2 S3 

Emer. 

stop 

1 

Emer. 

stop 

2 

Emer. 

stop 

3 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 

A2 GND GND GND 

O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

Category 1 

emergency stop 

A shunt between the two terminals of an emergency stop will not be detected. 

Short-circuits between I1, I2, I3 will be detected. 

Category 0 

emergency stop 

0 V 0 V 

(1) Technical characteristics for maximum rating of fuses, see page 1/18. 

(2) Only applicable to XPS MC32X. 


Run Emergency stop Run Emergency stop Run 

Input 

Emergency stop 1 

Input 


Input 


Relay outputs K1/K2 

Stop category 0 

Relay outputs K3/K4 


tv = 0…300 s 

tv = 0…300 s 

Key 

0 

1 

tv = delay time 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/20 


page 1/18 


page 1/19

Functions (continued) 1 




Type XPS MC 

Emergency stop monitoring, with or without time delay, 2-channel wiring, with start button 


+ 24 V + 24 V 

1 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

S1 

S2 

S3 

Emer. 

stop 

1 

Emer. 

stop 

2 

Start 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

K2 

K4 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 


O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

Category 1 emergency stop 

A shunt between the two terminals of an emergency stop will not be detected. 

Short-circuits between I1, I2, I3 will be detected. 

Category 0 emergency stop 

0 V 0 V 




Run Emergency stop Run Emergency stop Run 

Input 


Input 


Input 


Input 


Input 

Start 

Output O1 


Output O2 


tv = 0…300 s 

tv = 0…300 s 

Key 

0 


1 

1/21





Type XPS MC 

1 

Two-hand control (type III-C conforming to EN 574-1) 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

NO NC NO NC 

S1 

S2 

A1 

Mushroom 

head 1 

Mushroom 

head 2 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

(2) 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

Y1 

Y2 

Channel 1 Channel 2 

0 V 0 V 




Mushroom 

head 1 

Input 

1closing 

Input 

1 opening 

Start-up 

Two-hand 

control 

activated 

Two-hand 

control 

not activated 

Two-hand 

control 

activated 

Mushroom 

head 2 

Input 

2closing 

Input 

2 opening 

t < 500 ms 

Output 

No start-up 

Key 

0 


1 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/22 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Guard monitoring with 1 limit switch 


230 V 230 V 

1 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

Control 

outputs 

F1 

(1) 

Guard closed 

Open 

F2 

(1) 

S2 

A1 

S1 

Start 

(2) 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

Validation 

0 V 0 V 




Start test = NO 


Input 

Limit switch 1 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Starttest=YES 


Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Output 

Output 

No start-up 

Rising edge monitored start 

Input 


Input 

Start 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 


Input 


Input 

Start 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Output 

Output 

No start-up 

Falling edge monitored start 

Input 


Input 

Start 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 


Input 


Input 

Start 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Output 

Output 

No start-up 

Key 

0 

1 

1/23





Type XPS MC 

1 

Guard monitoring with 2 limit switches 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

Guard closed 

Open 

ESC 

S2 

S3 

K01 

S1 

Start 

K02 

EDM 

(2) 

A1 


I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

K2 

K4 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 

ESC = external start conditions 

EDM = external devices monitoring 



Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/24 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Guard monitoring with 2 limit switches (continued) 




Starttest=YES 


1 

Input 


Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

t t EDM 



Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Input 

Start 

t < t sync. 

Input 


Input 

Start 

t < t sync. 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

Output 

t < t EDM 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 



Input 


Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 

Start 

t < t sync. 

Input 

Start 

t < t sync. 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

Output 

t < t EDM 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 

Key 

0 

1 


t EDM = maximum monitoring time of external devices 

t sync. = synchronisation time 

1/25





Type XPS MC 

1 

Guard monitoring with 2 limit switches, with guard locking 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

Guard closed 

Open 

S1 

ESC 

S4 

K01 

S2 

S3 

Start 

K02 

EDM 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 

I3 I4 I5 I6 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

K2 

K4 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 





Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/26 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Guard monitoring with 2 limit switches, with guard locking (continued) 




Starttest=YES 


1 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Input 

Locking 

t





Type XPS MC 

1 

Guard monitoring for injector presses and blowing machines 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

Control 

outputs 

F1 

(1) 

S4 

Monitoring of second 

power circuit breaking 

device 

Open 

ESC 

S2 

S3 

K01 

K02 

S1 

Start 

EDM 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 





Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/28 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Guard monitoring for injector presses and blowing machines (continued) 




Starttest=YES 


1 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


t < t sync. 

Input 


t < t sync. 

Input 

Valve monitoring 

Input 


Output 

Output 

No 

start-up 



Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


t < t sync. 

Input 


t < t sync. 

Input 


Input 

Start 

Input 


Input 

Start 

Output 

Output 

No 

start-up 



Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 


t < t sync. 

Input 


t





Type XPS MC 

1 

Magnetic switch monitoring 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

NC 

NO 

S1 

BK WH 

Magnetic 

switch with 

coded 

magnet 

present 

BU BN 

S2 

Start 

ESC 

K01 

K02 

EDM 

(2) 

A1 


I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 





Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/30 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Magnetic switch monitoring (continued) 




Starttest=YES 


1 

Input 

N/C 

Start-up 

Magnet 

present 

Magnet 

not present 

Magnet 

present 

Input 

N/C 

Start-up 

Magnet 

present 

Magnet 

not present 

Magnet 

present 

Input 

N/O 

Input 

N/O 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

Output 

t < t EDM 

t = t EDM 

t > t EDM 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 



Input 

N/C 

Start-up 

Magnet 

present 

Magnet 

not present 

Magnet 

present 

Input 

N/C 

Start-up 

Magnet 

present 

Magnet 

not present 

Magnet 

present 

Input 

N/O 

Input 

N/O 

Input 

Start 

t < t sync. 

Input 

Start 

t < t sync. 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

Output 

t < t EDM 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 



Input 

N/C 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 

N/C 

Start-up 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Input 

N/O 

Input 

N/O 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Input 

Start 

Input 

Start 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

Output 

t < t EDM 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 

Key 

0 

1 




1/31





Type XPS MC 

1 

Sensing mat monitoring 

b Control outputs connected to a sensing mat cannot be used for other items. 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

S1 

ESC 

K01 

Sensing 

mat 

S2 

Start 

K02 

EDM 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 

I3 I4 I5 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 





Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/32 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Sensing mat monitoring (continued) 


Start test 


1 

Start-up 

Sensing mat not activated 

Sensing mat 

activated 

Sensing mat 

not activated 

Input 1 

Sensing mat 

Input 2 

Sensing mat 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

t < t EDM 

t = t EDM 

t > t EDM 


Start-up 

Sensing mat not activated 

Sensing mat 

activated 

Sensing mat 

not activated 

Input 1 

Sensing mat 

Input 2 

Sensing mat 

Input 

Start 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

t < t EDM 


Input 1 

Sensing mat 

Input 2 

Sensing mat 

Input 

Start 

Start-up 

Sensing mat 

not activated 

Sensing mat 

activated 

Sensing mat 

not activated 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

t < t EDM 

Key 

0 

1 



1/33





Type XPS MC 

1 

Light curtain monitoring, relay output type 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

(1) 

ESPE 

(2) 

ESC 

OSSD1 OSSD2 

(1) (2) 

S1 

Start 

K01 

K02 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 

I3 I4 I5 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 


ESPE = electro-sensitive protection equipment 

OSSD1/OSSD2 = output signal switching device 



Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/34 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Light curtain monitoring, relay output type (continued) 




Starttest=YES 


1 

Input 

OSSD 1 

Input 

OSSD 2 

Rising 

edge 

Light curtain beams 

made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

t





Type XPS MC 

1 

Light curtain monitoring, solid-state output type 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

ESPE 

(+) 

ESC 

OSSD1 OSSD2 

(–) (1) (2) 

S1 

Start 

K01 

K02 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 

I3 I4 I6 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 






Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/36 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Light curtain monitoring, solid-state output type (continued) 




Starttest=YES 


1 

Input I1 

OSSD 1 

Rising 

edge 


made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Lightcurtain 

beams 

made 

Input I1 

OSSD 1 

Rising 

edge 

Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Input I2 

OSSD 2 

Input I2 

OSSD 2 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

t < t EDM 

t = t EDM 

t > t EDM 

Output 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 



Input I1 

OSSD 1 

Rising 

edge 


made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Lightcurtain 

beams 

made 

Input I1 

OSSD 1 

Rising 

edge 

Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Input I2 

OSSD 2 

Input I2 

OSSD 2 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Input 

Start 

Input 

Start 

Input 

EDM 

Input 

EDM 

Output 

Output 

t < t EDM 

No 

start-up 

t < t EDM 



Input I1 

OSSD 1 

Rising 

edge 


made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Input I1 

OSSD 1 

Rising 

edge Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Light curtain 

beam(s) 

broken 

Light curtain 

beams 

made 

Input I2 

OSSD 2 

Input I2 

OSSD 2 

t





Type XPS MC 

1 

Zero speed detection 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

B2 

+ 

– 

A 

B1 

+ 

– 

A 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 

The zero speed signal (validation of the output) will be activated only if: 

1: one input is in a high state, 

2: the other input is in the low state, 

3: the frequency of the two inputs is less than the stated value. 




Sensor control 

Sensor B1 

Zero speed 

f1,f2 f max. 

Zero speed 

f1,f2





Type XPS MC 

Dynamic monitoring of hydraulic valves on linear presses 


230 V 230 V 

1 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

B3 

+ 

– 

A 

B2 

+ 

– 

A 

S4 

Closing 

of press 

S5 

Opening 

of press 

B1 

+ 

– 

A 

(2) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 

I4 I5 I6 I7 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

1 

K2 

K4 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

2 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 

0 V 0 V 


Validation for 

closing press 

Validation for 

opening press 




Valve control 

Input 

Closing of press 

Input 

Opening of press 

Input 

Valve B1 (closing) 

Input 

Valve B2 (opening) 

Input - Valve B3 

(closing/opening) 

Output 

Closing of press 

Output 

Opening of press 

Stop 

at TDC 

Closing 

of press 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Stop 

at BDC 

Opening 

of press 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Valve sensor signals 

Valve B1 

(closing) 

Valve B2 

(opening) 

Valve B3 

(closing/opening) 

Press 

open 

(TDC) 

Closing of 

press 

Press 

closed 

(BDC) 

Opening of 

press 

Note: The valve sensor signals must function as described above. 

1 

Key 0 

BDC = Bottom Dead Centre 

TDC = Top Dead Centre 


1/39





Type XPS MC 

1 

Monitoring safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric press 

b This function comprises several monitoring modes including: 

- Safety stop at top dead centre (1), 

- monitoring braking travel, 

- as an option, dynamic monitoring of doubled-bodied solenoid valves (2). 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(3) 

Control 

outputs 

F2 

Operation 

with 

embedded 

tools 

S9 

NO NC NO NC 

S1 S2 

S4 

OTS 

S3 

S5 

UN 

(Y1a) 

P > 

PSV1 

1 

2 

(Y1b) 

P > 

PSV2 

1 

2 

S6 

Stop 

Continuous 

run 

S7 

Reset 

S8 

KM1 

0 1 2 3 

2 

1 

4 

3 

6 

5 

7 

8 

(1) 

Mushroom 

head 1 

Mushroom 

head 2 

Emergency 

stop 

A1 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 … I32 13 23 H1 33 43 

(4) 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

µC 2 

K0 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Ter 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K1 

K2 

K3 

K4 


O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

2 

4 

1 

(Y1a) 

p 

Valve control 

PSV 1 

a 

Y1 

b 

PSV 1 PSV 2 

p 

(Y1b) 

Valve control 

PSV 2 

2 

4 

1 

FM1 

SM1 

OFF 

Stop 

SM2 

ON 

Run 

1 

2 

KM1 

230 V 

To emergency 

stop 

Signalling 

of operation 

with 

embedded 

tools 

(2) 

KM1 

0 V 0 V 

N 

N 

S8: Operating modes: 

0 - stop, 

1 - adjust, 

2-jog, 

3 - automatic continuous run. 

OTS = Limit switch associated with top dead centre (TDC) 

UN = Limit switch associated with bottom dead centre (BDC) 

PSV = safety valve 



Main movement 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/40 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Monitoring safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric press (continued) 

Functional diagram in adjust mode 

Emergency 

stop 

Reset 

Selector 

Adjust 

Start main 

movement 

Start 

Couple 

Uncouple 

Couple 

Uncouple 

Couple 

Uncouple 

1 

Mushroom 

head 1 

Input - N/O 

Input - N/C 

Mushroom 

head 2 

Input - N/O 

Input - N/C 

t < 500 ms 

t < 500 ms 

t < 500 ms 

Input - Emergency stop 

Channel 1 


Channel 2 

Input - OTS 

Input - UN 

Without 

purpose in 

this mode 

Input - PSV 1 

Input - PSV 2 

Input 

Continuous 

deactivated 

Input 

Reset 

Input 

Stop selector 

Stop 

Input 

Adjust selector 

Input 

Jog selector 

Input 

Continuous run foot switch 

(embedded tools) 

Adjust 

Output - Valve 1 

Output - Valve 2 

Output 


Key 

0 

1 

OTS = Limit switch associated with top dead centre (TDC) 

UN = Limit switch associated with bottom dead centre (BDC) 

PSV = safety valve 

t sync = synchronisation time 

1/41





Type XPS MC 

1 


Functional diagram in jog mode 

Emergency 

stop 

Reset 

Selector 

Jog 

Start main 

movement 

Stop at TDC 

Start 

Closing of press Automatic raised maintain Braking Stop 

at TDC 

Mushroom 

head 1 

Input - N/O 

Input - N/C 

Mushroom 

head 2 

Input - N/O 

Input - N/C 

t < 500 ms 


Channel 1 


Channel 2 

Input - OTS 

No-load running 

Input - UN 

Input - PSV 1 

Input - PSV 2 

Input 

Continuous deactivated 

t





Type XPS MC 


Functional diagram in automatic continuous run mode 

Emergency Selector Start main 

stop Continuous movement 

Reset run 

Stop at TDC 

Start 

Continuous 

deactivated 

Continuous run Braking Stop 

at TDC 

1 

Mushroom 

head 1 

Input - N/O 

Input - N/C 

Mushroom 

head 2 

Input - N/O 

Input - N/C 

t < 500 ms 


Channel 1 


Channel 2 

Input - OTS 

No-load running 

Input - UN 

Input - PSV 1 

Input - PSV 2 

Input 

Continuous deactivated 

t





Type XPS MC 

1 

Safety time delays 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

S1 

Control 

signal 

(2) 

Output signal Kx 

(t) 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 … I16 

I17 … I32 

13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

Output signal Kx 

(t) 

0 V 0 V 




Control signal 

Output signal for EV function 

Output signal for AV function 

t EV 

t AV 

Functions: 

EV = On-delay 

AV = Off-delay 

EW = Pulse on energisation 

AW = Pulse on de-energisation 

Output signal for EW function 

t EW 

Output signal for AW function 

t AW 

On-delay 

Start-up 

Pulse on energisation 

Start-up 

Input 


Output 

Input 


Output 

Time delay 

Pulse time 

Off-delay 

Start-up 

Pulse on de-energisation 

Start-up 

Input 


Input 


Output 

Output 

Time delay 

Pulse time 

Key 

0 

1 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/44 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

"Muting" function for light curtains 


230 V 230 V 

1 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

+ 

ESPE 

OSSD1 OSSD2 

(–) (1) (2) 

S1 

Start 

K01 

K02 

ESC 

EDM 

S2 

S3 

S4 

S5 

muting muting muting muting 

A1 B1 A2 B2 

S6 

Free 

passage 

(2) 

H1 

"Muting" 

indicator light 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 … I16 I17 … I32 13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 

0 V Channel 1 Channel 2 

0 V 








Input - OSSD 1 

Start 

necessary 

ESPE 

protected 

"Muting" activated 

Protected zone shunted 

ESPE 

protected 

"Muting" 

error 

Outputs 

Stop 

Free passage activated 

Protected zone 

shunted 

Start ESPE 

necessary protected 

Input - OSSD 2 

Input - Start 

Input - "Muting" A1 

Input - "Muting" B1 

Input - "Muting" A2 

t < t sync. 

t < t sync. 

Input - "Muting" B2 

Input 

Free passage 

Output (H1) 

"Muting" indicator 

light 

t





Type XPS MC 

1 

Enabling switch monitoring, 2 contact type 


230 V 230 V 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

Enabling 

NO 

S4 

0 1 2 

13 

14 

NC 

21 

22 

Switching of 2 contact 

enabling switch: 

0 1 2 

NO 13-14 

NC 21-22 

Key 

(2) 

Activated 

Deactivated 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 

I6 I7 I8 … I16 I17 … I32 13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 




Start-up 


Position 1 


Position 0 


Position 1 


Position 2 


Position 1 


Position 0 

Input 

Closing enabling switch 13-14 

t < t sync. 

Input 

Opening enabling switch 21-22 

Output 

Key 

0 

t Z = enabling time 

1 t < tZ 

Presentation: 

page 1/16 

1/46 


page 1/18 


page 1/19





Type XPS MC 

Enabling switch monitoring, 3 contact type 


230 V 230 V 

1 

+ 24 V + 24 V 

F1 

(1) 

Control 

outputs 

Switching of 3 contact 

enabling switch: 

S4 NO 

0 1 2 

Enabling 

1 

2 

NC 

5 

6 

NO 

3 

4 

0 

NO 1-2 

NC 5-6 

NO 3-4 

0 

NO 1-2 

NC 5-6 

NO 3-4 

1 2 

1 2 

Key 

(2) 

Activated 

Deactivated 

A1 

C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 

I6 I7 I8 I9 … I16 I17 … I32 13 23 H1 33 43 

XPS MC 

T 

24 V 

5 V 

Logic 

µC 1 

K0 

Ter 

K1 

K3 

µC 2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

Channel 

1 

Channel 

2 

K2 

K4 


O1 

O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 

14 24 34 44 

K01 

K02 


0 V 0 V 




Start-up 


Position 1 


Position 0 


Position 1 


Position 2 


Position 1 


Position 0 

Input 


Input 

Opening enabling switch 5-6 

Input 


Output 

1 

Key 0 

t Z = enabling time 

t < tZ 

1/47


0 


automation system solutions 

1 

Preventa safety modules 

1 

Applications 

Modules 

For Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring 

Conforming to standards 

Product Category 3 conforming to Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1, 

EN 954-1, EN 1088 (instantaneous break contacts) EN 1088 


(time delay break contacts) 

EN 1088 

Machine assemblies 


IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418 

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA (pending) 


Safety 3N/O 3 N/O instantaneous 

+ 2 N/O time delay 

3 N/O instantaneous 

3 N/O time delay 

Additional 

1 solid-state output for 

signalling to PLC 

1N/C 

3 solid-state outputs for 


Display 

Supply 

2LEDs 4LEDs 11 LEDs 

a and c 24 V 

a and c 24 V 

c 24 V 

a 48 V 

a 115 V 

a 115 V 

a 230 V 

a 230 V 

Synchronisation time 

between inputs 

Input channel voltage 

Unlimited 

75 ms 

(automatic start) 

Unlimited or 1.5 s 

depending on cabling 

24 V/48 V version a and c 24 V/a 48 V c 24 V/– c 24 V/– 

115 V/230 V version 

a 115 V/230 V c 48 V/48 V – 

or 110 V/120 V/230 V 

– – – 

Module type 

XPS AC XPS AT XPS AV 

Pages 1/64 

1/68 

1/48

0 

1 

1 

For Emergency stop and limit switch 

monitoring 

For Emergency stop, limit switch or solid-state output safety light curtain 

monitoring 

For Emergency stop, limit switch, 

safety mat and sensitive edge or 

solid-state output safety light curtain 

monitoring 

Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 3 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 

EN 1088 EN 1088 EN 1088 EN 1088 

EN 61496-1 (type 4) EN 1760 

EN 61496-1 (type 4) 

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418 

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA 

3N/O 7N/O 3N/O 

– 2 N/C + 4 solid-state outputs 

for signalling to PLC 

1 N/C + 4 solid-state outputs 

for signalling to PLC 

3LEDs 4LEDs 4LEDs 

a and c 24 V a and c 24 V a and c 24 V 

a 115 V and c 24 V 

a 230 V and c 24 V 

a 110 V and c 24 V 

a 120 V and c 24 V 

a 230 V and c 24 V 

Unlimited 

Unlimited or 2 s, 4 s (depending on 

wiring) 

c 24 V/– c 24 V/– c 24 V/– 

– c 24 V/24 V – 

– – c 24 V/24 V/24 V 

XPS AF XPS AFL XPS AR XPS AK 

1/75 1/79 1/83 1/89 

1/49

Selection guide (continued) 

0 


1 


1 

Applications 

Modules For enabling switch monitoring For electrical monitoring of switches combined in pairs 


Product Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 

EN 1088 

Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 


UL, CSA 


Safety 2N/O 3N/O 

Additional 2 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 1 N/C + 2 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 

Display 3LEDs 3LEDs 

Supply c 24 V a and c 24 V 

a and c 48 V 

a 115 V 

a 230 V 

Synchronisation time – 1.5 s 

Input channel voltage 

24 V/48 V version c 24 V/– c 24 V/48 V 

115 V/230 V version – c 48 V/48 V 

Module type 

XPS VC 

XPS FB 

Pages 1/94 1/98 

1/50

0 

1 

1 

For electrical monitoring of two-hand control stations 


EN 574 type III A 


EN 574 type III C 

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 

UL, CSA 

1N/O 2N/O 2N/O 

1N/C 1N/C 2 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 

2LEDs 3LEDs 3LEDs 

a and c 24 V 

a 115 V 

a 230 V 

c 24 V 

a 24 V 

a 115 V 

a 230 V 

c 24 V 

500 ms 500 ms 

500 ms 

c 24 V/– 

c 24 V/24 V 

c 24 V (c 24 V), 

c 48 V (a 24 V) 

c 48 V/48 V 

c 24 V/– 

– 

XPS BA XPS BC XPS BF 

1/102 

1/51

Selection guide (continued) 

0 


1 


1 

Applications 

Modules 

For increasing the number of safety contacts 

For the monitoring of applications requiring safety time 

delays 

Functions 

Allows additional safety contacts to be added to another 

module 

Unlocking of guards after 

a safety time delay for 

machines with long 

rundowm time 

Shunting contact in 

association with XPS VN 

modules for the zero 

speed detection, solenoid 

valve monitoring, etc. 


Product Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 3 conforming to EN 954-1 

EN 1088 

Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418 


UL, CSA 


Safety 4N/O 8N/O 1 N/O time delayed 1 N/O pulse type 

Additional 1 N/C +1 solid-state output for signalling to PLC 2 N/C + 2 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 


Supply 

a and c 24 V 

a 115 V 

a 230 V 

Module type 

XPS ECM XPS ECP XPS TSA XPS TSW 

Pages 1/107 1/111 

1/52

0 

1 

1 

For coded magnetic switch monitoring For control of 1 to 4 

single-beam photo-electric 

sensors XU2 S 

For 2 max. 

For 6 max. 

For monitoring light curtains type 4 

For monitoring 2 to 6 coded switches depending on model 

Protects access to a 

hazardous zone by 

associating the module 

with 1 to 4 single-beam 

photo-electric sensors 

Built-in “muting” function 

Protects access to a hazardous zone by associating the 

module with light curtains XUS L 

Built-in “muting” function 


EN 1088 

Category 2 conforming to 

EN 954-1 

EN 61496-1 - type 2 


IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 

UL, CSA 

2N/O 2N/O 3N/O 3 solid-state 

2 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 4 solid-state outputs for 2 solid-state outputs for – 



3LEDs 15 LEDs 4LEDs 5LEDs 5LEDs 

c 24 V 

XPS DMB XPS DME XPS CM XPS LMR XPS LMS 

1/115 2/94 1/122 

1/53

Selection guide (continued) 0 


1 


1 

Applications 

1,0 

0,8 

0,6 

0,4 

0,2 

0,0 

0 

Modules 

For zero-speed detection of a.c. or 

d.c. motors which produce a 

remanent voltage in their windings 

due to residual magnetism 

For lift control 

For applications with a safety 

amplifier relay with one or two 

proximity sensors or limit switches 

Functions 

Detecting the stopping of the motor 

by measuring the remanent voltage 

in the stator windings (compatible 

with electronic motor control 

devices such as variable speed 

drives, d.c. injection brakes, etc.) 

Checks the height of the cabin when 

it stops at a landing in order to 

compensate for any difference 

generated by variation of the load in 

the cabin 

Error-free detection and amplification 

of signals emitted by limit switches, 

PNP or NPN type electronic proximity 

switches (c 24V)ora2-wiretype 

connection with “-” and “+” switching. 

Conversion to contact signals for selfmonitoring 

safety modules 


Product Category 3 conforming to EN 954-1 Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1 Suitable for use in systems up to 

EN 1088 EN 81-1, EN 81-2 

95/16/CE (lift directive) 

category 4 (EN 954-1) 

Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 692 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292 


UL, CSA 


Safety 1N/O+1N/C 2N/O 2N/O+2N/C 

Additional 2 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 1 “NC” 

Display 4LEDs 4LEDs 4LEDs 

Supply c 24 V a or c 24 V – 

a 115 V a 115 V a 115 V 

a 230 V a 230 V a 230 V 

Module type 

XPS VN XPS DA XPS NS 

Pages 1/127 1/133 1/135 

1/54

0 

1 

1 

For dynamic monitoring of hydraulic valves on 

linear presses 

For dynamic monitoring of double-bodied 


For safety stop at top dead centre monitoring with 

braking travel control 

Dynamic monitoring of the position of the valve 

pistons of the hydraulic safety system on linear 

hydraulic presses. Dangerous movements of the 

machine are allowed when the correct change of 

signal occurs 

Dynamic monitoring of double-bodied safety 

valves on eccentric presses. 

The device prevents engagement of the clutch 

and engages the brake if a fault occurs in the 

solenoid valve 

Automatic monitoring of the stopping distance at 

each cycle + maintain open function for eccentric 

presses 


IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 693 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 692 

UL, CSA 

2N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C 3N/O 

– 4 solid-state outputs for signalling to PLC 

8LEDs 

4LEDs 

c 24 V c 24 V – 

a 115 V 

a 115 V 

a 230 V 

a 230 V 

XPS PVT XPS PVK XPS OT 

1/137 1/141 1/146 

1/55

General 

0 



1 


1 


Manufacturing workshops and technical service installations in buildings are increasingly subject to more stringent 

safety requirements. 

Good equipment is safe equipment, which combines: 

- safety: of persons (risk limited to an acceptable level), 

- reliability of operation: of the production tool (machine always able to perform its function) 

Safety is achieved by: 

- simultaneously optimising safety and reliability of operation, 

- applying fundamental principles: redundancy, self-monitoring, 

- making reliability a design consideration (failure causing the machine to react in a specified way, positive safety), 

- ease of maintenance 

Safety and automated systems 

All dangerous areas must be identified and have restricted access, controlled in a secure manner, i.e. any breakdown 

or careless operation must result in the automation system failing to a non-dangerous position. 

It should be noted that the use of safety products alone does not necessarily mean that the machine conforms to the 

machinery directive. 

It is in fact correct operation, wiring, association with other devices and scheme used which make the entire machine safe. 

It is more important to think in terms of safety solutions rather than safety products. 

General structure of an automated machine 

Signalling 

Display 

Control 

Data 

processing 

Detection 

Sensor 

Safety device 

Preactuation 

Contactors - Directional valves 

Variable speed drives 

Machine 

guarding 

Operation 

Control system 

Operating part 

1/56

Basic principles 

0 


1 


Objective 

Detection of initial fault. 

Ensure non-dangerous positioning (machine stops in safe state). 

Ensure the safety of personnel operating industrial machines. 

Basic principles 

1 

Redundancy 

Consists of compensating for the 

failure of one component by the 

correct operation of another, based 

on the assumption that both will not 

fail simultaneously 

Redundancy 

Consists of compensating for the 

failure of one component by the 

correct operation of another, based 

on the assumption that both will not 

fail simultaneously 

+ 

Self-monitoring 

Consists of automatically checking, 

at each operating cycle, the 

operation of any component which 

changes state. 

The next cycle can be inhibited 

or enabled. 

+ 

Reliable operation Reliable operation + Safety 

If an initial fault is undetected, 

corrective action is not initiated 

and a second fault may occur thus 

compromising safety. 

An initial fault in the safety circuits is detected before a second fault can occur 

(next cycle inhibited). 

The use of a safety module with redundancy and self-monitoring functions allows a category 4 control system to be built 

in accordance with standard EN 954-1 (parts of control systems relating to safety). 

Definitions 

Redundancy function 

This function is achieved by providing dual circuits at the design stage, together with a check function which will only permit 

a control action when at least two output signals are identical. 

Self-monitoring function 

Safety modules incorporate relays with mechanically linked N/O and N/C contacts. 

This technique ensures that all N/O and N/C contacts within each relay remain synchronised. 

The self-monitoring function is achieved by checking the correct operation of the linked contact relays which are energised 

during the current operating cycle. 

The method for detecting the failure of a N/O contact in a mechanically linked contact relay consists of checking the correct 

operation of its N/C contacts which are thus incorporated in the self-monitoring circuit. This is only possible if mechanically 

linked relay contacts are used. 

1/57

Concept of interposing 

relays 

0 


1 


1 

Operation of the control circuit without interposing relays 

The control signal from the protection device (Emergency 

stop in the circuit on the left) acts directly on the power 

contactor of the device. 

Emergency 

stop 

Start 

Stop 

KM1 

In this type of scheme, there is still a risk of simple faults: 

- Emergency Stop button auxiliary contact being 

shorted out, 

- KM1 contactor sticking in. 

When the operator presses an Emergency Stop button, 

the instruction is not processed, and another sequence 

can begin following the Emergency stop, despite the 

presence of the fault. 

KM1 

KM1 

In this type of failure, the safety function (1) is no 

longer provided. Therefore, a reliable interposing relay 

system must be used. 

M 

(1) A safety function is a function whose non-execution 

or untimely execution results in immediate placing of the 

equipment in a non-hazardous condition. 

Operation of the control circuit with interposing relays 

Feedback loop 

KM6 

KM5 

KM5 

KM5 

Emergency 

stop 

Start 

KM6 

KM6 

Safety module 

Redundancy 

KM5 

KM6 

M 

KM5 and KM6 contactors with mechanically linked contacts 

Independent safety circuits 

Safety modules provide a reliable interposing relay function by overcoming a number of risks associated with: 

- control circuit fault (inputs), 

- power circuit fault (outputs), 

- safety module internal component fault. 

The safety function remains operative whenever any one of these faults occurs. 

For the use of mechanically linked contact relays CAp KN31 or CAD 32, LC1 D09 to LC1 D150, with contacts N/C 

which can be used in the feedback loop, please consult your local representative or agent. 

1/58

Applications for protection 

systems and access doors 

0 


1 


Selection criteria 

Low risk 

High risk 

1 

Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of intrinsically safe 

design (tried and tested components and principles). 

Machines with instant stopping. Locking 

(stopping time < access time) (1) 

Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of redundancy 

and self-monitoring. 

The safety modules perform both functions. 

XPS FB 

XPS FB 

Locking by actuator key Locking by actuator key and Activation in positive and negative 

activation in positive mode 

(combined) mode associated with 

associated with a safety module a safety module 

Activation in positive mode 

Activation in positive and 

negative (combined) mode 

High inertia machines with long stopping times. Interlocking 

(stopping time > access time) (1) 

XPS FB 

XPS VN 

XPS FB 

Interlocking device with actuator key 

captive in the guard 

Interlocking device with operating 

key captive in the guard 

Interlocking device with operating 

key captive in the guard and zero 

speed detection 

XPS VN 

XPS FB 

Interlocking device with electromagnetic lock 

(1) Stopping time: time elapsed between actuation of the machine stop control and the moment the machine stops (risk eliminated). 

Access time: time required for a person to gain access to the hazardous zone (calculated on the basis of an approach speed). 

Other configurations 

Please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

1/59

Electrical durability 

0 



1 


1 

Curves showing electrical durability of safety contacts conforming to EN 60947-5-1, table C2 

XPS AL, XPS AC, XPS AT (time delay contacts), XPS AX, XPS TSA, 

XPS TSW, XPS BA, XPS BC, XPS CM, XPS DA, XPS FB, XPS NS, XPS OT, 

XPS PVK, XPS PVT, XPS VN 

10 

Switching current (A) 

1 

0,1 

10 4 

10 5 

10 6 

10 7 

Number of operating cycles 

XPS AT (instantaneous contacts), XPS ECM, XPS ECP 


10 

24 V 

1 

0,1 

10 4 10 5 

10 6 10 7 


XPS AF, XPS AK, XPS AFL 


10 

1 

XPS AV, XPS MP, XPS VC, XPS BF, XPS MC 


10 

1 

0,1 

10 4 

10 5 

10 6 

10 7 


0,1 

10 4 

10 5 

10 6 10 7 


XPS AR 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 


5 

4 

3 

XPS DMB/DME 

100 


10 

2 

1 

10 4 10 5 10 6 


1 

10 4 

10 5 

10 6 

10 7 


XPS LMR/LMS 

100 


10 

1 

10 4 

10 5 

10 6 

10 7 


1/60

Electrical durability (continued) 0 


1 


Definition of tests 

Determining the electrical durability according to EN 60947-5-1 (table C2) 

Type of current Utilisation category Start-up Breaking 

Current Voltage Cos ϕ Current Voltage Cos ϕ 

1 

a.c. supply AC-15 10 x Ie Ue 0.7 Ie Ue 0,4 

Type of current Utilisation category Start-up Breaking 

Current Voltage T0.95 Current Voltage T0,95 

d.c. supply DC-13 Ie Ue 50 ms Ie Ue 50ms 

Ie: Operational current measured. 

Ue: Operational voltage measured. 

Cos ϕ: Power factor. 

T0,95:Timetakentoreach95%ofratedcurrent. 

The tests are carried out with a frequency of 6 switching operations per minute and with no additional protection of the 

components connected to the safety outputs. 

The use of additional protection for the components connected to the safety outputs significantly increases the durability 

of the safety outputs. 

Determining the breaking capacity according to EN 60947-5-1 (table 4) 

Utilisa- Start-up Breaking Total Switching ops. Switching ops. Minimum 

tion Current Voltage Cos ϕ Current VoltageCos ϕ no. of per minute for per minute for duration of 

cat. switching 1…1000 1001…6050 switching 

ops. switching ops. switching ops. operation 

AC-15 10 x Ie Ue 0.3 Ie Ue 0.3 6050 60 6 50 ms 

Utilisa- Start-up Breaking Total Switching ops. Switching ops. Minimum 

tion Current Voltage T0.95 Current VoltageT0.95 no. of per minute for per minute for duration of 

cat. switching 1…1000 1001…6050 switching 

ops. switching ops. switching ops. operation 

DC-13 Ie Ue 50ms Ie Ue 50ms 6050 60 6 50 ms 

Ie: Operational current measured. 

Ue: Operational voltage measured. 

Cos ϕ: Power factor. 

T0.95:Timetakentoreach95%ofratedcurrent. 

Comments : 

The maximum values for the breaking capacity of the safety outputs in the various utilisation categories are not fixed and 

depend on the power factor and on the switching frequency. The test definition for the “breaking capacity” and “durability” 

tables in European standard EN 60947-5-1 uses different values for the power factor and the switching frequency. 

The power factor (cos ϕ) in the “breaking capacity” table (0.3) is greater than that in the “durability” table (0.7) 

In the "breaking capacity" table, the switching frequency of the safety outputs is higher for the first 1000 switching 

operations (60 per minute) than that for 1001 to 6050 switching operations (6 per minute). 

Consequently, the maximum breaking capacity values determined using the “breaking capacity” table are lower than 

those in the “durability” table. 

1/61

Operating principle, 

characteristics 

0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS AC 

For Emergency stop and switch monitoring 

1 


XPS AC safety modules are used for monitoring Emergency circuits conforming to standards EN 418 and EN 60204-1 

and also meet the safety requirements for the electrical monitoring of switches in protection devices conforming to 

standard EN 1088. They protect the operator and the machine by immediately stopping any dangerous movement, after 

receiving a stop command from the operator or when a fault is detected in the safety circuit itself. 

To aid diagnosis, the modules have LEDs which provide information on the monitoring circuit status. 

The XPS AC module has 3 safety outputs and a solid-state output for signalling to the PLC. 


Module type XPS AC XPS ACppppP 






Supply 

Voltage V a and c 24, a 48, a115, a 230 a and c 24, a 48, a115, a 230 

Voltage limits 

- 20Ö + 10 % (a 24 V) 

- 20Ö + 20 % (c 24 V) 

- 15Ö + 10 % (a 48) 

- 15Ö + 15 % (115 V) 

- 15Ö + 10 % (230 V) 

- 20Ö + 10 % (a 24 V) 

- 20Ö + 20 % (c 24 V) 

- 15Ö + 10 % (a 48) 

- 15Ö + 15 % (115 V) 

- 15Ö + 10 % (230 V) 

Frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 

Consumption W < 1.2 (c 24 V) < 1.2 (c 24 V) 

VA < 2.5 (a 24 V) 

< 6 (a 48 V) 

< 7 (a 115 V) 

< 6 (a 230 V) 

< 2.5 (a 24 V) 

< 6 (a 48 V) 

< 7 (a 115 V) 

< 6 (a 230 V) 

Start button monitoring No No 


Identical to supply voltage 

(nominal supply voltage) 

24 V version V a 24 (approx. 90 mA), 

c 24 (approx. 40 mA) 

a 24 (approx. 90 mA), 

c 24 (approx. 40 mA) 

48 V version V a 48 (approx. 100 mA) a 48 (approx. 100 mA) 



Outputs 

Voltage reference 

Volt-free 

Number and type of safety 

3 N/O (13-14, 23-24, 33-34) 3 N/O (13-14, 23-24, 33-34) 

circuits 

Number and type of additional 

circuits 

1 solid-state 1 solid-state 

Breaking capacity in AC-15 VA C300 : inrush 1800, maintained 180 C300 : inrush 1800, maintained 180 

Breaking capacity in DC-13 24 V/2 A L/R = 50 ms 24 V/2 A L/R = 50 ms 

Max. thermal current (Ithe) A 6 6 

Max. total thermal current A 10.5 10.5 

Output fuse protection A 4 gG (gl) or 6 fast acting 4 gG (gl) or 6 fast acting 

conforming to IEC EN 947-5-1, 

DIN VDE 0660 part 200 

Minimum current mA 10 10 

Minimum voltage V 17 17 

1/62

Characteristics, (continued) 

0 



1 



Characteristics (continued) 

Module type XPS AC XPS ACppppP 

1 


Response time on input opening ms < 100 < 100 

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 300 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC EN 947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

Rated impulse withstand 

voltage (Uimp.) 

kV 3 (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC EN 947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

LED display 2 2 

Operating temperature C - 10Ö + 55 

Storage temperature C - 25Ö + 85 


conforming to 

IEC EN 529 

Terminals IP 20 

Enclosure IP 40 

Connection Type Captive screw clamp terminals Captive screw clamp terminals, separate removable 

block 

- 1-wire Without cable Solid or flexible cable: 0.14Ö 2.5 mm 2 Solid or flexible cable: 0.2Ö 2.5 mm 2 

connection end 

With cable 

Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25Ö 2.5 mm 2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25Ö 2.5 mm 2 

end 

With cable 

With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25Ö 1.5 mm 2 

With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25Ö 2.5 mm2 

end 

- 2-wire 

connection 

Without cable 

end 

Solid or flexible cable: 0.14Ö 0.75 mm 2 Solid cable: 0.2Ö 1 mm 2 

Flexible cable: 0.2Ö 1.5 mm 2 

With cable 

Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25Ö 1 mm 2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25Ö 1 mm 2 

end 

With cable 

end 

Double with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5Ö 1.5 mm 2 Double with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5Ö 1.5 mm 2 

1/63

References 

0 


1 



1 

560074 

References 

Description 

Type of 

terminal block 

connection 

Number of 

instantaneous 

opening 

safety 

circuits 

Additional 

outputs 


kg 

Safety modules 

for Emergency 

stop and 

limit switch 

monitoring 

Integrated in 

module 

3 1 

solid-state 

a and 

c 24 V 

XPS AC5121 0.160 

a 48 V XPS AC1321 0.210 

XPS ACppppP 

a 115 V XPS AC3421 0.210 

a 230 V XPS AC3721 0.210 

Separate, 3 1 solidtate 

can be removed 

from module 

a and 

c 24 V 

XPS AC5121P 0.160 

a 48 V XPS AC1321P 0.210 

a 115 V XPS AC3421P 0.210 

a 230 V XPS AC3721P 0.210 

1/64

Connections, 

functional diagram 

0 


1 


For Emergency stops and switches monitoring 

0 

0 

XPS AC 

XPS AC module associated with an Emergency stop button with 1 contact 

S1 

F1 

Start 

S2 

ESC 

1 

A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 

XPS AC 

Logic 

K1 

T 

K2 

48 V, 115 V, 230 V 

K1 K2 

A2 PE 14 24 34 

Y43 

Y44 

To PLC 

Y1-Y2 : Feedback loop 

ESC : External start conditions 

XPS AC module associated with an Emergency stop button with 2 contacts (recommended application) 

F1 

S1 

S2 

Start K3 

K4 

ESC 

A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 

Y43 

XPS AC 

Logic 

K1 

K3 

K3 

K3 

T 

K2 

K4 

K4 

K4 

48 V, 115 V 230 V 

K1 

K2 

A2 PE 14 24 34 

Y44 

K3 

K4 

To PLC 

Y1-Y2 : Feedback loop 

ESC : External start conditions 

Functional diagram for module XPS AC 

XPS AC 

Key to LEDs 

Supply 

voltage 

Not activated 

Start button 

Activated 


not activated 


activated 


ìA1î (01) 


ìA2î (02) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2 

1 

2 

Output 13-14 ìFî 



Solid-state output 

Y43-Y44 ìFî 

Key 

0 

1 

1 Supply voltage A1-A2 

2 State of K1-K2 (safety outputs closed) 

1/65



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS AV, XPS AT 


1 


XPS AV and XPS AT safety modules are used to monitor Emergency stop circuits, conforming to standards EN 418 

and EN 60204-1, and also comply with the safety requirements for the electrical monitoring of switches used in 

conjunction with machine guards conforming to the standard EN1088. They provide protection for both the machine 

operator and the machine by immediately stopping the dangerous movement on receipt of a stop instruction from the 

operator, or on detection of a fault in the safety circuit itself. 

In addition to the three instantaneous opening safety outputs (stop category 0), the modules incorporate stop 

category 1 time delay outputs (3 for XPS AV and 2 for XPS AT), which allow for controlled deceleration of the motor 

components until a complete stop is achieved (for example, motor braking by variable speed drive). At the end of the 

preset delay, the supply is disconnected by opening the time delay output circuits. 

For module XPS AV, the time delay of the 3 output circuits is adjustable, in 15 preset values, between 0 and 

300 seconds using selector keys. 

For module XPS AT, the time delay of the 2 output circuits is adjustable between 0 and 30 seconds using a 12-position 

selector switch. 

The XPS AV module also incorporates 3 solid-state signalling outputs for signalling to the process PLC. 

To assist diagnostics, the modules incorporate LEDs to indicate the state of the monitoring circuit. 

The function for monitoring the Start button can be configured by wiring. 


Module type XPS AV11113 and AV11113P XPS ATpppp 





Category 4 max. (instantaneous safety outputs) 

Category 3 max. (time delay safety outputs) 

Supply V c 24 a and c 24, a 115, a 230 

- voltage 

- voltage limits - 20…+ 20 % -20…+10%(24V) 

- 15…+ 15 % (115 V) 

- 15…+ 10 % (230 V) 

- frequency Hz – 50/60 

Consumption W


0 



1 




Module type XPS AV11113 XPS AV11113P XPS ATpppp 

1 

Synchronisation time between s For guard: 1.5 

inputs 

For Emergency stop: unlimited 

Approx. 0.075 

for automatic start, terminals 

S33-Y2 and Y3-Y4 linked 

Outputs 

- voltage reference 

Volt-free 

- number and type of instantaneous 3 N/O (03-04, 13-14, 23-24) 3 N/O (13-14, 23-24, 33-34) 

opening safety circuits 

- number and type of time delay 3 N/O (37-38, 47-48, 57-58) 2 N/O (57-58, 67-68) 

opening safety circuits 

- number and type of additional circuits 3solid-state 1 N/C (41-42) 

- breaking capacity in AC-15 

instantaneous outputs VA C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180 B300: inrush 3600, maintained 360 

time delay outputs VA C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180 C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180 

- breaking capacity in DC-13 

instantaneous outputs 

time delay outputs 

- breaking capacity of solid-state 

24 V/1.25 A L/R = 50 ms 

24 V/1.25 A L/R = 50 ms 

24 V/20 mA 

24 V/1.5 A L/R = 50 ms 

24 V/1.5 A L/R = 50 ms 

– 

outputs 

- max. thermal current (the) 



- max. total thermal current 

A 

A 

3.3 for all 3, or 6 for 1 and 2 for 2, or 4 for 2 and 2 for 1 

3.3 for all 3, or 6 for 1 and 2 for 2, or 4 for 2 and 2 for 1 

20 

5 

2.5 

8 

- output fuse protection conforming to 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

DIN VDE 0660 part 200 



- minimum current 

A 

mA 

4 gG or 6 fast acting 

4 gG or 6 fast acting 

10 

6gG 

4gG 

10 

- minimum voltage V 17 17 


Response time on instantaneous 

opening inputs 

ms

References 

0 



1 



1 

103244 

References 

Description Type of Number Additional Supply Reference Weight 

terminal of safety outputs 

block circuits 

connection 

kg 

Safety Integrated 6 N/O 3 solid-state c 24 V XPS AV11113 0.320 

modules for in module (3 N/O 

Emergency 

time delay) 

stop and 

switch 

monitoring 

XPS AV11113 

103245 

Separate, 6 N/O 3 solid-state c 24 V XPS AV11113P 0.320 

can be (3 N/O 

removed time delay) 

from module 

XPS AV11113P 

803165 

Integrated 5 N/O 1 N/C a and XPS AT5110 0.650 

in module (2 N/O c 24 V 

time delay) 

XPS ATpppp 

a 115 V XPS AT3410 0.850 

a 230 V XPS AT3710 0.850 

1/68

Connections, 

0 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS AV 


XPS AV 

Module XPS AV associated with an Emergency stop pushbutton with 1 N/C contact, automatic start or unmonitored start 

+ 24 V 

+ 24 V 

F1 

K01 

1 

K02 

ESC 

Emergency 

stop 

S1 

11 

12 

K11 

K12 

S3 

13 

(1) 

To PLC 

14 

Start 

A1 S13 S11 S31 S32 S12 

S14 03 13 

23 

37 

47 

57 

Y+ Y64 Y74 Y84 

Logic 

channel 1 

Output 1 

Output 2 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Output 1 

Output 2 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

K1/K2 

XPS AV 

K3/K4 

A2 

Y39 S33 S21 S22 S34 

Y40 04 14 

24 

38 

48 

58 

Time delay 

stop 

K01 

(2) 

K02 

K11 

(3) 

K12 

0 V 

0 V 

(1) Link for automatic start. 

(2) Instantaneous opening safety outputs (stop category 0). 

(3) Time delay opening safety outputs (stop category 1). 





Power-up 


not activated 


S11-S12 


(without ESC) S13-S14 

Linked input 

S21-S22 

Linked input 

S31-S32 

Time delay interrupt 

Y39-Y40 

N/O output 

03-04/13-14/23-24 

N/O output 

37-38/47-48/57-58 

Signalling output Y74 


activated 

Emergency 

stop 

not 

activated 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 


S11-S12 

Start button 

S13-S14 

Linked input 

S21-S22 

Linked input 

S31-S32 


Y39-Y40 

N/O output 

03-04/13-14/23-24 

N/O output 

37-38/47-48/57-58 


Power-up 


not activated 


activated 

Emergency 

stop 

not 

activated 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 



There is no start contact or it is shunted. 

Start Start Time delay 

Tv = 0…300s 

interrupted 


The output is activated on closing of the start contact. 


Start Tv = 0…300s Start Time delay 

interrupted 


The start input is monitored so that there is no start-up in the event of the start contact being shunted or the start circuit being closed for more than 10 s. 

Start-up is triggered following activation of the start button (push-release function) on opening of the contact. 

1/69

Connections, 

0 


(continued) 

0 


1 



1 

XPS AV 

Module XPS AV associated with an Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts, monitored start 

+ 24 V 

F1 

S1 

11 

+ 24 V 

To PLC 

Emergency 

stop 

12 

A1 S13 S11 S31 

S32 S12 S14 03 13 

23 

37 

47 

57 

Y+ Y64 Y74 Y84 

Logic 

channel 1 

Output 1 

Output 2 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Output 1 

Output 2 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

K1/K2 

XPS AV 

K3/K4 

A2 

Y39 S33 S21 S22 S34 

Y40 04 14 

S3 

13 

14 

Emergency 

stop 

Start 

21 

22 

S1 

K01 

K02 

K11 

Time delay 

stop 

K01 

K02 

24 

K11 

38 

48 

(1) (2) 

K12 

58 

ESC 

K12 

0 V 

0 V 






Power-up 

Linked input 

S11-S12 


(channel 1) S21-S22 


(channel 2) S31-S32 

Start button 

S33-S34 


Y39-Y40 

N/O output 

03-04/13-14/23-24 

N/O output 

37-38/47-48/57-58 



not activated 


activated 


not activated 


activated 


No 

start-up 

Start 

Tv = 0Ö 300s 

Start 

Time delay 

interrupted 

Emergency stop monitoring function configuration 

1-channel wiring 

2 channel wiring, with short-circuit detection 

S1 

S1 

A1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AV 

A1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AV 

A2 S21 S22 

A2 S21 S22 

1/70

Connections, 

0 


0 

(continued) 

0 


1 



XPS AV 

Monitoring of a movable guard associated with 2 switches 

Automatic start (diagram shown for guard closed) 

+ 24 V 

F1 

+ 24 V 

1 

K01 

K02 

K11 

21 

S1 

13 

ESC 

K12 

Guard 

closed 

22 

14 

21 

S2 

To PLC 

22 

A1 S13 S11 S31 S32 S12 

S14 03 13 

23 

37 

47 

57 

Y+ Y64 Y74 Y84 

Logic 

channel 1 

Output 1 

Output 2 

K1 

K3 

Logic 

channel 2 

Output 1 

Output 2 

K2 

K4 

Fault 

K1/K2 

XPS AV 

K3/K4 

A2 

Y39 S33 S21 S22 S34 

Y40 04 14 

24 

38 

48 

58 

S2 

13 

14 

Guard 

closed 

Time delay 

stop 

K01 

(1) (2) 

K02 K11 K12 

0 V 

0 V 





Power-up 

Linked input 

S11-S12 

Guard (channel 1) 

S21-S22 

Guard (channel 2) 

S31-S32 

Guard open 

S13-S14 


Y39-Y40 

N/O output 

03-04/13-14/23-24 

N/O output 

37-38/47-48/57-58 


Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

open 


Start 

Tv = 0…300s 

Start 

Time delay 

interrupted 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 678 

9 

10 

11 

1 S12 input state 





6 Y40 input state (time delay stop) 

7 K1/K2 state (N/O instantaneous opening safety outputs) 

8 K3/K4 state (N/O time delay opening safety outputs) 

9 A1-A2 supply voltage 

10Fault 

11Configuration mode 

1/71

Connections, 

0 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS AT 


1 

XPS AT 

Module XPS AT associated with an Emergency stop pushbutton 

L1 (+) 

F1 

(-) (+) 

S1 

A1 

XPS AT 

115 V 

230 V 

T - + 

S21 S11 

B1 S12 S22 

1 2 

A2 PE S33 

Y1 

K3 

K1 

K1 

K2 

K2 

K4 

K1 

K2 

K3 

K4 

Logic 

Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 

K1 

K2 

13 23 33 41 57 67 

K3 

K4 

14 24 34 42 58 68 

S2 

Start 

(2) 

(1) 

Stop 

category 0 

Instantaneous 

opening 

safety outputs 

Stop 

category 1 

Time delay 

opening 


N (-) 

S1: Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts (recommended application). 

Output 41-42 must not be used as a safety circuit. 

(1) With Start button monitoring 

(2) Without Start button monitoring 

Functional diagram for module XPS AT with Emergency stop button monitoring 

Supply 

voltage 

Begin 


not activated 

Emergency 

stop 

activated 

Supply 

voltage 

75 ms t max. 

Guard 

closed 

Guard 

opens 

Input A S11-S12 


Start button 

Start button 

1 

2 

Feedback loop 

Y39-Y40 

Output 13-14 (N/O) 



Output 41-42 (N/C) 



Key 0 

1 

Tv = 0…30 s 

Adjustable 

Tv = 0…30 s 

Adjustable 

1 Avec surveillance du bouton marche 1 With (Y3-Y5) Start button monitoring (connection Y3-Y5) 

2 Without Start button monitoring (connection Y3-Y4) 

1/72

Connections (continued) 

0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS AT 


XPS AT 

Example of a safety circuit combining an Emergency stop module with a variable speed drive 

F1 T1 F3 

(-) (+) 

F2 

S1 

1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

+ 24 V 

A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 13 23 33 41 57 67 

Q1 

0... 30 s 

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 

FW 

RV 

A2 PE S33 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 14 24 34 42 58 68 

KM1 

KM2 

R1 

PLC 

S2 

Start 

K1 

K2 

(1) 

K1 

K2 

(2) 

KM1 

KM2 

KM1 

U 

V 

W 

M1 

3 

PE 

KM2 


(2) “Emergency stop” signalling 

S1: Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts (recommended application) 

XPS AT 

Connection with 1 Emergency stop pushbutton 

(-) (+) 

S1 

S1 

(+) (-) 

S2 

A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 13 23 33 41 57 67 

XPS AT 

Both input channels are supplied on the same polarity. 

S1: Emergency stop pushbutton with 2 N/C contacts. 

(a short-circuit between the 2 inputs is not detected) 

XPS AT 

Configuration with Start button monitoring 

(functional diagram for Start button 1, see page 1/72) 

XPS AT 

A2 PE S33 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 

S2 

(1) 

S3 

A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 

13 23 33 41 57 67 

XPS AT 

Connection of multiple Emergency stop pushbuttons with 2 N/C contacts 

(recommended application). 

The 2 input channels are supplied on different polarity. 

A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is detected. 

Monitoring an Emergency stop pushbutton with 1 N/C contact 

(-) 

(+) 

S1 

Configuration without Start button monitoring 

(functional diagram for Start button 2, see page 1/72) 

XPS AT 

A2 PE S33 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 

S2 

(3) Auxiliary terminal (to be used to separate the feedback loop from the 

wiring to the Start button) 

XPS AT 

Key to LEDs 

(1) 

A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 13 23 33 41 57 67 

XPS AT 

S1: Emergency stop button with 1 N/C contact 

Not all faults are detected: a short-circuit on the Emergency stop pushbutton 

is not detected 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 Supply voltage A1-A2, internal electronic fuse status 

2 S12 (A) input state 

3 S22 (B) input state 

4 Stop category 1 outputs closed 

1/73



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS AF 


1 



XPS AF safety modules are designed to conform with category 4 of standard EN 954-1. 

They are used for: 

p Monitoring Emergency stop circuits conforming to standards EN 418 and EN 60204-1. 

p Electrical monitoring switches activated by protection devices conforming to the standard EN 1088. 

Housed in a compact enclosure, the modules have 3 safety outputs. 

Preventa XPS AFppppP safety modules have removable terminal blocks, which facilitate machine maintenance. 

To aid diagnostics, the modules have 3 LEDs on the front face which provide information on the monitoring circuit 

status. 


Module type XPS AF5130 XPS AF5130P 





Supply 

- voltage 

V a and c 24 


- frequency Hz 50/60 

Consumption VA ≤ 5 




Yes/No (configurable by terminal connection) 

Control unit voltage and current 

c 24 V/30 mA approx. 

(at nominal supply voltage) 

Maximum wiring resistance RL Ω 90 

Synchronisation time between 

inputs A and B 

Unlimited 

Outputs 


Volt-free 

- number and type of safety circuits 3 N/O (13-14, 23-24, 33-34) 

- breaking capacity in AC-15 VA C300 : inrush 1800, maintained 180 

- breaking capacity in DC-13 24 V/1,5 A - L/R = 50 ms 

- max. thermal current (Ithe) A 6 


- output fuse protection A 4 gG or 6 fast acting, conforming to IEC EN 947-5-1, DIN VDE 0660 part 200 




See page 1/60 

Response time on input opening ms ≤ 40 

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 300 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 


voltage (Uimp.) kV 4 (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

LED display 3 

Operating temperature °C - 10…+ 55 

Storage temperature °C - 25…+ 85 

Degree of protection Terminals IP 20 

conforming to 

IEC/EN 60529 Enclosure IP 40 

Connection Type Captive screw clamp terminals Captive screw clamp terminals, separate removable 

block 

- 1-wire connection Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…2.5 mm 2 Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…2.5 mm 2 

With cable end Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm 2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm 2 

With cable end With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5 mm 2 With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm2 

- 2-wire connection Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…0.75 mm 2 Solid cable: 0.2…1 mm 2 , flexible cable: 0.2…1.5 mm 2 

With cable end Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1 mm 2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1 mm 2 

With cable end Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5…1.5 mm 2 Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5…1.5 mm 2 

1/74

References 

0 


1 



803276 

References 

Description 

Type of 


connection 

No. of Supply Reference Weight 

safety 

circuits 

kg 

1 

Safety Integrated 3 a and XPS AF5130 0.250 

modules for in module c 24 V 

Emergency 

stop and 

switch 

monitoring 

XPS AF5130 

803275 

Separate, 3 a and XPS AF5130P 0.250 

can be 

c 24 V 

removed 

XPS AF5130P 

1/75

Connections, 


0 


1 



XPS AF 

Module XPS AF associated with an Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts 

L1 (+) 

1 

F1 

N (-) 

A1 S33 S34 S39 

13 23 33 

A2 

S1 

T 

XPS AF 

K3 

K4 

ESC 

S2 

(1) (2) 

Logic 

(1) With start button monitoring 

(2) Without start button monitoring 

ESC: External start conditions 

Start 

S11 S12 S21 S22 

14 24 34 

K1 

K2 

K3 

K4 


Emergency stop function 

Input A (S11-S12) 

Input B (S21-S22) 

Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 

Start button 

S33-S39 N/O 

Output 13-14 N/O 



Key 0 

Supply Start Emergency stop Emergency stop 

voltage not activated activated 

1 

(1) With start button monitoring 

(2) Without start button monitoring 

Guard function with automatic start 

Supply 1st 2nd Guard 

Voltage switch switch opens 

Guard 

Guard closed 



Link at S33-S39 




t = 

1 

Key 0 

(1) 

(2) 

Module XPS AF with connection of multiple Emergency stop buttons, combined with a PLC 

L1 (+) 

F1 

F2 

F3 

+ 24 V 

K3 

K4 

S4 

Start 

ESC 

2 

3 4 

K3 

K3 

A1 S33 S34 S39 

13 23 33 

T 

K1 

A1 Input 

PLC 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

+COM 

K4 

K4 

(1) 

XPS AF 

Logic 

K2 

A2 Output 

1 

2 

3 

4 5 

COM 

A2 

S11 S12 S21 S22 

14 24 34 

S1 

N (-) 

S2 

S3 

K3 

K4 


output 

closed 

1 

2 3 


(1) Other circuits controlled by module XPS AF 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

1 A1-A2 supply voltage, fuse status 

2 K1 relay energised 


1/76

Connections (continued) 0 


1 



XPS AF 



S1 


1 

A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33 

XPS AF 

A2 S11 S12 S21 S22 14 24 34 

XPS AF 

A2 S11 S12 S21 S22 14 24 34 

S1 

XPS AF 

A2 S11 S12 S21 S22 14 24 34 

S1 

S2 

S3 

Emergency stop button with a single N/C contact 

Not all faults are detected: a short-circuit on the 

Emergency stop pushbutton is not detected. 

Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts 

(recommended application). 

The 2 input channels are connected to different 

polarities. A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is 

detected. 

Connection of multiple Emergency stop buttons 

with 2 N/C contacts (recommended application). 

The 2 input channels are connected to different 

polarities. A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is 

detected. 

Monitoring of a movable guard associated with 2 limit switches with 1 contact each in combined mode 

(switch 1 with N/O contact, switch 2 with N/C contact) 

XPS AF 

A2 S11 S12 S21 S22 14 24 34 

S1 

S2 

Guard closed 

XPS AF 

Configuration with automatic or manual reset 

S2 

S2 

A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33 

XPS AF 

A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33 

XPS AF 

A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33 

XPS AF 


Key to LEDs 

Without start button monitoring, 

manual reset 

Function: push-release. 

With start button monitoring, 

manual reset 

1 

2 

3 




1/77



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS AFL 

For Emergency stop, switch and safety light curtain 

monitoring 

1 


XPS AFL safety modules are designed to conform with category 3 of standard EN 954-1. 


p Monitoring Emergency stop circuits conforming to standards EN 418 and EN 60204-1. 

p Electrical monitoring of switches actuated by protection devices conforming to standard EN 1088. 

They can also be used for monitoring type 4 light curtains conforming to EN 61946-1 which have solid-state safety 

outputs (e.g. XUS LT type curtains, see pages 2/103 and 2/104). 

Housed in a compact enclosure, the modules have 3 safety outputs. 

Preventa XPS AFLppppP safety modules have removable terminal blocks, which facilitate machine maintenance. 

To aid diagnosis, the modules have 3 LEDs on the front face which provide information on the monitoring circuit status. 



Module type XPS AFL5130 XPS AFL5130P 

Products designed for max. use 

in safety related parts of control 



Supply 

- voltage 

V a and c 24 



Consumption VA ≤ 5 




No (configurable terminal connection) 


and current 

c 24 V/30 mA approx. 

(at nominal supply voltage) 

Maximum wiring resistance RL Ω 90 

Synchronisation time between 


Unlimited 

Outputs 


Volt-free 



- breaking capacity in DC-13 24 V/1.5 A - L/R = 50 ms 

- maximum thermal current (Ithe) A 6 

- sum of maximum thermal current A 18 

- output fuse protection A 4 gG or 6 fast-acting, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0660 part 200 




See page 1/60 

Response time on input 

opening ms ≤ 20 


Rated impulse 

withstand voltage (Uimp.) kV 4 (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

LED display 3 

Operating temperature range °C - 10…+ 55 

Storage temperature range °C - 25…+ 85 


conforming to 

IEC/EN 60529 Enclosure IP 40 

Connection Type Captive screw clamp terminals Captive screw clamp terminals, separate removable block 

- 1-wire connection Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…2.5 mm 2 Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…2.5 mm 2 

With cable end Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm 2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm 2 

With cable end With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5 mm 2 With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm 2 

- 2-wire connection Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…0.75 mm 2 Solid cable: 0.2…1 mm 2 , flexible cable: 0.2…1.5 mm 2 

With cable end Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1 mm 2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1 mm 2 


1/78

References 

0 


1 


For Emergency stop, switch and safety light curtain monitoring 

103240 

References 

Description 

Type of 


connection 

No. of 

safety 

circuits 


kg 

1 


for Emergency 

stop, switch and 

safety light 

curtain 

monitoring 

Integrated in 

module 

3 a and XPS AFL5130 0.250 

c 24 V 

XPS AFL5130 

103241 

Separate, 

can be removed 

from module 

3 a and XPS AFL5130P 0.250 

c 24 V 

XPS AFL5130P 

1/79

Connections, 

functional diagrams 0 


1 


For Emergency stop, switch and safety light curtain 

monitoring 

1 

XPS AFL 

XPS AFL module associated with an Emergency stop button with 2 

N/C contacts 

L1 (+) 

F1 

K3 

K4 

ESC 

S2 

Start 

(1) (2) 

A1 S33 S34 S39 

13 23 33 





Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 

Start button 

S33-S39 N/O 




Key 

1 

Supply voltage Start Emergency stop 

not activated 

(1) 

(2) 


activated 

T 

XPS AFL 

Logic 

K1 

K2 

(1) With monitoring of start button 

(2) Without monitoring of start button 

Guard function with automatic starting 

Supply voltage 1 st 

switch 

2 nd 

switch 

Guard 

opens 

N ( ) 

A2 

S1 

S11 S12 S12 S11 S22 

14 24 34 

K3 

K4 



ShuntatS33-S39 


Guard open 

Guard closed 


(1) With monitoring of start button 

(2) Without monitoring of start button 



Key 

1 

t = 

Configuration for the Emergency stop monitoring function 


Emergency stop button with one N/C contact 


Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts 

XPS AFL 

A2 S11 S12 S12 S11 S22 14 24 34 

S1 

XPS AFL 

A2 S11 S12 S12 S11 S22 14 24 34 

S1 

A short-circuit on the Emergency stop button is not detected 

A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is not detected 


Connection of several Emergency stop buttons 

XPS AFL 

A2 S11 S12 S11 S22 14 24 34 

S1 

S2 

S3 

A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is not detected 

1/80

Connections 0 


1 


For Emergency stop, switch and safety light curtain monitoring 

XPS AFL 

Monitoring of a moving guard associated with 2 switches each 

having one contact (switch 1 with a N/O contact, switch 2 with a 

N/C contact) in combined mode 

Without short-circuit detection 

Monitoring of electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) 

1 

+ 24 V 

S2 

Start 

XPS AFL 

A2 S11 S12 S11 S22 14 24 34 

A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33 

XPS AFL 

S1 

S2 

A2 S11 S12 S11 S22 14 24 34 

Open the 

guard 

Guard closed 

+24 V Out1 

Out2 

0 V 

ESPE 

OSSD1 

0 V 

OSSD2 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 


2 Relay K1 energised 

3 Relay K2 energised 

1/81


characteristics 1 


Preventa safety modules type XPS AR 

For Emergency stop, switch or safety light curtain 

monitoring 

1 


XPS AR safety modules meet the requirements of category 4 in conformity with 

standard EN 954-1 and are designed for the following safety applications: 

b Monitoring Emergency stop circuits conforming to EN 418 and EN 60204-1; 

b Electrical monitoring of switches actuated by protection devices conforming to 

standard EN 1088; 

b Monitoring type 4 safety light curtains conforming to EN 61496-1 which have solidstate 

safety outputs (e.g. XUS LT type curtains, see pages 2/103 and 2/104). 

In addition to 7 safety outputs, XPS AR modules are fitted with 2 relay signalling 

outputs and 4 solid-state signalling outputs for messages to the process PLR. 

XPS ARppppppP safety modules have removable terminal blocks, which facilitate 

machine maintenance. 

To aid diagnosis, the modules have 4 LEDs on the front face which provide 

information on the monitoring circuit status. 



Module type XPS AR3p1144 XPS AR3p1144P 

Products designed for max. Conforming to EN954-1 


use in safety related parts of 


Supply Voltage V a and c 24, a 115, a 230 

Voltage limits c 24 V % -15…+10 

a 24 V % -15…+10 

a 115 V % -15…+15 

a 230 V % -15…+10 

Frequency Hz 50/60 

Consumption 

Version c 24 V: < 4 W, version a24 V : < 7 VA, 115/230 V version : < 9 VA 




Yes/no (configurable terminal connection) 

Control unit voltage and current (across terminals 

V c 24 (about 20 mA) (at nominal supply voltage) 

S11-S52 and S21-S22) 

24 V, 115 V, and 230 V versions 

Maximum wiring resistance RL 

Ω 50 

(across terminals S11-S52 and S21-S22) 

Synchronisation time between inputs A and B 

ms 100 

Automatic starting, terminals S33, S34 shunted 

Safety outputs 

- voltage reference Volt-free 

- number and type of safety circuits 7 N/O (13-14/23-24/33-34/43-44/53-54/63-64/73-74) 

- number and type of additional outputs 4 solid-state outputs (Y31-Y32, Y31-Y64, Y31-Y74, Y31-Y35) 

- number and type of auxiliary contacts 2 N/C (81-82/91-92) 

- breaking capacity in AC-15 VA B300 (inrush: 3600, maintained: 360) 

- breaking capacity in DC-13 24V/2A,L/R=50ms 

- solid-state output breaking capacity 24 V/20mA 

- maximum thermal current (Ithe) A 10 

- sum of maximum thermal current A 40 

- output fuse protection A 6 gG or 10 fast-acting, conforming to IEC 947-5-1, DIN VDE 0660 part 200 




Response time on input opening ms

References 1 





monitoring 

580011 

References 

Description 

Type of Number of 

terminal safety 

block circuits 

connection 

Additional 

outputs 

Solid-state 

outputs to 

PLC 

V 

Safety modules for Integrated in 7 2 4 a 24 

Emergency stop, switch or module 

c 24 

safety light curtain 

monitoring 


kg 

XPS AR311144 0.300 

1 

a 115 

c 24 

XPS AR351144 0.400 

XPS AR3p1144 

a 230 

c 24 

XPS AR371144 0.400 

Separate, 

can be 

removed 

from module 

7 2 4 a 24 

c 24 

XPS AR311144P 0.300 

a 115 

c 24 

XPS AR351144P 0.400 

a 230 

c 24 

XPS AR371144P 0.400 

Principle, characteristics: 

page 1/82 

Connections: 

pages 1/84 to 1/86 

Functional diagrams: 

page 1/87 

1/83

Connections 1 





monitoring 

XPS AR 

1 

Configurations for the Emergency stop monitoring function 


Emergency stop button with one N/C 

contact 


Emergency stop button with 2 N/C 

contacts, without short-circuit 

detection 

Emergency stop button with 2 N/C 

contacts, with short-circuit detection 

(recommended application) 

Connection of several Emergency stop 

buttons with 2 N/C contacts 

(recommended application) 

S1 

S1 

S1 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S12 S52 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S52 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S11 S52 

A1 B1 

S11 

S12 

XPS AR 

XPS AR 

XPS AR 

XPS AR 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S11 S52 S21 S22 

S1 

S1 

S2 

S3 

Not all faults are detected: 

a short-circuit on the Emergency stop 

button is not detected 

The two input channels are supplied with a different potential. 

A short-circuit between the two inputs is detected 

Starting configurations 

Automatic starting With Start button monitoring Without Start button monitoring 

ESC 

S3 

ESC 

S3 

ESC 

A1 B1 S33 S34 Y1 Y2 

XPS AR 

A1 B1 S33 S34 Y1 Y2 

XPS AR 

A1 B1 S33 S34 Y1 Y2 

XPS AR 

A2 B2 Y1 S37 

A2 B2 Y1 S37 

A2 B2 Y1 S37 


page 1/82 

References: 

page 1/83 

1/84






monitoring 

XPS AR 

Monitoring of a moving guard associated with 2 switches each having one contact (switch 1 with a N/O contact, switch 2 with a N/C contact) in combined mode 

Automatic starting, without synchronisation time monitoring 

Manual starting by a start button 

Guard closed 

Guard closed 

1 

S2 

S1 

S2 

S1 

S3 

A1 B1 S11 S12 

S11 S52 S33 S34 

A1 B1 S11 S12 

S11 S52 S33 S34 

XPS AR 

XPS AR 

A2 B2 S21 S22 Y1 S37 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

Y1 

S37 

Monitoring of a moving guard associated with 2 switches and automatic starting in combined mode 

(shown with guard open) 

S2 

S1 

A1 B1 S11 S12 

S11 S52 S33 S34 

XPS AR 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

Y1 

S37 

XPS AR module associated with an Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts 

L 

F1 

K3 

(+24 V) 

S1 

Input 

B 

Input 

A 

Start 

S2 

K4 

ESC 

To PLC 

A1 B1 S11 S52 S21 S22 S11 S12 S12 S33 S34 Y1 Y2 

13 23 33 43 53 63 73 

+ 

K1 

81 

91 

Input 

A 

Y64 

Input 

B 

Y74 

XPS AR 

Logic 

K1/K2 

Fuse (1) 

K2 

A2 

A2 B2 

( ) 

S37 

Y1 

14 24 

34 

44 54 64 74 82 92 

Y31 

Y32 

Y35 

Monitored starting 

K3 

K4 

To PLC 

N 

Supply connection according to the voltage: 

a across terminals A1/A2, or c 24 V across terminals B1/B2 


(1) Operating status of internal electronic fuse 


page 1/82 

References: 

page 1/83 

1/85






monitoring 

1 

XPS AR 

XPS AR module for monitoring of electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) 

+24 V 

F1 

+24 V 

K3 

0 V 

OSSD1 

A 

OSSD2 

B 

Start 

S2 

K4 

ESC 

To PLC 

A1 B1 S11 S52 S21 S22 S52 S12 S33 S34 Y1 Y2 

13 23 33 43 53 63 73 

81 

91 

Y64 

Y74 

+ 

K1 

Input 

A 

Input 

B 

XPS AR 

Logic 

K1/K2 

Fuse (1) 

K2 

A2 

A2 B2 

S37 

Y1 

14 24 

34 

44 54 64 74 82 92 

Y31 

Y32 

Y35 


K3 

K4 

(2) 

To PLC 

N 



(2) ESPE indicator light deactivated 

Example of a safety circuit associating the XPS AR module in switch and PLC monitoring mode 

L 

F1 

Guard closed 

S1 

S2 

K3 

Start 

K4 

(+24 V) 

Input 

B 

Input 

A 

S2 

ESC 

A1 B1 S11 S52 S21 S22 S11S12 

S12 S33 S34 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 

81 

91 

Y64 

Y74 

+ 

K1 

Input 

A 

Input 

B 

XPS AR 

Logic 

K1/K2 

Fuse (1) 

K2 

A2 

A2 B2 

( ) 

S37 

Y1 

14 24 

34 

44 54 64 74 82 92 Y31 

Y32 

Y35 

+24 V 


5 

6 7 

Inputs 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +24 V A1 

PLC 

Outputs 

1 

2 

3 

4 5 

A2 

K3 

K3 

K4 

K4 

1 

2 3 

4 

5 

N 




page 1/82 

References: 

page 1/83 

1/86

Functional diagrams 1 





monitoring 

Functional diagrams of the XPS AR module 

Monitoring of limit switches with automatic starting 

Supply voltage 

Start 

1 st switch 

2 nd switch 

Guard 

opens 

Guard 

opens 

1 st switch 

2 nd switch 

Monitoring of limit switches with automatic starting and synchronisation time 

monitoring 


Guard 

1 st switch 

opens 1 st switch 

Guard 2 nd switch 2 nd switch 

opens 

1 


Input B S11-S22 

Input S33-S34 N/O 

Output 13-14/23-24/3-34/43- 

44/53-54/6364/73-74 N/O 

Output 81-82/91-92 N/C 




Output 13-14/23-24/33-34/43- 

44/53-54/6364/73-74 N/O 

Output 81-82/91-92 N/C 

Output (K1 + K2) Y31/Y32 

Output (Power) Y31/Y35 

Output (input A) Y31/Y64 

Output (input B) Y31/Y74 

1 

Key 0 

Emergency stop monitoring or monitoring of limit switches with monitored 

starting 


Starting 

activated 

Starting 

deactivated 

t = 


or IDP activated 





1 

Key 0 t 100 ms t 100 ms 

Monitoring of light curtains (ESPE) with solid-state outputs and monitored 

starting 

Supply voltage Starting 

activated 

Starting 

deactivated 

Light curtains Light curtains 

deactivated activated 



Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 

Output 13-14/23-24/33-34/43- 

44/53-54/6364/73-74 N/O 

Output 81-82/91-92 N/C 






Input B OSSD1 (ESPE) 

-S52 

Input OSSD2 (ESPE) 

- S12 

Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 

Output 13-14/23-24/33-34/43- 

44/53-54/6364/73-74 N/O 

Output 81-82/91-92 N/C 





Bridge Y1-S37 

Key 

0 

1 

Bridge Y1-S37 

Key 

0 

1 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

34 


1 A1-A2 supply voltage, electronic internal fuse status 

2 Input S22 (A) 

3 Input S52 (B) 

4 State of K1-K2 (N/O safety outputs closed) 

page 1/82 

References: 

page 1/83 

1/87



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS AK 

For Emergency stop, switch, safety mat and edge or safety 


1 


XPS AK safety modules are designed to conform with category 4 of standard EN 954-1. 


p Monitoring Emergency stop circuits conforming to standards EN 418 and EN 60204-1 

p Electrical monitoring of switches activated by protection devices, with optional selection of synchronisation time 

between signals 

p Monitoring 4-wire safety mats or edges 

p Monitoring type 4 light curtains conforming to EN 61496-1, which have solid-state safety outputs (for example, XUS LT 

type curtains, see pages 2/103 and 2/104) 

Housed in a compact enclosure, the modules have 3 safety outputs, a relay signalling output and 4 solid-state 

signalling outputs for signalling to the process PLC. 

XPS AKppppP safety modules have removable terminal blocks, which facilitate machine maintenance. 

To aid diagnostics, the modules have 4 LEDs on the front face which provide information on the monitoring circuit status. 



Module type XPS AK3p1144 XPS AK3p1144P 





Supply 

- voltage 

V a and c 24, a 110 and c 24, a 120 and c 24, a 230 and c 24 



Consumption VA ≤ 5(version24V),≤ 6 (versions 110, 120 and 230 V) 




Yes/No (configurable terminal connection) 

Control unit voltage and 

current (between terminals 

c 24 V/30 mA approx. (at nominal supply voltage) 

S21-S22 and S31-S32) 

Maximum wiring resistance RL 

between terminals S21-S22, S31-S32 Ω 28 

Synchronisation time between s Automatic start: 2 or 4 depending on wiring 


Manual start (start button between S33 and S34): unlimited 

(terminals S21-S22, S31-S32) 

Outputs 


Volt-free 


- number and type of additional circuits 1 N/C (41-42) + 4 solid-state 


- breaking capacity in DC-13 24 V/1.5 A - L/R = 50 ms 

- solid-state output breaking capacity 24V/20mA,48V/10mA 

- max. thermal current (Ithe) A 6 


- output fuse protection A 4 gG or 6 fast acting, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0660 part 200 




Response time on input opening ms ≤ 40 



voltage (Uimp.) kV 4 (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

LED display 4 

Operating temperature °C - 10…+ 55 

Storage temperature °C - 25…+ 85 


conforming to IEC 60529 Enclosure IP 40 

Connection Type Captive screw clamp terminals Captive screw clamp terminals, separate removable block 

-1-wire connection Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…2.5 mm2 Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…2.5 mm2 

With cable end Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm2 

With cable end With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5 mm 2 With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5 mm 2 

-2-wire connection Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…0.75 mm 2 Solid cable: 0.2…1 mm 2 , flexible cable: 0.2…1.5 mm 2 

With cable end Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1 mm2 Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1 mm2 


1/88

References 

0 


1 




References 

Description Type of No. of Additional Solid Supply Reference Weight 

terminal safety outputs state 

block circuits outputs 

connection to PLC kg 

1 


for Emergency 

stop, switch, 

safety mat and 

edge or safety 

light curtain 

monitoring 

Integrated 3 1 4 a 24 V XPS AK311144 0.300 

in module 

c 24 V 

XPS AK3p1144 

a 110 V XPS AK361144 0.400 

a 120 V XPS AK351144 0.400 

c 24 V 

a 230 V XPS AK371144 0.400 

c 24 V 

Separate, 3 1 4 a 24 V XPS AK311144P 0.300 

can be 

c 24 V 

removed 

from module 

a 110 V XPS AK361144P 0.400 

c 24 V 

XPS AK3p1144P 

a 120 V XPS AK351144P 0.400 

c 24 V 

a 230 V XPS AK371144P 0.400 

c 24 V 

1/89

Connections 

0 



1 




1 

XPS AK 




Emergency stop button with a single N/C contact Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts, Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts, 

without short-circuit detection 

with short-circuit detection (recommended 

application) 

S1 

S1 

S1 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AK 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AK 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AK 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

Not all faults are detected: 

a short-circuit on the Emergency stop 

pushbutton is not detected 

The 2 input channels are connected to 

different polarities. 

A short-circuit between the 2 inputs is 

detected. 

Connection of multiple Emergency stop buttons 

Start configurations 

with 2 N/C contacts (recommended application) Automatic start With start button monitoring 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AK 

A1 B1 S13 S14 

XPS AK 

A1 B1 S13 S14 

XPS AK 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S33 S34 

A2 B2 S33 S34 

S1 

Start 

S2 

S2 

S3 

The 2 input channels are connected to 

different polarities. 


Proximity sensor monitoring 

Sensors with PNP outputs 

Without short-circuit detection 

Sensors with NPN and PNP outputs 

With short-circuit detection 

Safety mat and edge monitoring 

S1 

+ + 

PNP 

PNP 

- - 

+ 

PNP 

- 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS AK 

XPS AK 

XPS AK 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

NPN 

+ 

- 

0 V 

0 V 

1/90


functional diagram 0 


1 




XPS AK 

Monitoring of a movable guard associated with 2 switches with 1 contact each (switch 1 with N/O contact, switch 2 with N/C contact). 

Automatic start, without synchronisation time monitoring 

Guard closed 

Manual start via Start button 

Guard closed 

1 

S2 

S1 

S2 

S1 

A1 B1 S11 S12 

XPS AK 

S31 S32 S13 S14 

A1 B1 S11 S12 

XPS AK 

S31 S32 S13 S14 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

S33 

S34 

S2 

Monitoring of a movable guard associated with 2 switches and automatic start 

(diagram shows guard open) 

Start 

S2 

S1 

A1 B1 S11 S12 

XPS AK 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

S31 S32 S13 S14 

S33 

S34 

Functional diagram for outputs 

S1 

S2 

Outputs 

2 s 4 s 

Module XPS AK associated with an Emergency stop button with 2 N/C contacts 

L 

F1 

S1 

To PLC 

(+24 V) 

Input B 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 S13 S14 13 23 

33 

41 

Y64 

Y74 

+ 

XPS AK 

Logic 

K1 

Input 

A 

K1/K2 

Input 

B 

Fuse (1) 

K2 

A2 

B2 S21 S22 S33 S34 14 24 

( ) Input A 

K3 

S1 

S2 K4 

Start 

34 

42 Y31 Y32 

Y54 

To PLC 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

N 

Supply connection depending on voltage: 

a on terminals A1/A2, or c 24 V on terminals B1/B2 


(1)Operating status of internal electronic fuse 

1/91



1 




XPS AK 

Module XPS AK for monitoring electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) 

+24 V 

1 

F1 

+24 V 

0 V 

OSSD1 

ESPE 

outputs 

OSSD2 

To PLC 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 S13 S14 13 23 

+ 

XPS AK 

A 

Logic 

B 

K1 

33 

41 

Input 

A 

K1/K2 

Y64 

Input 

B 

Fuse (1) 

Y74 

K2 

A2 

B2 S21 S22 S33 S34 14 24 

34 

42 Y31 Y32 

Y54 

K3 

S1 

Start 

K4 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

(2) 

To PLC 


(1) Operating status of internal 

electronic fuse 

(2) ESPE indicator light deactivated 

0 V 

Example of safety circuit combining module XPS AK for limit switch monitoring and a PLC 

L (+) 

F1 

Guard closed 

S1 

S2 

Input B 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 S13 S14 13 23 

K1 

+ 

Logic 

XPS AK 

33 

41 

Input 

A 

K1/K2 

Y64 

Input 

B 

Fuse (1) 

Y74 

K2 

A2 

B2 S21 S22 S33 S34 14 24 

Input A 

K3 

34 

42 Y31 Y32 

Y54 

+24 V 

S3 

Start 

K4 

5 

6 7 

ESC 

Inputs 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +24 V 

A1 

PLC 

Outputs 

1 

2 

3 

4 5 

A2 

K3 

K3 

K4 

K4 

1 

2 3 

4 

5 

N (-) 



1/92


0 


1 




XPS AK 


Switch monitoring function with automatic start 


Supply 

voltage 

Start 

Guard 

opens 2nd switch 

1st switch Guard opens 

Switch monitoring function with automatic start 

and synchronisation of time monitoring 

Supply 1st Guard 1st 

voltage switch opens switch 

Guard 2nd 2nd 

opens switch switch 


1 



Output 13-14/ 

23-24/ 33-34 N/O 

Output 41-42 N/C 



Output 13-14/ 

23-24/ 33-34 N/O 


Output (K1 + K2) 

Y31-Y32 


Y31-Y32 

Output (Power) 

Y31-Y54 

Output (Input A) 

Y31-Y64 

Output (Input B) 

Y31-Y74 

Key 

0 

1 


Y31-Y54 


Y31-Y64 


Y31-Y74 

Key 

0 

1 

t = t = 2s t = 4s 

Emergency stop monitoring or switch monitoring function 

Light curtain monitoring function (ESPE) with solid-state outputs 

Supply 

voltage 

Start 

Emergency stop or switch 

activated 

Supply 

voltage 

Start 

Light curtain 

Deactivated Activated 




Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 

Output 13-14/ 

23-24/ 33-34 N/O 

Input B OSSD1 

(ESPE) S32 

Input OSSD2 

(ESPE) S12 

Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 



Y31-Y32 

Output 13-14/ 

23-24/ 33-34 N/O 



Y31-Y54 


Y31-Y64 


Y31-Y74 

Key 

0 

1 


Y31-Y32 


Y31-Y54 


Y31-Y64 


Y31-Y74 

Key 

0 

1 

Safety mat and edge monitoring function with monitored start 

Input S11-S12 


Supply 

voltage 

Start 

Walk 

on mat 

Leave 

mat 

Start 

Walk 

on mat 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

34 


Start button 

S33-S34 N/O 

Output 13-14/ 

23-24/ 33-34 N/O 



Y31-Y32 




4 K1/K2 status (N/O safety outputs closed) 


Y31-Y54 


Y31-Y64 


Y31-Y74 

Key 

0 

1 

1/93


characteristics, 

references 1 


Preventa safety modules type XPS VC 

For enabling switch monitoring 

1 


Enabling switches, consisting of an XY2 AU handle and an XPS VC monitoring 

module, allow authorized staff to carry out adjustment, programming or maintenance 

operations near hazardous zones of machines and under certain conditions. 

Indeed, to be accessible, such phases, often carried out at reduced speed, must be 

intentionally selected by authorized persons by means of selectors with or without 

keys. Once the selection is made, the enabling switch thus temporarily takes over 

from the hazardous zone’s usual protection measures. Caution: the enabling switch 

alone must not cause dangerous movements of the machine to be activated; a 

second voluntary control action on the part of the operator is required. In addition, 

each person in the hazardous zone must be provided with an enabling switch to 

ensure their own safety. 


Module type XPS VC1132 XPS VC1132P 

Products designed for max. use in safety related parts of 


control systems conforming to EN 954-1 

Supply (Ue) 

conforming to IEC 38 

Voltage V c 24 

Voltage limits c 24 V -20…+20% 

Consumption W

Connections, 



Preventa safety modules type XPS VC 

For enabling switch monitoring 

XPS VC 

+ 24 V 

F1 

1 

S1 

0 1 2 

6 5 

1 

2 

K3 

ESC 

K4 

A1 S12 S13 S11 

Y1 Y2 13 

XPS VC 

23 

Supply A1/A2 

K1 

Fault 

K1/K2 

Logic 

Fault 

K1/K2 

K2 

A2 S21 S23 

Y34 Y44 14 

24 

4 3 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

0 V 

ESC: External start conditions. 

Functional diagram of XPS VC module 


Enabling switches 

position0to1 


position1to2 


position2to1 


position 1 to 0 

Enabling switches 1.2 

(S11-S13) 

Enabling switches 5.6 

(S11-S12) 

Enabling switches 3. 4 

(S21-S23) 

Return loop 

Solid-state output Y44-A2 

(K1/K2) 

Output 13-14/23-24 

(N/O) 

1 

Key 0 

Key to LEDs 

State of contacts 

1 A1-A2 supply voltage, 

0 1 2 

electronic internal fuse status 

1-2 

2 Fault signalling 

5-6 

3 Safety outputs closed 

3-4 

1 

2 

3 

1-2 

5-6 

3-4 

0 1 2 

Contact closed 

Contact open 

N/C contact with positive opening operation 

7 8 

1/95


0 



1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS FB 

For electrical monitoring of switches combined in pairs 

1 


Safety module XPS FB meets the safety requirements for monitoring the operation of 2 switches used on guards for 

the protection of personnel (e.g. grilles, protective covers, mechanical shielding, etc.). It is also possible to monitor the 

operation of two photo-electric sensors with relay output (e.g. access to robotised areas). To do this, each sensor must 

be fitted with a N/O contact and a N/C contact or an N/C + N/O changeover contact. The contacts must not, however, 

be of the make before break type. 

Module XPS FB monitors correct operation of the limit switches connected to it when the guard moves. It automatically 

detects any operating or electrical wiring fault in the limit switches. Detection of a fault (shorting, change of contact state 

during operation, etc.) causes immediate opening of the safety contacts in the module and subsequent stopping of the 

machine's dangerous movement. 

After the module has been energised, the guard must be opened and closed again to check that the limit switches are 

properly connected and no faults are present. This function can be simulated by means of the reset button. With the 

feedback loop closed, the safety circuits of the module are actuated after closing the guard and (optional) operation of 

the Start button. 

The feedback loop allows self-monitoring of any contactor or control relay used to increase the number of output 

contacts and/or to increase the breaking capacity. Any contactor or control relay used for this purpose must incorporate 

mechanically linked contacts. 

The function of the Start button on module XPS FB is determined by the terminal connections. When terminals Y3-Y5 

are linked, the Start button is included in the monitoring circuit and the safety outputs are activated on the falling edge 

of the output signal when the Start button is released. When terminals Y3-Y4 are linked, the safety outputs are activated 

immediately after the Start button is pressed. This configuration allows the safety modules to function automatically as 

soon as the safety guard is closed, provided that the Start button is shorted. 

High risk applications 

Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of redundancy and self-monitoring. 

The safety modules perform both functions. 

Machines with instant stopping. Locking (stopping time < access time) (1) 

XPS FB 

XPS FB 

Locking by actuator key and 

activation in positive mode 

associated with a safety module 

Activation in positive and negative 

(combined) mode associated with 

a safety module 

High inertia machines with long stopping times. Interlocking (stopping time > access time) (1) 

XPS FB XPS VN 

XPS FB XPS VN 

XPS FB 

Interlocking device with actuator Interlocking device with actuator Interlocking device with electrokey 

captive in guard key captive in guard and zero magnetic lock 

speed detection 

(1) Stopping time: Time elapsed between actuation of the machine stop control and the moment the machine stops 

(risk eliminated). 

Access time: Time required for a person to access the hazardous zone (calculated on the basis of an approach speed). 

1/96


0 


1 




Type 




XPS FB 


1 

Supply 

- voltage V a and c 24 or 48, a115, a 230 

- voltage limits a -20…+10%(24V,48V) 

c -20…+20%(24V,48V) 

a - 15…+ 15 % (115 V) 

a - 15…+ 10 % (230 V) 


Consumption VA

References, 

connections, 


0 


1 



1 

Description Number of Solid-state Supply Reference Weight 

safety 

outputs for 

circuits signalling to PLC kg 

Safety modules 3 2 c and XPS FB5111 0.650 

for electrical 

a 24 V 

monitoring of 

switches 

combined in c and XPS FB5311 0.650 

pairs 

a 48 V 

a 115 V XPS FB3411 0.850 

XPS FB 

a 230 V XPS FB3711 0.850 

XPS FB 

Guard locking on all machines 

L1 (+) 

F1 

A1 

115 V 

230 V 

Lim. sw. S1 (N/C) 


Lim. sw. S2 (N/O) 

Start button S3 

(N/O) 


(N/O) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2 

S1 

T - + 

K3 

K4 

S13 S12 S11 Y1 Y2 S33 S34 

13 

K1 

K2 

S3 

Start 

Logic 

A2 PE S23 S22 S21 S43 S44 Y3 Y4 Y5 

14 

1 

2 

K1 

(4) 

XPS FB 

K2 

K1 

K2 

23 

33 41 

24 34 42 

K1-K2 state 

(1) 

To PLC 

S2 

S4 

Fuse OK 

Test (2) 

K3 

K4 

N (-) 

Y1-Y2: Feedback loop 

Output (41-42) must not be used as a safety circuit. It can be used for non-hazardous machinery movements. 

S1, S2 : Switch (guard closed) 

S4 : Test pushbutton (simulation of opening and closing of moving guard) 

Simulation 

(opening 

Functional diagram for module XPS FB 

and 

closing of 

Guard 

guard by 

open Start 

test button) 

Supply Guard 

Guard 

voltage closed 

open 

Supply 

voltage 


A1/A2 

Fuse 

(3) 

Y53 

Y54 






(N/O) 

Test button S4 

(N/O) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2 

K1/K2 

Y63 

Y64 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 


2 Feedback loop Y1-Y2 

+ guard closed 

3 K1-K2 state 

(N/O safety outputs closed) 


(2) Without Start button monitoring 

(3) Operating state of internal 

electronic fuse 

(4) Automatic start 

Begin 

guard 

opening 

Guard 

open 

Begin 

guard 

closing 

Guard 

closed 

Begin 

guard 

opening 

Guard 

closed 









Output Y53-Y54 



T1 

Tmax.approx. 

1.5 s 

1 

Key 

0 

1 With Start button monitoring (Y3-Y5 connection) 

2 Without Start button monitoring (Y3-Y4 connection) 

T2 

Response time 


T2 

Response time 

T1 

Tmax.approx. 

1.5 s 

T2 

Response time 

1/98


0 


1 



XPS FB 

Guard locking on an injection press conforming to standard EN 201 

L1 (+) 

F1 

S1 

K5 

K3 

S3 

Start 

K5 

S4 

1 

K4 

A1 

115 V 

230 V 

T - + 

S13 S12 

S11 

Y1 Y2 S33 S34 

13 

K1 

K2 

XPS FB 

K1 

Logic 

K2 

23 

33 41 

Y53 Y63 

A1/A2 

Fuse 

(2) 

K1/K2 

K1 K2 

A2 PE S23 S22 S21 S43 S44 Y3 Y4 Y5 

14 24 34 42 

(1) 

K5 K5 

S2 

Y54 

Y64 

K1/K2 state (N/O 

safety outputs closed) 

To PLC Fuse OK 

N (-) 

K3 

K4 

K5 

S1-S2: Switches (guard closed position) 

S4: Hydraulic switch (guard closed position) 


(2) Operating state of the internal electronic fuse 

Monitoring of 2 photo-electric sensors with module XPS FB 

L1 (+) 

F1 

Reset S1 

(2) 

B1 

BK 

BK 

OG 

(3) 

RD 

(5) BN 

BU 

BU 

Photo-electric sensor 1 

B2 

BK 

BK 

OG 

(3) 

RD 

(5) BN 

BU 

BU 

Photo-electric sensor 2 

Reset 

S1 K5 

(2) 

(1) 

A1 S11 S12 S13 Y3 Y4 Y5 S21 S22 S23 13 23 33 41 Y53 Y63 

XPS FB 

A1/A2 

K1 

K2 

Fuse 

(4) 

K1/K2 

A2 

PE Y1 

K3 

K4 

Y2 S33 

S2 

Start 

S34 

S43 S44 

14 24 34 42 

K5 K5 

Y54 

Y64 

K1/K2 state (N/O safety 

outputs closed) 

To PLC 

Fuse OK 

K5 

K3 

K4 

K5 

N (-) 

(1) With Start button monitoring. 

(2) Reset button S1: 1 N/C contact + 1 N/O contact. 

(3) To avoid interference between the 2 photo-electric sensors, bilateral installation of the sensors is recommended (1 transmitter on each side and 1 receiver 

on each side) so that the direction of the beams of photo-electric sensors 1 and 2 are reversed. 

(4) Operating state of the internal electronic fuse. 

(5) Contact represented with beam broken. 

1/99



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS BA, XPS BC 



1 Two-hand control stations are designed to provide protection against hand injury. They require machine operators to 

keep their hands clear of the dangerous motion area. The use of two-hand control is an individual protective measure, 

which can safely protect only one operator. Separate two-hand control stations must be provided for each operator in 

a multiple-worker environment. Preventa XPS BA and XPS BC safety modules for two-hand control comply with the 

requirements of European standard EN 574 for two-hand control systems. 

The control stations must be designed and installed such that they cannot be activated involuntarily or easily rendered 

inoperative. Depending on the application, the requirements of type C standards specific to the machinery involved 

must be met (additional personal protection methods may have to be considered). 

To initiate a dangerous movement, both operators (two-hand control pushbuttons) must be activated within an interval 

≤ 0.5 s (synchronous activation). If one of the two pushbuttons is released during a dangerous operation, the control 

sequence is cancelled. Resumption of the dangerous operation is possible only if both pushbuttons are returned to their 

initial position and reactivated within the required time interval. 

The safety distance between the control units and the hazardous area must be sufficient to ensure that when only one 

operator is released, the hazardous area cannot be reached before the dangerous movement has been completed or 

stopped. 


Type XPS BA XPS BC 






Supply 

-voltage V z 24, a 115, a 230 c 24, a 24, a 115, a 230 

- voltage limits - 20…+ 20 % (c 24 V), - 20…+ 10 % (a 24 V), - 20…+ 10 % (c 24 V), - 15…+ 10 % (a 24 V), 

- 15…+ 15 % (a 115V),-15…+10%(a 230 V) - 15…+ 15 % (a 115 V), - 15…+ 10 % (a 230 V) 


Consumption VA < 20 (apparent power)


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS BF 



Type XPS BF1132 XPS BF1132P 

Products designed for max. use in 




Supply 

- voltage V c 24 


1 

Consumption W

Selection, 

references 

0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS BA, XPS BC, XPS BF 


1 

Selection 

Standard EN 574 defines the selection of two-hand control stations according to the control system category. 

The following table details the three types of two-hand control conforming to EN 574. 

For each type, it lists the operating characteristics and minimum requirements. 

Requirements of standard EN 574 Type I Type II Type III 

A B C 

Use of both hands (simultaneous action) 

Link between input and output signals 

Output signal inhibited 

Prevention of accidental operation 

Tamper-proof 

Output signal reinitialised 

Synchronous action (specified time limit) 

Use of proven components 

(Category 1 conforming to EN 954-1) 

XPS BApp 

Redundancy with partial error detection 


XPS BC 

XPS BF 

Redundancy + Self-monitoring 


XPS BC 

XPS BF 

Two-hand control station 

XY2 SBpp 

Meets the requirements of standard EN 574 

Conforming to standard EN 954-1 

560153 

560154 

XPS BA 

References 

Description Type Type of Number Additional Supply Reference Weight 

conforming terminal of safety outputs 

to standard 

EN 574 

block 

connection 

circuits 

kg 

Safety III A Integrated 1 N/O 1 N/C a or c 24 V XPS BA5120 0.200 

modules 

in module 

for electrical 

monitoring of a 115 V XPS BA3420 0.200 

two-hand 

control 

stations a 230 V XPS BA3720 0.200 

III C Integrated 2 N/O 1 N/C c 24 V XPS BC1110 0.400 

in module 

XPS BC 

a 24 V XPS BC3110 0.400 

a 115 V XPS BC3410 0.400 

560075 

a 230 V XPS BC3710 0.400 

2 N/O 2 solid-state c 24 V XPS BF1132 0.150 

XPS BF1123P 

Separate, 

can be 2 N/O 2 solid-state c 24 V XPS BF1132P 0.150 

removed 

from 

module 

1/102

Connections, 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS BA, XPS BC 


XPS BA 

Module XPS BA associated with a two-hand control station 

Type III A conforming to EN 574 

L1 (+) 

F1 

S1 

Functional diagram for module XPS BA 

Supply 

voltage 

Two-hand control 

deactivated 

Button 

1 

Button 

2 


activated 

Two-hand 

control 

deactivated 

1 

- 

A1 T11 T11 T12 T13 11 

+ 

T 

S2 

Logic 

K1 

Supply A1-A2 

Input T11-T12 (N/C) 

Input T11-T13 

(N/O) 

N (-) 

XPS BA 

A2 12 14 



output 

Safety output 11-14 

(N/O) 


11-12 (N/C) 

Key 

0 

1 

max. 500 ms 

max. 25 ms 

Response time 

S1 and S2: pushbuttons. 

Must not be used for applications (presses) which 

require a type III C module (XPS BC) 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 


2 K1 state (N/O safety output 11-14 closed) 

XPS BC 

Module XPS BC associated with a two-hand control station 

Type III C conforming to EN 574 

Functional diagram for module XPS BC 

L1 (+) 

F1 

A1 T13 T12 T11 Y1 Y2 13 23 31 

A2 

XPS BC 

S1 

T 

K1 

K3 

K4 

Logic 

K2 

ESC 

K1 

K2 

T22 T23 T21 

14 24 32 

K1 

K2 

Two-hand control deactivated 

Mushroom head S1 

(N/C) 


(N/O) 


(N/C) 


(N/O) 

Feedback loop 



Output 31-32 (N/C-) 

Button 

1 

Button 

2 

Two-hand control activated 

Two-hand 

control 

non active 

N (-) 

S2 

K3 

K4 

Key 0 

1 

max. 500 ms 

max. 30 ms 

Response time 

ESC: External start conditions. Y1-Y2: feedback loop. 

Output (31-32) must not be used as a safety circuit. 

It can be used for non-dangerous machine movements. 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

1 Supply voltage A1-A2, S1-S2 

LED 1 indicates that buttons S1 and S2 are correctly connected 

2 Feedback loop Y1-Y2 

3 K1-K2 state (N/O safety outputs closed) 

1/103


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS BC 


1 

XPS BC (continued) 

Module XPS BC associated with a two-hand control station and foot switch (must only be applied to suitable applications) 

L1 (+) 

F1 

S4 

012 

S3 

S1 

S2 

A1 T11 

XPS BC 

T13 

T12 T21 T23 T22 

13 23 31 

N (-) 

A2 

K3 

K4 

Y1 

Y2 

K3 

14 24 32 

K4 

S4 selector switch: 

0=stop 

1 = control station 

2 = foot switch 

S1-S2: two-hand control station pushbuttons 

S3: foot switch 

Modules XPS BC associated with 2 two-hand control stations 

L1 (+) 

F1 

A1 

T11 

S11 

XPS BC 

T13 

S12 

1 2 3 4 5 

T12 T21 T23 T22 

6 

7 

9 

X1 

8 

10 

13 23 31 

When operator 1 is absent: 

replace terminal block X1 with X3 and physically remove 

the two-hand control station. 

When operator 2 is absent: 

replace terminal block X2 with X3 and physically remove 

the two-hand control station. 

A2 Y1 Y2 

14 24 32 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

X3 

S1 

123 

K3 

K4 

S21 

S22 

7 

X2 

9 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 

8 

10 

A1 

T11 

XPS BC 

T13 

T12 T21 T23 T22 

13 23 31 

N (-) 

A2 Y1 Y2 

K3 

14 24 32 

K4 

S1 selector switch: 

1 = operator 1 

2 = operator 2 

3 = operator 1 and operator 2 

S11-S12, S21-S22: two-hand control station pushbuttons 

1/104

Connections (continued), 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS BF 


XPS BF 

XPS BF module associated with a two-hand control console 

F1 

1 

S1 

XY2 SB 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

A1 S11 S12 S13 

Y1 Y2 13 23 

Logic 

Fault 

K1/K2 

K1 

K1 

XPS BF 

K2 

K2 

A2 S21 S22 S23 Y34 Y44 

14 24 

S2 

XY2 SB 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

ESC : External start conditions. Y1-Y2 : return loop 

Functional diagram of XPS BF module 

Key to LEDs 

Two-hand control not active 

Mushroom-head 

button S1 N/C 

Mushroom-head 

button S1 N/O 

Pushbutton 

1 

Pushbutton 

2 

Two-hand control active 

Two-hand 

control 

deactivated 

1 

2 

3 

Mushroom-head 

button S2 N/C 

Mushroom-head 

button S2 N/O 

Return loop 

1 A1-A2 supply voltage (fuse status) 


3 State of K1-K2 (N/O safety outputs closed) 



Solid-state output Y34 

(fault) 


(K1/K2) 

T1 = 

0.5 s max. 

T2 = 

0.02 s max. 

Activated 

Deactivated 

Key 

1/105



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS ECM, XPS ECP 


1 



XPS ECp safety modules, for increasing the number of safety contacts, are available as attachments for Preventa XPS 

base modules (Emergency stop, limit switch, two-hand control, etc.). 

They are used to increase the number of safety output contacts of the base modules. 

Type XPS ECM XPS ECP 





Supply 

- voltage V a and c 24, a 115, a 230 

- voltage limits -20…+10%(a 24 V) 

-20…+20%(c 24 V) 

-15…+15%(a 115 V) 

-15…+10%(a 230 V) 


Consumption 

24 V VA

References 

0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS ECM, XPS ECP 


References 

Description Number Additional Solid- Supply Reference Weight 

of safety outputs state 

circuits 

outputs 

for PLC 

kg 

1 

Safety modules 4 1 1 a and XPS ECM5131 0.550 

for increasing 

c 24 V 

the number of 

safety contacts 

used with XPS 

base modules 

XPS ECM 

a 115 V XPS ECM3431 0.650 

a 230 V XPS ECM3731 0.650 

8 1 1 a and XPS ECP5131 0.550 

c 24 V 

XPS ECP 

a 115 V XPS ECP3431 0.650 

a 230 V XPS ECP3731 0.650 

1/107

Connections, 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS ECM 


1 

XPS ECM 

L (+) 

F1 

13 

23 

XPS 

Base module 

14 24 

Y2 

Y1 

(1) 

A1 

U1 K1 B1 K2 U2 Y1 13 

XPS ECM 

23 

33 

43 

51 

Y63 

T – + 

K1 

A1/A2 

N (–) 

115 V 

230 V 

A2 

PE 

K1 

K2 

K2 

Y2 14 

24 

34 

44 


52 

Signalling 

output 

Fuse 

(2) 

Y64 

To PLC 

(1) When installing base modules and 

modules for increasing the number of 

safety contacts into different electrical 

enclosures, run separate cables for 

terminalsU1-13 and U1-23. 

(2) Operating status of internal electronic 

fuse. 

Functional diagram for module XPS ECM 

Supply 

voltage 

Channel 1 

closes 

Channel 2 

closes 


opens opens 

Input A (U1-K1) 

Input B (U2-K2) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2 





Signalling 

output 51-52 (N/C) 


A1/A2 (fuse) 

Key 0 

1 

1/108

Connections, 



1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS ECP 


XPS ECP 

L (+) 

F1 

1 

13 

23 

XPS 

Base module 

14 24 

Y2 

Y1 

(1) 

A1 

U1 K1 B1 K2 U2 Y1 13 

XPS ECP 

23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

73 

83 

91 

Y03 

N (–) 

115 V 

230 V 

A2 

T – + 

PE 

K1 

K2 

K1 

K2 

Y2 14 

24 

34 44 54 64 


74 

84 

92 

Signalling 

output 

A1/A2 

Fuse 

(2) 

Y04 

To PLC 

(1) When installing base modules and 

modules for increasing the number of 

safety contacts into different electrical 

enclosures, run separate cables for 

terminals U1-13 and U1-23. 

(2) Operating status of internal electronic 

fuse. 

Functional diagram of module XPS ECP 

Supply 

voltage 


closes closes 

Channel 1 

opens 

Channel 2 

opens 

Input A (U1-K1) 

Input B (U2-K2) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2 









Signalling 

output 91-92 (N/C) 

Solid-state out put 

A1/A2 (fuse) 

Key 0 

1 

1/109



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS TSA, XPS TSW 

For safety time delays 

1 


XPS TSA and XPS TSW safety modules are used in applications requiring safety time delays: 

- XPS TSA modules in applications with interlocking on high inertia machines (guards unlocked after safety time delay 

has elapsed), 

- XPS TSW modules in applications with a safety switchover contact (shunting contact in association with XPS VN 

modules for zero speed detection, solenoid valve monitoring, etc.) 

The time delay of safety circuits can be set to 16 preset values, using 2 selectors located on the front panel of the 

modules. 

To aid diagnosis, the modules are fitted with LEDs which provide information on the monitoring circuit status and have 

2 solid-state outputs for messages to the process controller. 

In addition, their removable terminal blocks optimise the maintenance of machines. 


Module type XPS TSA XPS TSW 





Supply 

- voltage V a and c 24, a 115, a 230 

- voltage limits - 15…+ 15 % (c 24 V) 

- 20…+ 10 % (a 24 V) 

- 15…+ 15 % (115 V) 

- 15…+ 10 % (230 V) 


Consumption 

VA 

c 24 V

References 

0 


1 

Preventa safety modules types XPS TSA, XPS TSW 


560076 

References 

Description 


for applications with 

interlocking on high 

inertia machines 

Number of 

safety 

outputs 

Number of 

additional 

outputs 

1 delayed 2 N/C + 

2 solid-state 

to PLC 


a and c 

24 V 

kg 

XPS TSA5142P 0.250 

1 

XPS TSAppppP 

a 115 V XPS TSA3442P 0.360 

a 230 V XPS TSA3742P 0.360 

560077 


1 pulse type 2 N/C + 

for applications with 

2 solid-state 

safety switchover contact 

to PLC 

a and c 

24 V 

XPS TSW5142P 0.250 

XPS TSWppppP 

a 115 V XPS TSW3442P 0.360 

a 230 V XPS TSW3742P 0.360 

1/111

Connection, 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS TSA 


1 

XPS TSA 

Delayed unlocking of a guard application 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 (+) L1 (+) 

F1 

KM1 K3 

FM2 

Guard closed 

FM1 

KM1 

A1 Y1 

Y2 17 25 35 

XPS TSA Logic 

22 21 

S1 

FM2 

96 95 

98 97 

T 

+ 

1 2 

K1 

K2 

52 51 

Y1 

PE 

PE 

K1/K2 

F OK 

S2 

22 21 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

A2 PE Y53 Y54 Y64 18 26 36 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

M 

3 

To PLC 

KM1 S3 

N ( ) N ( ) 

14 13 

S4 

H1 

14 13 

KM1 

Y1 

Connection scheme 

Functional diagram of XPS TSA module 

L1 (+) L1 (+) 

(1) 

F1 

14 13 

KM1 

ESC 

A1 Y1 

Y2 17 25 35 

XPS TSA 

T 

Logic 

+ 

1 2 

K1 

K2 

Input A1-A2 

Input Y1-Y2 

Output 17-18 

N/O 

Output 25-26 

N/C 

Output 35-36 

N/C 

Supply 

voltage 

activated 

te 

Supply 

voltage 

deactivated 

Supply 

voltage 

activated 

Supply 

voltage 

deactivated 

Supply 

voltage 

deactivated 

te 

K1/K2 

F OK 

A2 PE Y53 Y54 Y64 18 26 36 

Signalling 

output 

Y53-Y54 

Signalling 

output 

Y53-Y64 

tv = 1...31 s 

tv = 1...31 s 

tv 

To PLC 

N ( ) N ( ) 

(2) 

Key 

0 

No starting 

Y1-Y2 open 

1 

No starting 

te < tv 

(1) Signal to be delayed. 

(2) Volt-free relay outputs with on-delay. 


te :power-uptime 

tv :delaytime 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 A1-A2 supply voltage (fuse status) 


3 Feedback loop state Y1-Y2 

4 Time function active 

1/112

Connection, 



1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS TSW 


XPS TSW 

Guard unlocking application using zero speed detection 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 (+) L1 (+) 

FM2 

Guard closed 

1 

FM1 

4 

1 

3 

2 

4 

5 

6 

22 21 

S1 

52 51 

Y1 

S4 

14 13 

FM2 

96 95 

98 97 

S2 

22 21 

KM1 

S3 

14 13 

14 13 

S4 

KM1 

A1 Y1 

Y2 17 25 35 

XPS TSW 

F0 

A1 Z1 Z2 Z3 

13 

21 

Y33/Y43 

T 

+ 

1 2 

K1 

PE 

PE 

XPS VN 

A1/A2 

K1/K2 

F OK 

K2 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

A2 14 22 Y34 

Y44 

A2 PE Y53 Y54 Y64 18 26 36 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

Y1 

3 

M 

KM1 

To PLC 

Connection scheme 

L1 (+) L1 (+) 

(1) 

F1 

14 13 

KM1 

ESC 

A1 Y1 

Y2 17 25 35 

XPS TSW 

T 

Logic 

1 2 

K1 

Functional diagram of XPS TSW module 

Supply 

voltage 

deactivated 

Supply 

voltage 

activated 

Input A1-A2 

Input Y1-Y2 

Output 17-18 

N/O 

Output 25-26 

N/C 

Supply 

voltage 

deactivated 

Supply 

voltage 

activated 

K2 

Output 35-36 

N/C 

K1/K2 

F OK 

A2 PE Y53 Y54 Y64 18 26 36 

Signalling 

output 

Y53-Y54 

Signalling 

output 

Y53-Y64 

tw 

te 

To PLC 

(2) 

Key 

0 

1 

No starting 

Y1-Y2 open 

tw 

(1) Control signal. 

(2) Volt-free relay outputs with pulse on energisation. 


Key to LEDs: see page 1/112 

te :power-uptime 

tw : pulse time 

1/113




Preventa safety modules types XPS DMB, 

XPS DME 

For coded magnetic switch monitoring 

1 


XPS DMB and XPS DME safety modules are designed for monitoring of coded 

magnetic safety switches. They are provided with two safety outputs and two 

solid-state outputs for messages to the process PLC. Conforming to category 4 of 

EN 954-1, XPS DMB modules are able to monitor two independent sensors; 

XPS DME modules can monitor up to six independent sensors. 

To monitor a larger number of sensors using these safety modules, the sensors can 

be connected in series or in parallel, while meeting the requirements of category 3 of 

EN 954-1. 

XPS DMpppppP safety modules have removable terminal blocks, which facilitate 

machine maintenance operations. 

To aid diagnosis, the modules have front panel LEDs which provide information on 

the monitoring circuit status. 


Module type XPS DMB1132 XPS DME1132 XPS DMB1132P XPS DME1132P 



control systems (conforming to EN 954-1) 

Supply (Ue) 



Voltage limits c 24 V -20…+20% 

Consumption W

References 1 



Preventa safety modules types XPS DMB, 

XPS DME 


580056 

References 

Description 

Safety module for 

2 coded magnetic 

switch monitoring 

Type of 

terminal 

block 

connection 

Integrated 

in module 

Number 

of safety 

circuits 

Solid-stat 

eoutputs 

to PLC 


V 

kg 

2N/O 2 c 24 XPS DMB1132 0.250 

1 

Safety module for 



Integrated 

in module 

2N/O 2 c 24 XPS DME1132 0.300 

XPS DMB1132p 

580057 

afety module for 



Separate, 

can be 

removed 

from 

module 

2N/O 2 c 24 XPS DMB1132P 0.250 

XPS DME1132 

afety module for 



Separate, 

can be 

removed 

from 

module 

2N/O 2 c 24 XPS DME1132P 0.300 

1/115

Connections 1 



Preventa safety modules type XPS DMB 


1 

XPS DMB 

Category 4 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact, N/C staggered (example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + 

N/O contacts, see page 2/58) 

+ 24 V 

F1 

Guard 1 closed 

S1 

XCS DM 

Start 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

S3 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

A1 S11 S12 S13 

Y1 Y2 13 

XPS DMB 

23 

Supply A1/A2 

K1 

Fault 

K1/K2 

Logic 

Fault 

K1/K2 

K2 

A2 S21 S22 S23 

Y34 Y44 14 

24 

S2 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

0 V 



2 solid-state outputs 



Category 3 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 3 switches with 2-pole N/C + N/O contacts, N/C staggered. 

S1.1 XCS DM 

S1.2 XCS DM 

S1.3 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

S11 S12 S13 

S21 S22 S23 

Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23. 

Input not used: Terminals S21-S23 shunted 

1/116

Connections 1 



Preventa safety modules type XPS DME 


XPS DME 

Category 4 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact, N/C staggered 

+ 24 V F1 

Guard1closed 

S1 XCS DM S3 XCS DM S5 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 


BK WH 

BU BN+ 


BK WH 

BU BN+ 

Start 

S7 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

1 

A1 S11 S12 S13 S31 S32 S33 S51 S52 S53 Y1 Y2 13 

Fault 

XPS DME 

23 

Supply A1/A2 

S13 

S33 

S53 

K1 

Fault 

K1/K2 

Logic 

S12 

S23 

S32 

S43 

S52 

S63 

K1/K2 

K2 

S22 

S42 

S62 

A2 S21 S22 S23 S41 S42 S43 S61 S62 S63 Y34 Y44 14 

24 

S2 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

S4 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

S6 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

0 V 





Category 3 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 3 switches with 2-pole N/C + N/O contacts, N/C staggered. 

S1.1 XCS DM 

S1.2 XCS DM 

S1.3 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

S11 S12 S13 

S21 S22 S23 

Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23, or S31, S32, S33 or S41, S42, S43 or S51, S52, S53 or S61, S62, S63. 

Input not used: Terminals Sp1-Sp3 (S21-S23, S31-S33, S41-S43, S51-S53, S61-S63) shunted 

1/117

Functional diagram 1 



Preventa safety modules type XPS DMB 


1 

Functional diagram of XPS DMB module 

Magnetic switch 1 

(S11-S12) 


Magnetic 

switch 1 

activated 

Magnetic 

Magnetic Magnetic 

switch 2 

switch 2 switch 2 

activated Start opens activated Fault 


(S11-S13) 


(S21-S22) 


(S21-S23) 

Return/start loop 

(Y1-Y2) 


(fault) 


(K1/K2) 

Output 13-14/23-24 

(N/O) 

< 0,5 s < 0,5 s 

Key 

0 

1 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 




1/118

Functional diagram 1 



Preventa safety modules type XPS DME 


Functional diagram of XPS DME module 


(S11-S12) 


Magnetic 

switch 1 

activated 

Magnetic 

Magnetic Magnetic 

switch 2 

switch 2 switch 2 

activated Start opens activated Fault 

1 


(S11-S13) 


(S21-S22) 


(S21-S23) 

Return/start loop 

(Y1-Y2) 


(fault) 


(K1/K2) 

Output 13-14/23-24 

(N/O) 

< 0,5 s < 0,5 s 

Key 

0 

1 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

5 4 8 9 

6 7 1011 

12 

13 

14 

15 




4 Magnetic switch 1 activated 

5 Magnetic switch 1 deactivated 











: 

1/119

Operating principle 1 



Preventa safety modules type XPS LM 

For the “muting” function of type 4 safety light curtains 

1 


XPS LM safety modules are used with type 4 light curtains conforming to EN 61496-1 

to provide a system inhibiting the “muting” light protection. This function enables an 

automatic passage of parts or loaded pallets without interrupting the transportation 

movement in the protected zone by the electro-sensitive protection system (ESPE). 

In addition to the electro-sensitive protection and XPS LM safety modules, the 

system consists of 2 to 4 inhibition sensors, an indicator light and a key switch to 

reset the system to the initial state in the event of a sequence error. 

When the system is switched on, by the start function and the light protection not 

interrupted, the main circuit is closed by the safety outputs of XPS LM modules (relay 

safety outputs for XPS LMR modules; solid-state safety outputs for XPS LMS 

modules). In addition to safety outputs, the modules have signalling outputs for 

sending system status information to the PLC. Five front panel LED indicators 

provide information concerning the safety circuit status. 

An interruption of the protection field monitored by the electro-sensitive protection 

system causes the instantaneous opening of the safety outputs; the process PLC 

receives a stop signal and the front panel LED display indicates the change of state 

of the safety circuits. The “open” state is maintained until the module is restarted 

using the start button. 

The “muting” function cannot be activated by supplying the inhibition sensors unless 

the safety outputs have been switched on beforehand. To trigger the “muting” 

function, the inhibition sensors must be activated within the 3 second time interval. 

During the activated “muting” phase, materials can be transported through the 

protection field without deactivating the safety outputs. In the event of intrusion in the 

hazardous zone, a person cannot activate the inhibition sensors in the same way and 

stop the system. 

When the “muting” operation is in process, a “muting” status indicator light is 

controlled by the XPS LM module. A fault of the indicator light (short-circuit, opencircuit) 

will be recognised straight away, and will deactivate the “muting” function. 

The indicator light only comes on when a “muting” signal is generated and indicates 

the inhibition of the light curtain . 

“Muting” indication 

Direction 

ESPE (Light curtain) 

Hazardous 

zone 

m 

MS1 

MS4 

Materials 

trolley 

MS2 

MS3 

Materials 

trolley 

ESPE: electro-sensitive protection equipment (light curtain). 

MS1, MS2, MS3, MS4: “muting” sensors. 

m: trolley length. 

dM = distance between MS1, MS2 and MS2, MB4. 

“Muting” function precautions 

b The “muting” sensors must either be thru-beam type XU2 M18PP340, polarised 

reflex type XU9 M18PP340 or mechanical limit switches with contacts. 

b dM ≤ m to obtain continuous validation of the “muting” function. 

b Avoid the intrusion of persons during the “muting” phase. This phase is indicated 

by the indicator light connected to the “muting” indicator output of the XPS CM 

module. 

b A materials trolley must provide the “muting” signal before entering the protection 

field and must cease it once it has cleared all the sensors of the protection field on 

exiting. 

dM 

1/120







Module type XPS LMS1150 XPS LMR1152 

Products designed for max. Conforming to EN 954-1 


use in safety related parts of 


Ambient air temperature Operation °C -10…+55 


1 



Terminals IP 20 

Enclosure IP 40 

Supply Voltage V c 24 


-10…+10% 

Maximum consumption W

References 





1 

580033 


Description 


for the “muting” 

function 

Type of 

terminal 

block 

connection 

Number 

of 

safety 

circuits 

Separate, 3solidstate 

can be 

removed 

from module 

Additional 

outputs 


V 

kg 

– c 24 XPS LMS1150 0.450 

XPS LMS1150 

580034 

3 N/O 2 solid-state c 24 XPS LMR1152 0.550 

XPS LMR1152 

Functional diagram of XPS LMS/LMR modules with “muting” function 

ML 

ML 

ML 

ML 

ML 

MS1 

MS4 

MS1 

MS4 

MS1 

MS4 

MS1 

MS4 

MS1 

MS4 

MS2 

MS3 

MS2 

MS3 

MS2 

MS3 

MS2 

MS3 

MS2 

MS3 

t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 

MS1 

MS2 

MS3 

MS4 

ML 

Muting 

Key 

0 

1 

< 3 s 

(1) 

(1) 

< 0,25 s 

< 3 s 

(1) The two “muting” sensors must be simultaneously active. 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

4 

3 5 

1 Supply voltage 

2 Channel 1 

3 Error 

4 Channel 2 

5 Restarting 

Indicator lights 2, 3 and 4 flash in the event of an error (error type signalling) 

1/122

Connections 1 





XPS LMS 

+ 24 V 

ESPE 

1 

Transmitter 

Receiver 

Reset 

Start 

(1) 

H1 

Muting 

VCC 

GND 

VCC 

GND 

OUT 1 

OUT 2 

A1 A1 EST EST ESS ESS 

53 

63 

BWS1N BWSE 

BWS2N 

BWS2P BWS1P A2 

24 V 

XPS LMS 

MS1 

MS1P MS1N MS1 MS2 MS2P MS2N MS2 MS3 MS3P MS3N MS3 MS4 MS4P MS4N MS4 ERK ERK 34 14 33 13 54 24 A2 

K1 

(2) 

PNP 

PNP 

PNP 

PNP 

K2 

K2 

K1 

0 V 

Muting sensors 

XPS LMR 

+ 24 V 

ESPE 

To PLC 

Reset 

Start 

(1) 

H1 

Muting 

VCC 

GND 

VCC 

GND 

OUT 1 

OUT 2 

A1 A1 EST EST ESS ESS 

53 

63 

BWS1N BWSE 

BWS2N 

BWS2P BWS1P A2 

13 33 23 0P 01 02 

XPS LMR 

MS1 

MS1P MS1N MS1 MS2 MS2P MS2N MS2 MS3 MS3P MS3N MS3 MS4 MS4P MS4N MS4 ERK ERK 64 14 34 24 

A2 

K1 

PNP 

PNP 

PNP 

PNP 

K2 

K2 

K1 

0 V 

Muting sensors 

(1) Key switch. 

(2) Use separate conductors. 

1/123






1 

Wiring of “muting” sensors 

“Muting” sensors with PNP output “Muting” sensors with NPN output “Muting” sensors with volt-free contacts 

VCC GND PNP 

VCC GND NPN 

MS1 

XPS LMS/LMR 

MS1N MS1P MS1 

MS1 

XPS LMS/LMR 

MS1N MS1P MS1 

MS1 MS1N MS1P MS1 

XPS LMS/LMR 

ESPE wiring 

ESPE receiver with two PNP solid-state outputs 

ESPE receiver with two relay outputs 

VCC 

GND 

PNP 

PNP 

ESPE 

VCC 

GND 

ESPE 

GND 

GND 

BWSE 

BWSE 

BWS1P BWS1N BWS2P BWS2N 

BWSE 

BWSE 

BWS1P BWS1N BWS2P BWS2N 

XPS LMS/LMR 

XPS LMS/LMR 

Connection of XPS LMS modules with the ESPE transmitter 

Direct connection Connection via an additional relay Connection via an additional relay to the test input 

VCC 

GND 

ESPE 

VCC 

GND 

ESPE 

VCC 

GND 

GND 

Test 

ESPE 

GND 

GND 

A1 63 

23 63 

23 63 

XPS LMS 

XPS LMS 

XPS LMS 

1/124






Connection of XPS LMR modules with the ESPE transmitter 

Direct connection Connection via an additional relay Connection to light curtain test input (recommended 

application) 

1 

VCC 

GND 

ESPE 

VCC 

GND 

ESPE 

VCC 

GND 

Test 

ESPE 

GND 

GND 

GND 

GND 

64 63 

64 63 

64 63 

XPS LMR 

XPS LMR 

XPS LMR 

1/125


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS VN 

For zero speed detection 

1 


XPS VN zero speed detection modules are used to detect the stop condition of electric motors. Their most common 

applications include: providing the unlock signal for electrically interlocked sliding or removable machine guards, 

controlling rotation direction signals for reversing motors and engaging locking brakes after a motor has come to a 

standstill. 

As electric motors run down, a remanent voltage is produced in the windings of the motor due to residual magnetism. 

This voltage is proportional to the speed of the motor and, therefore, decreases as the motor comes to a standstill. 

This remanent voltage is measured in a redundant manner so as to detect the stop condition of the motor. The cabling 

between the motor windings and the inputs of the XPS VN module is also monitored to prevent a cabling breakage or 

fault being seen as a stopped motor. 

A transformer should not be used to connect the motor to terminals Z1, Z2 and Z3 since there is no monitoring of the 

connection with the motor winding via the resistor monitoring. 

XPS VN safety modules are suitable for detecting the stop condition of all types of a.c. or d.c. motor driven machines 

which, when the motor runs down, produce a remanent voltage in the windings due to residual magnetism. These 

machines can be controlled by electronic devices, such as variable speed drives or d.c. injection brakes. 

The input filters for standard XPS VN modules are designed for a frequency of up to 50 Hz. 

For motors operating at a frequency higher than 50 Hz, which therefore produce a high-frequency remanent voltage, 

special modules XPS VNppppHS should be used. 

XPS VN safety modules have two potentiometers mounted on the front face of the module which allow independent 

adjustment of the switching threshold for each input circuit. This allows adjustment for different types of motors and 

application requirements. 

To assist diagnostics, XPS VN modules incorporate 4 LED indicators and 2 solid-state outputs to provide information 

on the status of the zero speed detection circuit. 

1/126

Characteristics, 

references 

0 


1 




Type 

XPS VN 

1 

Product designed for use in safety Category 3 

related parts of control systems 

(conforming to EN 954-1) 

Supply 

- voltage V c 24, a115, a 230 


- 15…+ 15 % (a115 V) 

- 15…+ 10 % (a 230 V) 

- frequency Hz 50/60 (115 V, 230 V) 

Consumption W 60Hz XPS VN1142HS 0.500 

detection 

a 115 V ≤ 60 Hz XPS VN3442 0.600 

>60Hz XPS VN3442HS 0.600 

XPS VN 

a 230 V ≤ 60 Hz XPS VN3742 0.600 

>60Hz XPS VN3742HS 0.600 

1/127

Connections 

0 


1 



1 

XPS VN 

Wiring scheme 

L (+) 

F2 

F1 

3-phase motor 

F1 

KM1 

F1 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

+ 24 V 

FM1 

M1 

3 

F1 

F1 

A1 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

13 

21 

Y33/Y43 

F1 

XPS VN 

U 

V 

W 

115 V 

230 V 

Logic 1 

K1 

A1/A2 

Zero 

speed 

M 

3 

A1 Z1 Z2 Z3 13 21 

XPS VN 

F1 = 2 A 

Logic 2 

K2 

A2 

14 22 Y34 Y44 

(1) (2) 

N (–) 

To PLC 

(1) Disengagement in event of stop 

(2) Motor running 

F1 = 2 A 

d.c. motor 

+ – 

3-phase motor with variable speed drive 

KM1 

F1 

F1 

KM1 

Variable speed 

drive 

F1 

F1 

A 

B 

F1 

M 

1 

A1 Z1 Z2 Z3 13 21 

XPS VN 

U 

V 

M 

3 

W 

A1 Z1 Z2 Z3 13 21 

XPS VN 

F1 = 2 AF1 = 2 A 

3-phase motor with star delta starting 

KM2 KM1 

KM3 

KM1:Motorstarcontactor 

KM2: Motor line contactor 

KM3: Motor delta contactor 

FM2 

F1 

F1 

F1 

W1 

PE 

W2 

V1 

U1 

M 

3 

U2 

V2 

A1 Z1 Z2 Z3 

13 21 

XPS VN 

F1 = 2 A 

The star contactor (KM1) must be closed after the motor is de-energised, in order to allow detection of zero speed. 

1/128




1 



XPS VN 

Functional diagram for module XPS VN 

Supply A1-A2 

Input - 1 channel Z1-Z2 

Supply 

voltage 

Motor 

start 

Motor 

stop 

instruction 

Error in channel 1 

(e.g. cable break) 

Detection 

Repair 

of motor 

standstill 

Reset 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 

Input - 2 channels Z3-Z2 



Solid-state output Y33-Y34 

(A1/A2) 


(zero speed) 


2 Stop detected by channel 1 

3 Stop detected by channel 2 

4 Stop detected by both channels within time window 

1 

Key 0 

The voltages at terminals Z1, Z2 and Z3 are indicated solely for the purposes of schematic diagram representation. 

Module XPS VN associated with a star-delta motor starter and guard switch XCS E 

L1 

230 V 

L2 

L3 

FM2 

FM1 F2 F3 

Y1 

T1 

S0 

S2 

F4 

S3 

Stop 

KM2 KM1 

KM3 

S1 

KM2 

S4 

Start 

A1 

13 

21 

Y33/Y43 

XPS VN 

A1/A2 

Zero 

speed 

FM2 

F1 

PE 

2 

1 

4 

3 

6 

5 

A2 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

14 

22 Y34 Y44 

KM1 

W1 

V1 

U1 

PE 

M 

3 

W2 

U2 

V2 

KM1 

Y1 

KM2 

KM1 

KM3 

KM2 

KM2 

KM3 

KM1 

N 

M1 

1/129

Connections 0 


1 



1 

XPS VN 

Association of modules XPS VN and XPS AK 

L 

F4 

Guard closed 

+ 24 V 

F5 

L1 

L2 

S1 

S4 

Stop 

S5 

Motor 

starter 

L3 

Y1 

Inputs 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

+24 V 

F2 

K1 

Guard 

unlocking 

S2 

Outputs 

F3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

PLC 

0 V 

0 V 0 V 

K2 

A1 B1 

S21 S22 

S11 

S12 S31 S32 13 23 33 41 

Y31 

F3 

1 

3 

5 

XPS AK 

K1/K2 

A1/A2 

fuse 

Input 

A 

Input 

B 

2 

4 

6 

F1 

F1 

F1 

K1 

K2 

A2 B2 

S13 

S14 

S33 

S34 

K1 

K2 

S3 

Validation 

14 24 34 42 

K1 

K3 

Y32 

Y54 

Y64 

Y74 

K3 

PE 

PE 

Z1 

Z2 Z3 A1 13 

21 

XPS VN 

A1/A2 

Y33/Y43 

Zero 

speed 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

M 

3 

A2 

14 

22 Y34 Y44 

M1 

Y1 

K3 

K1 

K2 

N 

S1 + Y1: Guard switch with 

solenoid locking on de-energisation, 

type XCS E or XCS L 

Pulse on 

de-energisation 

relay XPS TSW 

1/130

Connections 0 


1 



XPS VN 

Association of modules XPS VN and XPS FB 

L 

F4 

Guard closed 

+ 24 V 

F5 

1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

S0 

Emergency 

stop 

S1 

S2 

Inputs 

S4 

Stop 

S5 

Motor 

starter 

1 2 3 4 5 6 A1(+) 

F2 

S6 

Y1 

Outputs 

1 

2 

3 

4 

PLC 

A2 (-) 

K1 

Guard 

unlocking 

F3 

0 V 0 V 

K2 

F3 

1 

3 

5 

A1 S11 S13 S12 Y3 Y4 Y5 S21 S23 S22 

13 23 33 41 Y53 Y63 

A1/A2 

fuse K1/K2 

XPS FB 

2 

4 

6 

F1 

F1 

F1 

K1 

K2 

A2 PE Y1 Y2 S43 S44 S33 S34 

K1 K3 

S7 

S3 

K2 Simulation Validation 

14 

24 34 42 

Y54 

Y64 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

A1 

13 

21 

Y33/Y43 

PE 

PE 

XPS VN 

A1/A2 

Zero 

speed 

U 

V 

W 

PE 

M 

3 

M1 

A2 

Y1 

14 

22 Y34 Y44 

K3 K1 

K1 K2 K3 

N 

S1 + Y1: Guard switch with 

solenoid locking on de-energisation, 

type XCS E or XCS L 

Pulse on 

de-energisation 

relay XPS TSW 

1/131



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS DA 


1 


Door 

unlocking 

zone 

Landing indicator 

(stop reference point) 

Car doors 

Car 

+ 0,2 m 

– 0,2 m 


Landing 

doors 

Landing 

When the car is parked at a landing, with the doors open, some lifts automatically correct their level (isolevelling) in relation 

to the landing in order to compensate for any differences generated by modification of the load in the car. 

During this operation, European standard EN-81 recommends that the presence of the car be checked within an area of 

±0.2 mm around the landing (door unlocking zone), by means of a safety circuit which will cause the car to stop if it moves 

out of the specified zone. 

The use of an XPS DA safety module which checks the presence of the car in the specified zone at two points meets this 

requirement. 

The module is fitted with two safety outputs and two solid-state outputs for signalling functions. Four LEDs on the front 

face of the module provide visual indication of the state of the safety circuit. 

The position of the car in relation to the landing is detected by two limit switches in the lift shaft. It is also possible to use 

non-contact sensors (magnetic sensors with reed contact). 

When the car reaches the preset position and when it is within the permissible tolerances in relation to the landing, the 

two safety circuits in safety module XPS DA close and allow isolevelling of the car with the doors open. Any change in 

one of the input signals (car outside the specified zone) or detection of a fault (break in the wiring, short-circuit...) causes 

immediate opening of the safety outputs in module XPS DA and therefore stopping of the car. 

Type 

XPS DA 





Supply 

- voltage V a and c 24, a115, a 230 

- voltage limits a -20…+10%(24V),c - 20...+ 20 % (24 V), a - 15…+ 15 % (115 V), a - 15…+ 10 % (230 V) 


Maximum consumption 

-24V VA

References, 

connections, 

0 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS DA 


References 

Description 

Number of 

safety 

circuits 

Solid-state 

outputs for 

signalling 

to PLC 


kg 

1 

Safety modules 2 2 a and c 24 V XPS DA5142 0.350 

for lift control 

a 115 V XPS DA3442 0.450 

XPS DA 

a 230 V XPS DA3742 0.450 

Connections 

XPS DA 

Module XPS DA associated with a lift control system 

L1 (+) 

F1 

S1 (1) 

Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 

Lift control system 

S2 (2) 

S2 (2) 

Outputs 

1 

2 

3 

S3 (3) 

+ 24 V 

A1 

A2 

S11 

B1 S21 S22 S12 S34 

13 

XPS DA 

PE Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 

14 

23 

A1/A2 

(4) 

Fuse 

Y33/Y43 

K1/K2 

24 Y34 Y44 

(4) (5) 

(1) Limit switch S1 (car position) 

(2) Limit switch S2 (car position) 

(3) Enable instruction given by the lift control system 

(4) Operating state of internal electronic fuse 

(5) Output sates (only permissible for functions not relating 

to safety) 

(6) Feedback loop 

(7) Without Start signal monitoring (Y3-Y4 linked) 

N (-) 

(6) 

(7) 

Link active 

Functional diagram for module XPS DA 

Key to LEDs 

Supply A1-A2 

First limit switch S1 

Second limit switch S2 

Start signal S3 (1) 

Start signal S3 (2) 

Feedback loop Y1-Y2 

Safety output 13-14 (N/O) 

Safety output 23-24 (N/O) 

Solid-state output Y33/43-Y44 (K1/K2) 

Solid-state output Y33/43-Y34 (fuse) 

Supply First Second Start 

voltage limit limit signal 

switch switch 

Car outside 

door unlocking 

zone 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 Supply voltage A1-A2. Fuse state 



4 K1/K2 state (N/O safety outputs closed) 

Key 0 

1 

(1) With start signal monitoring Y3-Y4 open. 

(2) Without start signal monitoring Y3-Y4 linked. 

1/133



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS NS 

For amplifier relay applications 

1 


The XPS NS module is designed for reliable detection and amplification of signals generated by : 

- c 24 V proximity sensors (2-wire, 3-wire NPN or 3-wire PNP types), 

- magnetic sensors, 

- limit switches. 

The amplifier generates output signals which can be used in mechanically linked contact relays in safety circuits. 

Applications include : solenoid valve proximity sensors for eccentric press clutch/brake functions, magnetic sensors or 

limit switches mounted on protective guards, etc. 

By applying a nominal voltage to terminals A1/A2, two separate c 24 V supplies are generated, terminals A+ = (+) / 

A– = (–) and terminals B+ = (+) / B– = (–), the latter being interconnected such that an internal short-circuit is generated 

if the proximity sensors are improperly connected. In turn, the short-circuits, are displayed by the corresponding LED 

“POWER SUPPLY 1” or “POWER SUPPLY 2”. 

Two other LEDs indicate the status of their corresponding proximity sensor. 

Each output relay (linked contacts) contains a N/O volt-free contact and a N/C volt-free contact. A monitoring circuit 

connected to terminals 51-52 comprises 2 N/C contacts in series for each of the two output relays. Possible sensor or 

limit switch connections and their combinations are shown in the electrical connections diagram on page 1/135. 

Caution : If S1 and S2 are 2 proximity sensors placed close to each other, 2 different types of sensor should be used 

to avoid interference. 

For example : 

S1 : 2-wire, 

S2 : 3-wire NPN. 


Type 




XPS NS 

Can be applied in category 4 safety related parts of control systems 

Supply 

- voltage V a 115, a 230 

- voltage limits - 15…+ 15 % (115 V), - 15…+ 10 % (230 V) 


Consumption VA

References, 

connections, 


0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS NS 

For amplifier relay applications 

References 

Description Display Supply Reference Weight 

kg 

Safety modules 4LEDs a 115 V XPS NS3440 0.800 

for amplifier relay 

applications 

1 

a 230 V XPS NS3740 0.800 

Connections 

XPS NS 

Association of the XPS NS modules and sensors 

3-wire c 24 V 

Type PNP 

Type NPN 

2-wire c 24 V 

+ – 

Switching 

Limit switch 

+ – 

Switching 

S1 proximity sensor outputs 

13 

24 V 

14 21 22 51 

+ 

A+ 

+ A – 

+ A – + A + A 

L1 F1 

A1 

0 V 

– 

K1+ 

K1 

K1– 

A– 

S1 

XPS NS 

PE 

N 

A2 

24 V 

+ 

B+ 

K2+ 

K2 

K2– 

S2 

0 V 

– 

43 44 31 32 52 

S2 proximity sensor outputs 

B– 

– A + 

– A + A+ A+ 

Functional diagram of module XPS NS 

S1/S2 

deactivated 

S1 

activated 

S1/S2 

deactivated 

S1/S2 

activated 

S1/ S2 

deactivated 

Prox. sens. S1 (N/O) 

Prox. sens. S2 (N/O) 






Key 0 

1 

1/135


0 



1 

Preventa safety module type XPS PVT 

For dynamic valve monitoring on linear presses 

1 


The XPS PVT safety module is a dedicated module for monitoring hydraulic safety system valves, which control the 

movements of dangerous machinery. 

The operating principle of this module is explained in the circuit diagram of a hydraulic safety system for linear presses 

(see below). 

This hydraulic safety system features a 3-position piston which controls the up and down stroke of the operating cylinder. 

The circuit is equipped with a safety valve, to complete the redundant system. This circuit must be activated to enable the 

up and down stroke of the cylinder. 

If either of the two pistons becomes defective (for example, due to a broken spring or to oil contamination), and the valve 

piston shifts from its normal position toward the open position, the XPS PVT module will detect it and prevent 

resumption of the piston stroke. 

Proximity sensors integrated into the valve to detect the valve positions and connected to the XPS PVT module must 

be damped when the valve coils are in the de-energized state (position zero). 

The sensor circuits of the XPS PVT module are designed to allow connection of NPN and PNP proximity sensors or 

sensing components. Either 2-wire or 3-wire types can be used. 

The diagram on page 1/138 shows how to connect proximity sensors. 

Hydraulic safety system circuit operating on a linear press. 

Monitoring of valves in position 0. 

S3 

A B 

Closing + 

Opening 

(2) Y3 

P 

S1 

S2 

Pressure 

relief valve 

Closing 

Y1 

(1) 

A 

P 

B 

T 

Opening 

Y2 

Pump 

Pressure 

relief 

valve 

(1) 3-position hydraulic valve. 

(2) 2-position hydraulic valve. 

1/136


reference 

0 


1 




Type 

XPS PVT 

1 





Supply 



-10…+10% 

Consumption W

Connections 

0 


1 



1 

XPS PVT 

Electrical connection diagram for module XPS PVT 

L1 (+) 

F1 

1F1 

1F2 

Valve Y1 Valve Y2 Valve Y3 

S1 

+ 

S2 

+ 

S3 

+ 

- 

- 

- 

13 23 31 

XPS BC 

(1) 

14 24 Y1 Y2 32 

Close 

Open 

Close + open 

1K2 

1K4 

1K1 

1K4 

1K1 

1K3 

1K1 

1K3 

1K2 

1K3 

1K2 

1K4 

1K2 

1K4 

A1 1 3 5 B1 C1 13 21 

XPS PVT 

33 

K1 

K2 

K3 

Logic 

A2 2 4 

6 

16 14 22 34 36 

1K3 

PMB 

PMH 

Y1 

Y2 

Y3 

0 V 

N (-) 

1K1 

1K2 


Potentially hazardous 

closing movement 

(tripping relay) 

1K3 

1K4 

Open Auxiliary Close Open 

contactor 

Close 

+ 

open 

(1) Two-hand control or safety light curtain outputs 

1/138


0 


1 



XPS PVT 

Functional diagram of module XPS PVT 

Supply 

ON 

Commence 

close 

command 

Test 

deactivated 

Slide at bottom 

dead centre 

Commence 

open command 

Test 

deactivated 

Slide at top 

dead centre 

1 

Supply A1-A2 

Commence closing, input B1 

Commence opening, input C1 

Closing valve sensor, input 1-2 

Opening valve sensor, input 3-4 

Safety valve sensor, closing + 

opening, input 5-6 

Feedback loop output, 21-22 (N/C) 

Close test, 13-16 (N/O) 

Enable closing, 13-14 (N/O) 

Open test, 33-36 (N/O) 

Enable opening, 33-34 (N/O) 

Key 0 

1 

t11 

100 ms min. 

t2 

100 ms min. 

Key to LEDs 

1 2 3 4 

5 6 7 8 

1 Close instruction 

2 Test closure 

3 Open instruction 

4 Test opening 

5 Opening valve (Y2) in position 0 

6 Enable close 

7 Safety valve (Y3) activated 

8 Closing valve (Y1) in position 0 

1/139



0 


1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS PVK 

For dynamic monitoring of double-bodied solenoid valves 

1 



Safety module XPS PVK is specially designed for dynamic monitoring of the safety valves in eccentric presses, 

conforming to European standard EN 692. 

This standard establishes the specifications related to safety control systems for presses equipped with friction clutches. 

To meet the requirements of this standard, the clutch/brake control must be monitored dynamically. 

This function is provided by a double-bodied solenoid valve (safety valve for presses) which performs the functions of 

two valves mounted in one body. 

The position of the two valve pistons can be monitored by proximity sensors, mechanical limit switches or pressure 

switches. 

Module XPS PVK checks for the correct operation of the double-bodied safety valves at 3 points in the cycle. 

p Start at top dead centre: checks the rest position of the two valves. 

p Take-on point (transfer function): checks that the two valves are in the “activated” (energized) position. 

p Press stop trigger point: checks that the two valves return to the rest position. Return must be simultaneous for both 

valves within a defined time period. 

To set up an automatic disconnect of the XPS PVK module at the first machine stroke, a N/C auxiliary contact mounted 

on the main control contactor or on another contactor/relay, activated at the same time, can be wired to terminals 7 and 

8 in parallel with the RESET button. 

If a fault is detected during the cycle, the XPS PVK module will stop the slide stroke and will also inhibit the start of 

another cycle. 

Type 

XPS PVK 





Supply 

- voltage V c 24, a 115, a 230 


- 15…+ 15 % (a 115 V) 

- 15…+ 10 % (a 230 V) 


Consumption 

c 24 V W

References, 

connections 

0 


1 



References 

XPS PVK 


kg 

Safety modules 8LEDs c 24 V XPS PVK1184 0.700 

for dynamic 

monitoring of 

double-bodied 


a 115 V XPS PVK3484 0.900 

1 

a 230 V XPS PVK3784 0.900 

Connections 

XPS PVK 

Monitoring of a press safety valve by an XPS PVK module 

Safety noise damper 

Key to LEDs 

1 2 3 4 

Valve body 1 

Valve body 2 

Double-bodied 

safety valve 

Compressed 

air supply 

To clutch and 

brake 

Main contactor 

auxiliary contact 

Reset 

S3 

S1 

S2 

+ A + A 

A1 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 

XPS PVK 

Pressure switch 

for valve body 1 

Pressure switch 

for valve body 2 

Condition for execution of 

the transfer function 

13 21 

Outputs 

Feedback loop circuit relating 

to clutch control 

5 6 7 8 

1 c internal supply no. 1 

2 c internal supply no. 2 

3 Valve no. 1 blocked 

4 Valve no. 2 blocked 

5 Ready for monitoring 

6 Disconnect synchronised 

7 Reset 

8 Valves 1 and 2 energised 

1/141



0 


1 



1 

XPS PVK 

Functional diagram of the XPS PVK module 

Supply 

voltage 

Reset 

button 

activated 

Reset 

button 

deactivated 

Valve activated 

Cycle start 

Maintain function 

activated 

Maintain function 

deactivated 

Valve deactivated 

Valve 1 

sensor 

activated 

Valve 2 

sensor 

activated 

End of cycle 

top dead 

centre 

Supply A1-A2 

Safety valve 1 and 2 

Sensor valve body 1 

Sensor valve body 2 

Reset 7-8 

Solid-state output Y+ / Y34 




Transfer output 13-14 (N/O) 

Feedback loop 21-22 (N/C) 

Key 0 

1 

t 

approx. 100 ms 

Connection of XPS PVK module with 3-wire (or 2-wire) proximity sensors 

3-wire sensors 

2-wire sensors 



Reset 

Sensor 

valve 

body 1 

S1 

PNP 

+ - A 

Sensor 

valve 

body 2 

S2 

PNP 

+ - A 



Reset 

Sensor 

valve 

body 1 

S1 

PNP 

Sensor 

valve 

body 2 

S2 

PNP 

+ A + A 

S3 

S3 

A1 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 

XPS PVK 

13 21 

A1 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 

XPS PVK 

13 21 

A2 

14 22 

A2 

14 22 

1/142


0 


1 



XPS PVK 

Connection of an XPS PVK module with an eccentric press safety valve 

L1 (+) 

F1 

P 

B1 

2 

4 

To valve body 1 

1 

1 

PNP 

B1 

- 

+ 

Reset 

S1 

KM 

Main 

contactor 

auxiliary 

contact 

Condition for executing 


Part of clutch control 

feedback loop circuit 

A1 1 2 3 7 8 13 21 

c/a + 

(1) 

- 

24 V a 

c/a + 

XPS PVK 

- 

24 V a 

A2 

PE 

4 5 6 Y+ Y34 Y44 Y54 Y64 14 22 

Part of clutch control 

feedback loop circuit 

PNP 

B2 + 

- 

Supply 

1+2 

Valve 

1 

Valve 

2 

Synchronous 

disconnect 

Condition for executing 


N (-) 

P 

(2) (3) 

To valve body 2 

B2 

1 

4 

2 

To PLC 

(1) Internal power supply no. 1 

(2) Internal power supply no. 2 

(3) For a c 24 V version: integrated c/c adaptor 

1/143


0 



1 

Preventa safety modules type XPS OT 

For safety stop with automatic overtravel monitoring and 

control 

1 


Safety module XPS OT is used on eccentric presses to monitor overtravel and ensure that the press slide stops in 

a non-dangerous position, that is, top dead centre (TDC) during normal (non-emergency) operation. Use of this 

module, designed in accordance with standard EN 692 relating to mechanical press safety, makes it possible to create 

a redundant, self-monitoring control system. 

The two essential functions of this safety module are : 

p Trigger the end of cycle stop sequences slightly before top dead centre (at point A) so as to reach a standstill 

stop at TDC. After TDC, the permissible overtravel is approximately 10°. The safety module immediately detects any 

overtravel. Overtravel is indicative of braking device deterioration. In this case, jog mode must be used to move the slide 

back to TDC. The next cycle will be inhibited to allow maintenance to be performed on the braking device (cam 1). 

p Take over control monitoring during the dangerous part of the cycle (slide downstroke). Any stop instruction issued 

between TDC (0°) and point C (approximately 150° after TDC) causes an immediate stop of the press. This 

approximate value of 150° corresponds to the 8 mm tool closure dimension (safety point). When a stop 

instruction is issued after this point, the press completes the cycle and comes to a complete stop at TDC (cam 2). 

Control of the dangerous part of the cycle (generally the slide downstroke) is usually achieved from a two-hand control 

station associated with safety module (type XPS BC) monitoring this station to qualify as a Category 4 control system 

according to standard EN 954-1. 

Overtravel monitoring is performed on each cycle by safety module XPS OT. 

Press 

Control cams 

Permissible overtravel 

A 

N 300 

(usually slide upstroke) 

zone 

S 

TDC 

0 

10 

B 

N 150 

C 

Dangerous 

zone (usually 

slide downstroke) 

zone (usually 

Dangerous 

slide downstroke) 

approx. 10˚ S 

B1 

Cam 1 

Cam 2 

C2 


OTS 

LS 

UN 

LS 

A2 

A1 

zone 

approx. 

300˚ 

Safe zone 

Safe zone 

Top Dead 

Centre 

BDC 

approx. 

150˚ 

TDC Stop 

and overtravel 

monitoring 

(usually slide upstroke) 

Restart + Stop 

OTS 

UN 

Bottom Dead 

Centre 

Die 

8 mm max. 

S 

A 

B 

C 


Stop instruction trip point 

Point at which permissible overtravel is exceeded (a stop instruction 

issued after point B will lock up the press) 

Takeover point, beyond which the press will complete its cycle up 

to TDC 

TDC Top dead centre, actual stopping zone 

BDC Bottom dead centre 

Cam operation 

Cam 1 is associated with the OTS limit switch (LS), cam 2 with the UN limit switch (the limit switches must be located 

on different cams for safety reasons). 

The OTS limit switch is deactivated at TDC, at which point the UN limit switch is activated. 

Point A1 of cam 1 is located approximately 300° from TDC and, when reached, the press comes to a standstill: A1 is 

the press stop trigger point. 

Point B1, located approximately 10° after TDC, constitutes the end of cam 1: If B1 is exceeded during stopping, the 

overtravel is abnormally long, the press locks up and the next cycle is inhibited. 

Point A2 of cam 2 functions like point A1 on cam 1 (contact state of the UN limit switch reversed in relation to the 

contact state of the OTS limit switch). 

Point C2, located approximately 150° after TDC, corresponds to the 8 mm tool closing dimension. Stop instructions 

issued after C2 is reached are not executed until point A2 is reached. 

1/144


0 


1 



control 


Type 




XPS OT 


1 

Supply 

- voltage V a 115, a 230 

- voltage limits - 15…+ 15 % (115 V), - 15…+ 10 % (230 V) 


Consumption VA

References 

0 


1 



control 

1 

References 


kg 

XPS OT 

Safety modules 4LEDs a 115 V XPS OT3444 1.100 

for safety stop 

with automatic 

overtravel 

monitoring and 

control 

a 230 V XPS OT3744 1.100 

1/146

Connections, 


0 


1 



control 

XPS OT 

Connections 

L 

F1 Cam enclosure 

Maintained + 

TDC stop 

S1 

UN 

22 21 

TDC stop + 

overtravel 

OTS 

S2 

13 

14 

22 21 

Safety valve signals 

Dynamic valve 

monitoring 

+ 24 V 

1 

A1 3 4 5 6 Z1 Z2 25 11 

Z3 Z4 

Y13 

Y23 

Y33 

Y43 

- + 

XPS OT 

Start 

Muting 

A1/A2 

Fuse 

Start 

OTS 

UN 

Logic 

N 

A2 

PE 

(-) 7 8 9 10 

26 12 

13 14 

(Continuous 

only) 

Two-hand 

control station 

XY2 SB 

CONT. 

S3 

Start 

13 

14 

Feedback loop 

S4 

Y1 

K1 

K2 

Y2 

XPS BC 


(1) The 2 coils of the safety valve must be wired separately. 

K1 

23 

24 

K2 

S5 

Operating 

modes 

0=Stop 

1=Adjust 

2=Jog 

012 

Channel 1 Channel 2 Maintained 

K1 

K2 

H1 

Inputs 

PLC 

Outputs 

K1 

K2 

- PSV 

Y14 

Y24 

Y34 

Y44 

1 2 3 4 

1 2 3 4 

(1) 

K1 

K2 

Safety valve 

Functional diagram of module XPS OT 

Close signal 

input 9-10 

Limit switch 

OTS 5-6 

Limit switch 

UN 3-4 

Safety output 

11-12 

Safety output 

11-13 

Output 11-14 


Y13-Y14 


Y23-Y24 


Y33-Y34 


Y43-Y44 

Internal signal 

Z3-Z4 

Output 25-26 

Supply 

voltage 

TDC 

stop 

Start 

instruction 

Cycle 

start 

End of start 

instruction 

Dangerous 

movement 

Stop 

instruction 

Maintained 

Braking 

End of 

cycle 

TDC 

stop 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 Voltage present on terminals A1/A2 

2 Close instruction 

3 OTS limit switch activated 

4 UN limit switch activated 

Input Z1-Z2 

(XPS PVK 21-22) 

Input Z3-Z4 

(XPS PVK 13-14) 

Angle of rotation 

Key 0 

1 

t 

t = 300 ms max. or limited to Z1-Z2 

Permissible 

overtravel 

ca. 10° 

0° 10° 90° 150°180° 270° 300° 360° 

1 cycle 

1/147

Dimensions 0 


1 



1 

XPS BA 

XPS BC, XPS DA 

78 

78 

120 

22,5 

120 

45 

XPS AT, XPS ECM, XPS ECP, XPS FB, XPS NS, XPS VN 

78 

78 

78 

120 

90 

XPS ACpppp, XPSAFpppp, XPS AFLpppp, XPS DMBpppp, XPS VCpppp, 

XPS BFpppp 

XPS ACppppP, XPS AFpppPp, XPSAFLppppP, XPS DMBppppP, 

XPS VCppppP, XPS BFppppP 

99 

99 

114 22,5 

114 

22,5 

XPS AKpppp, XPSAVpppp, XPSCMpppp 

XPS DEMpppp 

XPS AKppppP, XPS AVppppP, XPS CMppppP, 

XPS TSApppP, XPS TSWppppP, XPS DEMpppp 

99 

99 

114 45 

114 45 

1/148

Dimensions (continued) 0 


1 



XPS ARpppppp 

XPS ARppppppP 

1 

99 

114 90 

114 90 

XPS PVT, XPS PVK 

Common side view XPS PVT XPS PVK 

73 

99 

118 

5 100 

152 

XPS LMS, XPS LMR 

84 

73 

118 

5 90 

XPS OT 

73 

118 

5 

200 

1/149

Selection guide 1 



AS-Interface safety solutions 

1 

Applications 

Safety monitors on AS-Interface 

"AS-Interface safety at work" 

Safety is incorporated into the AS-Interface system by adding a monitor and a safety interface 

connected together with other standard AS-Interface components to the yellow cable 

Functions 

Safety applications integrated on AS-Interface 

Emergency stop, limit switch and safety light curtain monitoring 

AS-Interface profile 7.F 

Addressing 

With configuration software ASISWIN 

Conforming to standards Product Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1, EN 1088 

EN 61496-1 (type 4), EN 1780 

EN 60947-6-3 



UL, CSA 

Number of circuits Safety 2“NO” 2x2 N/O 

Additional 1 solid-state output for signalling to PLC 2 solid-state outputs 


Supply c 24 V c 24 V 

Type 

ASI SAFEMONp 

Pages 1/154 

1/150

1 

1 

Safety interfaces on AS-Interface 

1 

Safety is incorporated into the AS-Interface system by adding a monitor and a safety interface connected together with other standard AS-Interface components 

to the yellow cable 

Emergency stop interfaces 

Interfaces for safety products 

Metal Plastic 1 M12 input 2 M12 inputs 1 M16 ISO input 

0.B.F.F 0.B.F.F 0.B.F.F 0.B.F.F 0.B.F.F 

Infrared with ASI-TERV2 

adjustment console + 

ASI-TERIR1 cable 













EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 61947-5-3, EN 574 

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418 

UL, CSA 

– – – – 

– – – – 

2LEDs 2LEDs 2LEDs 2LEDs 

On AS-Interface On AS-Interface On AS-Interface On AS-Interface 

ASI SSLBp ASI SSLCp ASI SSLLS 

1/158 

1/151


1 


AS-Interface safety monitors 

1 

To PLC 


AS-Interface, the recognised wiring system for sensors and actuators, has changed. 

In addition to standard process information, safety information can now be sent over 

the same cable. Capable of managing safety functions up to level 4 of the EN-954-1 

standard, the AS-Interface “Safety at work” system meets the needs of the most 

common safety applications such as for example: 

- Emergency stop monitoring with instantaneous break contacts (stop category 0), 

- Emergency stop monitoring with delayed break contacts (stop category 1), 

- monitoring of switches with and without interlocking, 

- monitoring of light curtains, etc. 


supply 

Standard 

interface 

Safety monitor 

Safety interface for 

Emergency stop button 


interface 

M12 connectors 

Options relative to the selected safety function such as, for example, start button 

monitoring may be parameterised for all pre-defined, certified functions. 

Safety is incorporated into the AS-Interface system by adding a monitor and safety 

interfaces connected together with other standard AS-Interface components to the 

yellow cable. 

Safety information is only exchanged between the monitor and the safety interfaces. 

This is transparent for the other standard AS-Interface components. Based on this 

principle, already installed AS-Interface systems can be updated with safety 

functions without having to replace the existing components (e.g. masters, input/ 

output interfaces, power supplies, etc.). Safety circuits are diagnosed readily and 

with no additional wiring by the standard AS-Interface master communicating with 

the safety monitor(s) via the yellow cable. 

The “Safety at work” AS-Interface system is configured by means of the Windowsbased 

“AS-Interface Safe Win” software. Making available a library of pre-defined, 

certified safety functions, the user can graphically select the desired safety functions 

at the last minute by the “Drag and drop” method in the configuration software. 

Knowledge of a programming language or specific tools is not necessary to set up 

the system. The configuration is loaded into the safety monitor(s) by means of a PC 

by carrying out a secure serial transmission and using the parameter setting 

connector on the monitor front panel. 

Safety interface 

for 

light curtain 

Standard 

interface 

ISO M16 

safety interface 

for safety switch 

To meet different safety requirements, the safety module is available in two versions: 

- monitor with 1 safety output with 2 contacts, 

- monitor with 2 independent safety outputs with 2 contacts. 

In addition to safety outputs with volt-free contacts, some models of safety monitors 

are provided with one or two solid-state signalling outputs and front panel lights 

indicating the status of the system and the monitoring circuits. To monitor more 

safety functions simultaneously or stop several safety circuits at different locations, 

a greater number of safety monitors may be used in an AS-Interface network. 

The safety interfaces are connected directly to the yellow cable via an insulation 

displacement connector. In addition to the possibility of self-addressing by the AS- 

Interface master and manual addressing by the console, they can be addressed 

directly by infrared means on the front panel of products. Their compact size provides 

the possibility of direct attachment to control devices such as, for example, 

Emergency stop buttons or switches. In addition to interfaces that can be attached to 

products, versions with 1 or 2 M12 connectors are also available. 

1/152





Monitor type ASI SAFEMON1/ASI SAFEMON1B ASI SAFEMON2/ASI SAFEMON2B 




control systems (conforming to EN 954-1) 

1 

AS-Interface profile 7.F 7.F 

AS-Interface consumption mA 44 44 

Protection type (suitable only for use in electronic rooms/ 

electrical cabinets with a minimum protection of IP 54) 

IP 20 IP 20 

Operating voltage Ub V c 24 ± 15 % c 24 ± 15 % 

Rated operating current mA 150 200 

Response duration ms

References 1 




References 

1 

Type 

Number 

of safety 

circuits 

Solid-state 

outputs 

to PLC 


kg 

521270 


monitors, 

Optimum range 

2N/O 1 c 24 V ASI SAFEMON1 0.300 

2x2N/O 2 c 24 V ASI SAFEMON2 0.300 



monitors, 

Universal range 

2N/O 1 c 24 V ASI SAFEMON1B r 0.300 

2x2N/O 2 c 24 V ASI SAFEMON2B r 0.300 

Description Use for Language Reference Weight 

kg 

Operating software 

Windowsbased 

PC CD-ROM 


FR/EN/ ASI SWIN 0.020 

DE/IT/ES/ 

PT 

ASI SAFEMONpB (1) 

FR/EN/ ASI SWIN2 r 0.020 

DE/IT/ES/ 

PT 

Adjustment console 

Device operating off 

LR6 batteries 

Infrared addressing 

and diagnosis of 

AS-Interface V2-1 

interfaces 

– ASI TERV2 0.500 

Accessories 

Description Function Language Reference Weight 

kg 

Cable 

For RS 232 parameter 

setting 

– ASI SCPC 0.100 

For transfer between 

2 monitors 

– ASI SCM 0.500 

Cord 

For infrared addressing – ASI TERIR1 0.570 

and diagnosis 

of AS-Interface V2-1 

interfaces 

For connecting to the 

ASI-TERV2 console 

User guide – FR/EN/ 

DE 

ASI SMONDOCA 0.400 

(1) User guide in EN, FR, DE, IT, ES and PT on CD-ROM ASI SWN2. 

r Available 1 st half 2004. 

1/154

Dimensions 1 




Dimensions 

ASI SAFEMONp, ASISAFEMONpB 

1 

104 

120 45 

Key to LEDs 

ASI SAFEMON1, ASI SAFEMON1B 

1 AS-Interface supply (green) 

2 AS-Interface fault (red) 

3 Signalling for restarting (yellow) 

4 Safety outputs closed (green) 

5 Safety outputs open (red) or output error (flashing red) 

ASI SAFEMON2, ASI SAFEMON2B 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

AS-i 

1 

1 

2 

2 

3 

3 

OUT 1 OUT 2 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Output 1 






Output 2 






1/155


presentation 1 

Components for safety solutions 1 

AS-Interface safety interfaces 

1 


Safety is incorporated into the AS-Interface system by adding a monitor and safety 

interfaces connected together with other standard AS-Interface components to the 

yellow cable. 

Safety information is only exchanged between the monitor and the safety interfaces. 

This is transparent for the other standard AS-Interface components. Based on this 

principle, already installed AS-Interface systems can be updated with safety 

functions without having to replace the existing components (e.g. masters, input/ 

output interfaces, power supplies, etc.). Safety circuits are diagnosed readily and 

with no additional wiring by the standard AS-Interface master communicating with 

the safety monitor via the yellow cable. 

Presentation 

Interface for Harmony Ø 22 mm Emergency stop 

Metal 

Plastic 

ASiSSLB4 

ASiSSLB5 

Interface for products with M12 outputs 

1 M12 output 2 M12 outputs 

ASiSSLC1 

ASiSSLC2 

Interface for products with ISO M16 or M20 outputs 

ASiSSLLS 

1/156





Interface type ASI SSLB4 ASI SSLB5 ASI SSLC1 ASI SSLC2 ASI SSLLS 

Environment 

Products designed for max. use in safety related 


parts of control systems (conforming to EN 954-1) 

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 IP 20 IP 20 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 

1 

AS-Interface profile 

Addressing 

Ambient air 

temperature 

0.B.F.F. 

Operation °C -10…+55 


Infrared with adjustment console 

Mechanical characteristics 

Mechanical durability 

0.3 0.3 – – – 

in terms of thousands of operating cycles 

Shock resistance 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn 

Vibration resistance 5gn 5gn 5gn 5gn 5gn 

Electrical characteristics 

Supply via AS-Interface Voltage V c 24 


-15…+15% 

Consumption W 1.2 

AS-Interface consumption mA 45 

AS-Interface connection 

Insulation Displacement Connector 

1/157

References 1 




References 

1 

Interfaces for Ø 22 mm Emergency stop 

Type 

Contact 

type 


connection 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

580116 

Metal N/C + N/C Insulation 

Displacement 

Connector 

ASI SSLB4 0.080 

ASI SSLB4 + ZB4-BS844 

Plastic N/C + N/C Insulation 

Displacement 

Connector 

ASI SSLB5 0.040 

580117 

Interfaces for products with connector outputs 

Type 


connection 

1 M12 input Insulation 

Displacement 

Connector 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

ASI SSLC1 0.040 

ASI SSLB5 + ZB5-AS844 

580118 

2 M12 inputs (2) Insulation 

Displacement 

Connector 

ASI SSLC2 0.050 

ASI SSLC1 

580119 

Interface for products with ISO outputs 

Type 

Number of 

contacts 


connection 

1 M16 ISO input (1) 2 Insulation 

Displacement 

Connector 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

ASI SSLLS 0.040 

580120 


ASI SSLLS 

(1) For ISO M20 product, see adapter below. 

(2) Only use pre-wired connectors XZ CP1541Lp (please consult our catalogue "Global Detecton 

- Electronic and electromachanical sensors) 

Accessories 

Type Material Unit 

reference 

Adapter for ISO M20 

(sold in lots of 5 units) 

Weight 

kg 

Metal DE9 RI2016 0.040 

“Mushroom-head” buttons 

Ø 40, turn to unlock 

Metal ZB4 BS844 (3) 0.060 

Plastic ZB5 AS844 (3) 0.050 

(3) Other “mushroom head” buttons, please consult our catalogue "Components for Human-Machine 

interfaces" . 

1/158

40 

12,5 

40 

34 

40 

34 

46,5 

40 

Dimensions, 

connections 1 



Dimensions 

ASI SSLB4 

ASI SSLB5 

1 

68 40 

64 40 



Ø3,2x7 

9 

Ø3,2x7 

9 

58 

Ø3,2x11 4,5 

40 

58 

Ø3,2x11 4,5 

40 


100 

57,5 

= = 

40 

Connections 



4 

3 

BN 

WH 

BU 

1 2 

BK 


4 

3 4 

3 

1 2 

1 2 

1/159


0 


1 


1 

Applications 

t 

Modules 

For Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring (modules integrated in Micro PLCs) 

Conforming 

to standards 

Principles EN 954-1 - category 3, pr EN 954-2 

for design EN 1088, pr IEC 61508-SIL 2 

Machine IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418 

assemblies 

Number of 


Number of dual 

or single contact 

safety inputs 

2N/O 

4N/C 

PLC diagnostics 

Input contacts 

Reset and feedback 

loop inputs 

Reading output 

control signal 

Supply 

monitoring 

Display 

10 bit 

1bit 

1bit 

1bit 

10 LED 


c 24 V 

PLC type 

Micro 

Module type 

TSX DPZ 10D2A 

Pages 1/164 

1/160

t 

1 

For Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring (modules integrated in Premium PLCs) 

EN 954-1 - category 4 

EN 1088, pr IEC 61508-SIL 3 

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418 

2N/O 

4N/O 

12 N/C 

24 bit 

2bit 

1bit 

1bit 

28 DEL 

c 24 V 

Premium 

TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282 

1/170 1/170 

1/161

Presentation, 

description 0 


Preventa safety module type TSX DPZ 

1 

Presentation 

The TSX DPZ 10D2A Emergency stop monitoring module integrated into the Micro 

PLC combines : 

b The ease of use of Preventa safety modules 

b PLC diagnostics performance 

Micro 

It also maintains all the advantages of a standard PLC (extended choice of I/O, ease 

of installation, flexibility of hardware and software developments, etc). 


relay 

The TSX DPZ 10D2A Emergency stop monitoring module combines a Preventa 

(XPS) hard-wired safety relay and a discrete acquisition function in a half-slot, for full 

diagnostics of input contacts and the state of safety circuit outputs. 

K3 

K4 

Solution with safety relay and separate PLC 

The TSX DPZ 10D2A safety module is used to interrupt one or more Emergency or 

safety stop control circuits in complete safety, in accordance with EN 60204-1. 

The proven safety of hard-wired technology and the capacity of the Micro PLC make 

module TSX DPZ 10D2A the optimum solution for making machines more reliable, 

safer, more compact and more cost-effective. 

Application developments requiring safety systems and PLC diagnostics 

Module TSX DPZ 10D2A is suitable for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring 

applications, requiring a level of safety up to category 3 (1) according to EN 954-1 

(safety related parts of control systems). 

Micro 

+ 

TSX DPZ 

(1) For more information on control system safety categories, please consult our 

specialist catalogue. 

K4 

K3 

Simplification using the safety module integrated in the PLC 

1 

2 

3 

Description 

Emergency stop monitoring module TSX DPZ 10D2A comprises : 

1 A metal casing with a locking system for fixing the module in its slot. This system 

is only accessible when the screw terminal block is removed. 

2 A removable screw terminal block for connecting sensors and preactuators. 

3 A cover giving access to the screw terminal block, which also holds the marker 

legend. 

Characteristics : 

page 1/164 

1/162 

Reference : 

page 1/164 

Connections : 

page 1/165

Functions 0 



Safety module TSX DPZ 10D2A provides the following functions : 

b Monitoring of 1 to 4 dual (or single), N/C (normally closed) contacts in pushbuttons, Emergency stops or limit 

switches on safety guards for an Emergency stop or immediate safety stop system (category 0 Emergency stop 

conforming to EN 418). 

b Hard-wired safety module identical to Preventa safety module XPS : 

v 2 N/O safety output circuits 

v category 3 

b Safety module independent of the Micro PLC processor: the PLC does not affect the safety module 

b 10 LEDs on the Micro PLC display panel : power supply failure and full diagnostics of the safety system 

b Electronic data acquisition units for full diagnostics of the safety system : 

v reading the state of the 8 pushbutton or limit switch inputs 

v reading the enable input and the feedback loop 

v reading the control signal of the 2 safety outputs 

v monitoring the external power supply for the module 

1 

This electronic data acquisition is designed so that the first failure will not adversely affect the safety function. If 

the safety system uses more sensors, it is possible to daisy-chain several TSX DPZ 10D2A modules. 

Schematic diagram 

To ensure correct operation of the safety function whatever the first failure, the following must be used : 

b At the inputs: Emergency stop pushbuttons or safety limit switches with dual contacts 

b At the outputs: if relaying is required, use relays with guided contacts 

b Module power supply: use an F1 protection fuse (see characteristics on page 1/164). 

S4 

S5 

S6 

S7 

S3 

S2 

S1 

S0 

0V 

N(-) 

F1 

S8 

K3 

K3 K4 

ESC 

K4 

F2 

L1(+) 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

5 

4 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

3 

2 

1 

Ix,4 

Ix,5 

Ix,6 

Ix,7 

Ix,3 

Ix,2 

Ix,1 

Ix,0 

K2 

K1 

K2 

K1 

Ix,9 

K2 K1 

Ix,8 

TSX DPZ 10D2A 

I 

s 

o 

l 

a 

t 

i 

o 

n 

Bus interface 

Bus 

6-7 Control of the safety system 

1-2 and 1-3 Safety outputs, volt-free 

4-5 Feedback loop and run enable (ESC: additional enable conditions) 

14-15 Monitoring of module c 24 V external power supply 

14-12, 12-10, 10-8, 8-6, 8 read channels for the Emergency stop pushbutton or limit switch contacts 

7-9, 9-11, 11-13, 13-15 


-1st contact (S4,S5,S6,S7) 

-2nd contact (S0,S1,S2,S3) 

2 

1 3 

Enable button (S8) 

External start 

conditions (ESC) 

K4 safety output 1-2 

K3 safety output 1-3 

Power supply fuse (F1) 

Output protection fuse (F2) 

1 Emergency stop or limit switch activated. 3 Error on contact S0…S3. 

2 Emergency stop reset or limit switch closed. 


page 1/164 

Reference : 

page 1/164 

Connections : 

page 1/165 

1/163


references 0 



1 

Standards and certifications 

Standards Whole machine Electrical equipment of industrial 

Product 

EN 60204-1 or IEC 204-1, EN 292 

machines 

Emergency stop device EN 418 

Safety of machinery : safety related 

parts of control systems 

EN 954-1 category 3, pr EN 954-2, EN 1088 

pr IEC 61508 (SIL 2) 

PLC Specific requirements IEC 1131-2 or EN 61131-2, CSA 22-2, UL 508 


BG, INERIS, INRS, UL, CSA 

General characteristics 

Power supply Nominal voltage V c 24 

Limit operating voltage V c 21.6…30 

Error signalling V c

Connections 0 




Category 3 wiring diagrams (redundant inputs and outputs) : recommended applications 

Connection of 4 sensors with dual contacts 

Connection of 4 sensors with dual contacts for existing installations 

S4 

S5 

S6 

S7 

S3 

S2 

S1 

S0 

24V 

0V 

F1 

S8 

K3 

K4 

ESC 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

5 

4 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

K3 

K4 

S4 

S5 

S6 

S7 

S3 

S2 

S1 

S0 

24V 

0V 

F1 

S8 

K3 

K4 

ESC 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

5 

4 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

K3 

K4 

1 

3 

3 

N(-) 

K3 

K4 

L1(+) 

F2 

2 

1 

N(-) 

K3 

K4 

L1(+) 

F2 

2 

1 

The states of all the contacts in the input circuit are read by the PLC. The 

consistency test carried out by the PLC program on the input contacts 

enables it to signal and locate precisely the faulty contact(s). 

When using less than 4 dual contacts, the input terminals not in use must be 

linked. For example, if contacts S0 and S4 are not in use, a bridge is required 

between terminals 14 and 12 and terminals 13 and 15. 

Suitable for use with existing wiring; with one contact on the safety 

module and one contact for diagnostics, this wiring enables global 

reading of the state of contacts S4 to S7 and individual reading of 

contacts S0 to S3. 

The consistency test carried out by the PLC program on the inputs 

enables it to signal any inconsistency with partial location of the fault. 

Wiring diagram with single contacts 

Connecting TSX DPZ 10D2A modules in series 

24V 

S4 

S5 

S6 

S7 

F1 

S8 

K3 

K4 

ESC 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

5 

4 

7 

9 

K3 

24V 

F1 

S8 

K3 K4 

L1(+) 

24V 

ESC 

F2 

F1 

15 

14 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

11 

13 

K4 

0V 

15 

14 

K3 

N(-) 

K3 

K4 

0V 

L1(+) 

F2 

15 

3 

2 

1 

N(-) 

K3 

K4 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

K4 

Not all faults are detected. A short-circuit on a pushbutton or limit switch is 

not detected. 

When using less than 4 single contacts, the input terminals not in use must 

be linked. 

For example, if contact S5 is not in use, a bridge is required between 

terminals 10 and 12. 

The connection of safety relay outputs in series enables diagnostics for up 

to 32 single or dual contact pushbuttons or limit switches. The number of 

modules connected in series is limited by the number of slots available on 

the Micro PLC. 


page 1/164 

Reference : 

page 1/164 

1/165

Presentation, 

functions 1 


Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY 

1 

Presentation 

TSX PAY safety modules integrated in the Premium PLC combine : 

v the simplicity of use of Preventa safety modules 

v the high performance of PLC diagnostics 

in addition to the advantages of a standard PLC (extended choice of I/O, simplicity 

of setup, flexibility for hardware and software developments, etc). 

TSX PAY safety modules incorporate in a single module, a Preventa (XPS) hard-wired 

safety block and an electronic data acquisition unit for complete diagnostics of input 

contacts and the state of outputs in the safety system. 

TSX PAY safety modules are used to safely interrupt one or more Emergency stop or 

safety stop control circuits according to the standards EN 60204-1 and EN 418. 

The proven safety of hard-wired technology and the performance of Premium PLCs 

make the TSX PAY modules the optimum solution for creating machines which are 

more available, safer, more compact and lower in cost. 

Solution for applications requiring safety systems and high-performance 

diagnostics 

Premium + TSX PAY 

The solution, integrated safety modules, enables complete diagnostics on the entire 

safety system. This diagnostics quickly locates the faulty contact, pushbutton cables, 

or limit switch, without additional contacts on the inputs and without any additional 

wiring. 

TSX PAY safety modules have their own power supplies and operate independently 

of the PLC processor. 

K4 

TSX PAY modules are suitable for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring 

applications, demanding a level of safety up to category 4 according to standard EN 

954-1 (parts of control systems relating to safety). 

K3 

M 

Functions 

TSX PAY modules offer the following functions: 

b Monitoring of 1 to 12 double or single pushbutton contacts, Emergency stop and 

limit switches for safety guards for an Emergency stop or immediate stop safety 

system (Emergency stop category 0 according to standard EN 418). 

b Hard-wired safety block identical to Preventa XPS safety modules: 

v 2 or 4 N/O (normally open) safety outputs, 

v 12 double contact inputs. 

b Safety block independent of the Premium PLC processor: the PLC does not 

operate on the safety module. 

b 28 LEDs on the module display block: for complete diagnostics of the safety 

system. 

b Electronic data acquisition units for complete diagnostics of the safety system: 

v read the status of the 24 inputs (image of the status of the 12 pushbuttons or limit 

switches) 

v read the enable input, 

v read the feedback loop, 

v read the safety outputs control, 

v monitor the external power supply of the module. 

This electronic data acquisition is designed so that the safety function is not 

compromised by any failure. If the safety system uses more sensors, it is possible to 

connect several TSX PAY modules. 


page 1/169 

1/166 

References: 

page 1/170 

Connections: 

page 1/171

Operation 1 




TSX PAY 262 module schematic 

To ensure the safety function irrespective of the first failure, it is compulsory to use: 

b For the inputs: Emergency stop pushbuttons or safety limit switches with double 

contacts 

b For the outputs: if relaying is necessary, use a guided contact relay 

b On the module power supply : an F1 protection fuse (see page 1/169 

characteristics). 

1 

24 V 

0 V 

S12 

S13 

F1 

S121 

S131/S122 

S141/S132 

B1 

A1 

A2 

Ix,12 

Ix,13 

TSX PAY 262 

S23 

S11 

K3 

S231/S222 

S232 

Y1 

K4 Y2/S33 

S34 

Y3 

Y4 

S112 

S111/S102 

Ix,23 

Safety logic 

K2 K1 

Ix,11 

I 

s 

o 

l 

a 

t 

i 

o 

n 

Bus interface 

Bus 

S21/S12 

S1 

S0 

S11/S02 

S01 

Ix,1 

Ix,0 

L1(+) 

N(-) 

K3 

F2 

K4 

23 

13 

14 

24 

K2 

K1 

13-14 et 23-24 

Y1-Y2/S33: 

Y2/S33-S34: 

Y3-Y4: 

S121 à S232: 

S01 à S112: 

A1-A2: 

B1: 



Input channel (+) 

(S121 to S232) 

Input channel (-) 

(S01 to S112) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2/S33 

Safety outputs, volt-free 

Feedback loop 

Run enable 

Choice of reactivation mode, see page 1/171 

12 contacts on (+) input channel 

12 contacts on (+) input channel 

c 24 V external power supply 

Selection of double or single contact wiring 

Power supply 

voltage 

On 


not activated 


activated 

Start-up button 

Y2/S33-S34 N/O 



Key 0 

1 

Protective function with automatic start-up 

Power supply 1 st switch 2 nd switch 

voltage 

Guard closed 

Input channel (+) 

(S121toS232) 

Input channel (-) 

(S01 to S112) 

Feedback loop 

Y1-Y2/S33 

Shunt to Y2/S33-S34 

N/O 


Guard 

opens 

1 


200 ms 

max 

Key 0 


page 1/169 

References: 

page 1/170 

1/167

Description, 

connection principle 1 



1 

1 

2 

6 

3 

4 

5 

Description 

TSX PAY safety modules comprise on the front panel : 

1 A rigid IP 20 casing to hold and protect the electronic card. 

2 A display block (32 LEDs) showing operating modes, faults and the status of the 

safety system. 

3 A high density 44-way SUB-D connector for connecting the safety system. 

4 A 6-way removable screw terminal block for connecting the safety outputs. 

5 Marking for labelling the safety outputs. 

6 Marking for the external power supply of the module. 

Connection principle 

Two types of connection for TSX PAY safety modules are available: 

Standard wiring 

A TSX CPP 301 three metre cable is fitted with a 44-way SUB-D moulded, elbow 

connector at one end, and flying leads differentiated by a colour code at the other 

end. 

This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 954-1. 

Fast wiring 

Using the Telefast 2 pre-wired system facilitates the installation of TSX PAY safety 

modules by giving access to inputs on the safety system via screw terminals. 

Connection is carried out using TSX CPP p02 cables fitted with 44-way SUB-D 

moulded, elbow connectors at both ends. 

The Telefast ABE 7CPA13 sub-base enables the connection of 12 double or single 

contact inputs, the power supply, reset inputs and the feedback loop. 

This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 954-1. 


page 1/169 

1/168 

References: 

page 1/170 

Connections: 

page 1/171





Standards and certifications 

Type of modules TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282 

Standards Machine Machine electrical 

EN 60204-1 ou IEC 204-1, EN 292 

equipment 

Emergency stop equipment EN 418 

Product Machine safety-parts of 

control systems relating to 

EN 954-1 category 4, EN 1088 

prIEC61508(SIL3) 

safety 

PLC Specific requirements IEC 61131-2 (EN 61131-2), CSA 22-2, UL 508 

1 



BG, UL, CSA 

Power supply Nominal voltage V c 24 

Operating voltage limit V c 19,2…30 

Fault indication V c

References 1 




1 

TSX PAY 262 

TSX PAY 282 


Type of input 

c 24 V 

12 Emergency 

stops or limit 

switches 

(double or 

single 

contacts), 

1 reset button, 

1 feedback 

loop, 

1 reset monitor 

Safety outputs Connections Reference (1) Weight 

kg 

2N/O 

(volt-free) 

2.5 A (Ithe) 

4N/O 

(volt-free) 

2.5 A (Ithe) 

Inputs: 44-way SUB-D connector 

Outputs: screw terminal 

(supplied) 

TSX PAY 262 0.430 

Inputs: 44-way SUB-D connector TSX PAY 282 0.490 

Outputs: screw terminal 

(supplied) 

Connection accessory 

Description For 

Type of connector on Reference Weight 

connection on TSX PAY 2p2 

kg 

screw terminal 

Telefast 2 

sub-base for 

TSX PAY 2p2 

modules 

Safety system, 

reset,monitoring 

and loop inputs 

Power supply 

c 24 V 

SUB-D, 44-way ABE 7CPA13 0.290 

Connecting cables 

Use 

From 

TSX PAY 2p2 

module 

For fast wiring 44-way SUB-D 

connector 

To Length Reference Weight 

kg 

ABE-7CPA13 

sub-base 

1m TSX CPP 102 0.160 

2m TSX CPP 202 0.260 

3m TSX CPP 302 0.360 

ABE-7CPA13 

For standard 

wiring 

44-way SUB-D 

connector 

Flying leads 

with colourcoded 

wires 

3m TSX CPP 301 0.330 

(1) Product supplied with a multilingual quick reference guide. 


page 1/169 

Connections: 

page 1/171 

1/170

Connections 1 




Input channel connection schemes 

Wiring 1 input channel: single contact 

S12 

S13 

S14 

S15 

S16 

S17 

S18 

S19 

S20 

S21 

S22 

S23 

+ 24 V 

0 V 

(—) 

(+) 

F1 

S01 

S112 

S121 

S122/S131 

S132/S141 

S142/S151 

S152/S161 

S162/S171 

S172/S181 

S182/S191 

S192/S201 

S202/S211 

S212/S221 

S222/S231 

S232 

B1 

A1 

A2 

Single contact wiring is not suitable for applications which require 

acategory3or4safetylevel. 

Not all faults are detected, a short-circuit on a contact is not 

detected. 

When using less than 12 single contacts, connect the input 

terminals which are not being used. 

For applications with more than 12 single contacts, it is possible 

to use several TSX PAY modules by wiring the outputs in series. 

Double contact wiring of the inputs is necessary for creating 

applications which require a category 3 or 4 safety level. 

When prompted, all the first faults are detected and located. A 

short-circuit between the 2 inputs is detected. 

When using less than 12 double contacts, connect the input 

terminals which are not being used. 

For applications with more than 12 double contacts, it is possible 

to use several TSX PAY modules by wiring the outputs in series. 

Safety output connection schemes 

Wiring 2 input channels: double contacts 

S0 

S1 

S2 

S3 

S4 

S5 

S6 

S7 

S8 

S9 

S10 

S11 

S23 

S22 

S21 

S20 

S19 

S18 

S17 

S16 

S15 

S14 

S13 

S12 

Reset function configurations 

+ 24 V 

0 V 

(+) 

F1 

(—) 

S01 

S11/S02 

S21/S12 

S31/S22 

S41/S32 

S51/S42 

S61/S52 

S71/S62 

S81/S72 

S91/S82 

S101/S92 

S111/S102 

S112 

S232 

S231/S222 

S221/S212 

S211/S202 

S201/S192 

S191/S182 

S181/S172 

S171/S162 

S161/S152 

S151/S142 

S141/S132 

S131/S122 

S121 

B1 

A1 

A2 

1 

) 

K3 

K4 

14 

24 

K2 

K1 

Y1 

K4 

Y2/S33 

13 

23 

K3 

F2 

L1(+) 

Y1 

Y2/S33 

S34 

Y3 

Y4 

Y1 

Y2/S33 

S34 

Y3 

Y4 

Automatic start-up 

Manual reset without start button 

monitoring 

14 

24 

34 

44 

K3 K4K5 K6 

K2 

Y2/S33 

13/23 

33/43 

K4 K3 

K6 K5 

F2 

L1(+) 

The design of a category 3 or 4 immediate stop system requires redundancy and 

checking, on request, of the power supply breaker devices. 

The wiring of N/C contacts (K3 and K4) enables this check on each request. 

Relays K3 and K4 must be mechanically linked contact relays. 

K1 

Y1 

F2 

L2(+) 

Y1 

Y2/S33 

S34 

Y3 

Y4 

Manual reset with start button 

monitoring 

When TSX PAY modules cut the power directly, it is necessary to connect the 

terminals Y1 and Y2/S33. 


page 1/169 

References: 

page 1/170 

1/171

Contents 

2-Safety detection solutions 

Selectionguidesafetyswitches.................................page2/2 

b Safety switches 

v General .................................................page 2/6 

v Presentation .............................................page 2/7 

2 

Key operated safety switches 

b Metal case safety switches, turret head, types XCS A, B, C and E 

v Presentation .............................................page 2/9 

v Cable entries tapped M20 x 1.5 .............................page 2/20 

v Cable entries tapped for Pg 13.5 cable gland ..................page 2/22 

v Cable entries tapped 1/2" NPT .............................page 2/24 

v Spare parts .............................................page 2/26 

b Plastic case safety switches, double insulated, fixed head, type XCS MP 

v Presentation ............................................page 2/12 

v Pre-cabled, length 2 m, 5 m or 10 m. .........................page 2/32 

b Plastic case safety switches, double insulated, turret head, 

types XCS PA, TA and TE 



v Cable entries tapped for Pg 11 cable gland ...................page 2/38 


Safety switches with rotary lever or spindle operator 

b Presentation ..............................................page 2/14 

b Plastic case, double insulated, turret head, types XCS PL, TL, PR and TR 


v Cable entries tapped for Pg 11 cable gland ...................page 2/50 


Coded magnetic switches 


b Plastic case, types XCS DMC, DMP and DMR ...................page 2/54 

Safety limit switches 


b Miniature design 

v Metal case, type XCS M ...................................page 2/62 

b Compact design 

v Metal case, type XCS D ...................................page 2/66 

v Plastic case, type XCS P ..................................page 2/68 

Limit switches with manual reset 

b Plastic case, double insulated, types XCK P and XCK T 



v Cable entries tapped for Pg 11 or Pg 13.5 cable gland ..........page 2/74 

v Cable entries tapped 1/2" NPT ..............................page 2/76 

2/0

Selectionguidesafetymats..................................page2/78 

Safety mats 

b Presentation ............................................. page 2/80 

b Type XY2-TP ............................................. page 2/83 

b Jumper cables Ø 8 mm-M8 and M8-M8 ........................ page 2/84 

Selection guide security light curtains .........................page2/86 


b Presentation ............................................. page 2/88 

2 

b Safety modules and single-beam photo-electric sensors ................... 

v Safety modules ......................................... page 2/96 

v Single beam photo-electric sensors 

with a test input associated with a built-in “muting” function ....... page 2/97 

b Type 4 safety light curtains 

v Compact light curtains with solid-state output ................. page 2/103 

v Accessories and spare parts .............................. page 2/105 

v Protective covers ....................................... page 2/107 

2/1


0 

Safety detection solutions 

2 

Safety switches 

Applications 

Protection of machine operators by stopping the machine when the operating key (attached to machine guard) is 

All heavy industrial machines, with quick rundown time (1) 

All heavy and light industrial 

machines, with slow rundown 

time (2) 

2 

Device 


Conformity Products 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14, JIS C4520 

to 

Machine 

standards assemblie IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088, EN 292 


UL, CSA 

Case material 

Metal 

Degree of protection IP 67 

Dimensions Switch 40 x 113.5 x 44 52 x 113.5 x 44 98 x 146 x 44 

(wxhxd) 

in mm Fixings 30 x 60 30 x 60 88 x 95 

Features 

Without locking of the operating 

key. 

Turret head: 8 positions for 

insertion of operating key. 

Manual locking and unlocking 

of operating key by pushbutton 

or key operated lock (can be 

mounted on left or right-hand 

side of switch head) 



Locking and unlocking of operating 

key by electromagnet (either on 

energisation or on deenergisation). 

Manual unlocking 

(using key lock) of operating key in 

abnormal conditions. 



Contact blocks 

Safety contacts actuated by the operating key. Slow break with positive opening operation 

N/C + N/O + N/O (2 N/O staggered) 

N/C + N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) 

N/C + N/C + N/C 

N/C + N/O + N/O (2 N/O staggered) 

N/C + N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) 

N/C + N/C + N/C 

+ N/C + N/O auxiliary contact with 

positive opening operation, 

controlled by solenoid 

Screw clamp terminals. Cable entry tapped for 13 mm cable gland, tapped M20 x 1.5 ISO or tapped 1/2" NPT 

Cabling 1 cable entry 2 cable entries 

Type reference XCS A XCS B, XCS C XCS E 

Page 2/18 

(1) Stopping time of machine less than time taken for operator to access dangerous zone. 

(2) Stopping time of machine greater than time taken for operator to access dangerous zone. 

2/2

0 

2 

withdrawn from the head of the switch 

All light industrial machines, with quick rundown time (1) 

All light industrial machines, with slow rundown 

time (2) 

2 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 68-2-30, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14, JIS C4520 

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088, EN 292 

cULus,BG 

UL, CSA 

Plastic 

IP 67 

30 x 87 x 15 30 x 93.5 x 30 52 X 114.5 X 30 110 x 93.5 x 33 

Centres: 20/22 Centres: 20/22 or 40.3 Centres: 20/22 

Without locking of operating 

key. 

Fixed head. 

2 positions for insertion of 

operating key. 

Without locking of operating key. 

Optional accessory: guard retaining device. 

Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of operating key. 

Locking and unlocking of operating key by 

electromagnet (either on energisation or on deenergisation). 

Manual unlocking (using tool) of operating key 

in abnormal conditions. 

Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of operating 

key. 

N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) N/C + N/O + N/O (2 N/O N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) 

N/C + N/C N/O + N/C make before break staggered) N/O + N/C make before break 

N/C + N/C + N/O (N/O 

staggered) 

N/C + N/C + N/C 

N/C + N/C 

N/C + N/C + N/O (N/O 

staggered) 

N/C + N/C + N/C 

N/C + N/C 

+ N/C auxiliary contact with positive opening 

operation, controlled by solenoid 

Pre-cabled, 4 or 6 x 0.5 mm2, 

L=2or5or10m 

Screw clamp terminals. Cable entry tapped for 11 mm cable gland, tapped M16 x 1.5 ISO or tapped 1/2" NPT. 

1 cable entry 2 cable entries 1 cable entry 

XCS MP XCS PA XCS TA XCS TE 

2/3

Selection guide (continued) 0 


2 


Applications 

Protection of machine operators by stopping the machine 

when the operating lever (attached to hinged machine 

guard) is displaced by 5° 

All light industrial machines fitted with hinged or rotary 

protective covers with small opening radius 

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when 

the door is opened by 5° 

All light industrial machines fitted with hinged access 

doors 

2 

Device Safety switches with rotary lever operating head Spindle operated safety switches 

Conformity Products 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N°14, JIS C4520 

to 

Machine 

standards assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088, EN 292 

Approvals 

UL, CSA 

Case material 

Plastic 


Dimensions Switch 30 x 87.5 x 30 52 x 108.4 x 30 30 x 96 x 30 52x117x30 

(wxhxdorØ) 

in mm Fixings Centres: 20/22 Centres: 20/22 or 40.3 Centres: 20/22 Centres: 20/22 or 40.3 

Features 

2 types of lever: straight or elbowed (flush with rear of switch) 

3 lever positions: to left, centred or to right 

Turret head: 4 positions 

2 types of spindles: length 30 mm or 80 mm 



Slow break safety contacts with positive opening operation (positive actuation) 

or outputs N/C contacts open when lever displaced more than 5° 

N/C + N/O 

(N/O staggered) 

N/C + N/C 

N/C + N/O + N/O 

(2 N/O staggered) 

N/C+N/C+N/O 


N/C+N/C+N/C 

N/C + N/O 


N/C + N/C 

N/C + N/O + N/O 


N/C+N/C+N/O 


N/C+N/C+N/C 

Cabling 

To screw terminals 

Cable entry tapped for 11 mm cable gland, tapped M16 x 1.5 ISO or tapped 1/2" NPT. 

1 cable entry 2 cable entries 1 cable entry 2 cable entries 

Pre-cabled – – – – 

By connector – – – – 

Type reference 

XCS PL XCS TL XCS PR XCS TR 

Pages 2/46 

2/4

0 

2 

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the door is opened 

All light industrial machines fitted with access doors with imprecise guiding and/or 

subjected to frequent washing 

Protection of operators by 

stopping the machine when 

the door is opened 

All machines with quick 

rundown time 

Protection of operators whilst 

performing maintenance 

operations (see page 2/17) 

Hoisting and lift equipment 

Coded magnetic switches Safety limit switches Limit switches with manual reset 

2 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-3, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088, EN 292 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 811 

(with slow-break action) 

UL, CSA UL, CSA – 

BG combined with safety modules XPS AF, XPS DM, XPS MP 

Plastic Metal or plastic Plastic 

IP 66 + IP 67 IP 66, IP 67 and IP 68 IP 65 

16 x 51 x 7 25 x 88 x 13 Ø 30, L 38.5 30 x 50 x 16 30 x 34 x 89 30 x 83 x 30 or 59.5 x 71 x 30 

16 78 – 20 Centres: 20/22 or 40/42 

6 approach directions 2 approach directions Plunger or rotary operating 

head 

Head adjustable in 15° steps 

throughout 360° 

Plunger or rotary operating head 


Manual reset knob on front of 

switch 

Independent Reed type contacts operated by an encoded magnet 

Contacts change state from a distance of 8 mm (5 mm for XCS DMC) 

Must be used with a Preventa safety module 

N/C + N/O 

(N/C staggered) 

N/O + N/O 


N/C+N/C+N/O 


N/C + N/O + N/O 


N/C + N/O 


N/C + N/O 


N/C contacts with positive opening operation 

N/C + N/C + N/O (N/O 

staggered) slow break 

N/C + N/C + N/O and N/C + N/C + 

N/O+N/Osnapaction 

N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) slow 

break 

N/C + N/C snap action 

– 

XCS D/P: cable entry tapped 

forISOM20x1.5or11mm 

cable gland, or tapped 1/2" 

NPT 

Cable entry tapped for ISO M16 

x 1.5 or 11 mm or 13 mm cable 

gland, or tapped 1/2" NPT 

– – – – 1 cable entry 1 or 2 cable entries 

4 x 0.25 mm2, 

6 x 0.25 mm2, 

4 x 0.25 mm2, 

XCS M: 7 x 0.5 mm2, or – 

L=2or5or10m 

L=2or5or10m 

L=2or5or10m 

9 x 0.34 mm2 ;L=1or2or5m 

– – – – – 

XCS DMC XCS DMP XCS DMR XCS M XCS D/P XCK p 

2/54 2/60 2/64 2/70 

2/5

General 

0 


2 


Refer to standards 

EN 292-2 and EN 1088 

Removable protective guards covering hazardous machine functions must be used in conjunction with an interlocking 

device. 

Application: high inertia machines. 

An interlocking guard with card locking must be used when the rundown time is greater than the time it takes for a 

person to reach the danger zone. 

This device ensures that the guard remains locked until the hazardous movement has stopped. 

2 


The key operated safety switches, specifically designed for machine guarding applications, provide an ideal solution 

for the locking or interlocking of movable guards associated with industrial machinery. They meet the requirements 

of the standards EN 292-2, EN 294, EN 1088 and IEC/EN 60204-1. 

The start control circuit of the machine is opened (switched-off) when the guard is removed or opened, using positive 

opening operation contacts. 

The removal/opening of the guard (after hazardous movements have stopped) can either be: 

- at the time the machine is switched-off for low inertia machines (machines whose rundown time is less than the time 

it takes for the operator to access the danger zone), or 

- delayed for high inertia machines (machines whose rundown time is greater than the time it takes for the operator 

to access the danger zone). 

Control circuit 

categories 

Safety limit switches used in conjunction with PREVENTA safety module, enable designers, with reference to 

EN 954-1, to develop category 4 control systems. 

Safety related parts of control systems should be developed taking into account the results of an appropriate Risk 

Assessment (EN 1050 - EN 292-1 and 2) 

Safety of personnel 

The machine starting circuit is not closed until the safety switch is fully operated. When it is released, the N/C contact 

or contacts is/are opened by positive action or a change of state in the case of encoded magnetic switches 

necessarily monitored by a PREVENTA safety module. 

Safety of operation 

The safety switches incorporate slow-break or snap-action contacts with positive opening operation (except for 

encoded magnetic switches which cannot be fitted with positive opening contacts). When the guard is closed, the 

multiple interlocking device is actuated thereby closing the N/C contacts and causing the contacts of encoded 

magnetic switches to change state. 

Safety in use 

The safety device is designed to accept small movements (a few millimetres) to compensate for mechanical play, 

vibration, etc. 

Design to minimise 

defeat 

Key operated and encoded magnetic safety switches are designed to be operated by specific actuators so that they 

cannot be defeated in a simple manner using common tools, metal plates, a simple magnet, etc. 

When loosening the fixing screws for re-orientation of the turret head (key operated switches), the head itself remains 

attached to the switch body and the contact states remain unchanged. 

Safety limit switches are also designed to ensure that it is not possible to adjust the head setting, remove the product 

or gain access to the contact block without the appropriate tool. 

There are various methods for obtaining a higher level of tamper proofing, for example: 

- using a cage device to prevent the insertion of a spare part, a key, a magnet or any other foreign body, 

- fixing the operating key or the encoded magnet to the guard by means that make it very difficult to remove (welding, 

riveting). 

2/6

Presentation 

0 


2 


Key operated 

metal case 

safety switches 

Without locking of the operating key 

Metal case limit switches for use on machines without inertia and operating 

in normal conditions (no vibration or shock and guard mounted vertically, 

without risk of rebound on closing), thus eliminating unintentional opening of 

the guard. 

With locking of the operating key and manual unlocking 

Metal case limit switches for use on heavy machines without inertia and 

operating in arduous conditions (shock or vibration exist), whereby the guard 

could open unintentionally. 

A key operated lock or a pushbutton enables the positive locking of the guard 

and its subsequent unlocking. 

2 

With interlocking and locking of the operating key by electromagnet 

Metal case limit switches for use on machines with inertia or necessitating a 

controlled opening of the protective guard. 

The locking of the moving guard can either be on de-energisation or 

energisation of the electromagnet. 

A key operated lock enables manual unlocking of the guard in the event of an 

interlocking circuit malfunction, and also provides extra safety for maintenance 

personnel likely to be working on the machine. 

The switches incorporate 2 LEDs: one indicating guard “open/closed” and the 

other, guard “locked/unlocked”. 

Key operated 

plastic case 


Without locking of the operating key 

Plastic case limit switches for use on light machines without inertia. 

For use in arduous conditions (shock or vibration exist, guard not vertical or 

risk of rebound on closing) where the guard could open unintentionally, a 

guard retaining device is available as an accessory (XCS PA or XCS TA). 

With interlocking and locking of the operating key by electromagnet 

Plastic case limit switches for use on machines with inertia or necessitating a 

controlled opening of the protective guard. 

The locking of the moving guard can either be on de-energisation or 

energisation of the electromagnet. 

A special tool enables manual unlocking of the guard in the event of an 

interlocking circuit malfunction, and also provides extra safety for maintenance 

personnel likely to be working on the machine. 

2/7

Presentation (continued) 0 


2 


2 

Rotary lever or 

spindle operated 

safety switches for 

hinged guards 

Coded magnetics 


With rotary operator 

Plastic case limit switches with straight or elbowed operating lever or spindle 

operator. Specifically designed for small industrial machines fitted with small sized 

hinged doors, covers or protective guards. 

They protect the operator by immediately stopping the dangerous movement of 

the machine as soon as the rotary lever or spindle displacement reaches an angle 

of 5°. 

With an associated coded magnet 

Plastic case switches for use on machines without inertia. Specifically designed 

for industrial machines fitted with doors, covers or guards with imprecise 

guiding. 

They are ideally suited for machines subjected to frequent washing. 

They protect the operator by immediately stopping any dangerous movement, as 

soon as the distance between the switch and its magnet is greater than 8 or 5 mm, 

depending on model. 


With plunger or rotary operator 

Metal case limit switches. 

They are used with machines without inertia or with inertia in conjunction with key 

operated switches for monitoring access doors and/or guards. When used on their 

own, they are always installed in “positive mode”. Combined in pairs, one switch 

is installed in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”. 

Manually reset limit 

switches 

With plunger or rotary operator 

Plastic case limit switches. 

For use with hoisting and lift equipment. 

The open position of the N/C contact is maintained until manually reset by the 

operating knob on the front of the switch. 

2/8



2 

Metal case safety switches 

Operating keys 

The operating keys are common to all metal case safety switches 

Play 

10° 

10° 

Play 

Their oblong fixing holes enable simple adjustment when mounting on 

moving guards. 

A pivoting operating key (both horizontally and vertically) is available when using 

safety switches in conjunction with hinged guards or guards with imprecise 

guiding. 

Straight operating keys are supplied with an adaptor shank for simple 

replacement of an XCK J limit switch by an XCS switch, without the need to 

drill additional fixing holes. 

2 

Play 

Play 

Turret head 

All metal case safety switches are fitted with a square turret head which can be 

rotated through 360° in 90° steps 

8 directions of actuation are possible for the operating key: 

- 4 in the horizontal plane, 

- 4 from above the switch (4 alternative positions of the key slot, 

depending on the orientation of the head). 

On removal of the fixing screw for re-orientation of the operating head, the 

head itself remains attached to the body and the contact states remain 

unchanged. 

Safety contacts 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

14 

22 21 

33 

34 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

Metal case safety switches incorporate a 3-pole contact block, with positive opening 

operation, which is actuated by insertion or withdrawal of the operating key. 

The withdrawal of the operating key opens the N/C safety contact(s), even in the event 

of the contact sticking or welding. 

The 3-pole contact block enables redundant safety circuits to be established (for 

example: N/C + N/C or N/C + N/O) and also, to provide signalling (for example: PLC, 

illuminated beacon, …). 

LED indicators 

An orange LED (optional for switches types XCS A, XCS B and XCS C, standard for switches type XCS E) indicates the position 

of the machine guard: 

LED illuminated: operating key not inserted in head of switch, N/C contact(s) open, guard open. 

LED not illuminated: operating key inserted in head of switch, N/C contact(s) closed, guard closed. 

A green LED (incorporated on limit switches type XCS E) indicates the locking of the machine guard: 

LED not illuminated: operating key not inserted in head of switch: the machine cannot be operated, 

LED illuminated: operating key inserted in head of switch and key locked. The machine is either ready for starting, running 

or decelerating to a standstill. 

2/9



2 


2 

Manual locking/ 

unlocking by 

pushbutton or key 

operated lock on 

XCSBandXCSC 

The pushbutton or key operated lock fitted to switches type XCS B or XCS C allows manual locking/unlocking 

ofthemachineguard. 

Their use is not necessary for the normal operation of 

the limit switch. 

For ease of access, the pushbutton or lock may be 

mounted on the right or the left of the limit switch 

head. 

For limit switches type XCS C, when the machine 

guard is locked (key in position “LOCK”), the 

resistance to forcible withdrawal of the operating key 

fitted to the guard is 150 daN. 

The key is removable from the locking device in the 

“LOCK” position. 

Locking/unlocking by 

electromagnet on 

XCS E 

Switches type XCS E incorporate an electromagnet for locking/unlocking of the machine guard. 

With the machine guard closed and locked, the 

resistance to forcible withdrawal of the operating key 

fitted to the guard is 200 daN. 

In addition to the 3-pole contact block positively 

operated by the operating key fitted to the guard, XCS E 

switches incorporate a N/C + N/O contact block 

mechanically linked to the electromagnet. 

The N/C contact is for use in the safety circuit of the 

machine and the N/O contact for signalling the status 

of the electromagnet. 

Keyoperatedlockon 

XCS E 

Switches type XCS E are fitted with a key operated lock allowing the unlocking of the machine guard whilst 

being held in the locked position by the electromagnet (authorised personnel only). 

UNLOCK 

LOCK 

The manual unlocking of the guard using the key 

operated lock is useful in the following cases: 

- whilst the machine is undergoing maintenance (with 

the key turned to the “UNLOCK” position and then 

removed, the degree of safety is higher in preventing 

an accidental machine restart. The safety for 

maintenance personnel is thus improved), 

- in the event of a power failure, 

- in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction 

(interlocked condition maintained: positive safety). 

The electrical supply providing the unlocking via the 

electromagnet always takes priority over manual 

unlocking using the key operated lock. 

The lock fitted to standard limit switches has key 

withdrawal from the “LOCK” and “UNLOCK” 

positions. 

2/10



2 


Example of operation of an XCS E switch with locking on electromagnet de-energisation 

Machine state 

Stopped 

de-energised 

Stopped 

energised 

Stopped 

ready to start 

Running 

Stopping 

sequence 

Stopped 

energised 

Guard position Open Open Closed Closed Closed Closed 

Guard state Free Free Free Locked Locked Free 

Electromagnet state 

“O” 

(de-energised) 

“1” 

(energised) 

“1” 

(energised) 

“O” 


“O” 


“1” 

(energised) 

2 

3-pole contact state 

for XCS E5ppp 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

3-pole contact state 

for XCS E7ppp 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

22 21 

32 31 

13 

14 

Functions Machine at rest. Machine cannot be 

started. 

Guard closed, 

operating key can 

be locked. It will be 

lockedassoonas 

the start instruction 

is given. 

Start instruction 

given, the machine 

is running. 

Stop instruction 

given, the machine 

stops gradually 

(deceleration then 

complete stop of 

motor). 

Machine has 

stopped. 

Theguardcanbe 

opened. 

Contact states of 

electromagnet 

43 

44 

52 51 

43 

44 

52 51 

43 

44 

52 51 

43 

44 

52 51 

43 

44 

52 51 

43 

44 

52 51 

Orange LED 

Green LED 

Safety circuit of the 

machine 

Open Open Open Closed Closed Open 

2/11



2 

Plastic case safety switches 

Operating keys 

The operating keys are common to all plastic case key operated safety switches. 

2 

Play 

10° 

10° 

Play 

Their oblong fixing holes enable simple adjustment when mounting on moving 

guards. 

An operating key pivoting both horizontally and vertically is available when using the 

switches in conjunction with hinged guards or guards with imprecise guiding. 

Straight operating keys are supplied with an adaptor shank for simple 

replacement of an XCK P limit switch by an XCS PA switch or an XCK T limit 

switch by an XCS TA switch, without the need to drill additional fixing holes. 

Play 

Play 

Turret head 

Safety switches XCS PA, XCS TA and XCS TE are fitted with a square turret head 

which can be rotated through 360° in 90° steps. 

Safety switches XCS MP have a fixed head. 

8 directions of actuation are possible for the operating key: 

- 4 in the horizontal plane (1 for XCS MP), 

- 4 from above the switch (1 for XCS MP), (4 alternative positions of the key 

slot, depending on the orientation of the head). 

When loosening the 2 fixing screws for re-orientation of the operating head, the 

head itself remains attached to the body and the contact states remain 

unchanged (XCS PA, XCS TA, XCS TE). 


XCSPA,XCSTE 

14 13 

22 21 

22 21 

13 

14 

11 

12 

21 

22 

The safety switches incorporate either a 2-pole contact block (XCS MP, XCS PA 

and XCS TE) or a 3-pole contact block (XCS MP and XCS TA), with positive 

opening operation, which is actuated by insertion or withdrawal of the operating 

key attached to the guard. 

or XCS TA 

22 21 

14 13 

34 33 

or XCS MP 

BU/WH BU 

OG/WH OG 

22 21 

BU/WH BU 

32 31 

OG/WH OG 

13 

14 

12 11 

BU/WH BU 

22 21 

BN/WH BN 

32 31 

In addition, safety switches type XCS TE incorporate a N/C contact block (with 

positive opening operation) actuated by the electromagnet. The N/C contact is 

for use in the safety circuit of the machine. The withdrawal of the operating key 

opens the N/C safety contact(s), even in the event of the contact sticking or 

welding. 

The 2-pole N/C + N/C contact block enables category 3 control circuits to be 

established conforming to EN 954-1 by using both N/C safety contacts in 

redundancy, or a category 1 control circuit by using one N/C contact in the safety 

circuit and the other N/C contact for signalling (for example: PLC, illuminated 

beacon, etc.). Alternatively, these switch(es) used in conjunction with a 

PREVENTA XPS safety module establishes a category 4 control circuit. 

Designers should follow the recommendations for enabling switches to 

EN 956-1 

BU/WH BU 

BN/WH BN 

OG/WH OG 

OG 

OG/WH 

Guard retaining 

device 

The guard retaining device XCS Z21 can be used with all plastic case switches 

XCS PA and XCS TA that are used in conjunction with either the wide (XCS Z12) 

or pivoting (XCS Z13) operating key. 

They assist in holding the guard closed by providing an extra retaining force of 

5 daN. 

It is specially suited for use with light machines operating in arduous conditions 

(vibration, mechanical shock, guard not vertical, risk of guard rebound on 

closing, etc.). 

It can be used for horizontal operating key actuation directions as well as those 

from above. 

2/12



2 

Plastic case safety switches 

Locking/unlocking by 

electromagnet on 

XCS TE 

Switches type XCS TE incorporate an electromagnet for locking/unlocking of 

the machine guard. 

With the machine guard closed and locked, the resistance to forcible 

withdrawal of the operating key fitted to the guard is 50 daN. 

In addition to the 2-pole contact block actuated by the operating key fitted 

to the guard, XCS TE limit switches incorporate a N/C contact block (with 

positive opening operation) actuated by the electromagnet. 

The N/C contact is for use in the safety circuit of the machine. 

2 

Unlocking by special 

tool on XCS TE 

1 

Switches type XCS TE are supplied with a special tool that enables unlocking 

of the machine guard whilst being held in the locked position by the 

electromagnet. 

UNLOCK 

The manual unlocking of the guard using the tool 1 is useful in the following 

cases: 

- whilst the machine is undergoing maintenance (with the tool turned to 

the “UNLOCK” position and then removed, the degree of safety is higher 

in preventing an accidental machine restart. The safety for maintenance 

personnel is thus improved), 

- in the event of a power failure, 

- in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction (interlocked condition 

maintained: positive safety). The electrical supply providing the 

unlocking via the electromagnet always takes priority over manual 

unlocking using the special tool. 

Example of operation of an XCS TE switch with locking on electromagnet de-energisation 

Machine state 

Stopped, 

de-energised 

Stopped, 

energised 

Stopped, 

ready to start 

Running 

Stopping 

sequence 

Stopped 

energised 

Guard position Open Open Closed Closed Closed Closed 

Guard state Free Free Free Locked Locked Free 

Electromagnet state 

“O” 


“1” 

(energised) 

“1” 

(energised) 

“O” 


“O” 


“1” 

(energised) 

2-pole contact state for 

XCS TE5ppp 

22 21 

13 

14 

22 21 

13 

14 

22 21 

13 

14 

22 21 

13 

14 

22 21 

13 

14 

22 21 

13 

14 

2-pole contact state for 

XCS TE7ppp 

22 21 

12 11 

22 21 

12 11 

22 21 

12 11 

22 21 

12 11 

22 21 

12 11 

22 21 

12 11 

Functions Machine at rest. Machine cannot 

be started. 

Guard closed, 

operating key can 

be locked. It will 

be locked as soon 

as the start 

instruction is 

given. 

Start instruction 

given, the 

machine is 

running. 

Stop instruction 

given, the 

machine stops 

gradually 

(deceleration then 

complete stop of 

motor). 

Machine has 

stopped. 

The guard can be 

opened. 

Contact state of 

electromagnet 

32 31 

32 31 

32 31 

32 31 

32 31 

32 31 

Safety circuit of 

the machine 

Open Open Open Closed Closed Open 

2/13



2 

Rotary lever or spindle operated safety switches 

Presentation 

Turret head 

Safety switches with rotary lever or spindle operator incorporate a turret 

operating head that can be rotated through 360° in 90° steps. 

Two additional self-locking screws are included with each switch for positive 

fixing of the head. 

2 

2bodyversions 

p Plastic case, narrow, with 1 cable entry for XCS PL and XCS PR. 

p Plastic case, wide, with 2 cable entries for XCS TL and XCS TR. 

XCS PL 

XCS TR 

2 types of operating lever, 2 spindle lengths 

p Levers 

Straight or elbowed (flush with rear of switch), making the lever switches 

suitable for use with all types of hinged guards, whether: 

- flush with the machine framework (use a switch with an elbowed flush 

lever), 

- overhanging in relation to the machine framework (use a switch with a 

straight lever). 

3 alternative operating lever positions allow the limit switches to be used with 

guards that open to the left, centre or right. 

p Spindle operators 

2 spindle lengths: 30 or 80 mm. 

13 

14 

22 21 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

11 

12 

22 21 

21 

22 

32 31 

13 

14 


XCS PL and XCS PR safety switches incorporate a 2-pole (N/C + N/O break 

before make or N/C + N/C) contact block with positive opening operation. 

XCS TL and XCS TR safety limit switches incorporate a 3-pole (N/C + N/O + 

N/O or N/C + N/C + N/O) contact block with positive opening operation. 

Opening of the N/C safety contact(s) occurs when the operating lever or spindle 

is displaced by an angle equal to or greater than 5°. 

Applications 

These limit switches provide a solution for monitoring hinged protective guards with 

small opening radius, used on machines with low inertia (no rundown time). 

They are specially suitable for existing machines which need to be brought in-line with 

the latest standards and directives since they can be used in conjunction with existing 

covers, including those whose mounting is somewhat imprecise. 

Mounting of the limit switch improves the machine operator's level of safety by limiting 

the opening of the protective guard and reducing the risk of touching any moving parts 

before they have come to a stop. 

2/14

Presentation 

0 


2 

Coded magnetic safety switches 

Presentation 

3 types of cases 

p PBT plastic body 

p Short and narrow XCS DMC 

p Flat and wide XCS DMP 

p Round Ø 30 XCS DMR 

p Output on cable length 2 m, 5 m and 10 m 

Contacts 

Coded magnetic safety switches are fitted with 2-pole (XCS DMC/XCS DMR) 

and 3-pole (XCS DMP) Reed type contacts with or without a closed-door 

display LED. 

The N/C and N/O contacts open as soon as the magnet is at a distance from 

the sensor of about 8 mm for XCS DMP/XCS DMR and about 5 mm for 

XCS DMC. 

2 

Connection 

The Reed technology contacts used in the safety circuits must necessarily be 

connected to the Preventa safety modules. 

Applications 

These devices provide a solution for the monitoring of cover or guards on 

inertia-less machines. 

They are particularly suitable for imprecise installations and difficult environments 

(dust, liquids,…). 

2/15



2 


Presentation 

With plunger or rotary head 

2 

Contacts 

p Metal case. 

p Short and narrow XCS M. 

p With protective plate, preventing both access to the fixing screws or 

adjustment of the head by unauthorised personnel. 

p Torx fixing screws. 

p Pre-cabled, length 1 m, 2 m or 5 m. 

XCS M3 limit switches are fitted with 3-pole contacts and XCS M4 switches 

are fitted with 4-pole contacts. 

4 versions of complete switches are available incorporating these contacts: 

- metal end plunger, 

- roller plunger, 

- thermoplastic roller lever, 

- diameter 16 mm steel roller lever. 

Connection 

Pre-cabled switches, either 7 x 0.5 mm² or 9 x 0.34 mm². 

Applications 

These switches provide a solution for monitoring covers, guards or grilles on 

machines without inertia, and in association with key operated switches. 

When used on their own, they are always installed in “positive mode” or combined in 

pairs, with one switch being in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”, and 

can, when connected to Preventa modules, provide a category 4 safety control 

system. 

XPS 

2/16

Presentation 

0 


2 


Presentation 

Operating heads 

Limit switches with manual reset knob are either fitted 

with a head for linear movement operators (plunger) 

or a head for rotary movement operators. The various 

types of operating heads include: plunger, roller 

plunger and roller lever. 

2 body versions 

p Plastic case, narrow, with 1 cable entry for XCK P, 

p Plastic case, wide, with 2 cable entries for XCK T. 

2 


13 

14 

22 21 

12 11 

22 21 

Limit switches with manual reset knob incorporate a 

2-pole contact block with positive opening operation. 

The contact arrangement can either be N/C + N/O break 

before make (slow break) or N/C + N/C snap action for 

the XCK P, N/C + N/O break before make (slow break) 

for the XCK T. 

After actuation, the N/C contact(s) remain tripped in 

the open position until manually reset using the reset 

knob on front of switch. 

Applications 

Limit switches with manual resetting are well suited for 

the detection and control of faults on hoisting equipment, 

lifts, elevators… 

2 

1 

3 

The switches conform to the standard EN 81-1. 

(with slow-break action contacts only). 

They are suitable for detection and control of: 

-overtravelofthelift1, 

- the speed of the lift, using intermediate speed 

limiter 2, 

- the engagement of the anti-chute block (when an 

overspeed is detected) 3. 

1 

2/17

Presentation 

0 


2 


Metal, types XCS A, XCS B, XCS C and XCS E 

Plastic, double insulated, types XCS MP, XCS PA, XCS TA 

and XCS TE 

Metal, 

types XCS A, 

XCS B, XCS C, 

XCS E 

Switches with or without locking of the operating key 

2 

Pages 2/20 to 2/25 

Plastic, 

types XCS MP, 

XCS PA, XCS TA, 

XCS TE 

Switches with or without locking of the operating key 

Pages 2/36 to 2/41 

2/18


0 


2 


Metal, types XCS A, XCS B, XCS C and XCS E 

Plastic, double insulated, types XCS MP, XCS PA, XCS TA 

and XCS TE 

Environment 

Limit switch type XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCS E (metal case) XCS MP, XCS PA, XCS TA, XCS TE (plastic case) 

Conforming Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

to standards 


Product certifications UL, CSA UL, CSA (c UL us for XCS MP) 

Protective treatment 

Standard version: “TC” 

Ambient air temperature 

Operation: - 25…+ 70 °C (- 25…+ 40°C for XCS E and - 25…+ 60°C for XCS TE) 

Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C (- 25…+ 80 °C for XCS MP) 

Vibration resistance 

5 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (6 gn (10…55 Hz) for XCS MP) 

Shock resistance 

10 gn (duration 11 ms) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (50 gn (duration 11 ms) for XCS MP) 

Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC/EN 60536. Class 2 conforming to IEC/EN 60536 

2 

Degree of protection IP 67 conforming to IEC/EN 60529 and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 (1) 

Cable entry 1 entry (XCS A, XCS B and XCS C)or2entries(XCS E) 

tapped for Pg 13.5 (n° 13) cable gland, tapped M20 or 

tapped 1/2" NPT 

1 entry (XCS PA and XCS TE) or 2 entries (XCS TA) 

tapped for Pg 11 (n° 11) cable gland, tapped M16 or 

tapped 1/2" NPT (with adaptor) for 

XCS TA and XCS TE 

Connecting cable – Pre-cabled, either 4 x 0.5 mm2 or 6 x 0.5 mm2 

(XCS MP) 

Materials 

XCS A/B/C/E 

XCS MP/PA/TA/TE/PL/TL/PR/TR 

Zamak enclosure 

Polyamide PA66 fibreglass impregnated enclosure 

Operating keys (all types): steel XC60, surface treated 

Contact block characteristics 

Rated operational characteristics 

Rated thermal current in enclosure 

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCS PA, XCS TA: a AC-15, A300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 6 A 

XCS E, XCS TE: a AC-15, B300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 3 A 

XCS MP: a AC-15, C300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 0,75 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 1,5 A 

All models: c DC-13; Q300: Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.55 A 

conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCS PA, XCS TA: Ithe = 10 A 

XCS E, XCS TE: Ithe = 6 A 

XCS MP: Ithe = 2,5 A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14 

Rated impulse withstand voltage XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCS PA, XCS TA: Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

XCS E, XCS TE, XCS MP: Uimp = 4 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-4 

Positive operation N/C contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, Section 3 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 30 mΩ conforming to IEC/EN 60957-5-4 

Short-circuit protection 

10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) 

Cabling 

Screw clamp terminals. Clamping capacity, min.: 1 x 0.5 mm 2 ,max.:2x1.5mm 2 with or without cable end 

Pre-cabled: 4 x 0.5 mm2 or6x0.5mm2 (XCS MP) 

Electrical durability Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C. Only applicable to XCS MP 

Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13. 

Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles per hour. 

Load factor: 0.5 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C 


Maximum operating rate : 900 operating cycles per hour. 

a.c. supply 

a 50/60 Hz 

o inductive circuit 

1 

0,5 

230 V 12/24/48 V 

110 V 

0,2 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

d.c. supply c Power broken in W for 1 million operating cycles Number of operating cycles: 100,000 

AC15 DC13 

Voltage V 24 48 120 V 125 30 125 

o W 13 9 7 A 1.5 2.3 0.55 

(1) Live parts of the switches are protected against the penetration of dust and water. However, when installing take all 

necessary precautions to prevent the penetration of solid bodies, or liquids with a high dust content, into the key aperture. 

Not recommended for use in saline atmospheres. 

2/19

References, 


0 


2 


Metal, turret head (1), types XCS A, B, C and E 

1or2cableentriesM20x1.5(2) 

Type of switch Without locking of key With locking of key, manual unlocking (3) 

2 

LED indication on opening Without 1 orange 1 orange Without 1 orange 1 orange Without 1 orange 1 orange 

of N/C contacts LED LED LED LED LED LED 

z 24/48 V a 110/240 V z 24/48 V a 110/240 V z 24/48 V a 110/240 V 

References of switches without operating key ( 

N/C contact with positive opening operation) 

22 21 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS A502 XCS A512 XCS A522 XCS B502 XCS B512 XCS B522 XCS C502 XCS C512 XCS C522 


slow break (4) 

22 21 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS A702 XCS A712 XCS A722 XCS B702 XCS B712 XCS B722 XCS C702 XCS C712 XCS C722 



12 11 

13 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 14 13 34 33 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS A802 – – XCS B802 – – XCS C802 – – 


Weight (kg) 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.475 0.475 0.475 0.480 0.480 0.480 

Complementary characteristics not shown under general characteristics (page 2/19) 

Actuation speed 

Resistance to forcible key withdrawal 


Maximum operating rate 

Minimum force for extraction of key 

Cable entry 

Materials 

Maximum: 0.5 m/s, minimum: 0.01 m/s 

XSC B and XCS C: 1500N;XCS E: 2000 N 

XCS A and XCS E: > 1 million operating cycles 

XCS B and XCS C: 0.6 million operating cycles 

For maximum durability: 600 operating cycles per hour 

≥ 20 N 

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C: 1 cable entry. XCS E: 2 cable entries 

Entries tapped M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland. Clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm 

Body : zamak. Head : zamak. Safety screws : 5-lobe torque. Protective plate : steel. 

References of operating keys 

Description Straight key Wide key Pivoting key Latch for sliding doors 

ForlimitswitchesXCSA,B,C,E XCS Z01 XCS Z02 XCS Z03 XCS Z05 

Weight (kg) 0.020 0.020 0.095 0.600 

(1) Adjustable throughout 360° in 90° steps. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch. 

(2) For cable entries tapped for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland, replace the last number in the reference by 1 (see page 2/22). 

Example: XCS A502 becomes XCS A501. 

(3) Unlocking by pushbutton for XCS Bppp and by key operated lock for XCS Cppp. 

(4) Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states whilst the operating key is inserted in the head of the switch. 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/27 and 2/28 

Connections: 

page 2/29 

2/20

References, 

characteristics (continued) 0 


2 


Metal, turret head (1), types XCS A, B, C and E 

1 or 2 cable entries M20 x 1.5 (2) 

Type of switch 

With interlocking, locking by electromagnet 

2 

Type of interlocking Locking on de-energisation and unlocking on energisation of electromagnet (3). 

To order a limit switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the electromagnet, replace the 

2nd number by 5 in the references shown below. 

Example: XCS E5312 becomes XCS E5512. 

LED indication 

Orange LED: “guard open” signalling. 

Green LED: “guard closed and locked” signalling. 

Supply voltage of electromagnet a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 48 V a or c 110/120 V (4) a or c 220/240 V (4) 

(50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) 

Type of contact on electromagnet N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O N/C + N/O N/C + N/O 



22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS E5312 – XCS E5322 XCS E5332 XCS E5342 



14 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 14 13 34 33 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS E7312 XCS E73127 XCS E7322 XCS E7332 XCS E7342 



3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS E8312 (6) XCS E83127 (6) XCS E8322 (6) XCS E8332 (6) XCS E8342 (6) 


Weight (kg) 1.140 1.140 1.140 1.140 1.140 

Electromagnet characteristics 

Load factor 100 % 

Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c 110/120 V a or c 220/240 V 

Voltage limits - 20 % + 10 % of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 

Service life 

20,000 hours 

Consumption 

LED indicator characteristics 

Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA 

Rated insulation voltage 50 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 250 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 

Current consumption 7mA 7mA 

Rated operational voltage a or c 24/48 V a 110/240 V 

Voltage limits a or c 20...52 V (including ripple on c) a 95...264 V (including ripple on c) 

Service life 100,000 hours 100,000 hours 

Protection against overvoltages Yes Yes 


(2) For cable entries tapped for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland, replace the last number in the reference by 1 (see page 2/23). 


(3) A key operated lock enables the forced opening of the interlocking device, allowing key withdrawal and subsequent opening of the N/C safety contacts. 

(4) For use on c 110/120 V or c 220/240 V, remove the LED indicator module. 


(6)UnitssuppliedwithasinglegreenLED. 

Dimensions: 


Connections: 

pages 2/29 to 2/31 

2/21

References, 


0 


2 


Metal, turret head (1), typesXCSA,B,CandE 

Cable entries tapped for Pg 13.5 (n° 13) cable gland 


2 



z 24/48 V a 110/240 V z 24/48 V a 110/240 V z 24/48 V a 110/240 V 



22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 




14 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 14 13 34 33 






Weight (kg) 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.475 0.475 0.475 0.480 0.480 0.480 







Cable entry 

Materials 


XCS B and XCS C: 1500N;XCS E: 2000 N 




≥ 20 N 

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C: 1 cable entry. XCS E: 2 cable entries. 

Entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5). Clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm. 





Weight (kg) 0.020 0.020 0.095 0.600 




Dimensions: 


2/22 

Connections: 

page 2/29

References, 



2 



Cable entries tapped for Pg 13.5 (n° 13) cable gland 



2 


To order a limit switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the electromagnet, replace 

the 2 nd number by 5 in the references shown below. 





Supply voltage of electromagnet a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c 110/120 V (3) a or c 220/240 V (3) 

(50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) 

Type of contact on electromagnet N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O 2 N/C 



22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS E5311 – XCS E5321 – XCS E5331 – XCS E5341 – 



14 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 14 13 34 33 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS E7311 XCS E73117 XCS E7321 XCS E73217 XCS E7331 XCS E73317 XCS E7341 XCS E73417 



3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C 


XCS E8311 

(5) 

XCS E83117 

(5) 

XCS E8321 

(5) 

– XCS E8331 

(5) 

– XCS E8341 

(5) 

– 

Weight (kg) 1.140 1.140 1.140 1.140 



Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c 110/120 V a or c 220/240 V 


Service life 

20,000 hours 

Consumption 






Voltage limits a or c 20...52 V (including ripple on c) a 95...264 V (including ripple on c) 

Service life 100,000 hours 100,000 hours 






(5) Units supplied with a single green LED. 

Dimensions: 


Connections: 

pages 2/29 to 2/31 

2/23

References, 


0 


2 


Metal, turret head (1),typesXCSA,B,CandE 

Cable entries tapped 1/2" NPT 


2 



z 24/48 V a 110/240 V z 24/48 V a 110/240 V z 24/48 V a 110/240 V 



22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 




14 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 14 13 34 33 






Weight (kg) 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.475 0.475 0.475 0.480 0.480 0.480 







Cable entry 

Materials 


XCS B and XCS C: 1500 N; XCS E: 2000 N 




≥ 20 N 

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C: 1 cable entry. XCS E: 2 cable entries. 

Entries tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

Body : zamak. Head : zamak. Safety screws : 5-lobe torque. Protective plate : steel 




Weight (kg) 0.020 0.020 0.095 0.600 




Dimensions: 


2/24 

Connections: 

page 2/29

References, 



2 






2 


To order a limit switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the electromagnet, replace 

the 2nd number by 5 in the references shown below. 





Supply voltage of electromagnet a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c 110/120 V (3) a or c 220/240 V (3) 

(50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) 

Type of contact on electromagnet N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O 



3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS E5313 – XCS E5323 XCS E5333 – XCS E5343 



22 21 

22 21 

13 

14 

32 31 

33 

34 

13 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS E7313 XCS E73137 XCS E7323 XCS E7333 XCS E73337 XCS E7343 



14 



12 11 

22 21 

32 31 

XCS E8313 – XCS E8323 XCS E8333 – – 

(5) (5) (5) 

Weight (kg) 1.140 1.140 1.140 1.140 



Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c 110/120 V a or c 220/240 V 


Service life 

20,000 hours 

Consumption 






Voltage limits a or c 20...52 V (including ripple on c) a 95/264 V (including ripple on c) 

Service life 100 000 hours 100 000 hours 






Dimensions: 


Connections: 

pages 2/29 to 2/31 

2/25

References 

0 


2 


Metal, turret head, types XCS A, B, C and E 

Spare parts 

809847 

Description For use Supply voltage Unit Weight 

with reference kg 

2 

XCS Z3p 

809849 

1orangeLEDindicator XCS A a or c 24/48 V XCS Z31 0.040 

module with cover, XCS B 

seal and 2 fixing screws XCS C 

a 110/240 V XCS Z32 0.040 

1 orange LED + 1 green XCS E53pp a or c 24/48 V XCS Z41 0.175 

LED indicator module 

with cover + lock (1), a 110/240 V XCS Z45 0.175 

seal and 4 fixing screws 

(lock supplied with 2 keys) XCS E55pp a or c 24/48 V XCS Z42 0.175 

a 110/240 V XCS Z46 0.175 

809848 

XCS E73pp a or c 24/48 V XCS Z43 0.175 

a 110/240 V XCS Z47 0.175 

XCS E75pp a or c 24/48 V XCS Z44 0.175 

XCS Z4p 

a 110/240 V XCS Z48 0.175 

Description For use Positions of key Reference Weight 

with withdrawal from lock kg 

Cover + lock XCS E53pp LOCK : yes/UNLOCK : yes XCS Z51 0.025 

with seal and 4 fixing screws 

(lock supplied with 2 keys) LOCK : yes/UNLOCK : no XCS Z55 0.025 

LOCK : no/UNLOCK : yes XCS Z59 0.025 

809849 

XCS E55pp LOCK : yes/UNLOCK : yes XCS Z52 0.025 

LOCK : yes/UNLOCK : no XCS Z56 0.025 



LOCK : yes/UNLOCK : no XCS Z57 0.025 


XCS Z5p 

XCS Z6p 



Blanking plugs for XCS A, – XCS Z27 0.050 

operating head slot XCS B, C, 

(Soldinlotsof10) 

XCS E 

809850 

Keys for interlock XCS C, – XCS Z25 0.100 

“forced opening” device XCS E 


XCS Z90 

Padlocking device XCS A, – XCS Z90 0.055 

to prevent insection XCS B, C, 

of operating key, 

XCS E 

forupto3padlocks 

(padlocks not supplied) 

(1) Lock supplied as standard with XCS E switches : key withdrawal in LOCK and UNLOCK positions. 

Dimensions: 


Connections: 

pages 2/29 to 2/31 

2/26

Dimensions 

0 


2 



XCS Appp 

XCS Bppp, XCS Cppp 

33 

7 

33 

37 

33 

7 

52 

33 

2 

38 

113,5 

60 43,5 

38 

113,5 

60 43,5 

28,5 

(1) 

44 

16 

= 30 = 

40 

(1) 

44 

16 

= 30 = 

40 

(1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland (1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3 Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3 

XCS Epppp 

48 

33 

7 

33 3,5 

6 

26 

38 

43,5 

146 

95 12 

(1) 

113 

(1) 

44 

16 

= 88 

= 

98 

(1) 26 

(1) 2 tapped entries for cable gland 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3 

References: 

pages 2/22 to 2/25 

Connections: 

pages 2/29 to 2/31 

2/27



2 



XCS Z01 

Adaptor shank (1) 

XCS Z02 

81,5 

2,5 

35 

3 

2,5 

55,5 

11 

== 

2 

25 

= = 

15 

= = 

14 

35 = 

25 

51 

33 20 11 

20 7,5 

= 

33 

2,5 

(1) Adaptor (supplied with operating key XCS Z01) for replacing, without drilling 

additional fixing hole, an XCK J safety limit switch with operating key ZCK Y07 

by an XCS A, B, C or E safety limit switch with operating key XCS Z01 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 10 Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 10 

XCS Z03 

XCS Z05 

2,5 

76 

30 

48 

41 

40 

11 

26 7 

30 

11 

42 

12,5 

115 64 

7 

2,5 

11 

25 

30 

25 

33 

17 

23 

40 

32 

140 

18 

20 6 

20 

4xM5 

100 20 

6 

Ø : 4 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3 

Operating radius required for key 

XCS Z01 

XCS Z02 

R = 2000 

R = 2000 

R = 2000 

R = 2000 

XCS Z03 

83,5 

83,5 

57,5 

57,5 

55 

22 

R =150 

16,5 

R = 400 

78 

78 

R = minimum radius 

References: 

pages 2/22 to 2/25 

Connections: 

pages 2/29 to 2/31 

2/28

Operation, 

Connections 0 


2 



Operation 


XCS p5ppp XCS p7ppp XCS p8ppp Contact operation 


Contact open 

Unstable 

31 

25 

23 

22,5 

21 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

31 

25 

23 

22 

21,5 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25 

23 

31 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

2 

Connections 

Wiring to category 1 conforming to EN 954-1 Wiring to category 3 conforming to EN 954-1 

Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O contact and protection 

Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O contact with mixed redundancy of the 

fuse to prevent shunting of the N/C contact, either by cable 

contacts and the associated control relay. 

damage or by unauthorised tampering. 

To activate K1, it is necessary to displace the lever when the supply is 

switched on. 

. 

F1 

F1 

O 

K1 

K1 

O 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

(1) 

14 13 

22 21 

34 33 

K2 

(1) 

I 

KM1 

KM2 

I 

X 

K2 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

X 

K1 

K2 

H1 

KM2 

M 

M 

(1) Signalling contact H1 : “key not inserted” indicator. 

Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1. Wiring method used in conjunction with Preventa safety module. 

(The key operated safety limit switch is generally used in conjunction with a standard limit switch) 

Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia) 

Locking or interlocking device rely on redundancy and autocheck. 

The safety modules ensure these functions. 

Method for machines with long rundown time (high inertia) 

XPS 

XPS VN 

XPS 

Locking by operating key and actuation in positive 

mode associated with a safety module. 

Interlocking device with operating key 

of the guard and zero speed detection. 

References: 

pages 2/22 to 2/25 

Dimensions: 


2/29

Connections 

0 


2 

Safety switches with electromagnet interlocking 

Metal, turret head, type XCS E 

Wiring to category 1 conforming to EN 954-1 

Wiring examples with protection fuse to prevent shunting of the N/C contact, either by cable damage or by unauthorised tampering. 

Locking on de-energisation 

N/C + N/O + N/O 

XCS E53p3 

Locking on energisation 

N/C + N/O + N/O 

XCS E55p3 

2 

F1 

F1 

(1) 

(2) 

51 52 

21 

13 

33 

22 

14 

34 

(1) 

(2) 

51 52 

21 

13 

33 

22 

14 

34 

E1 E2 43 44 

X3 

OG 

GN 

X2 

E1 E2 43 44 

X3 

OG 

GN 

X2 

X1 

X1 

O 

O 

I 

X 

I 

X 

X 

X 

M 

M 

(1) Electromagnet (1) Electromagnet 

(2) Auxiliary contact (2) Auxiliary contact 

E1-E2 : Electromagnet supply 


43-44 : Electromagnet signalling contact 51-52 : Electromagnet signalling contact 

13-14 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 13-14 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 

33-X1 : LED (orange) : operating key withdrawn 33-X1 : LED (orange) : operating key withdrawn 

51-X1 : LED (green) : operating key inserted and locked 43-X1 : LED (green) : operating key inserted and locked 

21-52 : Safety pre-wiring obligatory 21-44 : Safety pre-wiring obligatory 

References: 

pages 2/22 to 2/25 

Dimensions: 


2/30



2 


Metal, turret head, type XCS E 


Wiring examples with redundancy of the limit switch contacts, without monitoring. 

Locking on de-energisation N/C+N/C+N/O 

Locking on de-energisation N/C + N/C + N/O 

XCS E73p3 

XCS E73pp7 

F1 

F1 

F2 

F2 

2 

(1) 

(2) 

51 52 

21 

31 

13 

22 

32 

14 

K1 

K2 

(1) 

(2) 

51 52 

21 

31 

13 

22 

32 

14 

K1 

K2 

E1 E2 43 44 

X3 

OG GN 

X1 

X2 

O 

I 

KM1 

KM2 

E1 E2 41 42 

X3 

OG GN 

X1 

X2 

O 

I 

KM1 

KM2 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

KM2 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

KM2 

M 

M 





43-44 : Electromagnet signalling contact 41-42 and 51-52 : Electromagnet signalling contact 

21-22 and 31-32 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 21-22 and 31-32 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 

13-X1 : LED (orange) : operating key withdrawn 13-X1 : LED (orange) : operating key withdrawn 

51-X1 : LED (green) : operating key inserted and locked 51-X1 : LED (green) : operating key inserted and locked 

21-52 : Safety pre-wiring obligatory 21-52 and 42-31 : Safety pre-wiring obligatory 

Locking on energisation NC + NC + NO 

XCS E75p3 

F1 

F2 

(1) 

(2) 

51 52 

21 

31 

13 

22 

32 K1 

14 

K2 

E1 E2 43 44 

X3 

K1 

OG GN 

X1 

K2 

X2 

O 

I 

KM1 

KM1 

KM2 

KM2 

M 

(1) Electromagnet 

(2) Auxiliary contact 


51-52 : Electromagnet signalling contact 

21-22 and 31-32 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 

13-X1 : LED (orange) : operating key withdrawn 

43-X1 : LED (green) : operating key inserted and locked 

21-44 : Safety pre-wiring obligatory 

References: 

pages 2/22 to 2/25 

Dimensions: 


2/31

References, 


Safety detection solutions 2 


Plastic, double insulated, fixed head, type XCS MP 

Pre-cabled, length 2 m, 5 m or 10 m 


Without locking of operating key 

2 

References of switches without operating key ( N/C contact with positive opening operation) (1) 

2-pole N/C + N/O 

break before make, slow break (2) 

BU/WH BU 

OG 

OG/WH 

XCS MP59Lp 

2-pole N/C + N/C 


BU/WH BU 

OG/WH OG 

XCS MP79Lp 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O 

break before make, slow break (2) 

BU/WH BU 

BN/WH BN 

OG 

OG/WH 

XCS MP70Lp 



BU/WH BU 

BN/WH BN 

OG/WH OG 

XCS MP80Lp 

Weight (kg) 0.110 



Resistance to forcible withdrawal of operating key 



8N 

> 1 million operating cycles 

Connection Pre-cabled, 4 x 0.5 mm 2 or6x0.5mm 2 




≥ 8N 


Description Straight key Right-angled key Pivoting key 

For right-hand door 

For left-hand door 

For switches XCS MP XCS Z81 XCS Z84 XCS Z83 XCS Z85 

Weight (kg) 0.015 0.025 0.085 0.085 

Spare parts 

Description Unit reference Weight 

kg 

Blanking plugs 

XCS Z29 0.005 

(Sold in lots of 10) 

(1) Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch (3). Basic reference, to be completed: replace the p by 2 for a 2 m long cable, by 5 for 5 m long cable 

or by 10 for a 10 m long cable. Example: XCS MP59Lp becomes XCS MP59L10 for a switch with a 10 m long cable. 


Dimensions: 

page 2/33 

Connections: 

page 2/34 

2/32

Dimensions 2 


detection solutions 2 




Dimensions 

XCS MP 

XCS Z81 

15 

30 

1 20 1 

35,9 

14 13,5 

28,2 

8,4 

35 

2 

XCS Z84 

58 

14 

2xØ9 

2xØ4,3 

78 

5,6 

62 

3,5 

9 

5 

14 

34 

14 

(1) 

3,5 

11,6 

33,8 

8,4 

(1) Ø 7.6, length 2, 5 or 10 m. 

XCS Z83 

= 

25 

34 

= 

= 

= 

(1) 

15 

13 

28,2 

(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 6. 

XCS Z85 

= 

25 

34 

= 

8,4 

3,5 

= 

= 

15 

13 

28,2 

8,4 

3,5 

(1) 

(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 6. 


page 2/32 

2/33

Operation, 







XCS Z81 

XCS Z84 

R = 930 mm 

R = 160 mm 

R = 160 mm 

R = 230 mm 

2 

66,8 

66,8 

36,4 

36,4 

XCS Z83 

XCS Z85 

R = 50 mm 

R = 50 mm 

43,8 

43,8 

43,8 

43,8 

R = 50 mm 

R = 50 mm 


XCS MP59p XCS MP79p XCS MP70p XCS MP80p 

5,5 

5,2 

28,2 

5,2 

28,2 

5,5 

5,2 

28,2 

5,2 

28,2 

BU-BU/WH 

OG-OG/WH 

BU-BU/WH 

OG-OG/WH 

BU-BU/WH 

BN-BN/WH 

OG-OG/WH 

BU-BU/WH 

BN-BN/WH 

OG-OG/WH 

Contact operation 


Contact open 

2/34

Connections 2 






Connections 


Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O contact and protection 

fuse to prevent shunting of the N/C contact, either by cable 

damage or by tampering. 

Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the 

associated control relays. 

Operating key withdrawal and re-insertion necessary on power-up, in order to activate K1. 

F1 

F1 

BU/WH BU 

(1) 

BN 

BN/WH 

OG 

OG/WH 

K1 

OG/WH OG 

BU/WH BU 

O 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

2 

O 

I 

KM2 

K2 

KM1 

I 

K1 

K1 

K2 

KM2 

K1 

K1 

K2 

M 

M 

(1) Signalling contact 

Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1. Wiring method used in conjunction with Preventa safety module 

(the key operated safety switch is generally used in conjunction with a standard limit switch) 


Locking or interlocking mechanism uses the principles of redundancy and autocheck. 


XCS MP 

XCS M 

XPS 

Locking by operating key and actuation in positive mode associated with a safety module 

2/35

References, 


0 


2 


Plastic, double insulated, turret head (1), types XCS PA, 

XCSTAandXCSTE 

1ou2cableentriesM16x1.5(2) 



2 



13 

14 

22 21 

11 

12 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/O XCS PA592 – 

break before make 


13 

2-pole N/O + N/C XCS PA692 – 

make before break 


14 

21 

2-pole N/C + N/C XCS PA792 – 


22 

22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

33 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O – XCS TA592 



34 

13 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O – XCS TA792 



14 

32 31 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C – XCS TA892 


Weight (kg) 0.110 0.160 


809980 


Maximum : 0.5 m/s, minimum : 0.01 m/s 

Resistance to forcible key withdrawal XCS PA, XCS TA : 2 N (50 N using operating keys XCS Z12 or XCS Z13 together with guard retaining device XCS Z21) 

XCSTE:500 N 


XCS PA, XCS TA : > 1 million operating cycles 

XCS TE : 1 million operating cycles 


For maximum durability : 600 operating cycles per hour 

Minimum force for extraction of key ≥ 15 to 30 N depending on type 

Cable entry 

XCS PA, XCS TE : 1 entry tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland 

XCS TA: 2 entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland 

Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm 

Materials 


References of accessories 

Tool for forced opening of interlocking XCS TE XCS Z100 0.050 

device (Sold in lots of 10) 

XCS Z91 

Padlocking device to prevent insertion XCS PA, XCS TA, XCS Z91 0.053 

of operating key, for up to 3 padlocks XCS TE 



(2) For cable entries tapped for n° 11 (Pg 11) cable gland, replace the last number in the reference by 1 (see page 2/38). 

Example: XCS PA592 becomes XCS PA591. 


Dimensions: 


2/36 

Connections: 

page 2/44 

Description For use with Unit Weight 

safety switches reference kg 

Blanking plugs for operating head slot XCS PA, XCS TA, XCS Z28 0.050 


XCS TE

References, 

characteristics (continued) 0 


2 



XCSTAandXCSTE 

1ou2cableentriesM16x1.5(2) 



2 


To order a safety switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the electromagnet, replace 


Example : XCS TE5312 becomes XCS TE5512. 

Supply voltage of electromagnet a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 120 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 230 V (50/60 Hz on a) 



13 

14 

22 21 

11 

12 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/O XCS TE5312 XCS TE5332 XCS TE5342 



13 

2-pole N/O + N/C XCS TE6312 XCS TE6332 XCS TE6342 



14 

21 

2-pole N/C + N/C XCS TE7312 XCS TE7332 XCS TE7342 


22 

Weight (kg) 0.360 0.360 0.360 



Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 120 V a or c 230 V 

Voltage limits - 20 %, + 10 % of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 

Service life 

20,000 hours 

Consumption 

10 VA max. 

References of operating keys and guard retaining device 

Description Straight key Key with wide fixing Pivoting key Right-angled key Guard retaining 

(5) device (6) 

For safety switches XCS PA, TA, TE XCS Z11 XCS Z12 XCS Z15 XCS Z13 XCS Z14 XCS Z21 

Weight (kg) 0.015 0.015 0.012 0.085 0.025 0.080 



Example: XCS TE5312 becomes XCS TE5311. 

(3) A special tool included with the safety switch enables forced opening of the interlocking device, allowing key withdrawal and subsequent opening of the N/C 

safety contacts. 


(5) 2 key lengths, XCS Z12: L = 40 mm, XCS Z15: L = 29 mm. 

(6) Only for use with XCS PA and XCS TA safety switches used in conjunction with operating keys XCS Z12, XCS Z13 and XCS Z15. 

Dimensions: 


Connections: 

page 2/44 

2/37

References, 


0 


2 



XCSTAandXCSTE 

Cable entries tapped for Pg 11 (n° 11) cable gland 



2 






13 

14 

22 21 

11 

12 

22 21 

13 




14 



21 

22 

22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

33 




34 

13 




14 

32 31 



Weight (kg) 0.110 0.160 





XCSTE:500 N 






Minimum force for extraction of key ≥ 15 N 

Cable entry XCS PA, XCS TE : 1 entry tapped for n° 11 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11). 

XCS TA: 2 entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11). 

Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm. 

Materials 





Setof10blankingplugs XCS PA, XCS TA, XCS Z28 0.050 

for operating head slot 

XCS TE 


device (Sold in lots of 10) 


XCS Z91 





Dimensions: 


Connections: 

page 2/44 

2/38

References, 



2 



XCSTAandXCSTE 




2 


To order a safety switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the electromagnet, replace the 

2nd number by 5 in the references shown below. 


Supply voltage of electromagnet a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 120 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 230 V (50/60 Hz on a) 



13 

14 

22 21 

11 

12 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/O XCS TE5311 XCS TE5331 XCS TE5341 



13 

2-pole N/O + N/C XCS TE6311 XCS TE6331 XCS TE6341 



14 

21 

2-pole N/C + N/C XCS TE7311 XCS TE7331 XCS TE7341 


22 

Weight (kg) 0.360 0.360 0.360 



Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 120 V a or c 230 V 

Voltage limits - 20 % + 10 % of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c) conforming to IEC 60947-1 

Service life 

20,000 hours 

Consumption 

10 VA max. 





Weight (kg) 0.015 0.015 0.012 0.085 0.025 0.080 


(2) A special tool included with the safety switch enables forced opening of the interlocking device, allowing key withdrawal and subsequent opening of the 

N/C safety contacts. 




Dimensions: 


Connections: 

page 2/44 

2/39

References, 


0 


2 



XCSTAandXCSTE 




2 



13 

14 

22 21 

11 

12 

22 21 




13 




14 

21 



22 

22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

33 




34 

13 




14 

32 31 



Weight (kg) 0.110 0.160 





XCSTE:500 N 






Minimum force for extraction of key ≥ 15 N 

Cable entry 

XCS PA : 1 entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

XCSTE:1 entry tapped 11 mm and fitted with metal adaptor DE9 RA1012 for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

XCS TA : 2 entries tapped 11 mm, 1 fitted with metal adaptor DE9 RA1012 for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

Second entry fitted with blanking plug. 

Materials 



XCS Z91 






Dimensions: 


2/40 

Connections: 

page 2/44 



Blanking plugs for operating head slot XCS PA, XCS TA, XCS Z28 0.050 


XCS TE 


device (Sold in lots of 10)

References, 



2 



XCSTAandXCSTE 




2 


To order a safety switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the electromagnet, replace 



Supply voltage of electromagnet a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 120 V (50/60 Hz on a) 



13 

14 

22 21 

11 

12 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/O XCS TE5313 XCS TE5333 



13 

2-pole N/O + N/C XCS TE6313 – 



14 

21 

2-pole N/C + N/C XCS TE7313 XCS TE7333 


22 

Weight (kg) 0.360 0.360 



Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 120 V 

Voltage limits - 20 %, + 10 % of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 

Service life 

20,000 hours 

Consumption 

10 VA max. 





Weight (kg) 0.015 0.015 0.012 0.085 0.025 0.080 


(2) A special tool included with the safety switch enables forced opening of the interlocking device, allowing key withdrawal and subsequent opening of the 

N/C safety contacts. 




Dimensions: 


Connections: 

page 2/44 

2/41

Dimensions 

0 


2 


Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCS PA, XCS TA 

and XCS TE 

XCS PAp91, XCS PAp92 

XCS PAp93 

2 

30 

7 

30 

30 

7 

30 

13,5 

93,5 

93,5 

34 

39 

34 

39 

(1) 13,2 = 20/22 = 

30 30 

(1) 30 

13,2 

= 20/22 = 

30 

(1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland (1) 1 cable entry tapped for 1/2" NPT conduit 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 ctrs., 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 ctrs. 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 ctrs., 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 ctrs. 

XCS TAp9p 

XCS TEpppp 

7 

7 

30 

30 

15 

34 

(3) 

39 

38 

43 

93,5 

114,5 

(2) 

(1) 

30 

12,5 

12,5 

20/22 

40,3 

52 

14,5 

33 

(1) 40 

20/22 4 

110 

(1) 2 tapped entries for cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor (1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor 

(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 ctrs., 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 ctrs. Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 ctrs., 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 ctrs. 

(3) 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 13.3 

1/2" NPT conduit adaptor 

DE9 RA1012 

(1) 

21 (2) 

(1) Tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit 

(2) 11 mm threaded shank 

References: 

pages 2/36 to 2/41 

Connections: 

page 2/44 

2/42



2 



and XCS TE 

XCS Z11 

Adaptor shank (1) 

XCS Z12, XCS Z15 

13 

65 

22 

15 

2 

4,7 

12 

12 

37 

22 

15 

5 

4,7 

6 

== 

40 = 

2 

13 

26 

L 

55 11 

2 

(1) Adaptor (supplied with operating key XCS Z11) for replacing, without 

drilling additional fixing hole, an XCK T safety switch with operating key 

XCK Y01 by an XCS TA safety switch with operating key XCS Z11 

Ø a : 2 elongated holes Ø 4.7 x 10 Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 4.7 x 10 

Ø b : 1 elongated hole for M4 or M4.5 screw L = 40 mm (XCS Z12) or 29 mm (XCS Z15) 

= 

2 

XCS Z13 

XCS Z14 

12 

42,5 

15 

6 

52 

27 

5 

22 

2 

42,5 

35 = 

13 

55 

4,7 

13 

26 

= 

2 

12 

26 

32 

66 

23 

28,5 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 4.7 x 10 Ø : 1 elongated hole Ø 4.7 x 10 


XCS Z11 

XCS Z12, XCS Z15 

R = 1200 

R = 1200 

R = 1500 

R = 1500 

71 71 

d 

d 

XCS Z13 

d = 46 mm (XCS Z12) or 35 mm (XCS Z15) 

XCS Z14 

R = 150 

R = 1500 

R = 1200 

R = 300 

48 

72 72 

48 

R = minimum radius 

References: 

pages 2/36 to 2/41 

Connections: 

page 2/44 

2/43

Operation, 

Connections 

0 


2 



and XCS TE 

Operation 


XCS PA5pp, XCS PA6pp, XCS PA7pp, XCS TA5pp XCS TA7pp XCS TA8pp 

XCS TE5ppp XCS TE6ppp XCS TE7ppp 

2 

24 

18,5 

17 

17,5 

16 

21-22 

13-14 

24 

17 

15 

18,5 

17 

21-22 

13-14 

24 

18,5 

17 

11-12 

21-22 

24 

19 

17 

19 

16 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

24 

19 

17 

17,5 

16 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

24 

17 

16,5 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 


Contact closed Contact open Unstable 

Connections 


Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O contact and protection fuse to prevent Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts 

shunting of the N/C contact, either by cable damage or by tampering. and the associated control relay. 

To activate K1, it is necessary to displace the lever when the supply is switched 

on. 

F1 

F1 

O 

O 

22 21 

13 

14 

33 

34 

(1) 

K1 

14 13 

22 21 

K1 

K2 

I 

KM1 

KM2 

K2 

KM1 

I 

X 

K1 

K2 

X 

K1 

K2 

KM2 

M 

M 

(1) Signalling contact 

Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1. Wiring method used in conjunction with safety module. 

(The key operated safety switch is generally used in conjunction with a standard switch) 


Method for machines with long rundown time (high inertia) 

Locking or interlocking device rely on redundancy and autocheck. 


XPS 

XPS VN 

XPS 

Locking by operating key and actuation in positive 

mode associated with a safety module. 

Interlocking device with operating key of the guard and zero speed detection. 

References: 

pages 2/36 to 2/41 

Dimensions: 


2/44


0 


2 


Plastic, double insulated, turret head, type XCS TE 


Wiring examples with protection fuse to prevent shunting of the N/C contact, either by cable damage or by tampering. 


N/C + N/O 

XCS TE53pp 


N/C + N/O 

XCS TE55pp 

F1 

(1) 

F1 

(1) 

2 

(2) 

(32) 21 22 

(2) (34) 

21 22 

13 

14 

13 

14 

E1 

E2 31 33 

E1 

E2 31 33 

O 

O 

I 

X 

I 

X 

X 

M 

X 

M 





13-14 : Safety contact, available for redundancy or signalling 13-14 : Safety contact, available for redundancy or signalling 


Wiring examples with redundancy of the safety switch contacts, without monitoring. 


N/C + N/C 

XCS TE73pp 


N/C + N/C 

XCS TE75pp 

F1 

F2 

F1 

F2 

(1) 

K1 

K2 

(1) 

K1 

K2 

(2) (32) 

21 22 

O 

(2) (34) 

21 22 

O 

E1 

E2 31 33 

11 

12 

I 

KM1 

KM2 

E1 

E2 31 33 

11 

12 

I 

KM1 

KM2 

KM1 

KM2 

KM1 

KM2 

K1 

K2 

M 

K1 

K2 

M 


(2) Electromagnet auxiliary contact (2) Electromagnet auxiliary contact 



11-12 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 11-12 : Safety contact, available for redundancy 

References: 

pages 2/36 to 2/41 

Dimensions: 


2/45

Presentation 

0 


2 


Plastic, double insulated, turret head, 

types XCS PL, XCS TL, XCS PR and XCS TR 

XCS PL 

with 1 

cable entry 

With rotary operating head, with elbowed lever (flush with rear of switch) or straight lever 

2 

Pages 2/48, 2/50, 2/52 

XCS PR 

with 1 

cable entry 

With rotary operating head, with spindle operator, for hinged covers and guards 

Pages 2/48, 2/50, 2/52 

XCS TL 

with 2 

cable entries 

With rotary operating head, with elbowed lever (flush with rear of switch) or straight lever 

Pages 2/48, 2/50, 2/52 

XCS TR 

with 2 

cable entries 

With rotary operating head, with spindle operator, for hinged covers and guards 

Pages 2/48, 2/50, 2/52 

2/46


0 


2 




Environment 

Conforming Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-4, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

to standards 



UL, CSA, BG 


Standard version: “TC” and “TH” 

Ambient air temperature Operation: - 25…+ 70 °C. Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C 

2 

Vibration resistance 50 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 

Shock resistance 50 gn (11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 

Electric shock protection Class 2 conforming to IEC 60536 

Degree of protection IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529 

Cable entry 

Depending on model, either: 1 entry tapped for Pg 11 (n° 11) cable gland, tapped M16 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2" NPT 

Materials 


Polyamide PA66 fibreglass impregnated enclosure 

Stainless steel lever and fixings. 

Rated operational characteristics a AC-15 ; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A) 

c DC-13; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0,27 A) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1 

Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664 

Positive operation N/C contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Section 3 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 30 mΩ conforming to IEC 60957-5-4 


Cabling 


Screw clamp terminals 

Clamping capacity, min.: 1 x 0.5 mm 2 , max.: 2 x 1.5 mm 2 with or without cable end 

Minimum actuation speed 

0.01 m/second 

Electrical durability Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C. 




a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz 


Millions of operating cycles 

1 

0,5 

0,2 

230 V 12/24/48 V 

110 V 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

d.c. supply c 

Power broken in W for 1 million operating cycles 

Voltage V 24 48 120 

o W 13 9 7 

2/47

References, 


0 


2 


Plastic, double insulated, turret head (1), 


1or2cableentriesM16x1.5(2) 

Type Elbowed lever (flush with rear of switch) Straight lever Spindle 

2 

To right 

Operator To left Centred To right or to left Centred Length 30 mm (3) 

References ( 


13 

14 

12 11 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/O XCS PL592 XCS PL582 XCS PL572 XCS PL562 XCS PL552 XCS PR552 


slow break 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/C XCS PL792 XCS PL782 XCS PL772 XCS PL762 XCS PL752 XCS PR752 

slow break 

Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.105 

To right 


References ( 


22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS TL592 XCS TL582 XCS TL572 XCS TL562 XCS TL552 XCS TR552 


slow break 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

32 31 14 13 34 33 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS TL792 XCS TL782 XCS TL772 XCS TL762 XCS TL752 XCS TR752 


slow break 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS TL892 XCS TL882 XCS TL872 XCS TL862 XCS TL852 XCS TR852 

slow break 

Weight (kg) 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.155 


Lever displacement tripping angle 5° 


1 million operating cycles 

Minimum torque 

For tripping: 0.1 N.m; for positive opening: 0.25 N.m (XCS PL and XCS PR), 0.45 N.m (XCS TL and XCS TR) 

Cable entry 

XCS Pp: 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland. Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm 

XCS Tp: 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland. Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm 

(Switch supplied with 1 entry fitted with blanking plug) 

(1) Adjustable through 360° in 90° steps. Switches supplied with 2 additional self locking screws for positive fixing of the operating head. 


Example: XCS PL592 becomes XCS PL591. 

(3) For switches with 80 mm spindle: replace the second reference digit by 6. E.g.: XCS PR562. The weight increases by 0.032 kg. 

2/48

Operation, 

dimensions, 

connections 

0 


2 




1 or 2 cable entries M16 x 1.5 

Operation 

Operator displacement 

XCS PLp92, XCS PLp72 XCS PLp82, XCS PLp52 XCS TLp92, XCS TLp72 XCS TLp82, XCS TLp52 XCS PRp52 XCS TRp52 

XCS PLp62 

XCS TLp62 

or 

or 


XCS PL592, XCS PL572 XCS PL582, XCS PL552 XCS TL592, XCS TL572 XCS TL582, XCS TL552 XCS PR552 XCS TR552 

XCS PL562 

XCS TL562 

0 

10 

21-22 

13-14 

-90 

0 

-10 +10 

+90 

21-22 

13-14 

0 

10 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 


XCS PL762 

XCS TL762 

0 

-10 +10 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

0 

-10 +10 

21-22 

13-14 

0 

-10 +10 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

2 

0 

11-12 

21-22 



Contact open 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

0 

10 

0 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

° 

0 

-10 +10 

0 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

0 

-10 +10 

XCS TL892, XCS TL872 XCS TL882, XCS PL852 XCS TR852 

XCS TL862 

° 0 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

Dimensions 

Wiring schemes 

XCS PLpp2 XCS TLpp2 Category 1 conforming to EN 954-1 

27,4 

16 

27,4 

16 

Example with cable short-circuit protection 

fuse 

2,5 

2,5 

2,5 

2,5 

5,3 

F1 

5,3 

70 

43 

72,5 

70 

43 

72,5 

22 21 

13 

14 

28 

33 

28 

33 

O 

23,35 

87,5 

23,35 

12,5 

108,35 

(3) 

(2) 

I 

X 

X 

M 

(1) 

30 

20/22 

30 

(1) 

30 

12,5 

20/22 

40,3 

52 


Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O contact 

with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the 


(1) 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 (1) 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3x8.3 on 22mm centres (2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3x8.3 on 22mm centres 

2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres 

(3) 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3x13.3 

XCS PRpp2 

L 

XCS TRpp2 

L 

5 

5 

M4 

M4 

96,25 

32,1 

(1) 

30 

8,5 

13 

22 

28 

20/22 

30 

41,75 

117 

32,1 

12,5 

(1) 

30 

12,5 

8,5 

13 

22 

28 

(3) 

20/22 

(1) 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 (1) 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 


2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres 

2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres 

L=30(XCSPRp52) or 80 (XCS PRp62) 


L=30(XCSTRp52) or 80 (XCS TRp62) 

40,3 

52 

41,75 

(2) 

F1 

K1 

K1 

K2 

14 13 

K2 

22 21 

K1 

K2 

34 33 

O 

I 

KM1 

H1 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

KM2 

KM2 

To activate K1, the lever or the spindle must be 

rotated when the supply is switched on. 

H1: “lever or spindle displaced from initial 

position” indicator. 

When used in conjunction with a XPS safety 

module and another safety switch, the rotary 

lever or spindle operator safety switch can 

provide a category 3 or 4 control and 

monitoring system for moving guards 

conforming to EN 954-1. 

M 

2/49

References, 


0 


2 






2 

To right 


References ( 


13 

14 

12 11 

22 21 



slow break 

22 21 


slow break 

Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.105 

To right 


References ( 


22 21 

22 21 

12 11 

13 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

33 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS TL591 XCS TL581 XCS TL571 XCS TL561 XCS TL551 XCS TR551 


slow break 

34 

13 



slow break 

14 

32 31 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS TL891 XCS TL881 XCS TL871 XCS TL861 XCS TL851 XCS TR851 

slow break 

Weight (kg) 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.155 


Lever displacement tripping angle 5° 





Cable entry 

XCS Pp: 1 cable entry tapped for n° 11 cable gland to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11). Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm. 

XCS Tp: 2 cable entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11). Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm. 

(Switch supplied with 1 entry fitted with blanking plug). 

(1) Adjustable through 360° in 90° steps. Switches supplied with 2 additional self locking screws for positive fixing of the operating head. 

(2) For switches with 80 mm spindle: replace the second reference digit 5 with a 6. E.g.: XCS PR551 becomes XCS PR561. The weight increases by 0.032 kg. 

2/50

Operation, 

dimensions, 

connections 

0 


2 





Operation 


XCS PLp91, XCS PLp71 XCS PLp81, XCS PLp51 XCS TLp91, XCS TLp71 XCS TLp81, XCS TLp51 XCS PRp51 XCS TRp51 

XCS PLp61 

XCS TLp61 

or 

or 



XCS PL561 

XCS TL561 

0 

10 

21-22 

13-14 

-90 

0 

-10 +10 

+90 

21-22 

13-14 

0 

10 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 


XCS PL761 

XCS TL761 

0 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

-10 +10 -10 +10 

0 

21-22 

13-14 

0 

-10 +10 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

2 

0 

11-12 

21-22 



Contact open 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

0 

0 

21-22 

21-22 

0 

31-32 

31-32 

11-12 

13-14 

13-14 

21-22 

10 

-10 +10 

-10 +10 

0 

XCS TL891, XCS TL871 XCS TL881, XCS PL851 

XCS TR851 

XCS TL861 

0 

° 0 ° 0 

11-12 

11-12 

11-12 

21-22 

21-22 

21-22 

31-32 

31-32 

31-32 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

Dimensions 



27,4 

16 

27,4 

16 

Example with cable short-circuit protection fuse 

2,5 

2,5 

70 

5,3 

43 

72,5 

2,5 

2,5 

70 

5,3 

43 

72,5 

F1 

22 21 

13 

14 

28 

33 

28 

33 

O 

23,35 

87,5 

23,35 

12,5 

108,35 

(3) 

(2) 

I 

X 

X 

M 

(1) 

30 

20/22 

30 

(1) 

30 

12,5 

20/22 

40,3 

52 


Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O contact 

with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the 


(1) 1 cable entry tapped for n° 11 cable gland (1) 2 cable entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland 




XCS PRpp1 

XCS TRpp1 

L 

L 

5 

5 

M4 

M4 

96,25 

32,1 

(1) 

30 

8,5 

13 

22 

28 

20/22 

30 

41,75 

(1) 1 cable entry tapped for n° 11 cable gland (1) 2 cable entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland 



L=30(XCSPRp51) or 80 (XCS PRp61) 


L=30(XCSTRp51) or 80 (XCS TRp61) 

117 

32,1 

12,5 

(1) 

30 

12,5 

8,5 

13 

22 

28 

(3) 

20/22 

40,3 

52 

41,75 

(2) 

F1 

K1 

K1 

K2 

14 13 

K2 

22 21 

K1 

K2 

34 33 

KM1 



H1: “lever or spindle displaced from initial position” 

indicator. 


module and another safety switch, the rotary lever 

or spindle operator safety switch can provide a 

category 3 or 4 control and monitoring system for 

moving guards conforming to 

EN 954-1. 

O 

I 

H1 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

KM2 

KM2 

M 

2/51

References, 


0 


3 






2 

To right 


References ( 


13 



slow break 

14 

12 11 

22 21 

22 21 


slow break 

Weight (kg) 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.120 

To right 


References ( 

contact with positive opening operation) 

22 21 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O ñ ñ ñ ñ ñ XCS TR553 


slow break 

22 21 



slow break 

12 11 

13 

14 

32 31 

22 21 

33 

34 

13 

14 

32 31 

3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C ñ XCS TL883 XCS TL873 ñ ñ XCS TR853 

slow break 

Weight (kg) 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.170 


Lever displacement tripping angle 5 





Cable entry 

XCS Pp: 1 cable entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

XCS Tp: 2 cable entries tapped 11 mm, 1 fitted with metal adaptor DE9-RA1012 for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

(Switch supplied with 1 entry fitted with blanking plug). 

(1) Adjustable through 360 in 90 steps. Switches supplied with 2 additional self locking screws for positive fixing of the operating head. 

(2) For switches with 80 mm spindle: replace the second reference digit 5 with a 6. E.g.: XCS PR553 becomes XCS PR563. The weight increases by 0.032 kg. 

2/52

Operation, 

dimensions, 

connections 

0 


3 





Operation 


XCS PLp93 

XCS PLp83 

XCS PLp73 

XCS PLp53 

XCS PLp63 

XCS TL793 

XCS TLp73 

XCS TL763 

XCS TLp83 

XCS TL753 

XCS PRp53 

XCS TRp53 

or 

or 


XCS PL593 

XCS PL573 

XCS PL563 

0 

10 

21-22 

13-14 

XCS PL793 

XCS PL773 

XCS PL763 

XCS PL583 

XCS PL553 

-90 

0 

-10 +10 

+90 

XCS PL783 

XCS PL753 

21-22 

13-14 

XCS TL793 

XCS TL773 

XCS TL763 

0 

10 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

XCS TL783 

XCS TL753 

0 

-10 +10 

+90 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

XCS PR553 

0 

-10 +10 

21-22 

13-14 

XCS TR553 

0 

-10 +10 

XCS TL873 XCS TL883 XCS PR753 XCS TR753 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

2 

0 

0 

11-12 

21-22 



Contact open 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

Dimensions 



27,4 

16 

27,4 

16 

Example with cable short-circuit protection fuse 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

0 

11-12 

21-22 

0 

-10 +10 

XCS TR853 

0 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

2,5 

2,5 

70 

5,3 

43 

72,5 

2,5 

2,5 

70 

5,3 

43 

72,5 

F1 

22 21 

13 

14 

28 

33 

28 

33 

O 

23,35 

87,5 

13,5 

23,35 

12,5 

108,35 

(1) 13,2 20/22 

(1) 12,5 

30 

30 

30 

(3) 

(2) 

20/22 

40,3 

52 

(1) 1 cable entry tapped for 1/2" NPT conduit (1) 2 entries tapped 11 mm for 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor 

ÿ : 2 elongated holes ÿ 4.3x8.3 on 22mm centres (2) 2 elongated holes ÿ 4.3x8.3 on 22mm centres 

2 holes ÿ 4.3 on 20 mm centres 2 holes ÿ 4.3 on 20 mm centres 

(3) 2 elongated holes ÿ 5.3x13.3 

XCS PRpp3 

L 

XCS TRpp3 

L 

5 

5 

M4 

M4 

F1 

I 

K1 

X 

14 13 

22 21 

X 


Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O 

contact with mixed redundancy of the 

contacts and the associated control relays 

34 33 

O 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

M 

96,25 

32,1 

8,5 

13 

22 

28 

41,75 

13,5 

117 

32,1 

12,5 

8,5 

13 

22 

28 

(3) 

41,75 

(2) 

K1 

K2 

K2 

K1 

K2 

I 

KM1 

H1 

KM2 

KM2 

M 

(1) 

30 

13,2 

20/22 

30 

(1) 

30 

12,5 

20/22 

(1) 1 cable entry tapped for 1/2" NPT conduit (1) 2 entries tapped 11 mm for 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor 

ÿ : 2 elongated holes ÿ 4.3x8.3 on 22mm centres (2) 2 elongated holes ÿ 4.3x8.3 on 22mm centres 

2 holes ÿ 4.3 on 20 mm centres 2 holes ÿ 4.3 on 20 mm centres 

L = 30 (XCS PRp53) or 80 (XCS PRp63) 

(3) 2 elongated holes ÿ 5.3x13.3 

L = 30 (XCS TRp53) or 80 (XCS TRp63) 

40,3 

52 



H1: ìlever or spindle displaced from initial 

positionî indicator. 


module and another safety switch, the rotary 

lever or spindle operator safety switch can 

provide a category 3 or 4 control and monitoring 

system for moving guards conforming to 

EN 954-1. 

2/53





Plastic, types XCS DMC, XCS DMP and XCS DMR 

XCS DMC Rectangular, small size: 51 x 16 x 7 

2 

Page 2/56 

XCS DMP Rectangular, large size: 88 x 25 x 13 

Page 2/56 

XCS DMR Cylindrical, diameter: 30, length: 38.5 

Page 2/56 

2/54

General characteristics 2 





Environment 

Conforming to standards Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22 2 n o 14 


IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 1088 (XCS DMp5pp only) 



UL-CSA, BG 

Standard version: “TH” 

Ambient air temperature Operation °C - 25…+ 85 

Storage °C - 40…+ 85 

2 



Sensitivity to magnetic fields mT ≥ 0.3 

Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 60536 

Degree of protection IP 66 + IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529 

Materials 



Ratedinsulationvoltage(Ui) 

Thermoplastic case (PBT) 

Cable: PUR 

Ue: c 24 V, Ie: 100 mA max. 

Ui: c 100 V 

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 2.5 conforming to EN 60947-5-1 

Resistance across terminals Contact with LED Ω 57 

Contact without LED Ω 10 

Protection (not using safety module) 

External cartridge fuse: 500 mA gG (gl) 

Connection XCS DMC, DMR Pre-cabled 4 x 0.25 mm 2 , 2 m, 5 m or 10 m long depending on model 

XCS DMP 

Pre-cabled 6 x 0.25 mm 2 , 2 m, 5 m or 10 m long depending on model 

Contact materials 


Rhodium 

1.2 million operating cycles 

Maximum switching voltage V c 100 

Switching capacity Contact with LED mA 5…100 

Contact without LED mA 0.1…100 

Insulation resistance MΩ 1000 

Maximum breaking capacity Contact with LED VA 3 

Contact without LED VA 10 

Maximum switching frequency Hz 150 

2/55

References, 





Type Rectangular Cylindrical 

Small size Large size Diameter 30 

51 x 16 x 7 88 x 25 x 13 Length 38.5 

2 

References of switches (1) d must be used in conjunction with XPS safety modules (pages 2/58 and 2/59) 

Contact states shown are with the 

magnet positioned in front of the 

switch 



BK WH 

BU BN 

XCS DMC5902 – XCS DMR5902 

2-pole N/O + N/O contact (2) 


BK WH 

BU BN 



(1 N/C staggered) 

PK GY 

BK WH 

BU BN 

– XCS DMP5002 – 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O (2) 


PK GY 

BK WH 

BU BN 

– XCS DMP7002 – 



BK WH 

+ 

BU BN 


2-pole N/O + N/O (2) 


BK WH 

+ 

BU BN 



(1 N/C staggered) 

PK GY 

BK WH 

+ 

BU BN 

– XCS DMP5012 – 

3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O (2) 


PK GY 

BK WH 

+ 

BU BN 

– XCS DMP7012 – 

Weight (kg) 0.101 0.180 0.146 

(1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCS ZCpppp). 

In the references selected above, replace the last character (2) with 5 for cable length = 5 m and with 10 for cable length = 10 m. 

Example: rectangular, small size switch with N/C + N/O contacts, and cable length 10 m: XCS DMC59010. 

(2) To be connected with XPS AF only (see page 2/59). 


Fixing clamp – XSZ B130 

Weight (kg) – 0.080 

Additional coded magnet XCS ZC1 XCS ZP1 XCS ZR1 

Weight (kg) 0.009 0.050 0.018 


Operating zone 

Sao: 5 mm 

Sar: 15 mm 

Sao: 8 mm 

Sar: 20 mm 

Sao: 8 mm 

Sar: 20 mm 

Approach directions 6 directions 6 directions 2 directions 

Connections: 

pages 2/57 to 2/59 

2/56

Functional diagrams, 

dimensions, 

mounting 2 




Functional diagrams with the magnet present 

XCS DMC59pp XCS DMC79pp XCS DMP50pp XCS DMP70pp 

F 

O 

0 5 15 mm 

Sao H Sar 

7 

13 

Colour 

(N/O): BN/BU 

(N/C): BK/WH 

0 5 

Sao H 

15 mm 

Sar 

Colour 

0 8 20 mm 

(N/O): BN/BU 

Sao H Sar 

F 

(N/O): BK/WH 

F 

F 

O 

O 

Colour 

(N/O): BN/BU 

(N/C): BK/WH 

(N/C): GY/PK 

0 8 20 mm 

Sao H Sar 

F 

F 

O 

Colour 

(N/O): BN/BU 

(N/O): BK/WH 

(N/C): GY/PK 

XCS DMR59pp 

0 8 20 mm Colour 

Sao H Sar (N/O): BN/BU 

(N/C): BK/WH 

F 

O 

XCS DMR79pp 

0 8 20 mm Colour 

Sao H Sar (N/O): BN/BU 

(N/O): BK/WH 

F 

F 


Contact open 

Sao: assured operating distance. 

Sar: assured tripping distance. 

Conforming to EN 60947-5-3 

2 

12 

18 

Contact unstable 

Dimensions 

XCS DMC 

XCS DMP 

Magnet Sensor Magnet Sensor 

7 (1) 

16 

12,5 

7 (1) 

16 

12,5 

51 

51 

16 8 

16 8 

88 

78 

88 

78 

(1) Counterbored: Ø 6 x 3.5 mm. 

XCS DMR 

Accessories 

Magnet Sensor XSZ B130 

(2) 

38,3 

13 3,5 8 6,5 

25 

3,5 8 

25 

30 

6,5 

13 

16 

7 

38,5 

M30x1,5 

35,5 

(3) 

18,5 

21,7 

39 

31 

3,5 

(2) Countersunk holes: Ø 7 at 90°. 

Mounting 

XCS DMC XCS DMP XCS DMR 

d 

d 

4 

22 

8 

(3) 2 elongated holes 4x8 

b 

c 

e 

A 

A 

b 

a 

B 

B 

b 

a 

Ød 

C 

a 

a b c d e 

XCS DMC 40 13 min. – 81 x 55 – 

XCS DMP 100 10 min. – 118 x 55 – 

XCS DMR 40 12 min. >10 Ø45 20 

– >10 Ø45 13 

12 min.

Connections 2 





XCS DMP5ppp with XPS-DMB 

Category 4 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O contact, 1 N/C staggered. 

+ 24 V 

F1 


To PLC 

2 

+ 24 V 

F 

S1 

PK GY 

XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN + 

Start 

S3 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

A1 S11 

S12 S13 

Y1 Y2 13 

XPS DMB 

23 

Supply A1/A2 

Fault 

K1 

Fault 

K1/K2 

Logic 

K1/K2 

K2 

A2 S21 S22 S23 

Y34 Y44 14 

24 

F 

+ 24 V 

S2 

GY PK 

XCS DM 

WH BK 

BN + BU 

To PLC 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

0 V 



Chan. 1 Chan. 2 



XCS DMC5ppp, XCSDMR5ppp with XPS DME 

Category 4 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact, N/C staggered. 

+ 24 V 

F1 

Guard1closed 



S1 XCS DM S3 XCS DM S5 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

ESC 

S7 

K3 

K4 

Start 

A1 S11 S12 S13 S31 S32 S33 S51 S52 S53 Y1 Y2 13 

XPS DME 

Supply A1/A2 

S13 S33 S53 Fault 

K1 

Fault 

S12 S32 S52 

K1/K2 

K1/K2 

Logic 

S23 S43 S63 

K2 

S22 S42 S62 

23 

A2 S21 S22 S23 S41 S42 S43 S61 S62 S63 Y34 Y44 14 

24 

S2 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

S4 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

S6 

WH BK 

XCS DM 

BN+ BU 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

0 V 





Chan. 1 Chan. 2 



References: 

page 2/56 

2/58






Connection of up to 3 magnetic switches with an LED on one input, with XPS DMp (1) 

Category 3 connection conforming to EN 954-1 

Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact 

Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O contact 

+ 24 V 

F 

S1.1 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

S1.1 

XCS DM 

PK GY 

BK WH 

BU BN + 

2 

S1.2 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

S1.2 

XCS DM 

PK GY 

BK WH 

BU BN + 

S1.3 XCS DM 

BK WH 

BU BN+ 

S1.3 

XCS DM 

PK GY 

BK WH 

BU BN + 

To PLC 

S11 S12 S13 

S11 S12 S13 

S21 S22 S23 

S21 S22 S23 

(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23. 

XCS DMp7ppp with XPS AF 

Category 4 connection conforming to EN 954-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/C contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088) 

L ( + ) 

F1 

K3 

K4 

S2 

Start 

ESC 

(1) (2) 

A1 S33 S34 S39 

13 

XPS AF 

23 

33 

T 

Logic 

K1 

K2 

A2 S11 S21 S22 S12 

14 

24 

34 

S1 

XCS DM 

WH BK 

BN+ BU 

K3 

K4 

N ( ) 

(1) With monitoring of start button. 

(2) Without monitoring of start button. 


2/59





Miniature design, metal, type XCS M 

XCS M 

pre-cabled 

With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the body 

2 

Page 2/62 

With head for rotary movement (lever). Fixing by the body 

520577 

520576 

Page 2/62 

2/60






Environment 

Conforming to standards Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 



UL, CSA 



Ambient air temperature Operation: - 25...+ 70 °C. Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C 

Vibration resistance 

XCS M snap action: 5 gn. XCS M slow break: 25 gn (10…500 Hz) 

conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 

Shock resistance 25 gn, (18 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 

Electric shock protection Class I, conforming to IEC 6140 and NF C 20-030 

Degree of protection IP 66, IP 67 and IP 68 (1) conforming to IEC 60529; IK 06 conforming to EN 50102 

Materials 

Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety fixings: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel. 

Repeat accuracy 

0.05 mm on the tripping points with 1 million operating cycles for head with end plunger 


Rated operational characteristics a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A) 

c DC-13 ; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A, 

EN 60947-5-1 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 

Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 


Positive operation (depending on model) 

N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3 




Snap action contact: 0.01 m/minute 

Break before make, slow break: 6 m/minute 


b Conforming to 60947-5-1 Appendix C 

b Utilisation category AC-15 and DC-13 

b Maximum frequency: 3600 operating cycles/hour 

b Load factor: 0.5 

a.c. supply 

a 50/60 Hz 


d.c. supply c 

XCS M snap action 

(N/C+ N/C + N/O, N/C+ N/C + N/O + N/O 

contacts) 


5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0,5 

48 V 

110 V 

230 V 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 

Current in A 

PowerbrokeninWfor 


Ithe 

12/24 V 

XCS M slow break 

(N/C+ N/C + N/O contact) 

Power broken in W for 


Voltage V 24 48 120 Voltage V 24 48 120 

o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 3 

(1) Protection against prolonged immersion: the test conditions are subject to agreement 

between the manufacturer and the user. 


5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0,5 

230 V 

110 V 

Ithe 

12/24/48 V 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 

Current in A 

2 

2/61

References, 





Pre-cabled 

Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary (fixing by the body) 

2 

Type of operator Metal end plunger Roller plunger Thermoplastic roller 

lever 

References 

BK-WH BK 

BK-WH BK 

RD-WH RD 

RD-WH RD 

BU 

BN 

BU 

BN 

GN-YE 

GN-YE 

3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O 

snap action contact 

3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O 

break before make, 

slow break contact 

Steel roller lever 

XCS M3910L1 XCS M3902L1 XCS M3915L1 XCS M3916L1 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

RD-RD-WH 

BK-BK-WH 

BN-BU 

1,8 

4,2(P) 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

3,1(A) 

7(P) 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

RD-RD-WH 

BK-BK-WH 

BN-BU 

0 5 mm 0 mm 0 90˚ 

0,8 

1,4 

12˚ 


BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

1,8 

3,1(P) 

0 2,6 5 mm 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

3,1(A) 5,6(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 

0 4,6 mm 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

0 36˚ 90˚ 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

RD-RD-WH 

BK-BK-WH 

BN-BU 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 

25˚ 

45˚(P) 

0 36˚ 90˚ 

BK-WH BK 

RD-WH RD 

BU 

BN 

VT 

VT-WH 

GN-YE 

4-pole N/C+N/C+N/O+N/O 



BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

VT-VT-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BK-BK-WH 

BN-BU 

VT-VT-WH 

Weight (kg) 0.165 0.170 0.205 0.210 


closed 

(A) = cam displacement 

open 

(P) = positive opening point 

N/C contact with opening positive operation 


Switch actuation On end By 30° cam 

Type of actuation 

0 

1,8 

0,8 

4,2(P) 

5 mm 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

VT-VT-WH 

BK-BK 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

VT-VT-WH 

3,1(A) 7(P) 

0 mm 

1,4 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

VT-VT-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BK-BK-WH 

BN-BU 

RD-RD-WH 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 

BK-BK-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BN-BU 

VT-VT-WH 

RD-RD-WH 

BK-BK-WH 

BN-BU 

RD-RD-WH 

25˚ 70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 

Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 



Minimum force or torque Tripping 8.5 N 7N 0.5 N.m 

Positive opening 42.5 N 35 N 0.1 N.m 

Cabling 3-pole contacts PvR pre-cabled, 7 x 0.5 mm 2 , length 1 m (1) 

4-pole contacts PvR pre-cabled, 9 x 0.34 mm 2 , length 1 m (1) 

(1) For a 2 m long cable, replace L1 with L2. 

For a 5 m long cable, replace L1 with L5. 

2/62

Dimensions, 

connections 2 




Pre-cabled 

Dimensions 

XCSM pp10L1 

XCSM pp02L1 

(1) 

(1) 

2 

(1) Protective plate fixed by 5-lobe torque safety screws. 

XCSM pp15L1 

31 

XCSM pp16L1 

31 

(1) 

(1) 

(1)Protectiveplatefixedby5-lobetorquesafetyscrews. 

Connections 


Example with 3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O contact and protection fuse to 

prevent shunting of the N/C contacts, either by cable damage or 

by tampering. 

Example with 3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the 

associated control relyas. Opening and closing of the guard necessary to activate K1. 

F1 

(1) 

F1 

O 

BK 

RD 

BU 

BK 

RD 

BU 

K1 

K1 

GN-YE 

GN-YE 

K2 

O 

I 

BK-WH 

RD-WH 

K 

BN 

K1 

BK-WH 

K2 

RD-WH 

BN 

K2 

I 

KM1 

KM1 

KM2 

KM2 

K 

M 

K2 

H1 

K1 

M 

(1) Signalling contact H1: “guard closed” indicator light 

Example of guard monitoring using 2 switches and 1 safety module (category 4) 

Operation in positive and negative (combined) mode 

XPS 

2/63





Compact design, metal, type XCS D 

Compact design, plastic, type XCS P 

b XCS D, XCS P 

with 1 cable entry 

Conforming to CENELEC EN 50047 

v With head for linear movement (plunger) 

XCS D 

XCS P 

2 

Pages 2/66 and 2/67 Pages 2/68 and 2/69 

v With head for rotary movement (lever) 

XCS D 

XCS P 

562945 

562946 

562945 

562946 

562943 

562944 

562943 

562944 

Pages 2/66 and 2/67 Pages 2/68 and 2/69 

2/64







Environmental characteristics 

Conformity to standards Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 



UL, CSA 

Protective treatment Standard version “TC” 

Ambient air temperature For operation -25…+70°C 

For storage 

-40…+70°C 

Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 25 gn (10…500 Hz) 

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 50 gn (11 ms) 

Electric shock protection 

Class I conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCS D 

Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCS P 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 66 and IP 67 

Conforming to EN 50102 IK 06 for XCS D 

IK 04 for XCS P 


0.1 mm on the tripping points, with 1 million operating cycles for head with end plunger 

Cable entry Depending on model Tapped entry for 13.5 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2" NPT 

Materials 

XCS D zamak bodies and heads, XCS P plastic bodies, zamak heads 

Plastic protective cover, secured by 5-lobe socket head safety screw 

2 


Rated operational 


a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A); Ithe = 6 A 

c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1 



U imp = 4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664 

voltage 

Positive operation (depending on model) 

N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K 

Resistance across terminals y 25 mΩ conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3 



Connection 

Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm 2 ,max:1x1mm 2 or 2 x 0.75 mm 2 

(screw clamp terminals) 

Minimum actuation speed Snap action 

0.01 m/minute 

(for head with end plunger) Slow break 

6m/minute 


a.c. supply 

a 50/60 Hz 


d.c. supply c 

b Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C 

b Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13 

b Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour 

b Load factor: 0.5 

Snap action contacts 

Slow break contacts 


5 

1 

0,5 

110 V 

230/400 V 

24 V 

Ithe 

48 V 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

Power broken in W for 5 million operating 

cycles. 

Power broken in W for 5 million operating 

cycles. 


o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 2 


5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0,5 

0,2 

Ithe 

12/24/48 V 

230 V 110 V 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

2/65

References, 


dimensions 2 




Complete switches with 1 cable entry 

Type of head Plunger Rotary 

2 

Type of operator Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic roller 

lever 


References of complete switches with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O snap action contact 

With ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry 

XCS D3910P20 XCS D3902P20 XCS D3918P20 XCS D3919P20 

With Pg 13.5 cable entry 

With 1/2" NPT cable entry 

XCS D3910G13 XCS D3902G13 XCS D3918G13 XCS D3919G13 

XCS D3910N12 XCS D3902N12 XCS D3918N12 XCS D3919N12 

Weight (kg) 0.215 0.220 0.255 0.255 

Contact functional diagrams 

32 31 

22 21 

13 

14 




1,8 4,5(P) 

0 5mm 

0,9 

contact closed 

contact open 

(A)=camdisplacement 






21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

3,1(A) 7,8(P) 

0 mm 

1,5 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 

Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 


15 10 

(in millions of operating cycles) 

Minimum force or torque For tripping 15 N 12 N 0.1 N.m 

For positive opening 45 N 36 N 0.25 N.m 

Cable entry 

1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm 

1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm 

1 entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit 

Dimensions 

XCS D3p10ppp 

XCS D3p02ppp 

12,5 

Ø7 

3,5 

12,5 

Ø11,6 

2 

20 

65 

2 

30,5 

51 

19 

(2) 

65 

51 

19 

(2) 

14 

(3) 

14 

(3) 

(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland 

or 1/2" NPT conduit. 

(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22 mm centres or 

2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres. 

(3) 2 x Ø 3 holes for studs, depth 4 mm. 

30 (1) = 20/22 

34,5 34 

= 

30 (1) = 20/22 = 

34,5 34 

12,5 

15˚ 

15˚ 

2/66

References, 


dimensions (continued) 2 







lever 


References of complete switches with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O break before make, slow break contact 


XCS D3710P20 XCS D3702P20 XCS D3718P20 XCS D3719P20 

2 



XCS D3710G13 XCS D3702G13 XCS D3718G13 XCS D3719G13 

XCS D3710N12 XCS D3702N12 XCS D3718N12 XCS D3719N12 

Weight (kg) 0.215 0.220 0.255 0.255 


32 31 

22 21 

13 

14 




21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

1,8 3,2(P) 

0 3 5mm 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

3,1(A) 5,6(P) 

0 5,2 mm 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 42˚ 90˚ 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 42˚ 90˚ 



contact open 









15 10 




Cable entry 




Dimensions 

XCS D3p18ppp, XCSD3p19ppp 

40 

5,5 

24 

Ø19 

12,5 

33 

2 

52,5 






14 65 

51 

30 (1) = 20/22 = 

34,5 34 

12,5 

19 

(2) 

(3) 

15˚ 

15˚ 

2/67

References, 


dimensions 2 






2 


lever 


References of complete switches with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O snap action contact 


XCS P3910P20 XCS P3902P20 XCS P3918P20 XCS P3919P20 



XCS P3910G13 XCS P3902G13 XCS P3918G13 XCS P3919G13 

XCS P3910N12 XCS P3902N12 XCS P3918N12 XCS P3919N12 

Weight (kg) 0.215 0.220 0.255 0.255 


32 31 

22 21 

13 

14 




1,8 4,5(P) 

0 5mm 

0,9 


contact open 

(A)=camdisplacement 






21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

3,1(A) 7,8(P) 

0 mm 

1,5 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 90˚ 

12˚ 



15 10 




Cable entry 




Dimensions 

XCS P3p10ppp 

XCS P3p02ppp 

12,5 

Ø7 

3,5 

12,5 

Ø11,6 

2 

20 

65 

2 

30,5 

51 

19 

(2) 

65 

51 

19 

(2) 

14 

(3) 

14 

(3) 






30 (1) = 20/22 

34,5 34 

= 

30 (1) = 20/22 = 

34,5 34 

12,5 

15˚ 

15˚ 

2/68

References, 


dimensions (continued) 2 







lever 


References of complete switches with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O break before make, slow break contact 


XCS P3710P20 XCS P3702P20 XCS P3718P20 XCS P3719P20 

2 



XCS P3710G13 XCS P3702G13 XCS P3718G13 XCS P3719G13 

XCS P3710N12 XCS P3702N12 XCS P3718N12 XCS P3719N12 

Weight (kg) 0.215 0.220 0.255 0.255 


32 31 

22 21 

13 

14 




21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

1,8 3,2(P) 

0 3 5mm 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

3,1(A) 5,6(P) 

0 5,2 mm 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 42˚ 90˚ 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

25˚ 

70˚(P) 

0 42˚ 90˚ 



contact open 









15 10 




Cable entry 




Dimensions 

XCS P3p18ppp, XCSP3p19ppp 

40 

5,5 

24 

Ø19 

12,5 

33 

2 

52,5 






14 65 

51 

30 (1) = 20/22 = 

34,5 34 

12,5 

19 

(2) 

(3) 

15˚ 

15˚ 

2/69

Presentation 

0 


2 


Plastic, double insulated, types XCK P and XCK T 

XCK P 

with 1 cable 

entry 

With head for linear movement (plunger) operators 

2 

Pages 2/72, 2/74, 2/76 

With head for rotary movement operators 

Pages 2/72, 2/74, 2/76 

XCK T 

with 2 cable 

entries 

With head for linear movement (plunger) operators 

Pages 2/72, 2/74, 2/76 

With head for rotary movement operators 

Pages 2/72, 2/74, 2/76 

2/70


0 


2 



Environment 

Conforming Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60337-1, VDE 0660-200 

to standards 

Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 81-1 (only applicable to switches with slow break contacts) 


Standard version: “TC” and “TH” 

Ambient air temperature Operation: - 25…+ 70 °C. Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C 

Vibration resistance 25 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 

2 

Shock resistance 50 gn (11 ms) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 

Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC/EN 60536 and NF C 20-030 

Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC/EN 60529 


0.1 mm on the tripping points 

Cable entry 


Depending on model, either: 1 cable entry tapped for n° 11 or n° 13 cable gland, tapped M16 or tapped 1/2" NPT 

Rated operational characteristics a AC-15 ; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A) 

c DC-13; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 and VDE 0110 


Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60664 

Positive operation N/C contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Section 3 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to IEC/EN 60255-7 category 3 


Cabling 

10 A cartridge fuse gG (gl) 

Screw clamp terminals. 

XEN P2151 clamping capacity, minimum: 1 x 0.5 mm 2 ,maximum:2x2.5mm 2 

XES P2141 clamping capacity, minimum: 1 x 0.34 mm2, maximum: 2 x 1.5 mm2 


XEN P2151: 0.001 m/second, XES P2141: 0.001 m/minute 

Electrical durability Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C. 




XEN P2151 

XES P2141 

a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz 



5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0,5 

0,2 

Ithe 

230 V 12/24/48 V 

110 V 


5 

1 

0,5 

110 V 

230/400 V 

24 V 

48 V 

Ithe 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

0,1 

0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

d.c. supply c Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles 


o W 13 9 7 o W 10 7 4 

2/71

References, 


0 


2 



Cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 

Type of operating head Plunger Rotary 

2 

Type of Metal end Thermoplastic Thermoplastic roller lever plunger Thermoplastic 

operator plunger roller plunger Horizontal, 1 direction Vertical, 1 direction roller lever (1) 

(1) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 90° steps by reversing the notched washer. 

References ( 


2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P5109H29 XCK P5029H29 XCK P5219H29 XCK P5279H29 XCK P5189H29 


slow break (XEN P2151) 

13 

14 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/C XCK P9109H29 XCK P9029H29 XCK P9219H29 – XCK P9189H29 

snap action (XES P2141) 

12 11 

22 21 

Weight (kg) 0.075 0.075 0.080 0.080 0.090 


operator plunger roller plunger Horizontal actuation in 1 direction roller lever (1) 


References ( 


2-pole N/C + N/O XCK T5109H29 XCK T5029H29 XCK T5219H29 XCK T5189H29 



13 

14 

22 21 

Weight (kg) 0.085 0.085 0.090 0.100 



Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.3 m/s 1m/s 1.5 m/s 



Minimum force for tripping 15 N 12 N 6N 0.1 N.m 

or torque for positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N 0.25 N.m 

Cable entry 

XCK P : 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland. Clamping capacity 4 to 8 mm. 

XCK T : 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland. Clamping capacity 4 to 8 mm. 

Switch supplied with 1 entry fitted with blanking plug. 

2/72

Operation, 

dimensions 

0 


2 



Cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 

Operation 


XCK pp109H29 XCK pp029H29 XCK pp219H29 XCK Pp279H29 XCK pp189H29 


XCK p5109H29 XCK p5029H29 XCK p5219H29 XCK P5279H29 XCK p5189H29 

1,8 3,8 (P) 

3,1(A) 5,6(P) 

6,5(A) 13(P) 

6,5(B) 14,7(P) 

21-22 

13-14 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

21-22 

13-14 

13-14 

0 3 mm 

0 5,2 mm 

0 10,5 mm 

0 10,5 mm 0 

XCK P9109H29 XCK P9029H29 XCK P9219H29 XCK P9189H29 

1,8 4,5(P) 3,1 7,8(P) 6,5 15,7(P) 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

0 5mm 

0 mm 

0 mm 

0,9 

1,5 

3 


(A), (B) = cam displacement 

G Contact closed H Contact open (P) = positive opening point 

Dimensions 

XCK Pp109H29 XCK Pp029H29 XCK Pp219H29 

12,5 

21-22 

13-14 

3,5 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

12,5 

21-22 

5,5 

12,5 

21-22 

13-14 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

0 

2 

36 

46,5 

55 

20 

25 

89 

25 

99,5 

25 

108 

(1) 

30 

36 

XCK Pp279H29 

12,5 

5,5 

22 

= 

20/22 = 

30 

57 

(1) 

30 

36 

XCK Pp189H29 

40 

24 

5,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 

35,5 

69,5 

(1) 

30 

36 

XCK T5109H29 

12,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 

25 

110 

25 

(1) 

122,5 

25 

77 

20/22 

36 

(2) 

(1) 

30 

36 

25 

87,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 12,5 

20/22 

46,5 

(2) 

30 

36 

44,5 

25 

96 

= 20/22 = 

XCK T5029H29 XCK T5219H29 XCK T5189H29 

40 

12,5 

24 

12,5 

5,5 

3,5 

5,5 

30 

20/22 

20 

(2) 

55 

30 

36 

25 

110,5 

= = 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

35,5 

69,5 

20/22 (2) 

30 

36 

= = 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

30 

36 

= = 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

30 

36 

44,5 

= 

= 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

(1) 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland Ø : elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22/42 centres, holes Ø 4.3 on 20/40 centres 

(2) 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland 

2/73

References, 


0 


2 



Cable entries tapped for Pg 11 (n° 11) or Pg 13.5 (n° 13) cable gland 


2 




References ( 


Switches with 1 cable entry for n° 11 cable gland 


break before make XCK P5109 XCK P5029 XCK P5219 XCK P5279 XCK P5189 


13 

14 


2-pole N/C + N/C 

snap action (XES P2141) XCK P9109 XCK P9029 XCK P9219 XCK P9279 XCK P9189 


12 11 

22 21 

22 21 

XCK P9109H44 XCK P9029H44 XCK P9219H44 XCK P9279H44 XCK P9189H44 

Weight (kg) 0.075 0.075 0.080 0.080 0.090 


operator plunger roller plunger Horizontal actuation in 1 direction roller lever (1) 


References ( 


Switches with 2 cable entries for n° 11 cable gland 


break before make XCK T5109 XCK T5029 XCK T5219 XCK T5189 


13 

14 

22 21 

Weight (kg) 0.085 0.085 0.090 0.100 






Minimum force 

or torque 

for tripping 15 N 12 N 6N 0.1 N.m 

for positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N 0.25 N.m 

Cable entry XCK P : 1 cable entry tapped for n° 11 or n° 13 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11 or Pg 13.5). 

Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm or 9 to 12 mm. 

XCK T : 2 cable entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11). 

Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm. Switch supplied with 1 entry fitted with blanking plug. 

2/74

Operation, 

dimensions 

0 


2 



Cable entries tapped for Pg 11 (n° 11) or Pg 13.5 (n° 13) cable gland 

Operation 


XCK pp109, Pp109H44 XCK pp029, Pp029H44 XCK pp219, Pp219H44 XCK Pp279, Pp279H44 XCK pp189, Pp189H44 


XCK p5109 XCK p5029 XCK p5219 XCK P5279 XCK p5189 

1,8 3,8 (P) 

3,1(A) 5,6(P) 

6,5(A) 13(P) 

21-22 

6,5(B) 14,7(P) 

21-22 

21-22 

21-22 

21-22 

13-14 

13-14 

13-14 

13-14 

0 3 mm 

0 5,2 mm 

0 10,5 mm 

13-14 

0 10,5 mm 0 

XCK P9109, P9109H44 XCK P9029, P9029H44 XCK P9219, P9219H44 XCK P9279, P9279H44 XCK P9189, P9189H44 

1,8 

11-12 

4,5(P) 3,1 7,8(P) 6,5 15,7(P) 6,5 15,7(P) 

11-12 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

0 5mm 

0 mm 

0 mm 

0 

0,9 

1,5 

3 

3 

mm 

0 




Dimensions 

XCK Pp109, P9109H44 XCK Pp029, P9029H44 XCK Pp219, P9219H44 

12,5 

12,5 

5,5 

3,5 

12,5 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

20 

2 

36 

46,5 

55 

25 

89 

25 

99,5 

25 

108 

(1) 

30 

36 

= 

20/22 = 

30 

(1) 

30 

36 

= 20/22 = 

30 

(1) 

30 

36 

= 20/22 = 

30 

XCK Pp279, P9279H44 

12,5 

5,5 

22 

57 

XCK Pp189, P9189H44 

40 

24 

5,5 

35,5 

69,5 

XCK T5109 

12,5 

25 

110 

25 

(1) 

122,5 

25 

77 

20/22 

36 

(2) 

(1) 

= 20/22 = 

30 

= 20/22 = 

30 

30 

36 

30 12,5 

36 

44,5 

30 

36 

XCK T5029 XCK T5219 XCK T5189 

40 

12,5 

12,5 

24 

5,5 

3,5 

5,5 

25 

87,5 

46,5 

96 

25 

25 

20/22 (2) 

20/22 (2) 

20/22 (2) 

20 

55 

110,5 

= 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

= 

35,5 

69,5 

30 

36 

= = 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

30 

36 

= = 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

30 

36 

44,5 

= 

= 

40/42 9,5 

59,5 

(1) 1 entry tapped for n° 11 or n° 13 cable gland Ø : elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22/42 centres, holes Ø 4.3 on 20/40 centres 

(2) 2 cable entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland 

2/75

References, 


0 


2 





2 



(1) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 90° steps by reversing the notched washer 

References ( 


2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P5109H7 XCK P5029H7 XCK P5219H7 XCK P5279H7 XCK P5189H7 



13 

14 

22 21 

2-pole N/C + N/C – – – – XCK P9189H7 

snap action (XES P2141) 

12 11 

22 21 

Weight (kg) 0.075 0.075 0.080 0.080 0.090 






Minimum force for tripping 15 N 12 N 6N 0.1 N.m 

or torque for positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N 0.25 N.m 

Cable entry 

XCK P : 1 cable entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 

2/76

Operation, 

dimensions 

0 


2 




Operation 


XCK P5109H7 XCK P5029H7 XCK P5219H7 XCK Pp279H7 XCK Pp189H7 


XCK P5109H7 XCK P5029H7 XCK P5219H7 XCK P5279H7 XCK P5189H7 

1,8 3,8 (P) 

21-22 

3,1(A) 5,6(P) 

21-22 

6,5(A) 13(P) 

21-22 

6,5(B) 14,7(P) 

21-22 

21-22 

13-14 

13-14 

13-14 

13-14 

0 3 mm 

0 5,2 mm 

0 10,5 mm 

13-14 

0 10,5 mm 0 

XCK P9189H7 

2 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

0 




Dimensions 

XCK P5109H7 XCK P5029H7 XCK P5219H7 XCK P5279H7 

12,5 

3,5 

12,5 

5,5 

12,5 

20 

5,5 

12,5 

36 

46,5 

55 

22 

57 

25 

89 

25 

99,5 

25 

108 

25 

110 

(1) 

30 

36 

13,5 

= 

20/22 = 

30 

(1) 

30 

36 

13,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 

(1) 

30 

36 

13,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 

(1) 

30 

36 

13,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 12,5 

XCK p5189H7 

40 

24 

5,5 

35,5 

69,5 

25 

122,5 

(1) 

30 

36 

44,5 

13,5 

= 20/22 = 

30 

(1) 1 cable entry tapped for 1/2" NPT conduit 

Ø : elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22/42 centres, holes Ø 4.3 on 20/40 centres 

2/77





Applications 

Packaging, conveyor systems, materials handling, warehousing, storage, etc. 

Function 

Zone protection keeping machine operators away from dangerous movements. 

2 

Conforming to standards EN 1760-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 


Category 3 safety conforming to EN 954-1, BG with safety modules XPS A 

K and XPS MP, cUL/us 


Dimensions (mm) 500 x 500 500 x 750 

Response time 

≤ 40 ms with XPS AK, ≤ 30 ms with XPS MP 

Type of outputs 

Sensitivity 

Maximum supply voltage 

2 cables; 2 conductors on male/female connectors 

diameter 8 

Single mat: > 20 kg 

Group of mats: > 35 kg 

c 30 V 

Unit type XY2 TP1 XY2 TP2 

Page 2/83 

2/78

2 

2 

2 

Category 3 safety conforming to EN 954-1, BG with safety modules XPS AK and XPS MP, cUL/us 

IP 67 

750 x 750 750 x 1250 

≤ 40 ms with XPS AK, ≤ 30 ms with XPS MP 

2 cables; 2 conductors on male/female connectors 

diameter 8 

Single mat: > 20 kg 

Group of mats: > 35 kg 

c 30 V 

XY2 TP3 

XY2 TP4 

2/83 

2/79

Presentation, 

description 2 



Type XY2 TP 

Presentation 

Zone protection 

The equipment comprises category 3 safety mats, installed in front of or around 

potentially dangerous machines and/or robots. They provide a protection zone 

between machine operators and any dangerous movements. 

2 

They protect zones to provide safety for personnel in particular. 

They thus supplement safety devices by allowing free access for the unloading/ 

loading of machines. 

The safety mats are used either in conjunction with safety modules or combined with 

other zone protection systems. They are particularly suited for use in polluted 

environments (dust, oil, etc.). 

“Safety mat design” configuration software (1) enables design and setting-up of the 

installation. 

Applications 

Safety mats are mainly used in: 

v assembly and packaging lines, 

v conveying and handling lines, 

v warehousing and storage systems. 

1 

Description 

v A safety mat comprises: 

- a sensing zone 1, 

- a border consisting of aluminium rails 2, 

- and rail corners which secure the assembly 3. 

v Safety mats can be butt mounted in order to define the safety zone. 

v Mats are electrically interconnectable, without loss of sensitivity. 

2 

3 


Safety modules type XPS AK, XPS MP used in conjunction with safety mats 

XY2 TP establish a category 3 safety device conforming to standard EN 954-1. 

b The hazardous zone 1 is defined by the dangerous movement of a machine. 

b The safety zone 2, defined in accordance with standard EN 999, comprises one or 

several butt mounted safety mats 3 (10 maximum). 

1 2 3 

b Safety mats are used for detecting persons stepping onto the mat or falling objects 

in accordance with standard EN 1760-1; 

- weight > 20 kg for a single mat, 

- weight > 35 kg for a group of mats. 

b Any detection of movement on the safety mat immediately instigates the stopping 

of the dangerous movement of the machine to be made safe. The resetting of the 

machine can be performed manually or automatically, depending on the wiring 

configuration of the safety module within the process. 

b The safety mats can also be used for detection applications not related to safety. 

Directives and standards 

b The mats conform to the following standards: 

v EN 292, 

v EN 1050, 

v EN 60947-5-1, 

v EN 954-1, 

v EN 1760-1, 

v EN 60204-1, 

v UL 508, 

v CSA C22-2 No. 14. 

b Used in conjunction with safety modules XPS AK and XPS MP, the safety mats 

are c UL us and BG certified and approved. 

(1) Featured in the Schneider electronic catalogue. 

2/80

General 2 




Type XY2 TP 

S 

Hazardous zone 

S 

Setting-up precautions 

Standard EN 999 defines: 

b the minimum distance between the hazardous zone and the detection limit of the 

device furthest away from the hazardous zone, see calculation below; 

b the body approach speed. 

SMatMat 

S = minimum distance between the hazardous zone and 

the detection limit. 

Safety zone 

Standard EN 1760-1 states the following requirements: 

b surface layout drawing, 

b surface preparation, 

b handling and connection, 

b starting and testing. 

Safety rules 

Detection of failures liable to compromise safety and stopping of the machine 

The design of the machine and its control system must be to the same level of safety 

as that of the safety mat system in order to ensure the immediate stopping of the 

machines dangerous movement as soon as the hazardous zone is entered. 

It must not be possible to enter the protected zone without tripping the protection 

system. Therefore, safety mats must be installed in such a way that they cannot be 

avoided. 

The machine can only be restarted if no danger exists and no personnel are present 

in the hazardous zone. 

Calculation of the minimum safety distance according to the 

application 

Standard EN 999 states the following calculation of distance: 

b Safety mat installed on a flat surface: 

S = (1600 mm/s x (t1 + t2)) + 1200 mm. 

b Safety mat installed on a step: 

S = (1600 mm x (t1 + t2)) + (1200 mm - 0.4 H). 

S = minimum distance in mm, in a horizontal plane, between the hazardous zone and 

the detection limit of the device furthest away from the hazardous zone. 

T = overall response time = t1 + t2. 

t1 = maximum time in seconds between activation of the detection function (safety 

mat) and the changeover of the output signal switching devices to the inhibited state 

(e.g. safety module type XPS AK). 

t2 = response time of machine in seconds. Time required to stop the dangerous 

movement of the machine. 

H = distance above reference plane (e.g. height of step in mm). 

Note: in all cases S > 750 mm. 

2 

Safety distance parametering 

European standard EN999 

1600 x ( 0,04 + 0,300 ) + 1200 - 0,4 x 0 

Speed of 

movement 

(in mm/s) 

Response time 

of mat 

t1 (in s) + module 

S = Safety distance 

Response time 

of machine 

t2 (in s) + module 

OK 

1744 

Minimum 

distance 

(in mm) 

(in mm) 

Height of 

mat H 

(in mm) 

Example of an application processed using "Safety mat design" software (1) 

b Unintentional access to the hazardous zone of a machine must be detected by a 

safety device. 

b The estimated risk combined with a very dusty environment indicates that a floor 

mounted sensing device (safety mat) would be appropriate. 

b The stopping time of the machine is 300 ms and the response time of the sensing 

device is ≤ 40 ms. 

Calculation formula: S = (1600 mm/s x T) + (1200 mm - 0.4 x H) = (1600 x 0.34) 

+ (1200 - 0) = 1744 mm. 

(1) Featured in the Schneider electronic catalogue. 

2/81





Type XY2 TP 

Environment 




Conformity to standards Products IEC 60947-5-1, EN 1760-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 



BG with safety modules XPS AK and XPS MP c UL/us 

2 

Ambient air 

temperature 


Storage °C - 20…+ 70 

Sensitivity Single mat kg >20 

Group of mats kg >35 

Electric shock protection Class III conforming to EN 61140 

Degree of protection IP67 conforming to IEC 60529 

Type of covering 

NBR pelleted appearance 

Materials of mounting 

accessories 


Rated operating characteristics 

Rail connectors and corners 

Polyacetal 

c 30 V/100 mA 

Contact Material Stainless steel 

Type N/0 (1-3) 

Resistance Ω y 5 (closed state) 

MΩ 10 (open state) 

Response time ms 20 

Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles >1 

Connection 


Maximum permissible load on mat N/cm 2 2000 

Compression 

5 tonnes max. 

2 PUR flying leads (length 100 mm, 2 x 0.5 mm2 conductors) with Ø 8, IP 67 end 

connector (1 male / 1 female). 


Maximum number of mats per safety module 10 

Tensile strength N/mm 2 7 

Resistance to friction mg 120 

Shore A hardness 70 ± 5 

Amount of stretch to tear 250 % 

Behaviour in fire (DIN 4102) 

Resistance to incandescent materials 

B2 

Resistant 

Resistance to chemicals in the 

environment (1) 

Acetic acid 

Acetone 

Alkaline washing water 

Ammoniac 

Brake fluid 

Caustic potassium solution 

Citric acid 

Drilling emulsion 

Gasoline 

Greases 

Hydrochloric acid, 10% solution 

Methyl alcohol 

Methylated spirits 

Resistant 

Limited resistant 

Nitrated solution 

Oil ASTM No. 1/2/3 

Resistance to ultraviolet 

radiation 

Sodium hydroxide 

Stamping oil 

Water 

(1) The resistance of the coating to the products listed is valid for an ambient temperature of 23 °C, provided there is no surface deterioration. 

2/82

References 2 




Type XY2 TP 


Dimensions 

(mm) 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

500 x 500 x 11 XY2 TP1 4.400 

500 x 750 x 11 XY2 TP2 6.600 

750 x 750 x 11 XY2 TP3 9.800 

XY2 TPp 

750 x 1250 x 11 XY2 TP4 16.400 

Accessories for grouping mats 

Description 

Length 

(mm) 

Sold in 

lots of 

Unit 

reference 

Weight 

kg 

Rails 194 2 XY2 TZ10 0.450 

2 

394 2 XY2 TZ20 0.500 

444 2 XY2 TZ30 0.710 

XY2 TZp0 

494 2 XY2 TZ40 0.770 

644 2 XY2 TZ50 1.000 

694 2 XY2 TZ60 1.080 

744 2 XY2 TZ70 1.100 

1194 2 XY2 TZ80 1.860 

1244 2 XY2 TZ90 2.000 

XY2 TZ1 

XY2 TZ2 

Rail connectors 

(1) 

56 2 XY2 TZ1 0.150 

6 2 XY2 TZ2 0.050 

XY2 TZ4 

XY2 TZ5 

Outside corner 

(1) 

– 4 XY2 TZ4 0.100 

Kit comprising: 

– 1 XY2 TZ5 0.050 

1 internal corner + 

1 external corner XY2 TZ4 (1) 

(1) With 2 knock-out cable entries 

Installation software 

Description Media Reference Weight 

kg 

"Safety mat design" installation software 

For Windows 95, 98, 2000 and NT4 operating 

systems. 

Minimum PC configuration: Pentium 200 MHz, 

64 Mb RAM and 45 Mb hard disk space. 

PC 

CD-ROM 

SIS CD2020001 0.100 

2/83


references, 

connections 2 



Jumper cables Ø 8 mm-M8 and M8-M8 


Connector locking 


Clip-in male and female connectors (without locking) 

IP 68 (with connectors correctly clipped together) 

Ambient air temperature °C - 25…+ 90 

Conductor c.s.a. mm 2 2x0.5 

2 

Cable diameter mm 4.5 

Nominal voltage V c and a 60 

Nominal current A 4 

Insulation resistance Ω >10 8 

Contact resistance mΩ ≤ 15 

805906 

References 

XZC RTPAp 

Description 

Male/female jumper cable, 

M8, straight (1) 

For connection between 

mat in rail or 

to another cable 

Number of Length of PUR Reference 

Weight 

conductors cable 

m 

kg 

2 0.33 XZC RTPA1 0.005 

0.54 XZC RTPA2 0.005 

0.79 XZC RTPA3 0.010 

1.08 XZC RTPA4 0.010 

1.29 XZC RTPA5 0.020 

1.33 XZC RTPA6 0.020 

1.58 XZC RTPA7 0.020 

510124 

1 female jumper cable + 

1 male jumper cable, 

Ø 8 mm, straight 

For connection to the safety 

module 

2.58 XZC RTPA8 0.060 

2 2 XZC PTP0104L2 0.050 

5 XZC PTP0205L5 0.110 

10 XZC PTP0306L10 0.215 

XZC PTP0ppppp 

(1) The maximum number of jumper cables that can go through a rail is 4. 

Connections 

BU 

BK 

4 

3 1 

BN 

BU : (-) blue 

BN : (+) brown 

BK : (Out/output) black 

2/84

Dimensions, 

connections 2 



Type XY2 TP 

Dimensions 

Pressure sensitive safety mats 

XY2 TPp 

100 

100 

Aluminium rails 

XY2 TZp0 

G1 

G 

f 

21 

G1 

L 

G2 

2xØ4,3 

2 

e 

e 

G 

21 

a 

L 

2xØ4,3 

G3 

G2 

G1 

G 

e 

b 

21 

L 

2xØ4,3 

XY2 a b Thickness XY2 L G G1 G2 G3 

TP1 500 500 11 TZ10 194 50 144 – – 

TP2 750 500 11 TZ20 394 50 344 – – 

TP3 750 750 11 TZ30 444 50 394 – – 

TP4 1250 750 11 TZ40 494 50 444 – – 

e : dead zone = 10 mm TZ50 644 50 322 594 – 

f : dead zone = 25 mm TZ60 694 50 347 644 – 

TZ70 744 50 372 694 – 

TZ80 1194 50 413 776 1144 

TZ90 1244 50 431 812 1194 

Rail connectors External corner Internal corner 

XY2 TZ1 XY2 TZ2 XY2 TZ4 Included in the kit XY2 TZ5 

56 27 

13,5 27 27 

13,5 56 25 

13,5 56 25 

56 

6 

25 56 

25 56 

Connections 

Wiring example to category 3, with an XPS AK module 

BU 

BN 

SM1 

BU 

BN 

A1 B1 

S11 

BU 

BU 

S12 S31 S32 

BU 

BN 

XPS AK 

SM2 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

BN BN 

BU 

BU 

BN 

BN 

SM3 

BU 

BN 

2/85


0 


2 


Applications 

Function 

Packaging, conveyor systems, materials handling, warehousing and storage. 

Body protection 

Devices 

Single beam safety light curtains (Preventa safety module + 1 to 4 thru beam photo-electric detectors) 

2 

520914 

Infrared transmission 

Conformity 

Product standards IEC 60947-1, EN 61496-1, EN 60825-1, UL 508 

European 

directives 

Machinery Directive 98/37/CE, Health and Safety Directive 89/655/EEC and EMC Directive 89/336/EEC 

Certification 

Type 2 conforming to EN 61496-1 and EN 60825-1 (emission class 1). CE type approval BIA/Cologne. UL, CSA 

Height protected 

(to EN 999) 

750…1200 mm (1 to 4 beams) 

Nominal sensing 

distance 

8m 

Response time 

< 20 ms (detectors + safety module) 

Type of safety 

outputs 

2 guided relays 1 N/O each 

AC-15: C300, 1800 VA inrush, 180 VA sealed 

DC-13: c 24V/1.5 A, L/R = 50 ms 

Maximum thermal current = 2.5 A 

“Muting” function (1) 

Yes (built-in) 

Supply voltage Safety module XPS-CM: a or c 24 V (19…26 V) 

Detectors XU2-S: c 24 V (10…30 V) 

Type references 

XU2 Sppppppp + XPS CM 

Pages 2/96 and 2/97 

(1) “Muting”: inhibition of the safety light curtain's "detection" function. 

2/86

0 

2 

Materials handling, packaging Ö 

Finger protection (14 mm) or hand protection (30 mm) 

107900 

Multi-beam, infrared transmission safety light curtains 

Compact model with safety relay output (PNP) 

2 

ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, IEC 61496-1-2 for type 4 ESPE 

Machinery Directive 98/37/CE, Health and Safety Directive 89/655/EEC and EMC Directive 89/336/EEC 

CE, TUV, UL, CSA 

260Ö 1390 mm (finger protection) 

350Ö 2095 mm (hand protection) 

0,3Ö 7.5 m (finger protection) 

0,3Ö 9 m or 0.3Ö 20 m (hand protection ) 

Depending on protected height: 20Ö 40 ms (finger protection) 

Depending on protected height: 20Ö 35 ms (hand protection) 

2 solid state outpouts PNP (NO) 

c 24V, ≤ 500 mA 

Protection against short-circuits 

Yes (by external module) 

c 24 V ± 20 %, 2 A 

XUS LT 

2/103 to 2/105 

2/87

General 2 

0 




2 

Presentation 

Directives and standards 

Application sectors 

Safety rules 

Protection of personnel 

Safety light curtains are electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) designed for 

the protection of persons operating or working in the vicinity of machinery, by 

stopping the dangerous movement of parts as soon as one of the light beams is 

broken. 

In particular, they provide protection to ensure the safety of personnel operating 

dangerous machinery (annex IV of 98/37/EC) but they are equally suitable for use 

with many other types of machines. They make it possible to protect personnel whilst 

allowing free access to machines. 

The absence of a door or guard reduces the time required for loading, inspection or 

adjustment operations as well as making access easier. 


These light curtains conform to: 

b European Machinery Safety Directive 98/37/EC and European Health and Safety 

Directive 89/655/EEC, 

b Low Voltage Directives 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC and also, the Electromagnetic 

Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, 

b Standard IEC 61496-1, IEC 61496-2 (electro-sensitive protection equipment: 

ESPE), 

b Standard EN 60825 (emission power), 

b Standard EN 999 (installation positioning), 

These light curtains are UL, CSA and TÜV certified. 

Main applications 

b Application sectors for type 2 products: 

- assembly and packaging lines, 

- conveying and handling lines, 

- warehousing and storage systems, 

- waste disposal skips. 

b Types of machine requiring the use of type 4 products: 

- presses (all types), shears and trimmers, 

- hoisting equipment, 

- saws (all types), 

- machine tools (lathes, milling machines, machining centres), 

- woodworking machines (planing machines, lathes, spindle moulding machines, 

side and face milling cutters), 

- textile machinery (carding machines, weaving looms, steam rooms), 

- assembly machines, 

- assembly robots. 

Detection of failures 

Detection of failures liable to compromise safety and stopping of the machine 

The design of the machine and its control system must be to the same level of safety 

as that of the safety light curtain in order to ensure the immediate stopping of the 

machines dangerous movement as soon as the hazardous zone, protected by the 

light curtain, is entered. 

It must not be possible to enter the protected zone without breaking the protective 

light beams. The safety light curtain must therefore be installed in such a manner 

that the light beams cannot be avoided. 

The machine can only be restarted if no danger exists and no personnel are present 

in the hazardous zone. The risk that persons might be inside the protected zone but 

out of the protective light beams must be addressed. 

2/88

General (continued) 2 

0 




Installation rules 

Hazardous zone 

These are defined in standard EN 999. In particular: 

- the safety distance between the light curtain and the hazardous zone, 

- the body approach speed, 

- multiple single-beam devices, 

- multi-beam light curtains. 

Transmitter 

Light 

beams 

S 

Optical axis 

Receiver 

Calculation of minimum safety distance S between the light curtain and the 

hazardous zone 

S=K(t1+t2)+C (general formula) 

S = minimum distance in mm 

K = body approach speed (or of part of the body) in mm/s 

t1 = response time of protection device in s 

t2 = stopping time of machine (dangerous movements) in s 

C = additional distance in mm 

2 

b For single-beam light curtains: 

K = 1600 mm/s 

C = 1200 mm for a single beam 

C = 850 mm for several beams 

The heights protected are as follows: 

Number of beams 

Heights protected (mm) 

4 300, 600, 900, 1200 

3 300, 700, 1100 

2 400, 900 

1 750 

b For multi-beam light curtains: 

K = 2000 mm/s 

C = 8 (d - 14) where d = detection capacity of the light curtain 

Note: in all cases: S ≥ 500 mm 

Special rules for presses 

The use of safety light curtains and mechanical protectors on metal working presses 

is governed by specific standards and rules. 

The standards specify that only safety light curtains or mechanical protectors must 

be used as safety devices so that, if a person enters the protective field whilst the 

dangerous movement is in progress, the machine stops as quickly as possible. 

“Quick stopping” means stopping of the ram before the operator can reach the 

hazardous zone, taking into account their speed of movement. 

The continuous self-monitoring function of safety light curtains is essential for 

metal working press applications. If a fault occurs in the safety device, the 

potentially dangerous machine must be stopped automatically. 

Once the protected zone is clear, the movement which was started and then 

interrupted by entry into the zone must not resume its normal travel, even after a 

Reset button has been pressed. Resetting must restart the movement from the 

beginning of the cycle. The safety light curtain must allow starting of a 

dangerous movement only if its correct operation has been proved (by pushing 

a test rod into the hazardous zone, or by means of an automatic device) and if a 

Reset button (start interlock) has been reactivated. 

The safety distance S is calculated in a special way for: 

- mechanical presses: refer to EN 692, 

- hydraulic presses, pneumatic folding machines, shears, bending and shaping 

machines: refer to prEN 693. 

2/89


0 




Prevention of access over top of light curtain 

STOP 

Additional safety devices 

Safety light curtains can only be used on machines on which the movement of 

working components can be stopped at any time during a hazardous phase. 

These light curtains provide a stop signal, not a control instruction. This stop signal 

must be stored. 

2 

Clearing of the light curtain must not result in restarting of moving parts. 

Subsequent restarting must only be possible by means of deliberate operation of the 

appropriate control device, after having checked that there is no longer any danger. 

Electrical interfacing between the light curtain and the machine circuits must 

correspond to the machine standard specifications. 

Without additional safety device: 

insufficient degree of protection 

With additional safety device: 

light beam(s) broken, the machine 

stops 

Prevention of access from beneath the light curtain 

STOP 

Where safety light curtains do not provide an adequate degree of protection due to 

their location, additional suitable safety devices or additional light curtains must be 

used in order to prevent operators from entering the protective light curtain and 

reaching the hazardous zone (EN 294, EN 811), or from remaining in the area 

between the hazardous zone and the safety light curtain (EN 999). 

The position and size of these additional safety devices must be such that it is 

impossible for operators to reach the hazardous zone in any way whatsoever 

(over the top, from beneath, from behind or from the side) without breaking the 

beams of the light curtain. 

These additional safety devices must be: 

b either fixed 

(if possible, screwed or welded to the machine), 

b or moving 

(with continuous monitoring of their position if they have to open). 

It must be impossible for operators to disconnect or cut-out the switching circuits for 

these additional safety devices. 



With additional safety device: 

light beam(s) broken, the machine 

stops 

Prevention of access from rear of light curtain 

STOP 



With additional safety device: light 

beam(s) broken, the machine 

stops 

Detection field 

Light curtain 

Obstruction 

Light curtain 

Channel selection 

zone 

Protection for "blanking" or "floating blanking" functions 

The "blanking" (inhibition of light beams) or "floating blanking" (floating inhibition of 

light beams) functions create non protected areas in the detection field. These non 

protected areas are required for some applications. If an obstruction does not 

completely fill these unprotected areas, one of two actions must be implemented: 

- an increase of safety distance to take into account a larger opening in the light 

curtain, 

- the area not filled by an obstruction must be guarded by a solid protection method 

(mechanical barrier: metal plate or unfolded structure). 

Addition of solid protection to the light curtain when using channel 

selection 

2/90


0 




Installation precautions 

Reflective surface 

Reflective surface 

The devices must be installed such that the transmitter and associated receiver are 

mounted facing each other and correctly aligned for both height and angle. 

The aperture angle of the optics and transmitter/receiver alignment tolerance are 

±2.5°. 

Transmitter 

L 

D 

Receiver 

Optical axis 

Reflective surfaces located alongside the optical axis could result in stray reflections 

interfering with the beams which are the furthest away from the axis and, in 

consequence, prevent detection of an object entering the hazardous zone. The direct 

beam could then be joined by a stray reflected beam and this latter beam would not 

be broken when the object is in the axis. 

2 

For this reason, prEN 50100-1 and 2 and IEC 61496-1 specify a minimum distance 

D whereby: 

-for0


0 




Definitions 

d 

Detection capacity (d) 

This is the smallest diameter (object) that a type 4 safety light curtain is capable of 

detecting with absolute certainty. 

d=P+e 

2 

P 

e 

P: distance between the axis of 2 adjacent beams 

e: diameter of the beams 

XUS L range P (mm) e (mm) d (mm) 

XUS Lp 

10.7 3.3 14 

Finger protection 

XUS Lp 

Hand protection 

21 9 30 

Protected height (Hp) 

According to prEN 50100-2, this is the zone (or height) within which an object of 

equal diameter to the detection capacity d is detected with absolute certainty. 

d 

1st beam 

Hp 

last beam 

d 

Response time 

European standard EN 999 fully incorporates the various aspects of “response time” 

in the formula for calculating the minimum safety distance (see page 2/89): 

S=K(t1+t2)+C 

with, in particular: 

- t1: response time of the protection device (in s). This is the time indicated for the 

XPS-CE and XUS-L ranges. It is the total time between detection by the device and 

switching of the output component. 

- t2: stopping time of the machine and, in particular, of its dangerous movements 

(in s). This information is supplied by the machine manufacturer. It is the time 

between the stop instruction and the actual stop of the dangerous mechanical 

components. 

2/92


0 




Functions 

Protection mode 

AUTO/MAN (automatic/manual): this is what standard IEC 61496 calls start (or 

restart) interlock of the safety light curtain: 

b in AUTO mode: on power-up or after the beams have been cleared, the light 

curtain resets itself automatically (closing of the OSSD output safety circuits), 

b in MANUAL mode: on power-up or after the beams have been cleared, the light 

curtain keeps its output safety circuits in the "open" position. Pressing (and releasing) 

the reset button will cause actual resetting of the light curtain (and closing of its 

OSSD output safety circuits). 

Note: in all cases, a general start instruction for the machine will trigger its actual 

start-up. 

Monitoring of external switching devices 

Also called EDM (External Devices Monitoring) by standard IEC 61496, this consists 

of monitoring the function (open or closed), together with the time taken to reach that 

condition, of the machines power switching components. 

Alarm 

This is a low power solid-state output for signalling to the automation system. This 

output closes when the light curtain switches to alarm mode. 

Signalling 

LED display of operating modes and alarm. 

Alignment aid 

Display by visible infrared LED of each beam broken. 

Muting (inhibition) 

When activated, the “muting” function inhibits the detection function of the light 

curtain. 

Activation (or deactivation) is achieved by means of standard sensors (photo-electric 

or other). When activated, a signal is sent to the automation system. This function is 

used to allow objects to access the hazardous zone during the process. 

Signalling informs the operator or operators that they are not protected. 

Blanking 

This function makes it possible to inhibit detection by a selected group of light beams 

in the light curtain (and not all the beams as with muting). This function (adapted to 

the size of the objects) allows the presence of objects during process operations. 

Caution when using: the detection capacity changes. This imposes a greater safety 

distance. In addition, the use of additional protection each side of the object present 

must be included, in order to prevent any intrusion into the free areas. 

Floating blanking 

This function makes it possible to inhibit one or two light beams (adjacent or 

otherwise), anywhere in the light curtain. This configuration is used, for example, for 

metal plate feeding applications on folding presses or shears. 

Blanking plus floating blanking 

The blanking (fixed inhibition of light beams) and floating blanking (moving inhibition 

of one or two light beams) functions can be combined. Caution, these applications 

require complementary safety measures. 

2 

2/93

Operating principle 2 



Preventa safety modules and single-beam 


With a test input associated with a built-in “muting” 

function 


XPS CM safety modules form, with XU2 S single-beam photo-electric sensors 

(periodically tested), a category 2 light curtain conforming to standards IEC/EN 61496 

parts 1 and 2 and EN 60825-1. 

The connection of 1 to 4 pairs of XU2 S photo-electric sensors makes it possible to 

create a protected space up to 1200 mm high conforming to EN 999 and 8 m long. 

2 

The built-in “muting” function allows for the automatic passage of parts to be 

machined or loaded pallets without interrupting the transportation movement. 

When the system is engaged by the operating control (in series with the main circuit 

feedback loop) and the light protection is not interrupted, the main circuit is closed by 

the two safety relays of the XPS CM module. 

An interruption of the protection field causes the safety outputs to open 

instantaneously, and the process PLC receives a stop command. The LED on the 

XPS CM front panel changes from green to red. The “open” state is maintained until 

the module is restarted using the start button. 

The “muting” function allows the light protection to be inhibited. This possibility allows 

a trolley transporting materials to pass through without triggering the main circuit. 

The “muting” function cannot be activated by supplying the inhibition devices unless 

the safety outputs have been switched on beforehand. 

To trigger the “muting” function, the inhibition devices must be activated within the 

3-second time interval. This synchronisation time for the two inhibition inputs can be 

deactivated by connecting two configuration terminals. The “muting” cycle has a 

maximum duration of 60 seconds. During this period, materials can be transported 

through the protection field without deactivating the safety outputs. The 60 second 

limit value of the “muting” cycle may be made infinite by connecting two configuration 

terminals. 

During the “muting” operation process, a light indicating the “muting” state is 

controlled by the XPS CM module. An error at the level of the indicator light 

(short-circuit, open-circuit) will be recognized straight away, and will deactivate the 

“muting” function. The indicator light comes on when a “muting” signal is generated 

and indicates the inhibition of the protection function. 

“Muting” indication 

Hazardous 

zone 

m 

Penetration direction 

D4 

D3 

Materials 

trolley 

MA1 

MB1 

D2 

D1 

MB2 

MA2 

Materials 

trolley 

D1, D2, D3, D4: monitoring photo-electric sensors. 

MA1, MB1, MA2, MB2: “Muting” photo-electric sensors. 

m = trolley length 

dM = distance between MA1, MB1 and MA2, MB2. 

Conditions to be observed for the “muting” function 

b “Muting” sensors must be of the XU2 M18PP340 thru-beam or XU9 M18PP340 

polarised reflex type or mechanical limit switches with contacts. 

b dM ≤ m to obtain continuous validation of the “muting” function. 

b Avoid the intrusion of persons during the “muting” phase. This phase is indicated 

by an indicator light on the “muting” indicator output of the XPS CM module. 

b A materials transportation trolley must generate the “muting” signal before it 

enters the protection field and interrupt the signal when it is once again released 

from all the sensors of the protection field. 

dM 


page 2/95 

References: 



page 2/98 

Connections: 

pages 2/99 to 2/101 

2/94







function 

Characteristics of safety modules 

Module type XPS CM1144 XPS CM1144P 


Category 2 (type 2) conforming to IEC/EN 61496-1 

control systems conforming to EN 954-1 

Ambient air temperature °C Operation: -10...+ 55 °C. Storage: - 25…+ 85 

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 Terminals: IP 20, enclosure: IP 40 

Supply Voltage V c 24, voltage limits: - 20…+ 20 % 

Maximum consumption W < 15, with thru-beam photoelectric sensors and “muting” signalling 

Module fuse protection 


Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 300 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 4 (overvoltage category 3, conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and 2) 

Inputs for sensors Number of inputs to be monitored 4 (terminals Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4) 

Input voltage V c 24 

Supply voltage of sensors V c 24 (terminal U+/U-) 

Supply current of sensors mA

References 2 






function 

2 

580000 


Description Type of 

terminal 

block 

connection 

Safety modules Integrated in 

for the monitoring module 

of single-beam 

photo-electric 

sensors with a 

test input 

associated with a 

built-in “muting” 

function 

Number 

of 

safety 

circuits 

Additional 

outputs 


kg 

2 4 c 24 V XPS CM1144 0.350 

XPS CM1144p 

Separate, 

can be 

removed from 

module 

2 4 c 24 V XPS CM1144P 0.350 

Principle: 

page 2/94 


page 2/95 


page 2/98 

Connections: 

pages 2/99 to 2/101 

2/96

References (continued) 2 






function 

Single-beam photo-electric sensors with a test input 

811176 

811175 

XU2 S18pP340L5 

Description 

PNP 

thru-beam 

pair 

(transmitter + 

receiver) 

Light or dark 

programmable 

switching 

Transmission 

type 

Infrared 

Sensing 

distance: 8 m 

Line of 

sight 

Along 

case axis 

Connection Reference Weight 

kg 

Pre-cabled 

L=5m 

XU2 S18PP340L5 0.485 

M12 connector XU2 S18PP340D 0.155 

2 

90° to 

case axis 

Pre-cabled 

L=5m 

XU2 S18PP340WL5 0.485 

M12 connector XU2 S18PP340WD 0.155 

811181 

811176 

811180 

XU2 S18pP340WL5 

Thru-beam 

transmitter 

alone 

(for 

XPS CM1144p) 

Infrared 

Along 

case axis 

Pre-cabled 

L=5m 

XU2 S18KP340L5T 0.235 

M12 connector XU2 S18KP340DT 0.075 

XU2 S18KP340L5T 

90° to 

case axis 

Pre-cabled 

L=5m 

XU2 S18KP340WL5T 0.235 

811180 

XU2 S18KP340WL5T 

M12 connector XU2 S18KP340WDT 0.155 

811178 

XU2 S18PP340DR 

PNP thru-beam 

receiver 

alone 

(for 

XPS CM1144p) 

Infrared 

Along 

case axis 

Pre-cabled 

L=5m 

XU2 S18PP340L5R 0.250 

M12 connector XU2 S18PP340DR 0.080 

811181 

90° to 

case axis 

Pre-cabled 

L=5m 

XU2 S18PP340WL5R 0.250 

XU2 S18PP340WL5R 

M12 connector XU2 S18PP340WDR 0.080 

Other products 

Sensors available pre-cabled with other cable lengths. 


Principle: 

page 2/94 


page 2/95 


page 2/98 

Connections: 

pages 2/99 to 2/101 

2/97







function 

Functional diagram of XPS CM module 

Supply 

voltage 

Protection field 

free 


interrupted 


free 

Terminals A1-A2 

2 

Sensors Z1-Z4 

Start button 

Output 13-14/23-24 


(A1/A2 - Fuse) 


(Starting required) 


(OSSD activated) 


(muting faulty) 

Key 

0 

1 

Start 

Start 

Functional diagram of the XPS CM module with “muting” function 

Supply 

voltage 

Protection 

field 

free 

MA muting 

activated 

Muting MB 

activated 

Protection 

field 

interrupted 

Protection 

field 

free 

Muting 

de-activated 

MA muting 

activated 

Protection 

field 

interrupted 

MB muting 

activated 

Protection 

field 

free 

Muting 

de-activated 

MA muting 

activated 

MB muting 

activated 

Protection 

field 

interrupted 

Muting 

faulty 

Muting 

de 

activated 

Protection 

field 

free 

Terminals A1-A2 

Sensors Z1-Z4 

Start button 

Output 13-14/23-24 


(A1/A2 Fuse) 


(starting required) 


(OSSD activated) 


(muting faulty) 

MA muting input 

MB muting input 

Lamp muting 

Key 

0 

1 

Start 

< 3 s 

< 300 ms 

< 60 s 

> 3 s 

Start 

> 60 s 

Key to LEDs 

1 

2 

3 

4 


2 Signalling for restarting 

3 Safety output closed 

4 Safety output open 

Principle: 

page 2/94 


page 2/95 

References: 


Connections: 

pages 2/99 to 2/101 

2/98

Operation, 

curves, 

dimensions, 

connections 2 





function 

Operation 

Output state (PNP) indicator, yellow 

LED (illuminated when sensor 

output is on) 

Light switching 

No object 

in beam 

Object 

in beam 

Dark switching 

No object 

in beam 

Object 

in beam 

Curves 

Infrared detection curve 

E 

Øofbeam 

cm 

Functional check 

Signal 

level 

1,5 

1 

0,7 

2 

11 m 

Red LED 

LEDoff 

– 

Optimum 

alignment 

LEDon 

+ 

Dimensions 

XU2 S18PP340L5, XU2 S18PP340L5L 

4 

M18x1 (2) (1) 

XU2 S18PP340D 

4 

M18x1 (2) 

(1) 

55 24 

80 

55 

80 

92 

24 

(1) LED Fixing nut tightening torque: 24 N.m 

(2) Potentiometer Connector tightening torque: 2 N.m 

XU2 S18PP340WL5 

XU2 S18PP340WD 

4 

M18x1 

(2) 

(1) 

4 

M18x1 (2) 

(1) 

55 

95 

24 

55 

80 

107 

24 

(1) LED Fixing nut tightening torque: 24 N.m 

(2) Potentiometer Connector tightening torque: 2 N.m 

Wiring schemes (3-wire c) 

Cable connection 

Transmitter Receiver Receiver 

Light switching (no object present). 

PNP output 

Dark switching (no object present). PNP output 

BN 

OG 

BN 

Plug-in connector 

Transmitter Receiver Receiver 

Light switching (no object present). Dark switching (no object present). PNP output 

PNP output 

1 

2 1 + 

2 

3 

1 + 

4 – 

4 

3 

– 

2 

3 

Cable connections Connector schemes Beam break test (for transmitter only) 

Sensor connector pin view Beam made Beam broken 

(–) 

(+) 

(OUT) 

(Prog.) 

(Test) 

BU 

BN 

BK 

OG 

VI 

VI 

BU 

(Blue) 

(Brown) 

(Black) (receiver) 

(Orange) (receiver) 

(Violet) (transmitter) 

+ 

– 

Test 

Transmitter 

2 

Test 

1 (+) 

3 (–) 

4 

BN 

BK 

BU 

Receiver 

2 

Switching 

+ 

– 

1 (+) 

3 (–) 

4 

Output 

BK 

BU 

OG 

BN/1 

VI/2 

BU/3 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

BN/1 

VI/2 

BU/3 

+ 

– 

Principle: 

page 2/94 


page 2/95 

References: 


2/99







function 

Connection of XPS CM module with 4 pairs of XU2 S single-beam sensors 

(Connection of 1 to 4 pairs of XU2 S sensors to XPS CM, see page 2/101) 

24 V 

2 

F1 

BN 

BU 

VI 

(1) Sensor 3 

OG 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

De-activation of time 

intervals 

STM 

BN 

BU 

VI 

(1) Sensor 1 

OG 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

S1 

Start 

ESC 

K3 

K4 

3s 

60 s 

H1 

Muting 

A1 U U 

T1 

Z1 

Z3 

Y1 

Y2 

Y3 Y4 Y5 

UV 

H1 

13 

23 

Y33 

T 

K1 

Logic 

K2 

XPS CM 

A2 U U T2 T3 

Z2 Z4 UV MA MB 

14 

24 

Y34 

Y44 

Y54 

Y64 

(1) Sensor 2 

(1) Sensor A1 

(2) Sensor A2 

OG 

OG 

OG 

BN 

BU 

VI 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

BN 

BU 

BK 

A 

BN 

BU 

VI 

(1) Sensor 4 

OG 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

(2) Sensor B1 (2) Sensor B2 

OG 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

BN 

BU 

BK 

A 

OG 

A1/A2 - Fuse 

Starting required 

OSSD activated 

Muting faulty 

N ( ) 

K3 

K4 

Motor main control 

object 

XU2 S sensors can be programmed for light switching or dark switching (dark switching with sensors 1 and 3 and light switching with sensors 2 and 4, for example). 

ESC: external start conditions 

Y1-Y2: return loop. 

STM: for stopping time measurement. 

(1) Protection field sensors 

(2) Muting sensors 

Principle: 

page 2/94 

2/100 


page 2/95 

References: 

pages 2/96 and 2/97







function 

Connection of XPS CM module with 1 pair of XU2 S sensors 

(dark switching) 

Connection of XPS CM module with 2 pairs of XU2 S sensors 

(dark switching) 

Sensor 1 

OG 

Sensor 1 

OG 

A1 U+ U– 

XPS CM 

T1 

A2 U+ U T2 T3 

– 

BN 

BU 

VI 

Test 

+ – 

+ – 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

Z4 

A1 U+ U– 

XPS CM 

T1 

A2 U+ U– T2 T3 

BN 

BU 

VI 

Test 

BN 

BU 

VI 

OG 

+ + 

– – 

A 

Sensor 2 

+ + – – 

Test 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

BN 

BU 

BK 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

Z4 

2 

Connection of XPS CM module with 3 pairs of XU2 S sensors Connection of XPS CM module with 4 pairs of XU2 S sensors 

(2 for dark switching, 1 for light switching) (2 for dark switching, 2 for light switching) 

Sensor 3 

OG 

Sensor 3 

OG 

BN 

BU 

VI 

Test 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

BN 

BU 

VI 

Test 

BN 

BU 

BK 

A 

Sensor 1 

OG 

Sensor 1 

OG 

A1 U+ U– 

XPS CM 

T1 

BN 

BU 

VI 

A2 U+ U– T2 T3 

BN 

BU 

VI 

Test 

OG 

+ + 

– – 

+ + 

– – 

A 

Sensor 2 

+ + – – 

A 

Test 

BN 

BU 

BK 

BN 

BU 

BK 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

Z4 

A1 U+ U– 

XPS CM 

T1 

BN 

BU 

VI 

A2 U+ U– T2 T3 

BN 

BU 

VI 

+ + 

– – 

+ + – – 

Test 

A 

OG 

+ – 

+ – 

+ – 

A 

Test 

Sensor 2 

BN 

BU 

BK 

BN 

BU 

BK 

Z1 

Z2 

Z3 

Z4 

Sensor 4 

OG 

BN 

BU 

VI 

Test 

+ – 

A 

BN 

BU 

BK 

Principle: 

page 2/94 


page 2/95 

References: 



page 2/98 

2/101




Safety light curtains, type 4 

Compact light curtains with solid-state output 

2 

Light curtain type XUS LTQ6pppp (14 mm) XUS LTR5ppppp (30 mm) XUS LTY5ppppp (30 mm) 


Conforming to standards ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, 

IEC 61496-1-2 for type 4 ESPE 


e, TUV,UL,CSA 

European directives 

Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Health and Safety directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 

89/336 EEC 

Ambient air temperature Operating °C 0…+ 55 

For storage °C -25…+75 

Relative humidity 

95% maximum, without condensation 


Shock and vibration 

resistance 

Materials 

Fixings 

Conforming to IEC 61496-1 

Shock resistance: 10 gn, impulse 16 ms, 

Vibration resistance: 10…55 Hz, amplitude: 0.35 ± 0.05 mm 

Casing: aluminium with electrostatically applied red (RAL 3000) polyester paint finish; 

end caps: 20% fibreglass impregnated polycarbonate. 

End brackets (included) 

Optical characteristics 

Minimum detection capacity mm 14 (finger) 30 (hand) 

Nominal sensing distance (Sn) m 0.3…7.5 0.3…9 0.3…20 

Height protected mm 260…1390 350…2095 

Effective aperture angle (EAA) 

2.5° at 3 m 

Light source 

GaAIAs LED, 850 nm 

Immunity to ambient light Conforming to IEC 61496-2 


Response time ms 20…40 20…35 

Power supply c 24 V ± 20% 2 A conforming to IEC 61496 and IEC 60204-1 

Transmitter mA 285 

Receiver A 1.4 (with maximum load) 

Maximum current 

consumption (no-load) 

Transmitter mA 285 

Receiver mA 300 

Immunity to interference Conforming to EN 61496-1 

Safety outputs (OSSD) (Output Signal Switching Devices) 

2 solid-state PNP (N/O) outputs ≤ 500 mA, c 24 V (Short-circuit protection) 

Alarm output 

1 solid-state output 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN depending on model 

Monitoring activation of output switching devices (MPCE/EDM) 50 mA, c 24 V 

Signalling Transmitter 1 LED (power supply) 

Receiver 

4 LEDs (stop, run, interlock, suppression of floating light beam or ECS/FB (Floating 

Blanking) 

Connections (1) Transmitter M12, 5-pin, male connector on 0.25 m flying lead 

Receiver 

M12, 8-pin, male connector on 0.25 m flying lead 

Conductor c.s.a. Transmitter mm 2 0.34. Tinned wires. 

Receiver mm 2 Power supply and output signals: 0.5 (white, orange and yellow wires); 0.34 (grey, pink 

and violet wires). Tinned wires. 

Cable resistance Transmitter Ω 0.056 per metre for 0.34 mm 2 c.s.a. 

Receiver Ω 0.040 per metre for 0.5 mm 2 c.s.a. 

Cable lengths m Pre-wired connectors with screened (60% coverage) cable lengths of 10, 15 and 30 m 

are available separately. The maximum cable length is 60 m, depending on the load 

current and power supply. 

Tightening torque 

Receiver end cap assembly screw: 0.9 Nm 

Functions 

Functions 

Monitoring of external switching devices 

(EDM = External Devices Monitoring) 

“Test” function 

“Muting” function (inhibition) 

(1) Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 2/105. 

- Auto/Manual, 

- Monitoring of external switching devices (EDM: External Devices Monitoring), 

- Test (MTS: Monitoring Test Signal), 

- Blanking (ECS/B), 

- Floating Blanking (FB), 

- Alignment aid by display of each light beam broken, 

- LED display of operating modes and alarm. 

Selection of Auto/Manual, blanking relay monitoring, floating/blanking relay monitoring 

and floating relay monitoring by configuration switches. 

Monitoring of the function (open or closed) as well as the response time of the power 

components. 

Parameterable using configuration switches. 

Instigates the stop instruction of the light curtain by opening the contact (simulated 

intrusion) 

Possible with external module XPS LMS1150 

General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 

References: 

pages 2/103 to 2/107 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/108 and 2/109 

Connections: 

pages 2/110 and 2/111 

2/102

References 2 





107900 

Transmitter-receiver pairs for finger protection (1) 

Detection capacity 14 mm. Sensing distance 0.3 to 7.5 m. 

b 2 PNP safety outputs 

Height 

protected 

Response 

time 

Number of 

light beams 

Alarm 

output 

Reference 

(2) (3) 

Weight 

mm ms kg 

260 20 24 PNP XUS LTQ6A0260 4.000 

350 20 32 PNP XUS LTQ6A0350 4.270 

435 20 40 PNP XUS LTQ6A0435 4.530 

2 

520 25 48 PNP XUS LTQ6A0520 4.800 

610 25 56 PNP XUS LTQ6A0610 5.060 

700 25 64 PNP XUS LTQ6A0700 5.330 

785 30 72 PNP XUS LTQ6A0785 5.600 

870 30 80 PNP XUS LTQ6A0870 5.860 

955 35 88 PNP XUS LTQ6A0955 6.720 

1045 35 96 PNP XUS LTQ6A1045 6.990 

1130 35 104 PNP XUS LTQ6A1130 7.250 

1215 40 112 PNP XUS LTQ6A1215 7.520 

1305 40 120 PNP XUS LTQ6A1305 7.780 

XUS LTQ6Apppp 

1390 40 128 PNP XUS LTQ6A1390 8.050 

(1) Supplied with a test rod, 2 sets of 2 brackets with fixings and a user guide with certificate of 

conformity and 1 arc suppressor set. 

Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 2/105. 

(2) To order a transmitter-receiver pair with an NPN alarm output, replace the letter A by the 

letter B in the reference. 

Example: reference XUS LTQ6A0260 becomes XUS LTQ6B0260, with an NPN alarm output. 

(3) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding 

transmitter-receiver pair. 

Example: reference XUS LTQ6A0260 becomes XUS LTQ6A0260R for the receiver only. 

To order a transmitter only, replace the letter A or B by E and add the letter T to the end of the 

reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. 

Example: reference XUS LTQ6A0260 becomes XUS LTQ6E0260T for the transmitter only. 

Other versions 

Combining type 4 safety light curtains with external module for 

muting function. 


General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/108 and 2/109 

Connections: 

pages 2/110 and 2/111 

2/103






Transmitter-receiver pairs for hand protection (1) 

Detection capacity 30 mm. Sensing distance 0.3 to 9 m. 


2 

107900 

Height 

protected 

Response 

time 

Number of 

light beams 

Alarm 

output 

Reference 

(2) (3) 

Weight 

mm ms kg 

350 20 16 PNP XUS LTR5A0350 4.270 

520 20 24 PNP XUS LTR5A0520 4.800 

700 20 32 PNP XUS LTR5A0700 5.330 

870 20 40 PNP XUS LTR5A0870 5.860 

1045 25 48 PNP XUS LTR5A1045 6.990 

1215 25 56 PNP XUS LTR5A1215 7.520 

1390 25 64 PNP XUS LTR5A1390 8.050 

1570 30 72 PNP XUS LTR5A1570 8.580 

1745 30 80 PNP XUS LTR5A1745 9.110 

1920 35 88 PNP XUS LTR5A1920 9.640 

2095 35 96 PNP XUS LTR5A2095 10.160 

Detection capacity 30 mm. Sensing distance 0.3 to 20 m. 


To order a transmitter-receiver pair with a sensing distance 0.3 to 20 m, replace the letter R by Y. 

Example: reference XUS LTR5A0350 becomes XUS LTY5A0350 with a sensing distance 0.3 

to 20 m. 

XUS LTR/Ypppppp 

(1) Supplied with a test rod, 2 sets of 2 brackets with fixings and a user guide with certificate of 

conformity and 1 arc suppressor set. 

Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 2/104. 

(2) To order a transmitter-receiver pair with an NPN alarm output, replace the letter A by the letter 

B in the reference. 

Example: reference XUS LTR5A0350 becomes XUS LTR5B0350,withanNPNalarmoutput. 

(3) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding 

transmitter-receiver pair. 

Example: reference XUS LTR5A0350 becomes XUS LTR5A0350R for the receiver only. 

To order a transmitter only, replace the letter A or B by E and add the letter T to the end of the 

reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. 

Example: reference XUS LTR5A0350 becomes XUS LTR5E0350T for the transmitter only. 


Combining type 4 safety light curtains with external module for 

muting function. 


General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/108 and 2/109 

Connections: 

pages 2/110 and 2/111 

2/104






DF563511 

Accessories 

Description Material For use with 

light curtains 

90° mirror 

adaptor with 

rotatable 

fixings 

Glass 

(0.88 Sn) (2) 

Height (1) Reference 

mm 

Weight 

kg 

XUSLTppp260 343 XUS ZM0305 1.900 


















2 

XUS ZM/ZApppp 

Stainless steel 

(0.82 Sn) (2) 

XUSLTppp260 343 XUS ZA0305 2.000 


















(1) Usable reflective height. 

(2) Reduction of sensing distance to be taken into account for each 90° mirror adaptor used. 

Description Usage Length Reference Weight 

m 

kg 

Fixings kit (2 brackets) 

Light curtains 

XUSLT 

– XUS LZ213 0.100 

563528 

Pre-wired female connectors Transmitter type 10 XSZ TCT10 0.050 

15 XSZ TCT15 0.075 

30 XSZ TCT30 0.100 

Receiver type 10 XSZ TCR10 0.050 

15 XSZ TCR15 0.075 

30 XSZ TCR30 0.100 

End cap with connector Receiver type – XUS LZ222 0.108 

XSZ TCTpp 

XSZ TCRpp 

Validation kit 


XUSLT 

– XUS LZ100 0.007 

531506 

Arc suppressor (pair) 

All types of light – XUS LZ500 0.020 

curtain 

Anti-vibration kit (see page 2/106) 

Protective cover (see page 2/107) 

XUZ LZ100 

User guide on 

CD-ROM 

All types of light 

curtain 

– XUS LZ450 0.020 

(3) Depending on application. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/108 and 2/109 

Connections: 

pages 2/110 and 2/111 

2/105

Selection, 

references 2 




2 

Anti-vibration kit 

Selection according to weight and application 

Weight classes 

Description Reference Height 

mm 

Weight class 

1 2 3 

Type of light curtains XUSLTQ 260…1045 p 

1130…1390 p 

XUSLTR/Y 250…870 p 

1045…1390 p 

1570…2095 p 

Type of mirror adaptor XUSZM (1) 457 p 

610…711 p 

813…1016 p 

XUSZA 305…1067 p 

1219…1626 p 

1830…2134 p 

(1) Use of the anti-vibration kit is not recommended for mirror adaptors greater than 1016 mm in height. 

Applications 

Weight class Anti-shock applications(1) Anti-vibration applications (2) 

Shear mounted Compression mounted Shear mounted Compression mounted 

Number of 

fixings per 

head (3) 

Reference 

Number of 

fixings per 

head (3) 

Reference 

Number of 

fixings per 

head (3) 

Reference 

Number of 

fixings per 

head (3) 

Reference 

1 2 or 4 XSZSMK 2 XSZSMK1 2 or 4 XSZSMK 2 XSZSMK 

2 or 4 XSZSMK1 2 or 4 XSZSMK1 2 or 4 XSZSMK1 

2 XSZSMK2 

2 4 XSZSMK 2 XSZSMK 2 or 4 XSZSMK 2 or 4 XSZSMK 

4 XSZSMK1 2 or 4 XSZSMK1 4 XSZSMK1 4 XSZSMK1 

2 or 4 XSZSMK2 2 or 4 XSZSMK2 

3 4 XSZSMK 2 XSZSMK 4 XSZSMK 2 XSZSMK 

4 XSZSMK1 4 XSZSMK1 4 XSZSMK1 4 XSZSMK1 

2 XSZSMK2 2 or 4 XSZSMK2 

(1) Low frequency, high amplitude applications, such as punching presses where a powerful shock can exist. 

(2) High frequency, low amplitude applications, such as offset printing machines where constant vibration can exist. 

(3) Head: transmitter, receiver or mirror. 

Shock absorber characteristics 

Compression mounted 


per shock absorber 

Maximum load Torque Natural 

frequency 

Shear mounted 

Maximum load Torque Natural 

frequency 

kg Nm Hz kg Nm Hz 

For anti- XSZSMK 8.16 25.16 11 1.36 3.13 9.5 

vibration kit XSZSMK1 2.177 10.86 14 1.13 2.34 9 

XSZSMK2 24.94 107.39 13 10.43 14.94 7.5 

DF563510 

References of anti-vibration kits 

Description Usage Reference Weight 

kg 

Anti-vibration kit 

kit comprising 8 shock absorbers, 

stud fixing. 

16 washers and 16 nuts included 

with kit. 

For all types of light curtain 

and 90° mirror adaptor 

XSZ SMK 0.030 

XSZ SMK1 0.020 

XSZ SMK2 0.045 

XSZ SMK 

Dimensions: 

page 2/109 

2/106


references 2 




Protective covers for light curtains 


Ambient air 

temperature 

XUS ZWSppp 

For operation °C 0...55 

For storage °C - 25...70 

Material 

Lexan 

Reduction in sensing 

distance (Sn) 

Environmental chemicals 

0.91 (1) 

Chemical resistance Acids Resistant 

Aliphatic hydrocarbons 

2 

Alcohols 

Alkalis 

Detergents and cleaners 

Greases and oils 

Silicone oils and greases 

Amines 

Aromatic hydrocarbons 

Detergents and cleaners containing 

alkaline products 

Esters 

Halogenated hydrocarbons 

Ketones 

Silicone oils and greases containing 

alkaline products 

Limited resistance 

Not resistant 

563529 

References of protective covers 

Description For use with Height Unit reference Weight 

mm 

kg 

Lexan protective covers XUSLTppp260 279 XUS ZWS0260 1.510 

for XUS LTppp 

transmitter-receiver pair 

(0.91 Sn) (1) 

XUSLTppp350 371 XUS ZWS0350 1.570 

(Sold in sets of 2) 












XUS ZWSpppp 






(1) Reduction of sensing distance be taken into account for each pair of Lexan protective covers 

used. 

Dimensions: 

page 2/109 

2/107

Dimensions 2 






XUS LTppp 

90° mirror adaptors 

XUS ZMpppp/XUS ZApppp 

59,1 

52,8 (1) 

32 

145 8xØ7 

2 

50 

(2) 

36,8 

b1 

35 

38,1 

10,2 37,3 

26,7 

b 

H 

24 

b 

52 

102 

113 

13 

H 

13 

16˚ 

(1) 6 elongated holes 11.45 x 6.75 mm. 

(2) M12 male connector on 0.25 m flying lead. 

XUS b b1 H Height XUS b H 

protected 

LTppp0260 263 347.3 327 260 Zp0305 343 386 

LTppp0350 351 435.3 415 350 Zp0457 495 538 

LTppp0435 438 522.3 502 435 Zp0610 648 690 

LTppp0520 523 607.3 587 520 Zp0711 749 792 

LTppp0610 613 697.3 677 610 Zp0813 851 894 

LTppp0700 700 784.3 764 700 Zp0914 953 995 

LTppp0785 785 869.3 849 785 Zp1016 1054 1097 

LTppp0870 871 955.3 935 870 Zp1067 1105 1148 

LTppp0955 958 1042.3 1022 955 Zp1219 1257 1300 

LTppp1045 1046 1130.3 1110 1045 Zp1321 1359 1402 

LTppp1130 1133 1217.3 1197 1130 Zp1422 1461 1503 

LTppp1215 1219 1303.3 1283 1215 Zp1626 1664 1706 

LTppp1305 1306 1390.3 1370 1305 Zp1830 1867 1910 

LTppp1390 1394 1478.3 1458 1390 Zp2134 2172 2214 

LTppp1570 1570 1654.3 1634 1570 

LTppp1745 1746 1830.3 1810 1745 

LTppp1920 1920 2004.3 1984 1920 

LTppp2095 2095 2179.3 2159 2095 

General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

References: 

pages 2/103 to 2/107 

Connections: 

pages 2/110 and 2/111 

2/108

38,8 






Anti-vibration kits (1) 

XSZ SMK1 

Ø6 

XSZ SMK 

Ø6 

9,65 12,7 9,65 Ø9,9 

9,65 16 9,65 Ø19 

2 

XSZ SMK2 

Ø6 

12,7 19 12,7 Ø25,4 

(1) The anti-vibration kit comprises 8 shock absorbers, 16 washers and 16 nuts. 

Protective cover 

XUS ZWSpppp 

a 

57,15 

XUS a XUS a 

ZWS0260 279 ZWS1045 1062 

ZWS0350 371 ZWS1130 1148 

ZWS0435 452 ZWS1215 1234 

ZWS0520 528 ZWS1305 1321 

ZWS0610 627 ZWS1390 1410 

ZWS0700 716 ZWS1570 1585 

ZWS0785 800 ZWS1745 1758 

ZWS0870 886 ZWS1920 1930 

ZWS0955 973 ZWS2095 2108 

General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

References: 

pages 2/103 to 2/107 

Connections: 

pages 2/110 and 2/111 

2/109

Connections 2 





Direct connection with XUS LTppp 

N 

L 

F1 

Earth N L 

Power supply 

Receiver XUS LT 

Transmitter XUS LT 

2 

Earth 

0 V 24 V 

GND 

0 V 

(1) 

24 V MPCE/EDM 

Start 

AUX 

OSSD1 

OSSD2 

GND 

0 V 

24 V 

MTS 

MTS Ret 

(5) 

K1 

K2 

(3) 

NC 

To PLC 

(2) 

Start K1 K2 

(4) (4) 

Test 

(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line must be connected to the 0 V line 

of the system. 

(2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional). 

(3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line. 

(4) The MPCE/EDM coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit. 

(5) Connect the 0 V terminal to earth. 

Note: There must not be an unscreened connection exceeding 1 m in length (for example: start button, auxiliary outputs, power supply, MPCE/EDM, OSSD1 and 

OSSD2). Relays K1 and K2 must have force guided contact sets. 

Connection via a Preventa XPS AFL module 

Control panel 

L 

N 

L 

K3 

K4 

Start 

F3 

F4 

GND N L 

Power supply 

F1 

A1 

C8 C7 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33 

XPS AFL 

T 

K1 

Logic 

Control circuit 

K3 

K2 

K4 

GND 

0 V 24 V 

A2 

S11 S12 S11 S22 

14 24 34 

(2) 

To PLC (1) 

N 

K3 K4 

Test 

GND 0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM Start AUX OSSD1 OSSD2 

Receiver XUS LT(3) 

GND 0 V 24 V MTS 

Transmitter XUS LT 

MTS Ret 

(1) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional). 

(2) Connect the 0 V terminal to earth. 

(3) The light curtain must be configured with MPCE/EDM OFF and with automatic start. 

Note: There must not be an unscreened connection exceeding 1 m in length (for example: start button, auxiliary outputs, power supply, MPCE/EDM, OSSD1 and 

OSSD2). Relays K1 and K2 must have force guided contact sets. 

General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

References: 

pages 2/103 to 2/107 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/108 and 2/109 

2/110

Connections 2 





Transmitter 

Remote connector of transmitter 

Transmitter status indicator 

MTS (1) 

MTS return (1) 

BK 

BU 

Screening 

Non isolated wire 

1 

WH 

BN 

2 

+ 24 V 

0 V 

1 Yellow LED 

(1) Light curtain test input. 

Receiver 

Remote connector of receiver Receiver status indicator Configuration indicator 

Start 

1 2 3 4 5 

MPCE/EDM 

GY 

OSSD2 

Alarm 

output 

VT 

c + 24 V 

PK 

WH 

YE 

BN 

OG 

c 0 V 

OSSD1 

P 

6 

1 

2 

3 

4 

ON 

5 

6 

5 

6 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 2 

ON 

Screening 

Non isolated wire 

3 

1 Channel selection or floating light beam 

suppression 

orange LED 

2 Interlock or Alarm 

yellow LED 

3 Connector 

4 Machine stop 

red LED 

5 Machine run 

green LED 

6 Programming button 

1 Switches A 

2 Switches B 

3 Connector 

General: 

pages 2/88 to 2/93 


page 2/102 

References: 

pages 2/103 to 2/107 

Dimensions: 

pages 2/108 and 2/109 

2/111

3 - 

3 

3/0

Contents 

3-Safety dialogue solutions 

Selection guide dialogue components ..........................page3/2 

b Emergency stop mushroom head Ø 22 pushbuttons, 

Harmony ® style 4, chromium-plated metal bezel 

v Complete units, trigger action ............................... page 3/5 

v ZB4-B sub-assemblies for user assembly: bodies + heads. ........ page 3/6 

b Emergency stop mushroom head Ø 22 pushbuttons, 

Harmony ® style 5, plastic bezel 

v Complete units, trigger action ............................... page 3/9 

v ZB5-B sub-assemblies for user assembly: bodies + heads. ....... page 3/10 

b XAL control stations for Ø 22 trigger action control and signalling units 

v Complete stations ....................................... page 3/13 

v Separate components for user assembly ..................... page 3/14 

b Enabling switch for safety circuits 

3 

v Type XY2-AU. .......................................... page 3/17 

b Two-hand ergonomic control stations 

v Type XY2-SB, with XB4-B control units. ...................... page 3/21 

b Emergency stop trip wire switches 

v Type XY2-Cp ........................................... page 3/27 

v Accessories and spare parts ............................... page 3/30 

b Metal case foot switches with positive opening operation on release 

v Type XPE, metal ........................................ page 3/39 

v Type XPE, plastic ....................................... page 3/43 

b Illuminated beacons and indicator banks Ø 70 mm 

v Illuminated beacons, type XVB-L 

- for bulb with BA 15d base fitting ........................... page 3/50 

- with LED light source. ................................... page 3/51 

- with “flash” discharge tube. ............................... page 3/52 

v Indicator banks, type XVB-C : 

- illuminated lens units for bulb with BA 15d base fitting .......... page 3/53 

- illuminated lens units with integral LED. ..................... page 3/54 

- illuminated lens units with “flash” discharge tube .............. page 3/55 

- audible signalling units, base units, cover .................... page 3/56 

v Accessories ............................................ page 3/57 

v Rotating mirror beacon, type XVR ........................... page 3/61 

v Sirens, type XVS ........................................ page 3/63 

3/1


0 

Safety dialogue solutions 

3 

Dialogue components 

Applications Emergency stop Emergency stop mushr. Control stations for: Enabling grip 

mushroom head head pushbuttons for: - assembly and packing switch for: 

pushbuttons for: - assembly and packing machines, 

- robots, 

- machine tools, machines, - paper, cardboard and - machine tool 

- foundries, presses, - paper, cardboard and woodworking machines, applications, 

- automobile industry. woodworking machines, - food processing, chem- - labellers 

- food processing and ical & automobile induschemical 

industries. tries, mechanical presses. 

3 

Features Metal head and fixing Plastic head and fixing Plastic enclosure Plastic enclosure 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4, 

IEC/EN 60947-1, 

standards JIS C 4520, 

CSA C22-2 n° 14, 

UL 508 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, 

IEC/EN 60204-1, 

EN 292, EN 775, 

UL 508, 

CSA 622-2 n° 14 

Protective Standard version, “TH” treatment Standard version, 

treatment 

“TC” treatment 

Standard version, 

“TH” treatment 

Ambient temperature 

Operation - 25…+ 70 °C - 25…+ 60 °C 

Storage - 40…+ 70 °C - 40…+ 70 °C 

Electric shock Conforming to IEC 60536 

protection Class I Class II 

Degree of protection IP 65 IP 66 

to IEC 60529 and 

IP 65 with pushbutton 

NF C 20-010 

Positive operation Contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 appendix K 2-contact, 3-position with 

positive opening operation 


appendix K 

Rated insulation Ui = 600 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1 Ui = 250 V 

voltage 

Ui = 125 V for pushbutton 

Rated impulse U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1 Uimp=2.5kV 

withstand voltage conforming to IEC 60947-1 

Type references 

Harmony style 4 Harmony style 5 XAL K XY2 AU 

XB4 B, ZB4 B XB5 A, ZB5 A 

Pages 3/4 to 3/7 3/8 to 3/11 3/12 to 3/15 3/16 and 3/17 

3/2

0 

3 

Ergonomic two-hand control stations 

for control of machine tools 

Trip wire switches for: Foot switches for: 

Illuminated beacons and 

- conveyor belts, - machine tools, 

indicator banks 

- mechanical handling, 

machine tools 

- electrical test labs 

- woodworking machines, 

- rubber, plastics industry, 

- injection moulding machines. 

2 control pushbuttons and 1 mushroom 

head Emergency stop pushbutton 

Length of protected zone: 

15 to 100 metres. Can be 

tripped by the operator at 

any point in the work zone 

Metal, with or without 

protective cover. Single or 

double pedal 

Plastic, with or without 

protective cover. Single 

pedal 

Direct or tube fixing 

3 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, 

EN 574, EN 292, EN 999 

XY2 CB: 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, 

CSA C22-2 n 14 

XY2 CE/CH: 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, 

UL 508, 

CSA C22-2 n 14 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, 

CSA C22-2 n 14, 

with protective guard: 

NF E 09-031 

XPE B/G: 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, 

UL, CSA 

XPE A/Y: 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

Standard version, ìTCî treatment 

Special version, ìTHî treatment 

- 25Ö + 70 C - 25Ö + 70 C (1) 

- 40Ö + 70 C - 40Ö + 70 C (1) 

Conforming to IEC 60536 

Class I 

Direct fixing: class II 

Tube fixing: class I 

IP 65 XY2 CB: enclosure IP 22, IP 66, XPE B: IP 66 IP 65 

contact housing IP 65; IP 669 (with protective XPE G: IP 66 

Vertically mounted on base 

XY2 CE/CH: IP 657, IP 667 guard) 

XPE S: IP 65 

unit 

with booted pushbutton XPE A/Y: IP 43 

Contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 appendix K 

Ui = 600 V degree of pollution 3 

conforming to IEC 60947-1 

Ui = 500 V degree of Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 to IEC 60947-1 Ui = 250 V to IEC 60947-1 

pollution 3 to IEC 60947-1 Ui = 300 V to CSA C22-2 n 14 

XY2 CE, CH:Ui = 300 V 

to UL 508 and 

CSA C22-2 n 14. 

XY2 CB: Ui = 600 V 

to CSA C22-2 n 14 

U imp = 6 kV to IEC 60947-1 XY2 CE, CH ; U imp = 6 kV U imp = 6 kV to IEC 60947-1 U imp = 4 kV to 

to IEC 60947-1 IEC 60947-1 

XY2 B XY2 C XPE M, XPE R XPEA, XPEB XVB 

XPEG, XPES 

XPE Y r 

3/18 to 3/23 3/26 to 3/33 3/38 to 3/41 3/42 to 3/45 3/48 to 3/57 

(1) See characteristics page 3/48. 

r Available 1 st quarter 2004 according to type. 

3/3


0 


3 

Harmony ® style 4 

Emergency stop mushroom head pushbuttons 

Ø 22 trigger action 

Chromium-plated metal bezel 

Environment 

Protective treatment Standard version “TH” 

Ambient air temperature Storage °C -40…+70 

around the device Operation °C - 25…+ 70 unless otherwise stated 

Electric shock protection Conforming to IEC 60536 Class I 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65 unless otherwise stated 

Conforming to NEMA 

NEMA 4X and 13, unless otherwise stated 

3 

Mechanical shock protection Conforming to EN 50102 IK 03 

Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4, 

JIS C 4520, 

UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

Product certifications UL Listed, CSA Standard contact with screw clamp terminals : A600 ; Q600 

BV, RINA, LROS, DNV, GL (pending) Standard contact with screw clamp terminals 

Terminal identification Conforming to EN 50005 and EN 50013 

Characteristics of contact or combined functions 


Contact operation N/C or N/O Slow break 

Positive operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 All functions incorporating a N/C contact are positive opening 

Appendix K 

operation 

Operating force Emergency stop with N/C + N/O : 

- Push-pull N - standard : 45 

- trigger action : 50 

- Turn to release : N - standard : 40 

(with and without key unlocking) - trigger action : 44 

Additional contact N N/Ccontact:2 

(extra to change state) 

N/Ocontact:2.3 

Mechanical durability Emergency stop pushbutton 0.3 

Standard block only 5 

Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Frequency : 2 to 500 Hz : 5 gn 

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms : 10 gn 


Cabling capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Screw clamp terminals ; cross head screws (Pozidriv type) 

mm 2 Min. : 1 x 0.22 without cable end (1 x 0.34 for linking) 

Max. : 2 x 1.5 with cable end 

Contact material Silver alloy (Ag / Ni) Standard block with screw clamp terminals 

Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 A Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 10 

(gG cartridge fuse conforming to IEC 269-1) 

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

V Ui = 600 degree of pollution 3 

Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard block with screw clamp terminal connections : 

voltage kV Uimp = 6 

Rated operational characteristics a.c. supply : Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 utilisation category AC-15 A600 : Ue = 600 V and le = 1.2 A or Ue = 240 V and le = 3 A 

or Ue = 120 V and le = 6 A 

d.c. supply : Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

utilisation category DC-13 

Q600 : Ue = 600 V and le = 0.1 A or Ue = 250 V and le = 0.27 A 

or Ue = 125 V and le = 0.55 A 

Electrical durability a.c. supply for 1 million Standard block with screw clamp terminals: 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 operating cycles V 24 120 230 

Appendix C utilisation category AC-15 A 4 1.5 

Operating rate 3600 operating d.c. supply for 1 million Standard block with screw clamp terminals: 

cycles/hour operating cycles V 24 110 

Load factor : 0.5 utilisation category DC-13 A 0.5 0.2 

Electrical reliability Failure rate Standard block in clean environment : 

(conforming to IEC 60947-5-4) - at 17 V and 5 mA, λ

References 

0 


3 





Emergency stop mushroom head pushbuttons (colour : red) 

Screw clamp terminal connections 

Shape Type Type of contact Reference Weight 

of head of push 

XB4 BT845 

N/O N/C kg 

Trigger action 1 1 XB4 BT845 0.136 

Push-pull 

(ZB4BZ105+ZB4BT84) 

Ø40 

XB4 BS8445 

Trigger action 1 1 XB4 BS8445 0.130 

Turn to release 

(ZB4 BZ105 + ZB4 BS844) 

Ø40 

3 

Trigger action 1 1 XB4 BS9445 0.170 

Key release 

(ZB4 BZ105 + ZB4 BS944) 

(n° 455) Ø 40 

XB4 BS9445 

ARRET D'URGENCE 

ZBY 2p30 

ZBY p330 

Legend holder, 30 x 40 mm 

Description White marking Reference Weight 

on red background 

kg 

With8x27mm EMERGENCY STOP ZBY 2330 0.002 

legend 

ARRET D'URGENCE ZBY 2130 0.002 

Circular legends 

NOT-AUS ZBY 2230 0.002 

Diameter Marking, on Reference Weight 

yellow background 

mm 

kg 

60 EMERGENCY STOP ZBY 9330 0.004 


NOT-AUS ZBY 9230 0.004 



NOT-AUS ZBY 8230 0.008 


page 3/4 

Dimensions : 

page 3/7 

3/5

References 0 


3 





ZB4 B sub-assemblies for user assembly : bodies + heads 

Complete bodies (fixing collar + single contact block) 

Description Type of contact Reference Weight 

N/O N/C kg 

Screw clamp terminal 

connections 

– 1 ZB4 BZ102 0.053 

3 

ZB4 BZ102 

ZB4 BT84 

– 2 ZB4 BZ104 0.062 

1 1 ZB4 BZ105 0.062 

1 2 ZB4 BZ141 0.072 

Mushroom heads for latching pushbuttons (Emergency stop : red) 

Shape Type Push Reference Weight 

of head of push Ø Colour 

mm 

kg 

Trigger action 40 Red ZB4 BT84 0.077 

Push-pull 

(2) 

ZB4 BS834 

Trigger action 30 Red ZB4 BS834 0.068 


(2) 

40 Red ZB4 BS844 0.073 

Trigger action 30 Red ZB4 BS934 0.094 

Key release 

(n° 455) 

(2) 40 Red ZB4 BS944 (1) 0.098 

ZB4 BS934 

60 Red ZB4 BS964 0.118 

(1) Other key numbers : 

- key n° 421E : add the suffix 12 to the reference. 

- key n° 458A : add the suffix 10 to the reference. 



Example : the reference for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, latching pushbutton, with release by key 

n° 421E becomes : ZB4 BS94412. 

(2) Maximum number of contact blocks fitted to associated body : 4. 


page 3/4 

3/6 

Dimensions : 

page 3/7

Dimensions 

0 


3 






XB4 BT845 XB4 BS8445 XB4 BS9445 Common face view 

46,5 

38 e 

81 

39 e 

82 

22 39 e 

104 

e : panel thickness 1 to 6 mm. 

Heads for latching mushroom head pushbuttons 

Push-pull 

ZB4 BT84 

3 

56 


ZB4 BS834 

ZB4 BS844 

57 

57 40 

Key release 

ZB4 BS934 

ZB4 BS944, BS964 

22 

57 

22 

57 

ZB4 

Ø 

BS944 40 

BS964 60 

Bodies for pushbuttons, 

screw clamp terminal connections 

ZB4 BZ10p, BZ141 

Support panel cut-out 

40 

46,5 

36,5 

30 0 


page 3/4 

References : 


3/7


0 


3 




Plastic bezel 

Environment 




Electric shock protection Conforming to IEC 60536 Class II 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65 unless otherwise stated 

Conforming to NEMA 

NEMA 4X and 13, unless otherwise stated 

3 


Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4, 

JIS C 4520, 

UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 


BV, RINA, LROS, DNV, GL (pending) Standard contact with screw clamp terminals 


Characteristics of contact or combined functions 




Appendix K 

operation 

Operating force Emergency stop with N/C + N/O : 

- Push-pull N - trigger action : 50 


-Turn to release : N - trigger action : 44 

(with and without key unlocking) 

Additional contact N N/Ccontact:2 

(extra to change state) 

N/Ocontact:2.3 

Mechanical durability Emergency stop pushbutton 0.3 

Standard block only 5 




mm2 Min. : 1 x 0.22 without cable end (1 x 0.34 for linking) 





Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

V Ui = 600 degree of pollution 3 

Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard block with screw clamp terminal connections : 

voltage kV Uimp = 6 

Rated operational characteristics a.c. supply : Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 utilisation category AC-15 A600 : Ue = 600 V and le = 1.2 A or Ue = 240 V and le = 3 A 

or Ue = 120 V and le = 6 A 

d.c. supply : Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 



or Ue = 125 V and le = 0.55 A 


Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

Appendix C 

Operating rate 3600 operating 

cycles/hour. 

Load factor : 0.5 

Electrical reliability 

a.c. supply for 1 million 

operating cycles 

utilisation category AC-15 

d.c. supply for 1 million 



Failure rate 

(Conforming to IEC 60947-5-4) 

Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

V 24 120 230 

A 4 3 2 

Standard block with screw clamp terminals : 

V 24 110 

A 0.5 0.2 

Standard block in clean environment : 

-at17Vand5mA,λ

References 

0 


3 




Plastic bezel 

Emergency stop mushroom head pushbuttons (colour : red) 

Screw clamp terminal connections 

Shape Type Type of contact Reference Weight 

of head of push 

XB5 AT845 

N/O N/C kg 

Trigger action 1 1 XB5 AT845 0.076 

Push-pull 

(ZB5 AZ105 + ZB5 AT84) 

Ø40 

XB5 AS8445 

Trigger action 1 1 XB5 AS8445 0.072 


(ZB5 AZ105 + ZB5 AS844) 

Ø40 

3 

XB5 AS9445 

Trigger action 1 1 XB5 AS9445 0.112 

Key release 

(ZB5 AZ105 + ZB5 AS944) 

(n° 455) Ø 40 

Legend holder, 30 x 40 mm 




kg 

With8x27mm EMERGENCY STOP ZBY 2330 0.002 

legend 


ZBY 2130 

ZBY p330 

Circular legends 

NOT-AUS ZBY 2230 0.002 

Diameter Marking, on Reference Weight 

yellow background 

mm 

kg 



NOT-AUS ZBY 9230 0.004 



NOT-AUS ZBY 8230 0.008 


page 3/8 

Dimensions : 

page 3/11 

3/9

References 0 


dialogue solutions 

3 




Plastic bezel 

ZB5 B sub-assemblies for user assembly : bodies + heads 

Complete bodies (fixing collar + single contact block) 

Description Type of contact Reference Weight 

3 

ZB5 AZ102 

ZB5 AT84 

N/O N/C kg 

Screw clamp terminal – 1 ZB5 AZ102 0.021 

connections 

– 2 ZB5 AZ104 0.030 

1 1 ZB5 AZ105 0.030 

1 2 ZB5 AZ141 0.040 

Mushroom heads for latching pushbuttons (Emergency stop : red) 

Shape Type Push Reference Weight 

of head of push Ø Colour 

mm 

kg 

Trigger action 40 Red ZB5 AT84 0.050 

Push-pull 

(2) 

ZB5 AS844 


Trigger action 30 Red ZB5 AS834 0.042 


(2) 

40 Red ZB5 AS844 0.046 

Trigger action 30 Red ZB5 AS934 0.068 

Key release 

(n° 455) 40 Red ZB5-AS944 (1) 0.071 

(2) 

60 Red ZB5-AS964 0.092 

Trigger action 40 Red ZB5-AS944D 0.071 

Key release 

(n° 4A185) 

(2) 






Example : the reference for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, latching pushbutton, with release by 

key n° 421E becomes : ZB4 AS94412. 

(2) Maximum number of contact blocks fitted to associated body : 4. 


page 3/8 

3/10 

Dimensions : 

page 3/11

Dimensions 

0 



3 




Plastic bezel 


XB5 AT845 XB5 AS8445 XB5 AS9445 Commonfaceview 

43 

38,5 e 

80,5 

39 e 

81,5 

22 

39 e 

103 

e : panel thickness 1 to 6 mm. 

Heads for latching mushroom head pushbuttons 

Push-pull 

ZB5 AT84 

3 

56 40 




57 

57 Ø40 

Key release 


ZB5 AS944, AS964 

22 

57 

22 

57 

ZB5 

Ø 

AS14, AS944 40 

AS24, AS964 60 

ZB5 AS944D 

25 

58 

Bodies for pushbuttons, 

screw clamp terminal connections 

ZB5 AZ10p, AZ141 

Support panel cut-out 

40 

41,5 

31,5 

30 0 


page 3/8 

References : 


3/11


0 


3 

XAL control stations for Ø 22 trigger action control and 

signalling units 

Environment 


Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 70 


Electric shock protection Conforming to IEC 60536 Class II 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65 

Conforming to NEMA NEMA 4X and 13 


3 

Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4, 

JIS C 4520, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 



Material and colours Polycarbonate, light grey RAL 7035 and yellow RAL 1012 

Cable entries 

Characteristics of contact functions 

Knock-out cable entries for n° 13 (CM12, PG13.5) cable glands 

and tapped ISO 20 



Appendix K 

operation 

Operating force Emergency stop with N/C + N/O N Push-pull, trigger action : 50 

N Turn to release (with and without key unlocking), trigger action : 44 

Additional contact (extra force required) N N/Ccontact:2 

N N/Ocontact:2.3 

Mechanical durability 0.1 





mm2 Min. : 1 x 0.22 without cable end (1 x 0.34 for linking) 





Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V Standard block with screw clamp terminals : Ui = 600 degree of 

pollution 3 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV Standard block with screw clamp terminals : Uimp = 6 

Rated operational characteristics a.c. supply : A600 : Ue = 600 V and le = 1.2 A or Ue = 240 V and le = 3 A 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 utilisation category AC-15 or Ue = 120 V and le = 6 A 

d.c. supply : 



or Ue = 125 V and le = 0.55 A 

Electrical durability a.c. supply for 1 million V 24 120 230 

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 operating cycles A 4 3 2 

Appendix C 


Operating rate 3600 operating d.c. supply for 1 million V 24 110 

cycles/hour. operating cycles A 0.4 0.15 



Electrical reliability Failure rate Standard block : 

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-4 -at17Vand5mA,λ

References 

0 



3 



Complete stations (screw clamp terminal connections) 

Emergency stop function (light grey base “RAL 7035”, yellow lid “RAL 1012”) 

Description Type Type of contact Reference Weight 

Without marking 

N/O N/C kg 

1 mushroom head Trigger action – 2 XAL K178F 0.194 

pushbutton 

Ø 40 mm, red 


XAL-K178p 

1 1 XAL K178E 0.194 

3 

1 2 XAL K178G 0.194 

1 mushroom head Trigger action – 2 XAL K188F 0.188 

pushbutton 

Ø 40 mm, red 

Key release 

(n° 455) 

XAL-K188p 

1 1 XAL K188E 0.188 

1 2 XAL K188G 0.188 


page 3/12 

Dimensions : 

page 3/15 

3/13

References 0 



3 



Separate components for user assembly 

Empty enclosures 

For normal environments (with stainless steel lid fixing screws) 

Description Number Reference Weight 

of ways 

kg 

Light grey base “RAL 7035” 1 XAL K01 0.136 

Yellow lid “RAL 1012” 

For normal environments, CSA + UL certifications (1) (with stainless steel lid fixing screws) 

Light grey base “RAL 7035” 1 XAL K01H7 0.136 

Yellow lid “RAL 1012” 

3 

Electrical blocks (for mounting on metal plate at back of enclosure) 

Electrical blocks with screw clamp terminal connections 

Description Type Sold in Unit Weight 

lots of reference kg 

Standard contact N/O contact 5 ZEN L1111 0.015 

blocks (2) 

ZEN L1111 

N/C contact 5 ZEN L1121 0.015 

Mushroom heads for Emergency stop pushbuttons 

Shape Type Diameter Colour Reference Weight 

of head of push of push 

mm 

kg 

Trigger action latching mushroom heads 

Push-pull 40 Red ZB5 AT84 0.050 


Turn to release 30 Red ZB5 AS834 0.042 



Key release 30 Red ZB5 AS934 0.068 

(n° 455) 

40 Red ZB5 AS944 (3) 0.071 


Key release 40 Red ZB5 AS944D 0.071 

(n° 4A185) 

(1) Volt-free commoning/earth terminal included. 

(2) A maximum of 3 electrical blocks may be fitted per associated head. 






Example : the reference for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, latching pushbutton, with release by 

key n° 421E becomes : ZB5 AS94412. 


page 3/12 

Dimensions : 

page 3/15 

3/14

References (continued), 

dimensions 

0 


3 



Separate components for user assembly 

Legend holder 


ZBY 2130 



kg 

Legend holder EMERGENCY STOP ZBY 2330 0.002 

30x40mm 

with 8 x 27 mm 

legend 


NOT-AUS ZBY 2230 0.002 






Example : the reference for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a latching pushbutton, with release by key n° 421E ; 

becomes ZB5 AS1412. 

3 

Dimensions 

Single-way control stations XAL K 

(1) 

(2) 2xØ4,3 

= 

= 

68 

= 

22 

= 

(4) 

(3) 

53 

= 

= = = 

68 = 54 

= 

(1) Knock-out cable entry for n° 13 cable gland. 

(2) 2 knock-out cable entries. 

(3) 91 mm for latching mushroom head pushbuttons. 

(4) 113 mm for key release latching mushroom head pushbuttons. 


page 3/12 

3/15



Safety dialogue solutions 3 


For safety circuits 


Enabling switches, comprising an XY2 AU grip and an XPS VC monitoring module, 

allow authorised personnel to undertake adjustment, programming or maintenance 

operations near machine equipment hazardous zones, providing certain conditions are 

met. 

3 

Environment 

In effect, to gain access, these operations, often performed at reduced speed, must 

be selected by authorised personnel using selectors, with or without keys. Once 

selection is made, the enabling switch temporarily assumes control of the hazardous 

zone’s usual protection measures. Important note: the enabling switch alone must 

not lead to the actuation of any dangerous movements associated with the machine; 

a secondary, intentional control action is required from the operator. In addition, each 

person in the hazardous zone must be provided with an enabling switch to ensure 

their own safety. 

Conforming to standards Products IEC 60947-1, IEC/ EN 60947-5-1, cUL us 508 and CSA C222 n°. 14 

Machine assemblies EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 775, IEC 60204 







Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 60536 

Degree of protection IP 66 conforming to IEC 60529, IP 65 with a pushbutton, IK 06 conforming to EN 50102 


Enclosure 

Op. 

cycle 

1 million 

Double insulated enclosure made of PA66 

Cable diameter mm 7…13 



a AC-15 : C300 or Ue = 250 V, Ie = 1.5 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.75 A 

c DC-13 : R300 or Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.22 A 

conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Thermal current (Ithe) A 5 

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 250, degree of pollution III (II inside) conforming to IEC 60947-1 

125, contact 7-8 

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 2.5 conforming to EN 60947-1 

Positive operation 3-position contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 

appendix K 


Slow break 

Resistance across terminals mΩ ≤ 50 

Actuation force 

1…2: 12 N 

2…3: 50 N 

Terminal referencing Numbered conforming to CENELEC EN 50013 



Connection mm 2 Terminal block, 1 x 0.14…1 x 1.5 

References: 

page 3/17 

3/16 

Dimensions: 

page 3/17 

Schemes: 

page 3/17

References, 

dimensions, 

connections 3 



For safety circuits 

References 

Number 

of contacts 

Contact 

type 

3 2 enabling 

3 positions 

+1N/C 

Contact 

blocks and scheme 

0 1 2 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 5 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

XY2 AU1 0.310 

2 enabling 

3 positions 

+1N/C 

+1N/O 

supplementary 

contact 

0 1 2 

7 2 1 

3 

4 

6 5 

XY2 AU2 0.320 

8 

XY2 AUp 

Separate components and spare parts 

Description Reference Weight 

kg 

Grip support XY2 AZ1 0.215 

3 

XY2 AZ1 

CoverkitforkeyactuatorXCSZ01orXCSZ11 

only applicable to XY2 AU1 

XY2 AZ2 0.015 

XY2 AZ2 

XY2 AZ3 

Cover XY2 AZ3 0.060 

Dimensions 

XY2 AU1 XY2 AU2 XY2 AZ1 

46 

32 

33 

91 

58 

51 

46 

32 

58 

51 

17 

50 2xØ4,4 

20 

3 

174 

87 

174 

87 

87 174 8 

33 

84 

53 

10 

81 

Ø 13,5 

Connection example 

With XPS VC safety module 

+ 24 V 

0 V 

F1 

0 1 

S1 

Ø 13,5 

Ø 13,5 

A1 S12 S13 S11 

Y1 Y2 13 

XPS VC 

A2 S21 S23 

Y34 Y44 14 

ESC : external start conditions 

2 

6 5 

4 3 

S1 

2 1 

Supply A1/A2 

Fault 

Logic 

K1/K2 

Fault 

ESC 

K1/K2 

K3 

K4 

To 

PLC 

2 solid-state outputs 2 safety outputs 

K1 

K2 

K3 

K4 

23 

24 

State of XY2 AUp contacts 

1-2 

5-6 

3-4 

1-2 

5-6 

3-4 

0 1 2 

0 1 2 

7 8 


Contact open 

N/C contact with positive opening 

operation 

Only 

applicable to 

XY2 AU2 


page 3/16 

3/17

Presentation 

0 


3 

Two-hand ergonomic control stations 

With XB4 B control units 

Presentation 

The design of the control station incorporates features to 

significantly reduce occupational illnesses associated 

with repetitive movements of the hands, particularly 

“carpal tunnel syndrome”. 

The health and comfort of the machine operator is 

assured by: 

- the numerous alternative hand positions for operating 

the two pushbutton actuators, see diagrams to left, 

- a hand rail, 

- simple and fast adjustments of control station position. 

3 

This two-hand control station protects machine operators 

against both industrial accidents and illnesses related to 

their occupation. 

It conforms to the following European safety standards: 

- EN 574 (two-hand control), 

- EN 999 (approach speeds of parts of the human body 

and positioning of safety devices). 

The control station can be mounted: 

p directly on the machine housing, or 

p on a pedestal, enabling 3 directional adjustment: 

- height, 

- rake, 

- skew. 

The use of a two-hand control station in conjunction with a safety module type XPS BC or XPS BF provides type IIIC 

two-hand control conforming to EN 574, i.e. category 4 conforming to EN 954. 

The two-hand control station + XPS BC safety module combination has an EC examination of type certificate issued 

by BERUFSGENOSSENSCHAFT of Germany (1996), n° 007052001181295. 

The range comprises: 

- two-hand control stations with or without pre-wired terminal blocks, 

- kits (control station + pedestal), with or without pre-wired terminal blocks. 

The products are supplied with an installation manual, which is also available as a separate item. 


page 3/20 

3/18 

References: 


Dimensions: 

page 3/23

Description 

0 


3 



Description 

The control station 1 has 5 cut-outs (Ø 22 mm) 2 as standard. 5 additional cut-outs are possible 3. 

Its pedestal 4 enables the following quick and simple adjustments: 

- control station rake (± 30°) using handle 5, 

- control station skew (± 180°) using handle 6, 

- control station height (835 to 1170 mm) using handle 6. 

The baseplate 7 can be fitted with safety foot switches type XPE R 8, together with their protective covers 9. 

See page 3/39. 

DF531438 

3 

30 

30 

180 

1 

2 

3 

5 

4 

835...1170 

6 

9 

7 

8 


page 3/20 

References: 


Dimensions: 

page 3/23 

3/19


0 


3 



Environment 

Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947- 5-1, EN 574, EN 292, EN 999 

Colour 

RAL 2008 orange 




3 

Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 5gn(2…500Hz) 

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 10 gn (duration 11 ms) 

Electric shock protection Conforming to IEC/EN 61140 Class I 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60529 IP 65 

Mechanical durability Number of operating cycles 1 million 

Cable entry See dimensions, page 3/23 


Rated operational characteristics a AC-15 A600 or Ue = 240 V and Ie = 3 A 

c DC-13 

Q600 or Ue = 250 V and Ie = 0.27 A conforming to 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V Ui = 600 degree of pollution 3 

To UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n° 14 V Ui = 600 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 kV Uimp=6 

Contact operation Slow break, with positive opening N/C + N/O break before make on each black actuator pushbutton 

operation 

N/C + N/C simultaneous on Emergency stop pushbutton 

N/C + N/O break before make on Lock out pushbutton 

Positive operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

appendix K 

N/C contact with positive opening operation type “0” 

Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013 

Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC EN 269 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) 

Cabling Screw clamp terminals mm2 Minimum clamping capacity: 1 x 0,22 or 1 x 0,22 + 1 x 0,34 

Maximum clamping capacity: 1 x 2.5 or 2 x 1.5 



Appendix C 

Operating rate 3600 operating 

cycles/hour. 

Load factor: 0,5 

Electrical reliability 

a.c. supply for 1 million 



d.c. supply for 1 million 



Failure rate 


V 24 

A 4 

V 24 

A 0.5 

At 17 V and 5 mA, λ

References 

0 



3 



803051 

Two-hand control stations - painted 

Description Mushroom head Reference Weight 

Type of button Contacts kg 

XY2 SB7p 

2 control pushbuttons 

with N/C + N/O break 

before make contacts 

and 1 mushroom head 

pushbutton 

Emergency stop N/C + N/C XY2 SB71 4.000 

Red 

slow break 

Lock out N/C + N/O XY2 SB75 4.000 

(Schaltsperre) break before make 

Yellow 

3 

2 control pushbuttons 

with N/C + N/O break 

before make contacts 

and 1 mushroom head 

pushbutton, with pre-wired 


Emergency stop N/C + N/C XY2 SB72 4.000 

Red 

slow break 

Lock out N/C + N/O XY2 SB76 4.000 

(Schaltsperre) break before make 

Yellow 

Kits (control station + pedestal) 

803052 

2 control pushbuttons and Emergency stop N/C + N/C XY2 SB714 17.000 

1 mushroom head Red slow break 

Emergency stop pushbutton 

+ pedestal XY2 SB90 

2 control pushbuttons and Emergency stop N/C + N/C XY2 SB724 17.000 

1 mushroom head Red slow break 

Emergency stop pushbutton 

with pre-wired terminal block 

+ pedestal XY2 SB90 

Documentation 

XY2 SB7p4 


kg 

Installation manual All control stations XCO M2514 0.200 

XY2 XB7pp 

Presentation: 



page 3/20 

Dimensions: 

page 3/23 

3/21



3 



Accessories and spare parts 

803059 

Various accessories 

Description For use with Colour Unit Weight 

reference 

kg 

Metal pedestal XY2 SBpp Orange XY2 SB90 13.000 

adjustable height 

Collar for guard rail XY2 SB90 Orange XY2 SB98 0.800 

(welded fixing) 

3 

Control station top – Orange XY2 SB511 2.500 

without control devices 

XY2 SB90 

Control station base – Orange XY2 SB531 1.200 

803056 803055 

803054 

803053 

803058 

803057 

XY2 SB98 

XY2 SB511 

XY2 SB99 

ZB4 BR216 

ZB4 BS844 

ZB4 BS845 

Replacement seals – – XY2 SB99 0.300 

(soldinlotsof5) 

Adaptor ISO M25 – DE9 RA2125 0.010 


Fixing nut Adaptor – DE9 EC21 0.005 


Control units (1) 

Description Component Colour Reference Weight 

part 

kg 

Pushbutton Ø60mm Black ZB4 BR216 0.095 

actuator 

mushroom head 

Body/contact – ZB4 BZ105 0.055 

assembly 

N/C + N/O 

Emergency stop Ø40mm Red ZB4 BS844 0.060 

pushbutton 

mushroom head 


assembly 

N/C + N/C 

Lock out Ø 40 mm Yellow, marked 

pushbutton 

mushroom head “schaltsperre” 

(1) Other XB4 B control and signalling units are suitable for use on the control stations. 

Please refer to our catalogue “Components for Human-Machine interfaces”. 

ZB4 BS845 0.060 


assembly 

N/C + N/O 

Presentation: 


3/22 


page 3/20 

Dimensions: 

page 3/23

Dimensions 

0 


3 



Control station 

XY2 SB7p 

(3) 2xØ28,5 

(1) 

Pedestal 

XY2 SB90 

2xØ16 

44,5 

= = 

75 

137 

(2) 

40 

136,2 

170 

372 = 

440 

188,5 

= 

34 

330 

3 

430 

455 

450 242 

12 

6 

455 

696 

720 (1) 

(1) 2 plain holes for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) or ISO M20 cable gland. (1) Adjustable height of pedestal 720 to 1060 mm. 

(2) Ø 56 mm knock-out specifically for mounting on pedestal. 

(3) 1 plain hole for n° 21 (Pg 21) cable gland. 

For ISO M25, use adaptor DE9 RA2125 and fixing nut DE9 EC21. 

Presentation: 



page 3/20 

References: 


3/23

General 

0 


3 

Emergency stop trip wire switches 

Presentation 

Emergency stop trip wire switches are designed to: 

- avert hazards (dangerous phenomena) at the earliest possible moment, or to reduce existing risks which could cause 

injury to persons or damage to either machines or to work in progress, 

- be tripped by a single human action when a normal Emergency stop function is not suitable, 

- trip in the event of the trip wire breaking. 

Emergency stop trip wire switches are essential in premises and on machines which are dangerous when in operation. 

The operator must be able to trigger the stop instruction at any point within his working area. 

Application examples: woodworking machines, cutting presses, conveyor systems, transfer machines, printing and 

textile machines, rolling mills, test laboratories, paint shops, surface treatment works. 

3 

Setting-up 

Typical installation 

1 Fixing support 2 Emergency stop 3 First cable support 

4 Switch adjustment 5 Cable grips 6 Turnbuckle 

7 End spring 8 Pulley supports and pulleys 

1 3 

6 

8 7 

2 

4 5 

1 

Notes 

All XY2 CH/CE/CB trip wire switches can be fitted with a pilot light to indicate that the switch has been tripped. 

It is essential that pulleys be used with trip wires that deviate from a straight run, i.e. angled to form a protected zone. 

Important : The total sum of the angles through which the trip wire bends must be less than 180°. 

Main features 

1 Positive operation: the switches incorporate positive opening operation contacts, the tripping of the switch being 

made with positive action. 

2 Latching: the switch latches in the tripped position (N/C safety contact(s) open). The function of the N/O contact 

is purely for signalling. 

3 Resetting: the switches incorporate a reset button, which re-closes the safety contact(s). Restarting of the machine 

must only be achieved by manual operation of a control device within the machine start circuit, remote to the trip wire 

switch. 

1 2 3 

Running condition Stop instruction given (tripped) Stop condition (awaiting reset/restart) 

References: 

pages 3/27, 3/30 to 3/32 

Dimensions: 

page 3/33 

3/24



3 


Trip wire expansion 

and contraction: d 

Temperature variations likely to be encountered in the protected zone will obviously cause the trip wire to expand or 

contract. 

To enable instant verification that the trip wire is at its correct tension (and for making any necessary adjustments), 

XY2 CH and XY2 CE switches incorporate a trip wire tension indicator. 

d (mm) 

3 

Tripping force: F1 

Tripping deflection: f 

ThetrippingforceF1 is the force necessary on the trip wire to cause the switch to trip. 

The tripping deflection f is the distance that the trip wire has to be deflected from its taut position to the point at which 

the switch trips. 

f 

F1 

Adjustment values 

For Emergency stop trip wire switches type XY2 CE : the adjustment values depend on the positions of the cam located 

inside the switch. 

Adjustment is made by rotating the cam after the switch has been installed. Each notched position of the cam is 

referenced by the letters A to F, and the selected letter is visible through a viewing port. 

Temperature range : < 25 °C. 

Type Position Average tripping deflection and tripping force values for a distance between cable supports 

of cam of : 5 m for XY2 CH, XY2 CE and 20 m for XY2 CB 

Deflection f for : 

Force F1 

Light force Standard force Light Standard 

mm mm daN daN 

XY2 CE A 160 160 2 3.2 

B 170 175 2.4 3.8 

C 180 190 2.8 4.4 

D 190 200 3.2 4.9 

E 200 210 3.5 5.6 

F 205 220 3.9 6 

XY2 CH – – 160 – 2 

Standards 

Standards 

XY2 CB – – 350 – 6 

XY2 CH, CE and CB trip wire switches meet all the requirements of the harmonised European standard EN 418, relating 

to Emergency stop devices. The use of an end spring is strongly advised in the recommendations of the European draft 

standard prEN 616, when using trip wire switches on continuous duty mechanical handling equipment and systems. 

All the trip wire switches carry the e mark and are delivered with an EC declaration of conformity. 

References : 

pages 3/27, 3/30 to 3/32 

Dimensions : 

page 3/33 

3/25



dialogue solutions 3 


Environment 

Conforming to standards Products XY2 CB: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660-200, CSA C 22-2 n° 14, prEN616 

XY2 CE, CH, CB: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660-200, EN 418, prEN616 


XY2 CE, CH, CB: EN 60204-1, EN 292, Machinery Directive: 98/37/CE and 91/368/EEC 

Health and Safety Directive: 89/655/EEC 

Product certifications Special version XY2 CB: CSAa 600 V heavy duty. 

XY2 CE: UL-CSA A 300-Q 300. 

XY2 CH: UL-CSA 


Special version 

“TH” 

3 

Ambient air temperature Operation - 25…+ 70 °C 

Storage - 40…+ 70 °C 

Vibration resistance XY2 CE: 10 gn (10…300 Hz) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 ; 

XY2 CH: 10 gn (10…150 Hz) 

Shock resistance XY2 CE, CH: 50 gn (duration 11 ms) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 

Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC/EN 60536 and NF C 20-030 

Degree of protection XY2 CB: enclosure IP 22, contact housing IP 65, conforming to IEC/EN 60529 and NF C 20-010 

XY2 CE, CH: IP65 


XY2 CE, CH (Emergency stop): 10 000 operating cycles 

Length of protected zone (trip wire) 

XY2 CH: ≤ 15 metres, XY2 CE: ≤ 50 metres, XY2 CB: 100 metres and 200 metres 

Cable entry See dimensions, page 3/33. 



Nominal thermal current 

AC-15: A 300 or Ue = 240 V, le = 3 A 

DC-13: Q 300 or Ue = 250 V, le = 0.27 A conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

10 A 

Rated insulation voltage 

XY2 CE, CH: Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, Ui = 300 V 

conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

XY2 CB: Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, Ui = 600 V conforming 

to CSA C22-2 n° 14 

Rated impulse withstand voltage XY2 CE, CH: U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60664 

Positive operation N/C with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Section 3 


XY2 CB, CE, CH (Emergency stop): N/C + N/C or N/C + N/O slow break 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC/EN 60255-7 category 3 

Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013 

Operational voltage 

a 24…380 V 

Short-circuit protection XY2 CB, CE, CH: 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) conforming to IEC/EN 60269 

Rated operational power 

(Electrical durability) 

Operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour 


XY2 CB 


Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13 

a.c. supply a 50…60 Hz 

Power broken in VA (1) 

o Inductive circuit 

Voltage V 24 48 127 220 

o W 250 250 500 500 

XY2 CE, CH 



a.c. supply a 50…60 Hz 



1 

0,5 

220 V 

Ithe 

12/24/48 V 

127 V 

Cabling 

d.c. supply c 

0,1 

1 2 3 4 5 10A 

Power broken in W (1) 

Current in A 



o W 50 100 100 o W 15 23 30 

(1) For 1 million operating cycles 

Screw clamp terminals 

Clamping capacity: min. 1 x 0.5 mm 2 ,max.1x2.5mm 2 or2x1.5mm 2 

References: 

page 3/27 

3/26 

References: 

pages 3/30 to 3/32 

Dimensions: 

page 3/33

References 3 




Latching Emergency stops (cable not included) 

Without pilot light (1) 

Length of 

cable 

Distance 

between 

cable 

supports 

Reset Type of contact Cable 

anchor 

point 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

803015 

807506 

XY2 CH13250 

≤ 15 m 5 m By booted pushbutton 1 1 N/C + N/O 

slow break 

By key release pushbutton 

(key n° 421) (2) 

By booted pushbutton 


(key n° 421) (2) 

RH side or 

LH side 

1 1 RH side or 

LH side 

2 – N/C + N/C 

slow break 

≤ 50 m 5 m By booted pushbutton 1 1 N/C + N/O 

RH side or 

LH side 

XY2 CH13250 (3) 0.865 

XY2 CH13450 (3) 0.910 

XY2 CH13270 (3) 0.865 

2 – RH side or 

LH side 

XY2 CH13470 (3) 0.910 

RH side XY2 CE1A250 1.450 

1 1 slow break LH side XY2 CE2A250 1.450 

2 – N/C + N/C RH side XY2 CE1A270 1.450 

2 – slow break LH side XY2 CE2A270 1.450 

3 

XY2 CE1A250 


(key n° 421) (2) 

1 1 N/C + N/O RH side XY2 CE1A450 1.465 


2 – N/C + N/C RH side XY2 CE1A470 1.470 

2 – slow break LH side XY2 CE2A470 1.470 

807507 

≤ 100 m 20 m From inside enclosure 1 1 N/C + N/O LH side XY2 CB10 (4) 15.000 

1 1 slow break RH side XY2 CB20 (4) 15.000 

2 x 100 m 20 m From inside enclosure 1 1 N/C + N/O 

slow break 

RH side or 

LH side 

XY2 CB30 (4) 25.000 

With pilot light (5) 

Length of Distance 

cable between 

cable 

supports 

Reset 

Supply (direct) 

Bulb included 

Type of contact 

Cable 

anchor 

point 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

≤ 50 m 5 m By booted 

pushbutton 

230 V 2 2 2 N/C + N/O RH side XY2 CE1A297 1.470 


XY2 CB30 

Length of 

cable 

Distance 

between 

cable 

supports 

Reset 

Supply (via 

integral 

transformer) 

(6) 

Type of contact 

Cable 

anchor 

point 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

≤ 100 m 20 m From inside 

enclosure 

24 V/6 V 2 2 N/C + N/O LH side XY2 CB11 (4) 15.600 

2 2 slow break RH side XY2 CB21(4) 15.600 

2 x 100 m 20 m From inside 

enclosure 

127 V/6 V 1 1 LH side XY2 CB13 (4) 15.600 

1 1 RH side XY2 CB23 (4) 15.600 

220 V/6 V 1 1 LH side XY2 CB14 (4) 15.600 

1 1 RH side XY2 CB24 (4) 15.600 

24 V/6 V 1 1 N/C + N/O 

slow break 

RH and 

LH sides 

XY2 CB31 (4) 25.600 

127 V/6 V 1 1 RH and XY2 CB33 (4) 25.600 

LH sides 

220 V/6 V 1 1 RH and XY2 CB34 (4) 25.600 

LH sides 

(1) These Emergency stops are also available fitted with a pilot light, see ordering forms for XY2 CH and XY2 CE trip wire switches 

on pages 3/28 and 3/29. 

(2) Ø 30 mm mushroom head key release pushbutton. Locking and key withdrawal in the rest (unactuated) position. 

(3) For the ISO M20 threaded cable entry version, add the suffix H29 to the selected reference. Example: 

XY2 CH13250 becomes XY2 CH13250H29. 

(4) End spring included for XY2 CB. 

(5) Factory pre-wiring of the N/O contact available in series with the designated pilot light. 

(6) BA 7s - 6 V bulb included. 

Other versions See order forms, pages 3/28 and 3/29. 

XY2 CE with reset by Ø 40 mm mushroom head pushbutton or with integral cable tensioner and 

support. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

3/27

Order form (specimen suitable 

for photocopying) 3 



Complete units, pre-assembled 

Customer 

Company Order N° Delivery 

date 

Schneider Electric Industries 

Sales office - Subsidiary Co. Order N° 

How to use this form: 

- indicate the number of Emergency stop switches required, 

- complete the basic reference. 

Reference 

3 

Number of identical Emergency stop 


XY2 CH 

Model 

Emergency stop (latching) 1 


IP 65 (standard bellows) without tensioner 1 1 

IP 65 (silicone bellows) without tensioner 2 

IP 65 (standard bellows) with integral tensioner 3 

IP 65 (silicone bellows) with integral tensioner 4 

Type of reset 

Emergency stop (1) 

Reset by spring return pushbutton 

Flush 1 

Booted 2 

Mushroom head Ø 30 3 

Key release mushroom head, Ø 30 4 

(key n° 421) 

Key release mushroom head, Ø 30 5 

(key n° 455) 

Pull knob 6 

Key release mushroom head, Ø 30 (2) 9 

Contact block for Emergency stop function (3) 

Slow break 1 N/C + N/O (N/O staggered) 5 

1 N/C + N/C 7 

Pilot light 

Without pilot light 0 

With 24 V direct supply pilot light 3 




ISO M20 tapped cable entries 

H29 

Increased protective treatment against corrosion 

(1) Opening of a circuit + mechanical latching in the open position. 

(2) Other key numbers: 

458A 520E 1242A 1243E 1344A 1422A 1431E 

2123E 2132E 3112E 3113A 3122A 3123A 3233A 

3423A 3432A 4241A 

(3) Emergency stop trip wire switches can only be fitted with slow break contact blocks. 

TK 

3/28

Order form (specimen suitable 

for photocopying) 3 



Complete units, pre-assembled 

Customer 

Company Order N° Delivery 

date 

Schneider Electric Industries 

Sales office - Subsidiary Co. Order N° 

How to use this form: 

- indicate the number of Emergency stop switches required, 

- complete the basic reference. 

Reference 

Number of identical Emergency stop 


XY2 CE 

3 

Model 

Emergency stop (latching) Anchor point on RH side, standard force 1 

Anchor point on LH side, standard force 2 

Anchor point on RH side, light force 5 

Anchor point on LH side, light force 6 

Degree of protection and “cable under tension” pilot light 

IP 65 (standard bellows) without pilot light 

IP 65 (silicone bellows) without pilot light 

IP 65 (standard bellows) with pilot light 

IP 65 (silicone bellows) with pilot light 

A 

C 

D 

E 

Types of reset 

Emergency stop (1) 

Reset by spring return 

pushbutton 

Flush 1 

Booted 2 

Mushroom head Ø 30 3 

Key release mushroom head, Ø 30 (key n° 421) 4 

Key release mushroom head, Ø 30 (key n° 455) 5 

Pull knob 6 

Key release mushroom head, Ø 30 (2) 9 

Contact block for Emergency stop function (3) 

Slow break 1 N/C + N/O 5 

1 N/C + N/C 7 

2 N/C + N/O (compulsory with pilot light) (4) 9 

Pilot light 

Without pilot light 0 

With 24-48-130 V direct supply pilot light. Bulb not included (provide for 2 contact blocks) 6 

With 230 V direct supply, via integral resistor, pilot light. Bulb included (provide for 2 contact blocks) 7 

Increased protective treatment against corrosion 

(1) Opening of N/C contact + mechanical latching in the open position. 

(2) Other key numbers: 

458A 520E 1242A 1243E 1344A 1422A 1431E 

2123E 2132E 3112E 3113A 3122A 3123A 3233A 

3423A 3432A 4241A 

(3) Emergency stop trip wire switches can only be fitted with slow break contact blocks. 

(4) The use of a pilot light means selecting a switch fitted with 2 N/C + N/O contacts: XY2 CEppp9. 

TK 

3/29

References 3 





803017 

XY2 CZ402 


Description For use with Diameter 

mm 

Galvanised cables with 

red sheath 

Length 

m 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

XY2 CH 3.2 10.5 XY2 CZ301 0.280 

15.5 XY2 CZ3015 0.410 

25.5 XY2 CZ302 0.690 

810060 

XY2 CZ503 

50.5 XY2 CZ305 1.360 

100.5 XY2 CZ310 2.700 

3 

803019 

XY2 CZ524 

XY2 CH, 

XY2 CE and XY2 CB 

5 15.5 XY2 CZ1015 0.850 

25.5 XY2 CZ102 1.400 

50.5 XY2 CZ105 2.750 

100.5 XY2 CZ110 5.500 

810061 

803018 

XY2 CZ601 

Description Type For use with Sold in Unit 

Weight 

lots of reference 

kg 

Turnbuckles M6 x 60 + locknut All models except 1 XY2 CZ402 0.060 

XY2 CH (1) 

M8 x 70 + locknut All models except 1 XY2 CZ404 0.100 

XY2 CH (1) 

Cable grips Single CableØ3to5mm 10 XY2 CZ503 0.007 

XY2 CZ602 

Double CableØ3to5mm 10 XY2 CZ513 0.016 

Clamp Cable Ø 3.2 mm 10 XY2 CZ523 0.050 

803020 

Cable Ø 5 mm 10 XY2 CZ524 0.080 

Cable supports Fixed All models 10 XY2 CZ601 0.030 

Swivelling All models 1 XY2 CZ602 0.130 

Pulley bracket All models 1 XY2 CZ705 0.060 

XY2 CZ705 

Pulley Cable Ø 5 mm max. All models 1 XY2 CZ708 0.002 

Cable end protectors Cable Ø 3.2 mm 10 XY2 CZ701 0.002 

Cable Ø 5 mm 10 XY2 CZ704 0.010 

803016 

End springs For XY2 CE 1 XY2 CZ702 0.080 

XY2 CZ708 

For XY2 CH 1 XY2 CZ703 0.035 

For XY2 CB 1 XY2 CZ707 0.080 

810062 

803021 

XY2 CZ701 

Documentation 


kg 

Installation manual All XY2 C trip wire switches XCOM2512 0.200 

(1) Emergency stop trip wire switches XY2 CH incorporate a cable tensioner as standard. 

XY2 CZ702 

Dimensions: 

page 3/33 

3/30






803022 

Fitting kits 

Contents Application Diameter Length of Reference Weight 

cable 

mm m kg 

Tensioner + bracket For XY2 CE – – XY2 CZ917 0.612 

Kit comprising : 

- 1 galvanised cable, Ø 3.2 mm, 

length according to that selected, 

- 1 cable grip XY2 CZ523, 

- 1 end spring XY2 CZ703 

For XY2 CH 3.2 10 XY2 CZ9310 0.415 

For XY2 CH 3.2 15 XY2 CZ9315 0.535 

XY2 CZ917 


- 1 galvanised cable, Ø 3.2 mm, 

length according to that selected, 

- 4 cable grips XY2 CZ523, 

- 1 turnbuckle XY2 CZ404, 

- 1 cable support XY2 CZ601, 

- 3 cable end protectors 

XY2 CZ701, 

- 1 end spring XY2 CZ702 

For XY2 CE 3.2 25 XY2 CZ9325 1.250 

For XY2 CE/CB 3.2 50 XY2 CZ9350 1.980 

3 


For XY2 CE 5 25 XY2 CZ9525 1.905 

1 galvanised cable, Ø 5 mm, length 

according to that selected, 

- 4 cable grips XY2 CZ524, 

- 1 turnbuckle XY2 CZ404, 

- 1 cable support XY2 CZ601, 

- 3 cable end protectors 

XY2 CZ704, 

- 1 end spring XY2 CZ702. 

For XY2 CE/CB 5 25 XY2 CZ9550 3.280 

Other version 

Padlocking kit (for up to 3 padlocks) for reset pushbutton. 


Dimensions: 

page 3/33 

3/31

References 3 




Spare parts 

Spare parts 

Description Type Reference Weight 

kg 

Reset pushbutton 

(blue), spring return, 

for XY2 CE and XY2 CH 

Flushwith“R”markingonpush ZA2 BA639 0.030 

Booted ZA2 BP6 0.025 

Mushroom head Ø 30 ZA2 BC64 0.045 

803023 

Key for latching 

mushroom head reset 

pushbutton 

Key release mushroom head Ø 30, (key n° 421) ZA2 BS06212 0.090 

N° 421 Q99900911 0.006 

Head assembly for pilot 

light 

Yellow, for XY2 CE and XY2 CH ZA2 BV05 0.015 

3 

XY2 CZpppp 

Lens for pilot light Yellow, for XY2 CE and XY2 CH ZB2 BV015 0.003 

Pilot lights Yellow, for XY2 CH 24 V XY2 CZ0024 0.035 

48 V XY2 CZ0048 0.035 

130 V XY2 CZ0130 0.035 

230 V XY2 CZ0230 0.035 

Description Type Sold in 

lots of 

Unit 

reference 

Weight 

kg 

Incandescent bulbs 

BA 9s base fitting 

max. Ø 11 mm 

length 28 mm 

for XY2 CE 

24 V - 2.6 W 10 DL1 CE024 0.002 

48 V - 2.6 W 10 DL1 CE048 0.002 

130 V - 2.6 W 10 DL1 CE130 0.002 

Screw base fitting 

max. Ø 17 mm 

length 34 mm 

for XY2 CH 

24 V - 6 W 10 DL1 AA024 0.004 

48 V - 6 W 10 DL1 AA048 0.004 

130 V - 6 W 10 DL1 AA127 0.004 

230 V - 6 W 10 DL1 AA220 0.004 

BA 7s base fitting 

for XY2 CB 

6V-200mA 1 DL1 GA006 0.002 

807505 

803024 

Dust and damp protected 

bellows 

For XY2 CE Polychloroprene 1 XY2 CZ901 0.017 

Silicone 1 XY2 CZ904 0.005 

XY2 CZ901 

XY2 CZ902 

For XY2 CH Polychloroprene 1 XY2 CZ902 0.017 

Silicone 1 XY2 CZ903 0.005 

803025 

Tensioner For XY2 CE – 1 XY2 CZ203 0.095 

XY2 CZ203 

Adaptor For XY2 CB ISO M20 5 DE9 RP13520 0.050 

3/32

Dimensions 3 




XY2 CEpAppp 

XY2 CEpAppp + XY2 CZ917 

229 (2) 

105 (2) 

12 

195 

120 

52 

20 

243 

142 

63 44 6 

(1) (1) 

Ø 

31 

61 

82 

(1) 

23 

25 

(1) 3 plain holes for n° 13 (PG 13.5) or ISO M20 cable gland 

(2) Maximum extension 

Ø : 4 elongated holes Ø 6 mm 

3 

XY2 CBpp 

XY2 CH13p50 

(1) 

56 

208 

Ø 

458 

4xØ8 

265 

(1) Maximum extension 

Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 8 mm 

(2) Tapped entries for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland. 

For ISO M20, the reference becomes XY2 CH13p50H29. 

112 

68 

121 

197 

201 (1) 

48...56 

40 55 (1) 

(3) 

155 (2) 

= 210 

= 

240 

(1) 2 access points for operating cable 

(2) + 125 for opening of cover 

(3) 1 tapped entry for n° 13 (PG13.5) cable gland 

For ISO M20, use adaptor DE9 RP13520. 

XY2 CZ705 

XY2 CZ708 

M 8 Ø 9 

55 

53 


page 3/26 

References: 

page 3/27 

References: 

pages 3/30 to 3/32 

3/33

General 

0 


3 

Foot switches with positive opening operation on release 

Presentation 

Foot switches XPE M, XPE R, XPE B, XPE G, XPE A, XPE S, XPE Y are an ideal solution for providing start and stop 

instructions for many types of industrial machines, running in various operating modes: 

normal (pulsed) start, inching, hold to run. 

The range comprises metal case foot switches (heavy duty, high risk) complying to very strict regulations, and plastic 

case foot switches (light duty, low risk). 

Fitted with a protective cover, 

the foot switches are for applications 

where, for each issuing of the 

start instruction, a high level of 

danger exists (high risk). 

3 

Foot switches without a protective 

cover are suitable for applications 

where the issuing of the start 

instruction presents a reduced level 

of danger and for providing 

machinestopinstructions. 


Switches incorporate snap action contacts with positive opening operation. 

Foot switches can incorporate one or two N/C + N/O or N/C + N/C contact blocks. 

Positive opening operation on release of pedal: the hold down or return to the rest position of the pedal 

(machine stop) is positive acting. 

Terminology 

Positive opening operation 

A switch meets this requirement when all its N/C contacts can be switched to the open position with certainty, 

i.e. there are no flexible links between the moving contacts and the actuator to which the operating force is 

applied. 

All pedal operated foot switches incorporate a snap action N/C + N/O or N/C + N/C contact block with positive 

opening operation, and fully conform to the standard IEC 60947-5-1 Section 3. 

Snap action contact (quick break) 

The displacement speed of the moving contacts is not related to the speed at which the contact actuator is 

operated. This feature gives consistent electrical performance, even when the contact actuator device is 

operated at low speeds. 


page 3/38 

3/34 

References: 

pages3/39and3/40 

Dimensions: 

page 3/41




3 


Start instructions 

Metal case foot switches XPEMorXPERand plastic case foot switches XPE B, XPE G or XPE Y with protective 

cover are ideally suited for issuing a safety “Start” instruction for dangerous machines 

. 

plastic 

metal 

The protective cover over the 

operating pedal avoids the risk of 

accidental operation, either by 

human action or by falling objects, 

which could result in unintentional 

starting of a machine. 

toe plate 

1 

A trigger mechanism (toe plate) 

locks the pedal in the rest position 

on foot switches type XPE M, 

XPE R, XPE B, XPE G or XPE Y, 

thus providing increased safety 

for the operator. 

Positive action is required on the 

toe plate before the pedal can be 

depressed to start the machine. 

3 

2 

start 

On releasing the pedal to stop the 

machine, the trigger mechanism reengages 

and locks the pedal in the 

rest position. 

stop/rest 

Normal stop and 


instructions 

The range of foot switches XPE M, XPE R, XPE B, XPE G, XPE A or XPE Y can be used for issuing a normal stop 

instruction to a machine. 

Foot switch XPE S can be used for issuing an Emergency stop instruction. 

Never use the protective cover nor 

the trigger mechanism. In the event 

of an Emergency, access to the stop 

control must be as unrestricted as 

possible and without any constraints. 

For machine stop instructions use the N/C contact(s). 


page 3/38 

References: 


Dimensions: 

page 3/41 

3/35



3 


Pedal latching device 

when depressed 

Foot switches with pedal latching device are particularly suited for the control of “holdtorun”machines and also, 

for adjustment operations. 

Pressing the pedal issues the 

machine start instruction and, when 

the pedal reaches its stop, it latches 

in the operated position. 

3 

The removal of the foot from the 

pedal will not stop the “machine” 

cycle (hold to run), the pedal 

remains latched. 

For issuing a normal stop instruction, 

the foot is replaced on the pedal and 

the toe plate operated. This returns 

the pedal to the rest position. 

Switches with 2 step 

contact operation 

Foot switches featuring 2 step contact operation are ideal for applications involving 2-speed machines. 

Examples: 

- first speed: low (used for setting-up, adjustments or tool maintenance), 

- second speed: fast (normal machine operating speed). 

1st step 

6 

mm 

2 daN. 

9,5 

mm 

2,5 daN. 

The first step, at 6 mm pedal travel 

and at light foot pressure (2 daN), 

actuates a N/C + N/O contact block. 

The second step, at maximum 

pedal travel (12 mm) and maximum 

required foot pressure (9 daN), 

actuates a second N/C + N/O 

contact block. 

2nd step 

12 

16,5 

mm 

mm 

1 daN. 7 daN. 

Applications 

Numerous types of machines are fitted with foot switches. 

Dangerous machines: 

- cutting presses, stamping presses, 

- machine tools (lathes, milling machines, grinders, machining centres), 

- guillotines, cutters, folders, saws, 

- forging machines, rolling machines, cold metal forming machines. 

Other machines and sectors: 

- robots, robotised zones, 

- assembly and packaging machines, 

- food industry, 

- etc. 


page 3/38 

3/36 

References: 


Dimensions: 

page 3/41

General (continued) 

0 


3 


Foot switches used 

in conjunction with 

two-hand control 

stations 

Foot switches type XPE can be mounted directly onto the baseplate (without drilling additional fixing holes) of pedestal 

mounted two-hand control stations type XY2 SB5p and SB6p. 

The baseplate of the XY2 SB90 

two-hand control unit pedestal is 

pre-drilled with fixing holes to suit 

the mounting of either: 

- one XPE foot switch, with or 

without protective cover, or, 

- two XPE R foot switches, each 

with its own protective cover or 

fitted with a common (double) 

cover. 

3 

Ergonomic 

The protective cover is very strong and is sufficiently dimensioned to accommodate all types of footwear (large size, 

safety boots, etc.). 

The foot switch is designed such 

that the operating pedal is close to 

ground and at a comfortable angle. 

Various accessories improve the 

working comfort for machine 

operators and help to avoid 

discomfort in the base of the spine 

due to unbalanced positioning of 

the pelvis: 

- heel rest (metal XPE), 

- protective cover fitted with a hand 

grip, 

- connection component for assembling 

2 foot switches and for 

mounting hand grip (plastic XPE). 


page 3/38 

References: 


Dimensions: 

page 3/41 

3/37


0 



3 

Metal case foot switches 

with positive opening operation on release 

Environment 

Conforming to standards Without protective guard: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660-200, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

With protective guard: NF E 09-031 



Standard version: FI, CSA A300 - Q300 with tapped entries for cable gland 

Special version: CSA A300 - Q300 with 1/2" NPT adaptor 

Standard version: “TC” treatment. Special version: “TH” treatment 

Ambient air temperature Operation: - 25…+ 70 °C 

Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C 

3 


Shock resistance 20 gn conforming to IEC EN 60068-2-27 (150 gn conforming to NF E 09-031) 

Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC EN 60536 and NF C 20-030 




IP 66 conforming to IEC 60529 and IP 669 conforming to NF C 20-010 (with protective guard) 

Cable entry See dimensions, page 3/41. 



a AC-15; A 300 or Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A 

c DC-13; Q 300 or Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110 

Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22 -2 n° 14 

Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC 60664 

Positive operation 

N/C contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC EN 60255-7 category 3 

Short-circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse gG (gl) conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660-200 

Foot switches fitted with snap action contacts 

Foot switches with analogue output 

Rated operational power: conforming to IEC EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C Nominal supply voltage c 24…48 V 

Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13 Voltage limits c 19…58 V 

Current consumption, no-load 

4 mA 

Operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour Output current variation (IS) 0…+ 50 °C: + 2…- 6 % 

Load factor: 0.5 related to temperature - 25…+70°C:+2…-12% 

a.c. supply a 50-60 Hz d.c. supply c Output current curve Wiring scheme 


Power broken in W 

for 5 million operating cycles 

Current (mA) 

5 

5 

Ithe 

BN (brown) 

Voltage V 24 48 120 

1 

4 


1 

0,5 

400 V 

110 V 

230 V 

24 V 

48 V 

o W 10 7 4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

0 

Pedal travel 

2 5 10 15 (mm) 

BU (blue) 

3 

+ 

BK (black) 

2 ImA 

R 

– 

0,1 

0,1 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

Cabling 

Change of contact state 

Screw clamp terminals. Capacity: 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 with or without cable end 

References: 


Dimensions: 

page 3/41 

3/38

References 

0 


3 



521348 

Single and double pedal foot switches with protective guard 

Designation Pedal Contact operation Housing Reference Weight 

colour 

kg 

XPE M510 

Metal Single 1 step 1 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M510 2.570 

With trigger 

mechanism 

requiring positive Double 1 step 2 x 1 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M5100D 6.070 

actiontoallow 

pedal operation 

Single 1 step 1 N/C + N/O Orange XPE R510 2.570 

521350 

Double 1 step 2 x 1 N/C + N/O Orange XPE R5100D 6.070 

Single 1 step 2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M511 2.590 

Double 1 step 2 x 2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M5110D 6.090 

3 


XPE R5100D 



Orange XPE R711 2.590 

Analogue 1 step 2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M529 2.600 

output 


521347 

Metal Single 1 step 1 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M310 2.400 

Without trigger 

mechanism 


XPE M310 




521349 




XPE R3100D 

Single 1 step latching 1 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M410 2.400 





page 3/38 

Dimensions: 

page 3/41 

Single Analogue output 2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M329 2.420 

3/39

References 0 



3 



521346 

Foot switches without protective guard 

Description Contact operation Colour Reference Weight 

kg 

XPE R810 

Metal 1 step 1 N/C + N/O Orange XPE R810 1.200 

With trigger mechanism 

requiring positive action 2 step 2 N/C + N/O Orange XPE R911 1.200 

to allow pedal operation 

Analogue output 2 N/C + N/O Orange XPE R929 1.200 

3 

521345 

Metal 1 step 1 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M110 1.200 


mechanism Orange XPE R110 1.200 

2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M111 1.200 


2 step 2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE M211 1.200 

XPE M110 


Analogue output 2 N/C + N/O Orange XPE R229 1.200 

Accessories 

Description Application Unit Weight 

reference 

kg 

803037 

Single protective For XPE M XPE Z901 1.200 

cover 

For XPE R XPE Z911 1.200 

Double protective For XPE M XPE Z931 1.200 

cover 


XPE Z901 

Hand grip for For XPE Z901 or XPE Z911 XPE Z913 0.450 

protective cover 

Heel rest For XPE M XPE Z902 0.240 

803038 

XPE Z902 


Trigger For XPE M or XPE R XPE Z903 0.170 

mechanism 

Latching device For XPE M or XPE R XPE Z904 0.170 

(replacement for foot 

switches with this feature) 

Cable clamp For XPE M or XPE R XPE Z905 0.010 

550978 

Contact blocks For 1 step switches: 1st or 2nd N/C + N/O contact XE2S P4151 0.020 

Snap action 

For 2 step switches: 1st N/C + N/O contact 

For 2 step switches: 2 nd N/C + N/O contact XE2S P4151B 0.020 

XE2S P4151p 

ISO M20 adaptor For XPE M or XPE R DE9 RA1620 0.050 



page 3/38 

Dimensions: 

page 3/41 

3/40

Dimensions 

0 


3 



XPE M, XPE R without protective guard 

(1) 

22,5 

8 

59 

146,5 8,5 

164 

107 

89,5 

31 

= 

3 

XPE M, XPE R with protective guard 

= 

= 

= 

3XØ9 

104 

172 

(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 16 (Pg 16) cable gland. 

For ISO M20, use adaptor DE9 RA1620. 

XPE Z913 

164 

Ø 40 

= 

b 

= 

137 

(1) 

a 

Ø 10 

29 

Single 

14,5 

146,5 

172,5 

16,5 

10,5 

135 

89,5 

31 

3XØ9 

674 

(2) 

= 

= 

= 

= 

160 

Double 

186 

87 

11,75 

4XØ9 

a 

b 

Single pedal 152 160 

Double pedal 155 295 

(2) 1 Ø 6 plain hole. 

= 

11,75 

67 

= 

67 

295 

190 


page 3/38 

References: 


3/41


0 



3 

Plastic foot switches 


Environment 

Conforming to standards XPE A, XPE B, XPE G, XPE Y, XPE S without protective cover: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660200, 

XPE-B, XPE-G, XPE-S, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 

XPE B, XPE G with protective cover: NF E 09-031 except version XPE-B/G C and CC 


XPE B, XPE G, XPE S: standard version: UL, CSA A300 - Q300 with knock-out entries for ISO M20 cable gland 


Standard version: “TH” 

Ambient air temperature Operation: - 25…+ 70 °C, XPE-Y -25…+ 55 °C 

Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C 

3 


Shock resistance XPE A: 25 gn, XPE B, XPE G, XPE S, XPE Y: 20 gn conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 

Electric shock protection Class II, conforming to IEC 60536 and NF C 20-030 

Mechanical life 

XPE A, XPE/Y: 2 million operating cycles 

XPE B, XPE G: 5 million operating cycles 

XPE S, XPE G4: 0.5 million operating cycles 

Degree of protection XPE A: IP 43 conforming to IEC 60529 

XPE Y: IP 55 conforming to IEC 60529 

XPE B, XPE G: IP 66 conforming to IEC 60529, 

XPE S, XPE G4: IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529 

Cable entry See dimensions, page 3/44 



a AC-15; A 300 or Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A 

c DC-13; Q 300 or Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110 


Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC 60664 

Positive operation 

N/C contact with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K 

Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 60255-7 category 3 

Short-circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660-200 

Foot switches fitted with snap action contacts 

Rated operational power: conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C 


Operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour 


a.c. supply a 50-60 Hz 



5 

1 400 V 

0,5 110 V 

230 V 

24 V 

48 V 

d.c. supply c 

Power broken in W 

for 5 million operating cycles 

Ithe Voltage V 24 48 120 

o W 10 7 4 

0,1 

0,1 1 2 3 4 5 10 

Current in A 

Cabling 

References: 

page 3/43 

Screw clamp terminals. Maximum clamping capacity: 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 with or without cable end 

Dimensions: 

page 3/44 

3/42

References 

0 


3 



Foot operated enabling switch 

Single pedal foot switches with protective cover 

540107 

Description Contact operation Housing 

colour 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

XPE p510 


requiring positive action 


1 step 1 N/C + N/O Yellow XPE Y510 (1) 0.700 

Blue XPE B510 r 0.700 

Grey XPE G510 r 0.700 

2N/C+N/O Blue XPE B511 r 0.700 


2 step 2 N/C + N/O Blue XPE B711 r 0.700 


540108 

540109 

XPE p310 


mechanism 








Foot operated enabling switch with protective cover 


colour 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

3 

540110 

XPE p810 

3 position with reset 

button 

2 step, 3 position Grey XPE G4F r 0.730 

Foot switches without protective cover 


colour 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

540111 

540112 

XPE p110 

XPE A110 

XPE SA 


requiring positive action 



mechanism 

With Emergency stop 

device and reset button 

1step 1N/C+N/O Grey XPE G810 r 0.580 

2step 2N/C+N/O Grey XPE G911 r 0.580 




Black XPE A110 0.275 



Black XPE A111 0.295 

1 step 1 N/O + N/C Blue XPE BC r 0.570 

“normal stop” Grey XPE GC r 0.570 

2N/O+N/C Blue XPE BCC r 0.570 

Grey XPE GCC r 0.570 



1 step, latching 2 N/O Red XPE SA r 0.610 

2N/O+ 

1 N/C + N/O Red XPE SAA r 0.610 

550338 

550339 

XPE Z950 

XPE Z960 

Accessories 

Description Application Sold in 

lot of 

Hand grip for protective 

cover 

For XPE B, XPE G, XPE S or XPE Y 

(attached to one of the fixing holes) 

Reference 

Weight 

kg 

1 XPE Z923 r 0.120 

Protective skirt ForXPEBorXPEG 1 XPE Z950 r 0.050 

Connecting component (2) For XPE B, XPE G, XPE S or XPE Y 1 XPE Z960 r 0.020 

803039 

XE2S Pp1p1 

r Available : 4th quarter 2004. 


page 3/42 

M20 x 1.5 cable gland For diameter 6 to 12 mm cable 5 DE9RA200612 0.014 

Fordiameter10to14mmcable 5 DE9RA201014 0.014 


snap action 

For 1 step switches: 1st or 2 nd N/C + N/O 

contact 1 XE2S P4151 0.020 

For 2 step switches: 1st N/C + N/O contact 

For 1 step “normal stop” switches 1 XE2S P2151 0.020 

(1) IP 55, not UL, CSA approved 

(2) Enables assembly of 2 foot switches and also, mounting of the hand grip. 

Dimensions: 

page 3/44 

3/43

Dimensions 

0 


3 



XPE-B, XPE-G, XPE-Y, XPE-SA, XPE-SAA without protective cover 

XPE A 

(1) 

23 

50 

74 

31 

6 

54 

282 

122 = 39 = 

154 

11 

(2) 

3 

141 

165 

28 

(3) 

= = 

94 

161 

(1) 2 plain holes for ISO M20 or n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland. 

(2) 1 plain hole for ISO M20 or n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland. 

(3) 1 plain hole for ISO M16 or n° 9 (Pg 11) cable gland. 

XPE B, XPE G, XPE Y, XPE G4F with protective cover 

XPE Z923 

Ø 40 83,5 

Ø 10 

154 

282 

122 

(1) 2 plain holes for ISO M20 or n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland. 

141 

165 

675 

(1) 

122 = 39 = 

(2) 

(2) Ø 16 x 4 counterbored hole 


page 3/42 

References: 

page 3/43 

3/44

Connections 

0 


3 



Foot operated enabling switch XPE G4F with XPS VC (category 4) 

Wiring diagram 

+ 24 V 

F1 

S1 

0 1 2 

6 5 

1 

2 

K3 

ESC 

K4 

A1 S12 S13 S11 

Y1 Y2 13 

XPS-VC 

Supply A1/A2 

Fault 

K1 

23 

3 

Fault 

K1/K2 

Logic 

K1/K2 

K2 

A2 S21 S23 

Y34 Y44 14 

24 

4 3 

To PLC 

K3 

K4 

0 V 


Foot switch incorporating Emergency stop device XPE SAp with XPS AK (category 4) 

Wiring diagram with short-circuit detection (recommended application) 

S1 

A1 B1 S11 S12 S31 S32 

XPS-AK 

A2 B2 S21 S22 

The 2 input channels are connected to different polarities. 


Contact states of XPE G4F 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

0 1 2 

0 1 2 

Contact open 


3/45




Beacons and indicator banks 

Ø70mm,typeXVB 

7 

XVB C6pp 

3 

7 

XVB Cppp 

9 

XVB C081 

8 

XVB C9p 

2 

XVB Lppp 

14 

XVB C1p 

1 

14 

XVB C1p 

13 

XVB CY2 

12 XVB C07 

10 XVB C22 

11 

XVB C23 

4 

XVB C020 

3 

XVB C02 

5 

XVB C11 

6 

XVB C12 

3/46

General 3 




Ø 70 mm, type XVB 

Illuminated beacon 

XVB illuminated beacons and indicator banks are visual or audible signalling units 

used mainly to indicate machine operation sequences and to check status from a 

distance. They are visible through 360°. 

Examples: start, stop machine, no material, call technical staff, fault signalling, etc. 

Complete unit 

Ready assembled with a single illuminated signalling unit : 

v steady, 

v flashing, 

v or with “flash” discharge tube. 

Indicator bank 

Setting up 

It comprises: 

1 A base, incorporating a removable terminal block and bottom or side cable entry. 

2 A coloured lens unit: green, red, orange, blue, clear or yellow 

Accessories 

3 Support tube, 100, 400 or 800 mm long, with clamping device on the base. 

4 Support tube concealment cover. 

5 Fixing plate screwed onto tube for mounting on a horizontal surface. 

6 Fixing plate for mounting on a vertical surface. 

14 Adaptor with 13P cable gland. 

For customer assembly 

Variable composition, with up to 5 illuminated or audible signalling units, supplied 

unassembled (for assembly by the user). 

It comprises: 

12 A base, incorporating a removable terminal block and bottom or side cable entry. 

7 1 to 5 coloured lens units: green, red, orange, blue, clear or yellow 

8 Or 1 audible signalling unit. 

(Maximum of 5 illuminated lens units or 4 illuminated lens units + 1 audible 

signalling unit). 

9 A top cover, (except with discharge tube unit). 

The illuminated or audible signalling units stack vertically and are easily locked and 

unlocked by an integral ring nut. 

Only one “flash” discharge tube unit can be fitted on each indicator bank, always at 

the top. 

Electrical connections between each unit are made automatically during assembly. 

Accessories 

3 Support tube, 100, 400 or 800 mm long. 

4 Support tube concealment cover. 

5 Fixing plate screwed onto tube for mounting on a horizontal surface. 

6 Fixing plate for mounting on a vertical surface. 

10 Coloured markers (1). 

11 Legend holders with legend (1). 

13 Legends that attach to locking ring of individual signalling units for identification. 

14 Adaptor and 13P cable gland. 

(1) These allow the position of the various units (illuminated or audible) to be marked, for 

identification in the event of disassembly. 

Fixing 

Base fitted directly onto panel by means of 2 screws or by means of a plate screwed 

to the support tube. 

Cabling 

By means of a removable terminal block incorporated in the base unit (simplified 

wiring). The screw and captive cable clamp terminals are protected to prevent 

accidental contact with live parts. 

3 



References: 

pages 3/50 to 3/57 

Dimensions: 


3/47


0 


3 



Environment 

Product certifications Standard version CSA, UL 

Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 


Ambient air 

temperature 

For storage °C -40…+70 

For operation (1) Illuminated units with steady light °C - 25…+70, with 10 W incandescent bulb 

- 25…+ 50, with LED 

3 

Illuminated units with flashing light °C - 25…+ 50, with 7 W incandescent bulb 

- 25…+ 40, with 10 W incandescent bulb 

- 25…+ 50, with LED 

Illuminated units with “flash” discharge 

tube 

°C -25…+50 

Audible units °C - 25…+ 50, with buzzer or loudspeaker unit 



Mounted on support tube 

Mounted on base unit 

Class I 

Class II 


Conforming to IEC 60529 and 

NF C 20-010 

Conforming to UL 508 

IP 65 

Type 4X NEMA "Indoor" 

Material Illuminated units Polycarbonate 

Base unit and cover 

Support tube 

Fixing base 

Glass reinforced polyamide and polycarbonate 

Painted aluminium 

Zamac 

(1) Warning: illuminated units with incandescent bulbs must not be combined with LED illuminated units, due to the risk 

of overheating. 

Also, when different units (e.g. steady, flashing…) are combined, the maximum temperature is limited to that of the 

weaker unit. 

General: 


3/48 

References: 

pages 3/50 to 3/57 

Dimensions: 

pages 3/58 and 3/59

Characteristics (continued) 0 


3 




Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 250 

Voltage limits Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 0.85 to 1.10 Un (Un: nominal voltage) 

Consumption LED unit Steady light mA z 24 V: < 30 

a 120…230 V: < 30 

Flashing light mA z 24 V: < 40 

a 120…230 V: < 15 

Unit with discharge 

tube 

On power-up mA z 24 V: 5J unit: < 430; 10J unit: < 850 

Audible units mA z 12…48 V:

References 

0 


3 


Illuminated beacons Ø 70 mm, type XVB L 

for bulb with BA 15d base fitting 

Illuminated beacons with steady light 

820996 

Description Light source Colour Reference Weight 

kg 

Complete unit 

comprising: 

1 illuminated unit 

1 base unit 

(direct or tube fixing) 

Bulb (10 W max.) 

not included 

250 V max. 

Green XVB L33 0.260 

Red XVB L34 0.260 

Orange XVB L35 0.260 

Blue XVB L36 0.260 

Clear XVB L37 0.260 

Yellow XVB L38 0.260 

3 

820995 

XVB L3p 

Illuminated beacons with integral flashing light 

Complete unit 

comprising: 


1 base unit 



not included 

a 24 V 

c 24…48 V 

Green XVB L4B3 0.280 

Red XVB L4B4 0.280 

Orange XVB L4B5 0.280 

Blue XVB L4B6 0.280 

Clear XVB L4B7 0.280 

Yellow XVB L4B8 0.280 

XVB L4Bp 


not included 

a 48…230 V 

Green XVB L4M3 0.280 

Red XVB L4M4 0.280 

Orange XVB L4M5 0.280 

Blue XVB L4M6 0.280 

Clear XVB L4M7 0.280 

Yellow XVB L4M8 0.280 

General: 


3/50 



Dimensions: 

pages 3/58 and 3/59

References 

0 


3 



with LED light source 

Illuminated beacons with steady light 


kg 

820998 

Complete unit 

comprising: 

1 cover 


1 base unit 


LED, included 

z 24 V 







XVB L0Bp 

LED, included 

a 120 V 

Green XVB L0G3 0.270 

Red XVB L0G4 0.270 

Orange XVB L0G5 0.270 

Blue XVB L0G6 0.270 

Clear XVB L0G7 0.270 

Yellow XVB L0G8 0.270 

3 

LED, included 

a 230 V 







Illuminated beacons with integral flashing light 

820997 

Complete unit 

comprising: 

1 cover 


1 base unit 


LED, included 

z 24 V 







XVB L1Bp 

LED, included 

a 120 V 







LED, included 

a 230 V 







General: 




Dimensions: 


3/51

References 0 


3 



with “flash” discharge tube 

Illuminated beacons with 5 Joule “flash” discharge tube 

820999 


kg 

Complete unit 

comprising: 


1 base unit 


“Flash” discharge tube 

z 24 V 







820997 

3 


a 120 V 







XVB L6Bp 


a 230 V 







821000 

Illuminated beacons with 10 Joule “flash” discharge tube 

Complete unit 

comprising: 


1 base unit 



z 24 V 








a 120 V 







XVB L8Bp 


a 230 V 







General: 


3/52 



Dimensions: 

pages 3/58 and 3/59

References 0 

For use with base unit XVB Cpp: 

see page 3/56 


3 


Indicator banks Ø 70 mm, type XVB C for customer assembly 

(upto5units) 

Illuminated units for bulb with BA 15d base fitting 

Illuminated units with steady light 

821001 


kg 

Illuminated units 


not included 

250 V max. 

Green XVB C33 0.140 

Red XVB C34 0.140 

Orange XVB C35 0.140 

Blue XVB C36 0.140 

Clear XVB C37 0.140 

Yellow XVB C38 0.140 

821002 

XVB C3p 

Illuminated units with integral flashing light 



not included 

a 24 V 

c 24…48 V 

Green XVB C4B3 0.160 

Red XVB C4B4 0.160 

Orange XVB C4B5 0.160 

Blue XVB C4B6 0.160 

Clear XVB C4B7 0.160 

Yellow XVB C4B8 0.160 

3 

XVB C4pp 


not included 

a 48…230 V 

Green XVB C4M3 0.160 

Red XVB C4M4 0.160 

Orange XVB C4M5 0.160 

Blue XVB C4M6 0.160 

Clear XVB C4M7 0.160 

Yellow XVB C4M8 0.160 

General: 




Dimensions: 


3/53

References 0 


see page 3/56 


3 



(upto5units) 

Illuminated units with integral LED 

Illuminated units with steady light 

821003 

Description Voltage Colour Reference Weight 

kg 

Illuminated units with 

integral LED 

z 24 V Green XVB C2B3 0.150 






XVB C2pp 

3 

a 120 V Green XVB C2G3 0.150 

Red XVB C2G4 0.150 

Orange XVB C2G5 0.150 

Blue XVB C2G6 0.150 

Clear XVB C2G7 0.150 

Yellow XVB C2G8 0.150 

a 230 V Green XVB C2M3 0.150 






Illuminated units with integral flashing light 

821004 

Illuminated units with 

integral LED 

z 24 V Green XVB C5B3 0.170 






XVB C5pp 

a 120 V Green XVB C5G3 0.170 






a 230 V Green XVB C5M3 0.170 






General: 


3/54 



Dimensions: 

pages 3/58 and 3/59

References 0 


see page 3/56 


3 



(upto5units) 

Illuminated units with “flash” discharge tube 

Illuminated units with 5 Joule “flash” discharge tube 


kg 

821005 



z 24 V 








a 120 V 

Green XVB C6G3 0.280 






3 

XVB C6pp 


a 230 V 







Illuminated units with 10 Joule “flash” discharge tube 

821006 



z 24 V 







XVB C8pp 


a 120 V 

Green XVB C8G3 0.315 







a 230 V 







General: 




Dimensions: 


3/55

References 0 



3 



(upto5units) 

Audible units, base units, cover 

Audible units 

Description Characteristics Reference Weight 

kg 

821007 

Buzzer, 90 dB at 1 m 

Adjustable, 70 or 90 dB, 

continuous or intermittent mode 

(micro switch) 

z 12…48 V XVB C9B 0.170 

XVB C9p 

a 120…230 V XVB C9M 0.180 

3 

Loudspeaker unit 8 Ω XVB C9L0 – 

Base units + cover 

821008 

Base units for direct or tube fixing 

Description For use with Type Reference Weight 

kg 

Base unit + cover 

with bottom or side cable entry 

Banks without “flash” 

discharge tube unit 

Standard XVB C21 0.190 

XVB C07 

Base unit only 

with bottom or side cable entry 

Banks with “flash” 

discharge tube unit 

Standard XVB C07 0.160 


with side cable entry 

All types of bank AS-Interface (1) XVB C21A – 


with bottom entry, pre-cabled 

(length 1 metre) and fitted with 

M12 end connector 

All types of bank AS-Interface (1) XVB C21B – 

(1) For further information regarding AS-Interface connections, refer to our "AS-Interface cabling system" catalogue. 

General: 


3/56 



Dimensions: 

pages 3/58 and 3/59

References 0 


3 



Accessories 

Accessories common to beacons and indicator banks 

821012 

Description Characteristics Sold in 

lots of 

Unit reference 

Weight 

kg 

821009 

821010 

821011 

XVB C02 

XVB C11 

XVB C12 

XVB C020 

Aluminium support tube, 

black paint finish 

Aluminium support tube, 

unpainted 

Support tube 

concealment cover 

Fixing base for use on 

horizontal support 

Fixing base for use on 

vertical support 


BA 15d base fitting 



LEDs 


Flashing LEDs 


Adaptor for side entry 

through base unit 

100 mm 1 XVB C02 0.100 

400 mm 1 XVB C03 0.350 

800 mm 1 XVB C04 0.690 

100 mm 1 XVB C02A 0.100 

400 mm 1 XVB C03A 0.350 

800 mm 1 XVB C04A 0.690 

100 mm 1 XVB C020 0.080 

400 mm 1 XVB C030 0.305 

800 mm 1 XVB C040 0.610 

For mounting on support tube 

XVB C0p 

For direct mounting on base unit or 

with base XVB C11 + tube XVB C0p 

1 XVB C11 0.170 

1 XVB C12 0.380 

12 V 10 W 10 DL1 BLJ 0.090 

24 V 10 W 10 DL1 BLB 0.090 

48 V 10 W 10 DL1 BLE 0.090 

120 V 10 W 10 DL1 BLG 0.090 

230 V 10 W 10 DL1 BLM 0.090 

12 V 7 W 10 DL1 BEJ 0.090 

24 V 6.5 W 10 DL1 BEB 0.090 

48 V 6 W 10 DL1 BEE 0.090 

120 V 7 W 10 DL1 BEG 0.090 

230 V 7 W 10 DL1 BEM 0.090 

24 V White 1 DL1 BDB1 (1) 0.015 

Green 1 DL1 BDB3 0.015 

Red 1 DL1 BDB4 0.015 

Blue 1 DL1 BDB6 0.015 

Orange 1 DL1 BDB8 0.015 

120 V White 1 DL1 BDG1 (1) 0.015 

Green 1 DL1 BDG3 0.015 

Red 1 DL1 BDG4 0.015 

Blue 1 DL1 BDG6 0.015 

Orange 1 DL1 BDG8 0.015 

230 V White 1 DL1 BDM1 (1) 0.015 

Green 1 DL1 BDM3 0.015 

Red 1 DL1 BDM4 0.015 

Blue 1 DL1 BDM6 0.015 

Orange 1 DL1 BDM8 0.015 

24 V White 1 DL1 BKB1 (1) 0.015 

Green 1 DL1 BKB3 0.015 

Red 1 DL1 BKB4 0.015 

Blue 1 DL1 BKB6 0.015 

Orange 1 DL1 BKB8 0.015 

120 V White 1 DL1 BKG1 0.015 

Green 1 DL1 BKG3 0.015 

Red 1 DL1 BKG4 0.015 

Blue 1 DL1 BKG6 0.015 

Orange 1 DL1 BKG8 0.015 

230 V White 1 DL1 BKM1 0.015 

Green 1 DL1 BKM3 0.015 

Red 1 DL1 BKM4 0.015 

Blue 1 DL1 BKM6 0.015 

Orange 1 DL1 BKM8 0.015 

With 13P cable gland 1 XVB C14 0.015 

3 

Accessories specific to indicator banks 

Description Characteristics Reference Weight 

kg 

Cover only – XVB C081 0.030 

Setofcolouredmarkers 6 colours XVB C22 0.001 

General: 


Setof5legendholders Identification of stacked units on base unit XVB C23 0.002 

Sheet of 85 legends for Identification of stacked units on base unit XVB CY1 0.005 

base unit legend holder 

(XVB C23) 

Sheet of 52 legends Identification of stacked units on locking ring XVB CY2 0.005 

SIS labelling software For English, French, German, Italian and XBY 2U 0.100 

creation of legends Spanish 

(1) Use LEDs DL1 Bpp1 with yellow lens units. 



Dimensions: 


3/57

Dimensions 

0 


3 



Illuminated beacons XVB Lppp 

For bulb with BA 15d base fitting or LED 

With “flash” discharge tube 

139 

3 

70 

b 

232 

70 

Indicator banks XVB C 

Without “flash” discharge tube 

With “flash” discharge tube 

3 

2 

1 + 3 = Base unit + cover 

XVB C21 

2 Illuminated or audible 

signalling unit XVB Cppp 

3 

1 Base unit XVB C07 

2 Illuminated or audible 

signalling unit XVB Cppp 

3 “Flash” unit XVB Cppp 

1 

b 

2 

70 

1 

Number of illuminated b Number of illuminated or b 

or audible signalling units 

audible signalling units 

(no “flash”) 

other than “flash” tube 

1 138 70 

1 295 

2 201 2 358 

3 264 3 421 

4 327 4 484 

5 390 

Panel cut-out for direct fixing (on base unit XVB C21, XVB C07, XVB C21A or XVB C21P) 

42 

2xØ4,5orM4 

General: 


3/58 



References: 

pages 3/50 to 3/57



3 



Support tube XVB C0p and fixing plate for horizontal surface XVB C11 

Cut-out in horizontal panel for fixing on plate XVB C11 

4xØ5orM5 

54 

54 

1 

b 

2 

1 Support tube XVB C0p Ø25mm 

2 Fixing plate for 

horizontal surface XVB C11 

3 

b 

XVB C02 77 

XVB C03 377 

XVB C04 777 

Fixing plate for vertical surface XVB C12 

Direct mounting on base unit Mounting by means of Cut-out in vertical panel 

plate XVB C11 

for fixing on plate XVB C12 

screwedontotubeXVBC0p 

3xØ5orM5 

41,5 

51,5 

25,5 

2 

1 

b 

50 

= 

68 

= 

114 

114 

25,5 

1 Tube Ø 25 mm 

2 Fixing plate for vertical surface 

XVB C12 

b 

XVB C02 77 

XVB C03 377 

XVB C04 777 

Wiring scheme 

XVB L 

XVB C 

5 

4 

2 

C 

5 

3 

1 

1 

4 

2 

C 

5 

3 

1 

4 

3 

2 

1 

General: 




References: 

pages 3/50 to 3/57 

3/59

General, 


dimensions 

0 


3 


Rotating mirror beacon, type XVR 

General 

These rotating beacons are designed for long distance signalling applications. 



IEC 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2-14 


Ambient air temperature For storage °C - 40…+ 70 

For operation °C - 20…+ 50 

3 



Class I 

NF C 20-030 



NF C 20-010 

IP 65 

Type 4X Nema “INDOOR” 

Conforming to UL 508 and CSA 22 

Material Base unit Glass reinforced polyamide 6 

Domed lens unit 

Polycarbonate 


Consumption Halogen bulb mA z 24 V: < 3100 

Incandescent bulbs mA z 24 V: < 1050 

a 120 V: < 210 

a 230 V: < 110 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV Uimp=4 

Light source Halogen bulb Bulbs with H1 base fitting: maximum power 70 W 


Bulbs with BA 15d base fitting: maximum power 25 W 

Service life of motor H >2000 

Mounting position 

Horizontal 

Flash frequency Hz 3 

Connection Maximum clamping capacity mm2 1x1.5mm2 

Cable entry 

For ISO M20 x 1.5 cable gland (included) 

Dimensions 

Panel cut-out 

202 

Ø165 

M20 x 1.5 cable gland included 

3/60

References 

0 


3 


Rotating mirror beacon, type XVR 

Rotating mirror beacon 

Light source Supply voltage Colour Reference Weight 

kg 

Halogen bulb included 

70 W 

z 24 V Green XVR 1B93 1.165 

Red XVR 1B94 1.165 

Orange XVR 1B95 1.165 

Blue XVR 1B96 1.165 

Yellow XVR 1B98 1.165 

XVR 1ppp 

Incandescent bulb included 

25 W 

z 24 V Green XVR 1B03 1.165 

Red XVR 1B04 1.165 

Orange XVR 1B05 1.165 

3 

Blue XVR 1B06 1.165 

Yellow XVR 1B08 1.165 

a 120 V Green XVR 1G03 1.235 

Red XVR 1G04 1.235 

Orange XVR 1G05 1.235 

Blue XVR 1G06 1.235 

Yellow XVR 1G08 1.235 

a 230 V Green XVR 1M03 1.235 

Red XVR 1M04 1.235 

Orange XVR 1M05 1.235 

Blue XVR 1M06 1.235 


Yellow XVR 1M08 1.235 

Description Characteristics Unit reference Weight 

kg 

Domed lens unit Green XVR 0153 0.335 

Red XVR 0154 0.335 

Orange XVR 0155 0.335 

Blue XVR 0156 0.335 

Yellow XVR 0158 0.335 

Protective grill for 

domed lens unit 

Fixing base for 

use on vertical support 

Fixing base for support tube 

(1/2 NPT) 

Halogen bulbs 

H1 base fitting, 70 W 

– XVR 016 (1) – 

– XVR 012 – 

– 

XVR 013 – 

24 V DL1 BRBH – 


24 V DL1 BRB 0.100 

BA 15d base fitting, 25 W 

120 V DL1 BRG 0.100 

(sold in lots of 10) 

230 V DL1 BRM 0.100 

(1) This protective grill is only suitable for use with the XVR 1ppp rotating mirror beacon, without cable gland fitted. 

3/61

General, 


0 


3 


Sirens, type XVS 

General 

These sirens are designed for long distance signalling applications. 


Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1 




3 



NF C 20-030 

kV 

kV 

a 120 V and a 230 V : class II 

z 24 V : class III 



IP 40 

NF C 20-010 

Material Base unit Glass-reinforced polyamide 6 

Cone 

Butadiene-styrene acrylic 


Consumption mA z 24 : 440 

mA a 120 : 110 

mA a 230 : 55 

Frequency 1-tone Hz 1000 ± 10 % 

2-tone Hz 700 and 800 ± 15 % 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV a 120 V and a 230 V : U imp = 4 

kV z 24 V : U imp = 1.5 

Mounting position 

All positions 

Cabling Maximum clamping capacity mm2 1 x 1.5 with cable end 

3/62

References, 

dimensions 

0 


3 


Sirens, type XVS 

Sirens 

Description Supply voltage Number Reference Weight 

of tones 

kg 

Sirens z 24 V 1 XVS B1 0.860 

106 db 

2 XVS B2 0.860 

a 120 V 1 XVS G1 0.860 

2 XVS G2 0.860 

a 230 V 1 XVS M1 0.860 

XVS pp 

Dimensions 

2 XVS M2 0.860 

118 

3 

131 

(1) 

142 

Panel cut-out 

= = 

48 

(1) Cable gland 7 (DIN Pg 7), included. 

3/63

3 - 

4 

4/0 Schneider Electric

Contents 

4-Safety control and protection 

solutions 

SelectionguideMini-VARIOandVARIOswitchdisconnectors......page4/2 

b Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications 

v Complete units. .......................................... page 4/8 

v Components for customer assembly .......................... page 4/9 

b VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications 

v Complete units. ......................................... page 4/10 

v Components for customer assembly ......................... page 4/11 

b Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors 

v Operators, handles and front plates (for customer assembly) ..... page 4/13 

v Accessories ............................................ page 4/14 

b VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors 

v Pre-assembled. ......................................... page 4/16 

v Empty enclosures and switch bodies (for customer assembly) ..... page 4/17 

v Add-on modules. ........................................ page 4/18 

Selectionguidedirectstartersforsafetyapplications............page4/26 

b Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers model GV2-ME .......... page 4/28 

b Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers model GV2-ME 

and accessories (for customer assembly) ....................... page 4/31 

4 

b Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine 

subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE 

v Model LG7 or LG1, non reversing starters .................... page 4/34 

v Model LG8-K, reversing starters ............................ page 4/36 

v Model LJ7-K, non reversing starters with integral 

transformer ............................................ page 4/40 

v Model LJ8-K, reversing starters with integral 

transformer ............................................ page 4/41 

Selectionguidecontactorsfrom6to20A......................page4/44 

SelectionguideTeSyscontactorsfrom9to200A...............page4/46 

Selection guide contactors from 115 to 2750 A . . . ...............page4/48 

4/1


0 

Safety control and protection 


4 

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors 

Applications 

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive 

categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. 

VARIO switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot 

handles in the open position. 

4 

Use 

Standard applications 

Presentation Bare switches Enclosed switches 

Assembly Pre-assembled For customer Pre-assembled For customer 

assembly 

assembly 

Thermal current 12 and 20 A 10…32 A 10 and 16 A 

Operational current 8.1 and 11 A 8.1...29 A 8.1...11 A 

AC-23 at 400 V 

Number of poles 3 3...5 3 3...5 

Number of – 1or2 – 1or2 

auxiliary contacts 

Reversible 

terminal blocks 

Yes 

Mounting On door At back of On door or at – 

enclosure 

back of enclosure 

Operator Direct Offset with Direct or offset Direct 

door interlock with door interlock 

mechanism 

mechanism 

Switch type 

VCDN-12 VCCDN-12 VN-12 VCFN-12GE VN-12 

to 

VN-20 

VCDN-20 VCCDN-20 VN-20 VCFN-40GF +VCFX-GF1 

Pages 4/8 4/9 4/16 4/17 to 4/19 

4/2

or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation 

indicate the “open” position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance), and it is possible to padlock the 

High performance applications 

4 

Bare switches 

Enclosed switches 

Pre-assembled For customer Pre-assembled For customer 

assembly 

assembly 

12…175 A 10…140 A 10…63 A 

8.1…83 A 8.1...83 A 8.1...41 A 

3 3…6 (up to 80 A) 3 3…6 

3 (for 125 and 175 A 

ratings) 

– 1or2 – 2 

On door At back of enclosure In enclosure or On door, at back of – 

modular distribution enclosure, in 

boards 

enclosure or modular 

distribution boards 

Direct Offset with Direct Direct or offset with Direct 

door interlock 

door interlock 

mechanism 

mechanism 

VCp-02 to VCCp-02 to VVE-0 to V02 to VCF-02GE to 

VCp-06 VCCp-6 VVE-4 V6 VCF-6GE 

V02toV4 

+VCFX-GE1 

+VCFX-GDXE 

4/10 4/11 to 4/15 4/16 4/17 

4/3


0 



4 


VN-12 V02 VN-20 V01 V0 VVD-0 V1 VVD-1 

Switch type (bare type) VZN-12 VZ-02 VZN-20 VZ-01 VZ-0 VVE-0 VZ-1 VVE-1 

Environment 

Conforming to standards IEC 947-3 



UL, CSA, GL 

“TC” 

Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 529 

with protection shroud 

Ambient air temperature °C - 20…+ 50 

Flame resistance 960 °C conforming to IEC 695-2-1 

Shock resistance 15 gn 30 gn 15 gn 30 gn 

1/2sinewave=11ms 


4 

Vibration resistance 5gn 1gn 1gn 1gn 

10…150 Hz 


Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 

Rated impact withstand kV 6 8 6 8 8 8 8 8 

voltage (Uimp) 

Conventional thermal currents A 12 20 25 32 

in free air (Ith) and rated 

uninterrupted (lu) 

Conventional thermal current A 10 16 20 25 

in enclosure (Ithe) 


and current 

AC-21A/22A 230…690 V A 12 20 25 32 

AC-23A 230 V A/kW 10.6/3 14/4 19.7/5.5 19.7/5.5 

240 V A/kW 10.6/3 14/4 19.9/5.5 18.9/5.5 

400 V A/kW 8.1/4 11/5.5 14.5/7.5 21.8/11 

415 V A/kW 8.1/4 11/5.5 14/7.5 21/11 

500 V A/kW 8.9/5.5 11.9/7.5 16.7/11 16.7/11 

690 V A/kW 8.6/7.5 12.3/11 17.5/15 17.5/15 


AC-3 230/240 V kW 1.5 1.5 3 3 4 4 

400/415 V kW 3 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 

500 V kW 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 

690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 11 

Intermittent duty class 30 30 30 30 

Characteristics in normal 

operating conditions 

Rated making capacity A/400 V 120 200 250 320 

AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) 

Rated breaking capacity A/400 V 120 200 200 250 

AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) 

Short-circuit characteristics 

Permissible rms short time A/400 V/1s 140 300 140 300 300 384 

rating (Icw) 

Rated making capacity under kA/400 V 0.5 1 0.5 1 1 1 

short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak 

Rated conditional short-circuit 

current (I rms) 

with aM/gG fuses 

kA/400 V 6 10 6 10 10 10 

A 12 20 25 35 

References : 

pages 4/8 to 4/19 

Dimensions, schemes : 

pages 4/20 to 4/23 

4/4

0 

4 

V2 VVD-2 V3 VVD-3 V4 VVD-4 V5 V6 VZ7 VZN-05 

VZ-2 VVE-2 VZ-3 VVE-3 VZ-4 VVE-4 VZ2-0 VZN-06 

IEC 947-3 947-5 

UL, CSA, GL 

“TC” 

IP 20 conforming to IEC 529 

-20…+50 

960 °C 

30 gn – 

1gn – 

4 

690 690 690 690 690 690 690 

8 8 8 8 8 8 6 

40 63 80 125 175 12 6 

32 50 63 100 140 10 4 

Ie/AC-15 Ie/AC-15 

40 63 80 125 160 

25.8/7.5 50.3/15 61.2/18.5 71.9/22 96.6/30 6A 6A 

24.8/7.5 48.2/15 58.5/18.5 68/22 92.7/30 6A 6A 

29/15 41.5/22 57/30 68.5/37 83/45 4A 4A 

28/15 40/22 55/30 66/37 80/45 4A 4A 

28.5/18.5 44/30 54/37 64.5/45 79/55 2A 2A 

17.5/15 25/22 33/30 42/37 49/45 1A 1A 

5.5 11 15 22 30 – – 

11 18.5 22 30 37 – – 

15 22 30 37 45 – – 

11 18.5 18.5 30 37 – – 

30 30 30 30 30 – – 

400 630 800 1250 1750 – – 

320 500 640 1000 1400 – – 

480 756 960 1500 2100 – – 

1 2.1 2.1 2.8 2.8 – – 

10 10 10 10 10 1 1 

50 63 80 125 200 16 1.6 

4/5

Characteristics (continued) 0 



4 


VN-12 V02 VN-20 V01 V0 VVD-0 V1 VVD-1 

Switch type (bare type) VZN-12 VZ-02 VZN-20 VZ-01 VZ-0 VVE-0 VZ-1 VVE-1 

Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation 

Rated operational current 

DC-1 (L/R = 1ms) 24 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32 

2 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

48 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32 

2 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

60 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32 

2 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

110 V 1 contact A 1.5 2 9 10 

2 contacts A 8 10 12 16 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

4 

220 V 1 contact A 1.5 2 2.5 3 

2 contacts A 7 8 10 12 

3 contacts A 10 14 16 20 

250 V 1 contact A 0.6 0.7 0.8 1 

2 contacts A 3 4 6 8 

3 contacts A 8 10 12 16 


DC-2 to DC-5 24 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32 

(L/R = 1ms) 2 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

Other characteristics 

48 V 1 contact A 12 20 25 32 

2 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

60 V 1 contact A 10 14 16 20 

2 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

110 V 1 contact A 1.5 2 2.5 3 


3 contacts A 12 20 25 32 

220 V 1 contact A 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.8 

2 contacts A 1.4 1.5 1.5 2 


250 V 1 contact A 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.8 

2 contacts A 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 

3 contacts A 1.2 2.4 1.6 2 

Mechanical durability Millions of 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 

op. cycles 

Electrical durability in cat. AC-21 Millions of 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 

op. cycles 

Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5 Operating 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 

cycles 

Suitable for isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Cabling Flexible cable + cable end mm 2 4 6 4 6 6 6 

Solid cable mm 2 4 10 4 10 10 10 

Tightening torque N.m 0.7 2.1 0.7 2.1 2.1 2.1 

References : 

pages 4/8 to 4/19 

Dimensions, schemes : 

pages 4/20 to 4/23 

4/6

0 

4 

V2 VVD-2 V3 VVD-3 V4 VVD-4 V5 V6 VZ7 VZN-05 

VZ-2 VVE-2 VZ-3 VVE-3 VZ-4 VVE-4 VZ2-0 VZN-06 

40 63 80 125 175 8(Ie/DC-11) 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 8(Ie/DC-11) 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

35 40 50 60 70 4(Ie/DC-11) 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

12 20 25 30 12 2(Ie/DC-11) 

20 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

4 6 8 12 15 1(Ie/DC-11) 

14 25 30 40 50 – 

25 30 40 80 100 – 

2 4 5 6 10 0.8 (Ie/DC-11) 

12 20 25 30 40 – 

20 30 40 50 61 – 

4 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

25 40 50 60 70 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

40 63 80 125 175 – 

5 6 8 10 12 – 

8 10 20 22 24 – 

40 50 63 70 80 – 

1 1.5 2 2.2 2.4 – 

3 4 6 7 8 – 

7 10 15 16 13 – 

1 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.8 – 

2 3 6 7 8 – 

6 8 10 12 14 – 

0.1 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.1 0.05 

0.1 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.1 (AC-15) 0.05 

30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 (DC-11) 

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes – 

6 16 16 70 70 2 x 0.75…1.5 

10 25 25 95 95 2x1…2.5 

2.1 4 4 22.6 22.6 0.7 

4/7

References 

0 



4 

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications 

Complete units 

- 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A 

- Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied) 

- Marking on operator 

- Degree of protection IP 65 

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors 

For door mounting 

Operator Ith Reference Weight 

Handle Front plate Fixing 

mm mm A kg 

VCDN-20 

Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCDN-12 0.177 

padlockable with 60 x 60 

up to 3 padlocks 

(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shank) 

4 

20 VCDN-20 0.177 

For mounting at back of an enclosure (1) 

Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCCDN-12 0.334 




VCCDN-20 

20 VCCDN-20 0.334 

(1) Units supplied with a shaft extension VZN-17 and a door interlock plate KZ-32. 


pages 4/4 to 4/7 

4/8 

Dimensions : 


Schemes : 

page 4/21

References 0 



4 

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications 

(for customer assembly) 

Switch bodies 

Description Rating Reference Weight 

A 

kg 

3-pole 12 VN-12 0.110 

switch disconnectors 

20 VN-20 0.110 

VN-20 

Add-on modules 


A 

kg 

Main pole modules 12 VZN-12 0.020 

VZN-11 

20 VZN-20 0.020 

4 

Neutral pole module 12 and 20 VZN-11 0.020 

with early make and 

and late break contacts 

Earthing module 12 and 20 VZN-14 0.016 

VZN-14 

Auxiliary contact block 1 late make N/O contact VZN-05 0.020 

modules 

1 early break N/C contact VZN-06 0.020 

Input terminal For add-on pole or auxiliary contact VZN-26 0.004 

protection shrouds 

module (single-pole shroud) 

VZN-05 

For switch bodies (3-pole shroud) VZN-08 0.007 

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body 

VZN-12 or VZN-20 + + VZN-12 or VZN-20 

VN-12 

or 

or or VZN-11 + VZN-14 

VN-20 

or 

VZN-05 or VZN-06 




Dimensions : 


Schemes : 

page 4/21 

4/9

References 

0 



4 

VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance 

applications 

Complete units 

- 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A 

- Marking on operator o 



Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors 

For door mounting 

Handle Front plate Fixing Rating Reference Weight 

mm A kg 

VCF-0 

Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCD-02 0.215 

padlockable with 60 x 60 20 VCD-01 0.215 

up to 3 padlocks 25 VCD-0 0.215 

(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shank) 32 VCD-1 0.215 

40 VCD-2 0.215 

4 

4 screws 12 VCF-02 0.250 

20 VCF-01 0.250 

25 VCF-0 0.250 

32 VCF-1 0.250 

40 VCF-2 0.250 

63 VCF-3 0.560 

80 VCF-4 0.560 

Red, long Yellow 4 screws 125 VCF-5 1.200 



(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shank) 175 VCF-6 1.200 

VCF-5 

For mounting at back of an enclosure (1) 

Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 12 VCCD-02 0.392 

padlockable with 60 x 60 20 VCCD-01 0.392 

up to 3 padlocks 25 VCCD-0 0.392 

(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shank) 32 VCCD-1 0.392 

40 VCCD-2 0.392 

4 screws 12 VCCF-02 0.527 

20 VCCF-01 0.527 

25 VCCF-0 0.527 

32 VCCF-1 0.527 

40 VCCF-2 0.527 

63 VCCF-3 0.440 

80 VCCF-4 0.680 

VCCF-0 

Red, long Yellow 4 screws 125 VCCF-5 1.320 



(Ø 4 to Ø 8 shank) 175 VCCF-6 1.320 

For mounting in enclosure or for modular distribution boards 

Handle Front plate Rating Reference Weight 

mm A kg 

Red, Yellow 25 VVE-0 0.250 

padlockable 45 x 45 32 VVE-1 0.250 

with 1 padlock 40 VVE-2 0.250 

(Ø 4 to Ø 6 shank) 63 VVE-3 0.530 

80 VVE-4 0.530 

(1) Units supplied with a shaft extension VZN-17 and a door interlock plate KZ-32 or KZ-74 (see page 4/14). 

VVE-1 



4/10 

Dimensions : 


Schemes : 

page 4/23

References 0 



4 

VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance 

applications (for customer assembly) 

V0 

Switch bodies 


A 

kg 

3-pole 12 V02 0.200 

switch disconnectors (1) 20 V01 0.200 

25 V0 0.200 

32 V1 0.200 

40 V2 0.200 

63 V3 0.500 

80 V4 0.500 

125 V5 0.900 

175 V6 0.900 


Main pole modules 12 VZ-02 0.050 

20 VZ-01 0.050 

25 VZ-0 0.050 

32 VZ-1 0.050 

40 VZ-2 0.050 

63 VZ-3 0.100 

80 VZ-4 0.100 

Neutral pole modules 12 to 40 VZ-11 0.050 

with early make and 63 and 80 VZ-12 0.100 

late break contacts (1) 125 and 175 VZ-13 0.250 

Earthing modules 12 to 40 VZ-14 0.050 

63 and 80 VZ-15 0.100 

125 and 175 VZ-16 0.250 

Auxiliary contact block modules 

4 

V5 

Block with N/O + N/C (2) VZ-7 0.050 

2 auxiliary contacts N/O + N/O VZ-20 0.050 

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body 

1 add-on module on each side of the switch body 

VZ-7 or VZ-20 + V0p + VZ-7 or VZ-20 VZ-7 + + VZ-7 

or or or V5 or 

VZ-11 or VZ-12 + 

V0 

+ VZ-11 or VZ-12 VZ-20 + + VZ-20 

or or or or 

VZ-14 or VZ-15 + to + VZ-14 or VZ-15 VZ-13 + + VZ-13 

or 

VZ-0 

VZ-11 

or or or V6 or 

V4 

VZ-0p/VZ-0toVZ-4 + + VZ-0p/VZ-0toVZ-4 VZ-16 + + VZ-16 

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body 

VZ-0p + VZ-0p + V0p + VZ-0p + VZ-7 or VZ-20 or VZ-11 or VZ-14 

VZ-0 + VZ-0 + V0 + VZ-0 + VZ-7 or VZ-20 or VZ-11 or VZ-14 


VZ-15 

VZ-20 




The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main poles. Maximum of 3 main poles per switch body. 

(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/14. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts. 



Dimensions : 


Schemes : 

page 4/23 

4/11

0 

4 

VN12, VN20 

V02…V2 

VZN17, VZN30 

KZ32, KZ83 

4 

V3, V4 

VZ18, VZ31 

KZ74, KZ81 

V5, V6 

VZ18, VZ31 

KCF-2PZ 

KZ74, KZ81 

KCF-3PZ 

4/12

References 

0 



4 


Operators, handles and front plates (for customer assembly) 

Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors 




For Operator Reference Weight 

switch Handle Front plate 

body Dimensions Fixing 

mm 

kg 

VN-12, VN-20 Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 KCC-1YZ 0.050 

V02…V2 padlockable 45 x 45 

with 1 padlock 

(Ø4toØ6shank) 

4screws KCE-1YZ 0.040 

Red, Yellow Ø 22.5 KCD-1PZ 0.082 

padlockable 60 x 60 

with up to 

3padlocks 


4 

4screws KCF-1PZ 0.075 

V3 Red, Yellow 4screws KCF-2PZ 0.070 

and padlockable 60 x 60 

V4 

with up to 

3padlocks 


V5 Red, long Yellow 4screws KCF-3PZ (1) 0.160 

and padlockable 90 x 90 

V6 

with up to 

3padlocks 


(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adaptor plate KZ-106 must be ordered separately (see 

page 4/14). 



Dimensions : 

pages 4/20 to 4/23 

Schemes : 


4/13

References 0 


control and protection 


4 


Accessories 

Input terminal protection shrouds 

Description For Reference Weight 

use on 

kg 

VZ-8 

For switch bodies V02…V2 VZ-8 0.015 

(3-pole shroud) 

V3 and V4 VZ-9 0.020 

V5 and V6 VZ-10 0.060 

For add-on pole modules VZ-02…VZ-2. VZ-11. VZ-14 VZ-26 0.005 

(single-pole shroud) 

VZ-3. VZ-4. VZ-12. VZ-15 VZ-27 0.007 

4 

VZ-26 

VZ-13. VZ-16 VZ-28 0.020 

For contact blocks with – VZ-29 0.005 

2 auxiliary contacts 

Components for door interlocking 

VZ-18 

KZ-32 

KZ-81 



4/14 

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator 

Description For Distance Sold in Unit Weight 

use on enc.back/door lots of reference 

mm 

kg 

Shaft VN-12. VN-20 300…330 1 VZN-17 (1) 0.100 

extensions V02…V2 

400…430 1 VZN-30 (1) 0.130 

(1) Can be used with V02 to V2. 

V02…V2 300…330 1 VZ-17 0.075 

400…430 1 VZ-30 0.125 

V3 and V4 300…320 1 VZ-18 0.170 

400…420 1 VZ-31 0.215 

V5 and V6 330…350 1 VZ-18 0.170 

430…450 1 VZ-31 0.215 

Door VN-12. VN-20 – 5 KZ-32 0.177 

interlock 

V02…V2 

plates 

V3…V6 – 5 KZ-74 0.020 

Description For Front plate Sold in Unit Weight 

use on dimensions lots of reference 

mm 

kg 

Plates for VN-12. VN-20 45 x 45 5 KZ-83 0.205 

door mounting V02…V2 or 60 x 60 

of handles with 

4 screw fixing V3 and V4 60 x 60 5 KZ-81 0.010 

V3…V6 90 x 90 5 KZ-81 0.010 

Adaptor plate V3 and V4 90 x 90 5 KZ-106 0.075 

for switch 

disconnectors 

Dimensions : 

pages 4/20 to 4/23 

Schemes : 

pages 4/21 and 4/23

References 0 



4 


Accessories 

Accessories for operators 

Description For Front plate Sold in Unit Weight 

use on dimensions lots of reference 

mm 

kg 

Legend bearer Front plate 45 x 45 5 KZ-13 0.060 

with silver 

coloured blank 

legend plate 

KZ-15 

60 x 60 5 KZ-15 0.065 

90 x 90 5 KZ-103 0.070 

Legend bearer Front plate 45 x 45 20 KZ-14 0.060 

without 

legend plate 

60 x 60 10 KZ-16 0.065 

4 

90 x 90 5 KZ-101 0.070 

Silver coloured KZ-14 – 20 KZ-76 0.020 

blank legend 

plates for 

engraving 

KZ-16 – 10 KZ-77 0.010 

KZ-67 

KZ-101 – 5 KZ-100 0.005 

Sealing kits VN-12, VN-20 45 x 45 5 KZ-65 0.037 

V02…V2 60 x 60 5 KZ-66 0.033 

V3 and V4 60 x 60 5 KZ-62 0.033 

V3…V6 90 x 90 5 KZ-67 0.064 

Z01 

Tightening tool For operators – 5 Z01 0.050 

with 

Ø 22.5 fixing 



Dimensions : 

pages 4/20 to 4/23 

Schemes : 


4/15

References 

0 



4 

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors 

(pre-assembled) 

Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications 



- IP 65 enclosures, sealable and lockable 

- Covercanbelockedin“I”(ON)positionupto63A 


o 

VCF-0GE 

3-pole main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors (1) 

Operator Ithe Power Switch Possible Reference Weight 

Handle Front plate AC-23 body no. of 

Dimensions at 400 V fitted add-on 

modules (2) 

mm A kW kg 

4 

Red, Yellow 10 4 V02 2 VCF-02GE 0.500 


with up to 

3 padlocks 16 5.5 V01 2 VCF-01GE 0.500 

(Ø4toØ8 

shank) 

20 7.5 V0 2 VCF-0GE 0.500 

25 11 V1 2 VCF-1GE 0.500 

32 15 V2 2 VCF-2GE 0.500 

VCF-3GE 

50 22 V3 3 VCF-3GE 0.930 

63 30 V4 3 VCF-4GE 0.930 

Red, long Yellow 100 37 V5 1 VCF-5GE 2.190 


with up to 

3 padlocks 140 45 V6 1 VCF-6GE 2.190 


Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications 



3-pole main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors (1) 

VCFN-12GE 

Red, Yellow 10 4 VN-12 2 VCFN-12GE (2) 0.422 


with 1 padlock 

(Ø 8 shank) 16 5.5 VN-20 2 VCFN-20GE (2) 0.422 

or up to 

3 padlocks 

(Ø 6 shank) 20 7.5 V0 0 VCFN-25GE 0.512 

25 11 V1 0 VCFN-32GE 0.512 

(1) Switch disconnector characteristics, see pages 4/4 to 4/7. 

(2) For enclosures VCF and VCFN, see page 4/18. 

32 15 V2 0 VCFN-40GE 0.512 

Dimensions : 

page 4/24 

Schemes : 

page 4/25 

4/16

References 0 



4 


(for customer assembly) 


IP 65 enclosure fitted with red, padlockable handle and yellow front plate (for mounting a main and Emergency stop 

switch disconnector 

For mounting Ithe Possible no. of Reference Weight 

switch body type add-on modules (1) 

A 

kg 

VN-12, VN-20 10…32 2 VCFX-GE1 0.340 

V02…V2 

V02…V2 10…32 4 VCFX-GE4 0.660 

VCFX-GE2 

V3 and V4 50…63 3 VCFX-GE2 0.660 

4 VCFX-GDXE 0.660 

Switch bodies for standard applications (2) 


A 

kg 

4 

3-pole switch disconnectors 10 VN-12 0.110 

16 VN-20 0.110 

Switch bodies for high performance applications (2) 


A 

kg 

3-pole switch disconnectors 10 V02 0.200 

16 V01 0.200 

20 V0 0.200 

25 V1 0.200 

32 V2 0.200 

V0 

50 V3 0.200 

63 V4 0.200 

(1) See page 4/18. 

(2) Switch disconnector characteristics, see pages 4/4 to 4/7. 

Dimensions : 


Schemes : 

page 4/25 

4/17

References 

0 



4 



VZ-0 

VZ-11 

Add-on modules for enclosure VCF 


A 

kg 

Main pole modules 10 VZ-02 0.050 

(mounted in enclosure) 

16 VZ-01 0.050 

20 VZ-0 0.050 

25 VZ-1 0.050 

32 VZ-2 0.050 

50 VZ-3 0.100 

63 VZ-4 0.100 

Neutral pole modules 10 to 32 VZ-11 0.050 

with early make and 

late break contacts 50 and 63 VZ-12 0.100 

4 

100 and 140 VZ-13 0.250 

Earthing modules 10 to 32 VZ-14 0.050 

50 and 63 VZ-15 0.100 

VZ-15 

VZ-20 

100 and 140 VZ-16 0.250 

Auxiliary contact block modules N/O + N/C (1) VZ-7 0.050 

with 2 auxiliary contacts 

N/O + N/O VZ-20 0.050 

Maximum number of add-on modules which can be fitted on a switch body 

1 add-on module on each side of the switch body 

VZ-7 or VZ-20 + V0p + VZ-7 or VZ-20 

or 

VZ-11 or VZ-12 + 

or 

V0 

or 

+ VZ-11 or VZ-12 

or 

VZ-14 or VZ-15 + to + VZ-14 or VZ-15 

or 

or 

V4 

VZ-0p/VZ-0toVZ-4 + + VZ-0p/VZ-0toVZ-4 

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body 

VZ-0p + VZ-0p + V0p + VZ-0p + VZ-7 or VZ-20 or VZ-11 or VZ-14 






Note: the add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main poles. Maximum of 3 main poles per switch body. 

(1) Late make N/O contact, early break N/C contact. 

Schemes : 

page 4/25 

4/18




4 

Mini-VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors 


Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN-12GE and 20GE 


A 

kg 

Main pole modules 10 VZN-12 0.020 

VZN-11 

16 VZN-20 0.020 

Neutral pole module with early 10 and 16 VZN-11 0.020 

make and late break contacts 

4 

Earthing module 10 and 16 VZN-14 0.016 

VZN-14 

Auxiliary contact block module 1 late make N/O contact VZN-05 0.020 

with 2 auxiliary contacts 

1 early break N/C contact VZN-06 0.020 

VZN-05 

Maximum number of add-on modules with can be fitted on a switch body 

VZN-12 or VZN-20 + + VZN-12 or VZN-20 

VN-12 

or 

or 

VZN-11 

or VN-20 or 


or 


VZN-14 

Schemes : 

page 4/25 

4/19

Dimensions 

0 



4 

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A 

Switch disconnectors 

Switch bodies 


VN-12, VN-20 VZN-12, VZN-20 VZN-11, VZN-14 

VZN-05, VZN-06 

46,5 

45,5 

45,5 

62 

48 

56 

39 12 

39 12 

Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door 

VN-12, VN-20 

Single hole fixing 

4 screw fixing 

4 

1,5...6 

1,5...6 

44 

62,5 

44 

74,5 

45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate 

3 

Ø13 

36 

48 

12,7 

22,5 

36 

48 



4/20 

References : 


Schemes : 

pages 4/21 and 4/23

Dimensions (continued), 

schemes 

0 



4 

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A 

Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN-17 or VZN-30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail) 

VN12, VN20 

Single hole fixing 


1,5...6 

1,5...6 

e 

e 

Shaft 

extension 

Distance (e) 

enc. back/door 

mm 

VN-12, VN-20 VZN-17 300…330 

VZN-30 400…430 

Schemes 

Switch body Main pole module Neutral pole module Auxiliary contact blocks 

VN-12, VN-20 VZN-12, VZN-20 VZN-11 VZN-05 VZN-06 

4 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

14 

13 

22 21 



References : 


4/21

Dimensions 

0 



4 

VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A 

Switch disconnectors 

Switch bodies 

V0p, V0 to V2 

V3 to V6 

60 

55 

= 

= 

H 

b 

c 

G 

a 

4 

3 

44 

c 

1,5...6 

68 

36 

48 

74 


VZ-02 to VZ-4 

VZ-11 to VZ-16 

c 

a 48,5 

a b c G H Ø 

V3, V4 60 83 65 48 48 5.5 

V5, V6 90 125 90 68 68 5.5 

VZ-7, VZ-20 

20 

b 

65 

a b c 

VZ-02 and VZ-01, 60 83 65 

VZ-0 to VZ-2, VZ-11, VZ-14 

VZ-3, VZ-4, VZ-12, VZ-15 90 125 90 

VZ-13, VZ-16 30 125 63 

Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door 

V0p, V0 to V4 

V0p, V0to V2 

Single hole fixing 4 screw fixing Single 4 screw 4 screw 

hole fixing fixing 

fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate 

1,5...6 

1,5...6 

1,5...6 

V0p, V0 to V2 V0p, V0 to V2 V0p, V0 to V4 

12,7 

37 

c 

44 

72 

22,5 

36 

48 

c 

V0p, V0toV2 60 

V3, V4 65 

V5 and V6 


90 x 90 front plate 

94 

68 

65 

90 



4/22 

References : 

pages 4/11, 4/17 and 4/18 

Schemes : 

page 4/23

Dimensions (continued), 

schemes 0 



4 

VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A 

Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure 

V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft extension V3 to V4 with shaft extension V5 and V6 with shaft extension 

VZ-17orVZ-30 VZ-18orVZ-31 VZ-18orVZ-31 

(clip-on mounting on 6 rail 

possible for V0p to V2) 

1,5...6 

1,5...6 

1,5...6 

e 

4 

45 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

14 

13 

22 21 

14 

13 

24 23 

45 

74 

45 

83 

60 

100 

e 

G 

94 

e 

30 

Shaft Distance (e) Ø G 

extension enc.back/door 

mm 

Shaft 

extension 

Distance (e) 

enc.back/door 

mm 

V02 and V01 VZ-17 300…330 2x4.2 15 

V0 to V2 VZ-30 400…430 2x4.2 15 

V3 and V4 VZ-18 300…320 2x5 20 

VZ-31 400…420 2x5 20 

V5 and V6 VZ-18 330…350 

VZ-31 430…450 

Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards 

VVp-0 to VVp-2 

VVp-3 and VVp-4 

5,5 

68 

106 

5,5 

72 

110 

60 

Schemes 

Switch body Main pole module Neutral pole module Auxiliary contact blocks 

V02 and V01 VZ-02 and VZ-01 VZ-11 to VZ-13 VZ-7 VZ-20 

V0 to V6 

VZ-0 to VZ-4 



References : 


4/23

Dimensions 

0 




4 


VCFN-12GE to VCFN-40GE 

= = 

90 

131 

106 

82,5 

Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom 

VCF-02GE to 4GE 

VCFX-GE1 to GE4 

4 

H 

b 

c1 

c 

= = 

a 

a b c c1 H 

VCF-02GE to VCF-2GE, VCFX-GE1 (1) 90 146 85 131 130 

VCF-3GE and VCF-4GE (2) 150 170 106 152 164 

VCFX-GE2 and VCFX-GE4 (2) 150 170 106 152 164 

(1) Cable glands 2 x 16 P top and bottom 

(2) Cable glands 2 x 16/21/29 P top and bottom 

VCF-5GE and 6GE 

= 201 

= 

280 

191 

126 

190 

220 

References : 


Schemes : 

page 4/25 

4/24

Dimensions (contnued) 0 



4 

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors (for customer assembly) 


VCFX-GDXE 

162 

86 

130 

168 

Schemes 

Enclosed Main pole Neutral pole 

switch disconnectors module module 

or switch bodies 

4 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

Auxiliary contact blocks 

VZ-7 VZ-20 VZN-05 VZN-06 

14 

13 

22 21 

14 

13 

24 23 

14 

13 

22 21 

= 180 

= 

220 

References : 

pages 4/17 to 4/19 

4/25


0 



solutions 4 

Direct starters for safety applications 

Applications 

Industrial and service industries 

Use in a machine subject to the enforcement of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE and Health 

and Safety Directive 89/655/CEE. 

4 

Starter type Forcustomerassembly Pre-assembled 

Operation 

1 direction of movement 

Standardised powers of 3-phase motors in AC-3 supplied 

with 400/415 V 

0.06…11 kW 

0.06…9 kW 

Components 

Thermal-magnetic motor 

circuit-breaker + voltage 

minimum circuit-breaker 

Thermal-magnetic motor 

circuit-breaker + switch 

Rotary-control selector switch 

+ thermal-magnetic motor 

circuit-breaker + switch 

Unit type GV2-ME + 

GV-AX + 

GV2-MC + 

GV2-K 

LG7-K 

LG7-D 

LG1-K 

LG1-D 

Pages 4/28 to 4/31 4/34 4/35 

4/26

40 

4 

34 

2 directions of movement 

0.06…4 kW 0.06…5.5 kW 0.06…4 kW 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker + switch + 

control transformer 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker + reversing 

switch 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker + reversing 

switch + control transformer 

LJ7-K LG8-K LJ8-K 

4/40 4/36 4/41 

4/27

References 

0 



4 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers model GV2-ME 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers GV2-ME with screw terminals 

810413 

GV2-ME: pushbutton control 

Standard power ratings Setting Magnetic Reference Weight 

of 3-phase motors range of tripping 

50/60 Hz in category AC-3 thermal current 

400/415 V 500 V 690 V trips (2) Id ± 20 % 

P Icu Ics P Icu Ics P Icu Ics 

(1) (1) (1) 

kW kA kW kA kW kA A A kg 

4 

GV2-ME 

– – – – – – – – – 0.1…0.16 1.5 GV2-ME01 0.260 

0.06 g g – – – – – – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2-ME02 0.260 

0.09 g g – – – – – – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2-ME03 0.260 

0.12 g g – – – 0.37 g g 0.40…0.63 8 GV2-ME04 0.260 

0.18 g g – – – – – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2-ME04 0.260 

0.25 g g – – – 0.55 g g 0.63…1 13 GV2-ME05 0.260 

0.37 g g 0.37 g g – – – 1…1.6 22.5 GV2-ME06 0.260 

0.55 g g 0.55 g g 0.75 g g 1…1.6 22.5 GV2-ME06 0.260 

– – – 0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1…1.6 22.5 GV2-ME06 0.260 

0.75 g g 1.1 g g 1.5 3 75 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2-ME07 0.260 

1.1 g g 1.5 g g 2.2 3 75 2.5…4 51 GV2-ME08 0.260 

1.5 g g 2.2 g g 3 3 75 2.5…4 51 GV2-ME08 0.260 

2.2 g g 3 50 100 4 3 75 4…6.3 78 GV2-ME10 0.260 

3 g g 4 10 100 5.5 3 75 6…10 138 GV2-ME14 0.260 

4 g g 5.5 10 100 7.5 3 75 6…10 138 GV2-ME14 0.260 

5.5 15 50 7.5 6 75 9 3 75 9…14 170 GV2-ME16 0.260 

– – – – – – 11 3 75 9…14 170 GV2-ME16 0.260 

7.5 15 50 9 6 75 15 3 75 13…18 223 GV2-ME20 0.260 

9 15 40 11 4 75 18.5 3 75 17…23 327 GV2-ME21 0.260 

11 15 40 15 4 75 – – – 20…25 327 GV2-ME22 (3) 0.260 

15 10 50 18.5 4 75 22 3 75 24…32 416 GV2-ME32 0.260 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers GV2-ME with built-in auxiliary contact block 

With instantaneous auxiliary contact block: 

- GV-AE1, add suffix AE1TQ to the motor circuit breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2-ME01AE1TQ. 

- GV-AE11, add suffix AE11TQ to the motor circuit breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2-ME01AE11TQ. 

- GV-AN11, add suffix AN11TQ to the motor circuit breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2-ME01AN11TQ. 

These motor circuit breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 parts in a single pack. 

(1) As a % of Icu. 

(2) To use GV2-MEs in enclosures, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

(3) For the maximum rating which can be installed in GV2-MC or MP enclosures, please consult your Regional Sales 

Office. 

g > 100 kA. 

4/28

References 0 



4 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers model GV2-ME 

Accessories 


Description Mounting Max. Contact types Sold in Unit Weight 

number lots of. reference kg 

Instantaneous Front 1 N/O or N/C (1) 10 GV-AE1 0.015 

auxiliary N/O + N/C 10 GV-AE11 0.020 

contacts N/O + N/O 10 GV-AE20 0.020 

Side 2 N/O + N/C 1 GV-AN11 0.050 

LH N/O + N/O 1 GV-AN20 0.050 

Fault signalling Side (2) 1 N/O + N/O 1 GV-AD1010 0.055 

contact + LH (fault) + N/C 1 GV-AD1001 0.055 

instantaneous N/C + N/O 1 GV-AD0110 0.055 

auxiliary contact (fault) + N/C 1 GV-AD0101 0.055 

Short-circuit 

signalling Side 1 C/O 1 GV-AM11 0.045 

contact LH common point 

Electric trips 

Mounting Voltage Reference Weight 

kg 

Undervoltage or shunt trip (3) 

Side 24 V 50 Hz GV-Ap025 0.105 

(1 block on 60 Hz GV-Ap026 0.105 

RH side of breaker) 48 V 50 Hz GV-Ap055 0.105 

60 Hz GV-Ap056 0.105 

100 V 50 Hz GV-Ap107 0.105 

100…110 V 60 Hz GV-Ap107 0.105 

110…115 V 50 Hz GV-Ap115 0.105 

60 Hz GV-Ap116 0.105 

120…127 V 50 Hz GV-Ap125 0.105 

127 V 60 Hz GV-Ap115 0.105 

200 V 50 Hz GV-Ap207 0.105 

200 V…220 V 60 Hz GV-Ap207 0.105 

220 V…240 V 50 Hz GV-Ap225 0.105 

60 Hz GV-Ap226 0.105 

380 V…400 V 50 Hz GV-Ap385 0.105 

60 Hz GV-Ap386 0.105 

415 V…440 V 50 Hz GV-Ap415 0.105 

415 V 60 Hz GV-Ap416 0.105 

440 V 60 Hz GV-Ap385 0.105 

480 V 60 Hz GV-Ap415 0.105 

500 V 50 Hz GV-Ap505 0.105 

600 V 60 Hz GV-Ap505 0.105 

4 

INRS voltage minimum (only installed on GV2-ME) 

Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113 

Side 110…115 V 50 Hz GV-AX115 0.110 

(1 block on 60 Hz GV-AX116 0.110 

RH side of breaker 127 V 60 Hz GV-AX115 0.110 

GV2-ME) 220…240 V 50 Hz GV-AX225 0.110 

60 Hz GV-AX226 0.110 

380…400 V 50 Hz GV-AX385 0.110 

60 Hz GV-AX386 0.110 

415…440 V 50 Hz GV-AX415 0.110 

440 V 60 Hz GV-AX385 0.110 

(1) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. 

(2) The GV-AD is always mounted next to the circuit breaker 

(3) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot in the reference with a U, example: GV2-AU025. To order a shunt trip: 

replace the dot in the reference with an S, example: GV2-AS025. 

4/29

0 

4 

4 

GV2-MC 

GV2-V01 

GV2-K04 

GV2-MP 

GV2-K011 

GV2-E01 

GV2-CP 

GV2-SN 

4/30

References 

0 



4 

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers model GV2-ME 

and accessories, assembled by customer 

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers GV2-ME 

Motor-circuit breakers and accessories: see pages 4/28 and 4/29. 

The starter consisting of an enclosed motor circuit-breaker GV2-ME conforms to IEC 947-4-1. 

GV2- ME01 ME02 ME03 ME04 ME05 ME06 ME07 ME08 ME10 ME14 ME16 ME20 ME21 ME22 

Ithe enclosed 

(A)0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 9 13 17 21 23 

Enclosures for thermal-magnetic motor circuit breakers GV2-ME 

Type Degree of protection Possible attachments Reference Weight 

on side of GV2-ME 

Left Right kg 

Surface IP 41 1 1 GV2-MC01 0.290 

mounting 

Double, 

insulated with IP 55 1 1 GV2-MC02 0.300 

protective or GV2-MCK04 (1) 0.420 

conductor. 

Sealable IP 55 for 1 1 GV2-MC03 0.300 

cover temperature < + 5 °C 

Flush IP 41 (front face) 1 1 GV2-MP01 0.115 

mounting IP 41 (reduced flush mounting) – 1 GV2-MP03 0.115 

with protective IP 55 (front face) 1 1 GV2-MP02 0.130 

conductor IP 55 (reduced flush mounting) – 1 GV2-MP04 0.130 

Front plate 

Description Sold in Unit Weight 

lots of reference kg 

4 

For direct control, through a panel IP 55 1 GV2-CP21 0.800 

of a chassis-mounted GV2-ME 

Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately) 

Padlocking device (2) 1 to 3 padlocks 1 GV2-V01 0.075 

for GV2-ME operator (padlocking is only Ø 4 to 8 mm 

possible in “O” position) 

Mushroom Spring return (2) 1 GV2-K011 0.052 

head 

“Stop” Latching (2) Key release 1 GV2-K021 0.160 

pushbutton IP 55 key n° 455 

Ø 40 mm, 

red Turn to 1 GV2-K031 0.115 

release 1 GV2-K04 (3) 0.120 

Sealing kit For enclosures IP 55 10 GV2-E01 0.012 

and front plate IP 55 

for θ

Dimensions, 

mounting 

0 



4 


Surface mounting enclosures GV2-MC0p 

(1) 

(1) 2xØ5,3x6,3 

4 

147 

130 = 

145,5 

84 

93 

= 

= 

= 

147 

130 = 

84 

93 = = 

= 

(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit. 

Surface mounting enclosure GV2-MCK04 

(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit. 

Flush mounting enclosures GV2-MP0p (panel cut-out) 

GV2-MP0p GV2-MP01, MP02 GV2-MP03, MP04 Front plate GV2-CP21 

71 

= 

127 

140 

= = 

9,5 

117 

133 

= = 

62 21 11,5 

118 

133 

12 

1...6 

a 

= 

= 93,5 = 

106,5 

71 

93 

6,5 

12 

1...4 

76 

93 

7,5 

GV2- 

a 

MP01, MP02 – 

MP03, MP04 86 

4/32

Schemes 

0 



4 


GV2-MEpp 

14 

13 

12 11 

14 

13 

22 21 

14 

13 

24 

23 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

Front mounting add-on blocks 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 

GV-AE1 GV-AE11 GV-AE20 

or 

Side mounting add-on blocks 

Fault signalling + instantaneous auxiliary contacts 

GV-AD0110 GV-AD0101 GV-AD1010 GV-AD1001 

4 

E1 

E2 

D2 

C2 

D1 

C1 

D1 

D2 

(62) 

32 

44 

(74) 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

D1 

D2 

(64) 

34 

44 

(74) 

05 

(61) 

31 

43 

(73) 

(63) 

33 

43 

(73) 

08 

06 

96 95 

54 

53 

96 95 

52 51 

98 

97 

54 

53 

98 

97 

52 

51 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 

Short-circuit signalling contacts 

GV-AN11 GV-AN20 GV-AM11 

Undervoltage and shunt trips 

GV-AUppp GV-ASppp GV-AXppp 

Wiring diagram for undervoltage trip used on potentially dangerous machines, conforming to INRS 

10 AgG max. 

E2 

E1 

4/33

References 

0 



4 

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control 

for use on a machine subject to the application 

of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1) 

Non reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation) 

Standard power ratings Circuit breaker Dust & damp protected starter Weight 

of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz Setting range Basic reference. 

in category AC-3 of thermal trips Complete with 

code indicating 

220/ 400/ control circuit 

230 V 415 V 440 V voltage (2) (3) 

kW kW kW A kg 

– 0.06 0.06 0.16…0.25 LG7-K06pp02 1.300 

0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25…0.40 LG7-K06pp03 1.300 

LG7-K06 

– 0.18 0.18 0.40…0.63 LG7-K06pp04 1.300 

0.12 0.25 0.25 0.63…1 LG7-K06pp05 1.300 

0.25 0.55 0.55 1…1.6 LG7-K06pp06 1.300 

0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6…2.5 LG7-K06pp07 1.300 

0.75 1.5 1.5 2.5…4 LG7-K06pp08 1.300 

4 

1.1 2.2 3 4…6.3 LG7-K06pp10 1.300 

1.5 4 4 6…10 LG7-K09pp14 1.450 

3 5.5 5.5 9…14 LG7-D12pp16 1.600 

4 7.5 9 13…18 LG7-D18pp20 1.630 

Specifications 

9 9 17…23 LG7-D18pp21 1.630 

Functions performed by the starter: 

- isolation, 

- locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG7-K09, 

- lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3), 

- short-circuit protection, 

- overload protection, 

- pushbutton control: 1 white Start button “I” and 1 black Stop button “O”, 

- degree of protection of enclosure IP 657, double insulated 

Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. 

AGV2-SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases; for 

other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer. 

LG7-D12 

with padlocking facility 

fitted as standard 

Variants (pre-assembled) 


(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided 

that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. 

Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. 

Conformity to international standards: IEC 947 and IEC 439. 

(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). 

LG7-K 

Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 

50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 

Code J7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7 

LG7-D 

Volts a 24 42 48 110 220/ 230 240 380/ 400 415 440 

50/60 Hz 230 400 

Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 

(3) LG7-K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit breaker. 

LG7-K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is provided by an undervoltage coil, acting on the circuit breaker. This 

coil is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales 

Office. 

Dimensions : 

page 4/38 

4/34 

Schemes : 

page 4/39 


Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. 

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.




4 




Non reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation) 

Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position “I”. 






230 V 415 V voltages (2) 

kW kW kW A kg 

– 0.06 0.06 0.16…0.25 LG1-K065pp02 0.970 

LG1-K 

0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25…0.40 LG1-K065pp03 0.970 

– 0.18 0.18 0.40…0.63 LG1-K065pp04 0.970 

0.12 0.25 0.25 0.63…1 LG1-K065pp05 0.970 

0.25 0.55 0.55 1…1.6 LG1-K065pp06 0.970 

0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6…2.5 LG1-K065pp07 0.970 

0.75 1.5 1.5 2.5…4 LG1-K065pp08 0.970 

1.1 2.2 3 4…6.3 LG1-K065pp10 0.970 

1.5 4 4 6…10 LG1-K095pp14 1.120 

4 

3 5.5 5.5 9…14 LG1-D122pp16 1.270 

4 7.5 9 13…18 LG1-D182pp20 1.290 


9 9 17…23 LG1-D182pp21 1.290 


- isolation, 

- locking of isolation, 

- lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector), 




- degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated, 












LG1-K 

Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 

50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 


LG1-D 

Volts a 24 42 48 110 220/ 230 240 380/ 400 415 440 

50/60 Hz 230 400 

Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 

Dimensions : 

page 4/38 


Schemes : 

page 4/39 



4/35




4 




Reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation) 






230 V 415 V 440 V voltage (2) 

kW kW kW A kg 

– 0.06 0.06 0.16…0.25 LG8-K06pp02 1.640 

0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25…0.40 LG8-K06pp03 1.640 

LG8-K06 

– 0.18 0.18 0.40…0.63 LG8-K06pp04 1.640 

0.12 0.25 0.25 0.63…1 LG8-K06pp05 1.640 

0.25 0.55 0.55 1…1.6 LG8-K06pp06 1.640 

4 

0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6…2.5 LG8-K06pp07 1.640 

0.75 1.5 1.5 2.5…4 LG8-K06pp08 1.640 

1.1 2.2 3 4…6.3 LG8-K06pp10 1.640 

1.5 4 4 6…10 LG8-K09pp14 (3) 1.640 

3 5.5 5.5 9…14 LG8-K12pp16 (3) 1.640 

Specifications of reversing starters 

LG8-K09 

with padlocking facility 

fitted as standard 


- isolation, 

- locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG8-K09, 

- Emergency Stop (3), 



- control by selector switch “1-2”, position non maintained, 

- degree of protection of enclosure IP 657, double insulated. 












Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 

50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 


(3) LG8-K06: The mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit breaker. 

LG8-K09: the Emergency Stop function is provided by an undervoltage coil, acting on the circuit breaker. This coil is 

always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 



Starters for higher power ratings. 


Dimensions : 

page 4/38 

Schemes : 

page 4/39 

4/36




4 




Variants 

Description For use on Suffix to be added 

to starter reference (2) 

With Emergency Stop LG1, LG7, LG8 A04 

No control pushbuttons 

With Emergency Stop LG8-K06 A10 

2 pushbuttons with arrows “A” and“E” 

(latching) 

1Stopbutton“O” 

Without Emergency Stop LG8 A14 

2 pushbuttons with arrows “A” and“E” 

(non latching) 

Without Stop button 

With Emergency Stop, LG1 A37 

mushroom head 

Without Emergency Stop LG7, LG8 A39 

(when the Emergency Stop 

is on the machine) 

With padlocking facility LG1-K06, LG7-K06 A29 

(fitted as standard 

as from LG1-K09 or LG7-K09) 

4 

1 neutral terminal LG1, LG7, LG8 A59 

Fitted as standard on starters ordered 

for use on 240 V (U7) supply 

Short-circuit LG7 A12 

signalling block 

Vacuum valve LG7-D A40 

for compressor 

Without circuit breaker LG1, LG7, LG8 (3) 

Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4) 

Starter type A04 A10 A12 A14 A29 A37 A39 A40 A59 

LG1-K (5) 

LG7-K06 

LG7-K09 

LG7-D12 

LG8-K06 

LG8-K09 

Combination possible 

Combination not possible 





(2) Example: LG7-D12M716A04. 

(3) Delete the last two digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LG1-K065pp08 becomes LG1-K065pp 

(4) Example: LG8-K095ppA04A39A59. 

(5) LG1-K06: The mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit breaker. 

LG1-K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is provided by an undervoltage coil, acting on the circuit breaker. This 

coil is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales 

Office. 

4/37

Dimensions 

0 



4 



of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE 

Starters without isolator 

LG1-K06, K09 

LG1-D12, D18 

LG7-K06, K09, D12, D18 

LG8-K06, K09, K12 

120 

(1) 

(2) 

150 

165 

150 

165 

120 

165 

84 

175 

146 (2) 

177 (1) 

84 

175 

(3) 

4 

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands 

(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW 

Type of enclosure At At (2) Emergency Stop for starters ≥ 3kW 

top bottom (3) Only for LG7 

LG1-K and LG1-D 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 

LG7-K and LG7-D 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 

LG8-K 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 

References : 

pages 4/34 to 4/37 

Schemes : 

page 4/39 

4/38

Schemes 

0 



4 




D.O.L. starters 

LG1-K06, K09, D12, D18 

L3/L1 

L2/L2 

L1/L3 

LG1-K06, K09, D12, D18 

380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 

220/230 V, code M7 

– Q1 

Ph 

T3 

4 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

– Q1 

2 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

– Q1 

– KM1 – KM2 

1 

3 

5 

1 

3 

5 

1 

3 

5 

1 

T2 

3 

T1 

5 

KM1/1 

– Q2 

13 

– KM1 

– S1 

13 

2 

4 

6 

– S2 

1 

– KM1 

2 

4 

6 

A2 

3 

5 

12 

11 

14 

U1 

V1 

W1 

14 

– KM1 

KM1/5 

A1 

N 

LG7-K06 LG7-K09, D12, D18 LG7-K06, K09, D12, D18 


220/230 V, code M7 

Ph 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

D1 

D2 

KM1/1 

– Q1 

13 

– KM1 

– S1 

13 

– F1 

4 

6 

2 

4 

6 

E1 

E2 

– S2 

– KM1 

– KM1 

2 

U1 

4 

V1 

6 

W1 

Ph 

1/L1 

KM2/5 

– S1 

11 

2 

4 

6 

21 

12 

– KM2 

– KM1 

22 

2 

4 

6 

2 

4 

6 

– S2 

1 0 

13 

14 

54 

– KM1 

53 

– KM2 

A1 

A1 

E1 

E2 

22 

21 

2 

4 

6 

A2 

U1 

V1 

W1 

1 

3 

5 

12 

11 

3/L2 

5/L3 

14 

D1 

14 

– KM1 

D2 

2 

4 

6 

KM1/5 

A1 

N 

Reversing starters 

LG8-K06 LG8-K09, K12 LG8-K06, K09, K12 


220/230 V, code M7 

– Q1 

– KM1 – KM2 

1 

3 

5 

1 

3 

5 

2 

4 

6 

2 

4 

6 

– S2 

0 2 

13 

14 

54 

53 

U 

V 

W 

U 

V 

W 

– KM1 

– KM2 

KM2/1 

N 

A2 

A2 

References : 

pages 4/34 to 4/37 

Dimensions : 

page 4/38 

4/39

References 

0 



4 




Non reversing starters with integral transformer 

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that 

the installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. 



LJ7-K 

Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply 

(with pushbutton control of isolator function) 

Standard power ratings of Circuit breaker Starter: IP 657 Weight 

3-phase motors 50 Hz Setting range Reference (2) 

in category AC-3 

of thermal 

380/ trips 

400 V 

kW A kg 

0.06 0.16…0.25 LJ7-K06Q702 2.270 

0.09 0.25…0.40 LJ7-K06Q703 2.270 

0.18 0.40…0.63 LJ7-K06Q704 2.270 

4 

0.25 0.63…1 LJ7-K06Q705 2.270 

0.55 1…1,6 LJ7-K06Q706 2.270 

0.75 1.6…2.5 LJ7-K06Q707 2.270 

1.5 2.5…4 LJ7-K06Q708 2.270 

2.2 4…6.3 LJ7-K06Q710 2.270 

4 6…10 LJ7-K09Q714 2.270 



- isolation, 

- interlocking of isolator function fitted as standard on LJ7-K09, 





- terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, 

- degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated 

Reconnection of the power supply after a break must be by means of a deliberate action. 

AGV2-SNpp pilot light may be fitted; for customer assembly, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA. 

Variants (3) 



With Emergency Stop function LJ7 A04 

No pushbuttons 

Without Emergency Stop Function LJ7 A39 

(when Emergency Stop is on the machine) 

With padlocking facility LJ7-K06 A29 

(fitted as standard on LJ7-K09) 

Without circuit breaker LJ7 (5) 

(1) LJ7-K06 (P ≤ 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head Emergency Stop button acts mechanically on the circuit breaker. 

LJ7-K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV2-AX385, acting on 

the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is automatically supplied pre-wired for use on a 380/400 V 50 Hz supply. 

(2) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be 

connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). 

(3) Possible combinations of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ7-K06. Example: LJ7-K06Q702A04A29A39. 

Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7-K09Q714A04A39. 

(4) Example: LJ7-K06Q702A04. 

(5) Delete the last 2 figures of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ7-K06Q702 becomes LJ7-K06Q7. 

Dimensions : 

page 4/42 

4/40 

Schemes : 

page 4/43 



Please consult your Regional Sales Office.




4 




Reversing starters with integral transformer 

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the the corresponding directive, provided 

that the installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. 



LJ8-K 

Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply 

(with pushbutton control of isolator function) 

Standard power ratings of Circuit breaker Starter: IP 657 Weight 

3-phase motors 50 Hz Setting range Reference (2) 

in category AC-3 

of thermal 

380/ trips 

400 V 

kW A kg 

0.06 0.16…0.25 LJ8-K06Q702 2.650 

0.09 0.25…0.40 LJ8-K06Q703 2.650 

0.18 0.40…0.63 LJ8-K06Q704 2.650 

0.25 0.63…1 LJ8-K06Q705 2.650 

0.55 1…1,6 LJ8-K06Q706 2.650 

0.75 1.6…2.5 LJ8-K06Q707 2.650 

4 

1.5 2.5…4 LJ8-K06Q708 2.650 

2.2 4…6.3 LJ8-K06Q710 2.650 

4 6…10 LJ8-K09Q714 2.650 



- isolation, 

- interlocking of isolator function fitted as standard on LJ8-K09, 





- terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, 

- degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated 

Reconnection of the power supply after a break must be by means of a deliberate action. 

AGV2-SNpp pilot light may be fitted; for customer assembly, please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA. 

Variants (3) 



With Emergency Stop function LJ8 A04 

No pushbuttons 

Without Emergency Stop Function LJ8 A39 

(when Emergency Stop is on the machine) 

With padlocking facility LJ8-K06 A29 

(fitted as standard on LJ8-K09) 

Without circuit breaker LJ8 (5) 

(1) LJ8-K06 (P ≤ 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head Emergency Stop button acts mechanically on the circuit breaker. 

LJ8-K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV2-AX385, acting 

on the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is automatically supplied pre-wired for use on a 380/400 V 50 Hz supply. 

(2) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be 

connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). 

(3) Possible combinations of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ8-K06. Example: LJ8-K06Q702A04A29A39. 

Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ8-K09. Example: LJ8-K09Q714A04A39. 

(4) Example: LJ8-K06Q702A04. 

(5) Delete the last 2 figures of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ8-K06Q702 becomes LJ8-K06Q7. 




Dimensions : 

page 4/42 

Schemes : 

page 4/43 

4/41

Dimensions 

0 



4 




LJ7-K06, LJ8-K06 

120 

177 

84 

175 

4 

120 

150 

165 

150 

165 

LJ7-K09, LJ8-K09 

146 

84 

175 

Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P. 

References : 


4/42

Schemes 

0 



4 


for use in a machine subject to the application 


Non reversing starters 

LJ7-K06 

LJ7-K09 

– Q1 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

1 

– F1 4 A 

2 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

D1 

D2 

1 

– F1 4 A 

2 

– KM1 

U1 

V1 

1 

3 

2 

4 

2 

4 

W1 6 5 6 

– KM1/5 – KM1/1 

– T1 

400/24 V 

25 VA 

– S2 

– X1 

2 

13 1 

– KM1 – S1 

12 11 14 

13 

14 

– Q1 

– KM1 

U1 

V1 

2 

4 

1 

3 

2 

4 

W1 6 5 6 

– F1 

E1 

E2 

– KM1/5 – KM1/1 

– T1 

400/24 V 

25 VA 

– S2 

– X1 

2 

13 1 

– KM1 – S1 

12 11 14 

13 

14 

– KM1 

A1 

A2 

M 

3 

– KM1 

A1 

A2 

Reversing starters 

LJ8-K06 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

2 

– F1 

– S1 

11 

4 

12 

– S2 

1 0 

24 23 

21 

– KM2 

54 22 

– KM1 

53 

– S2 

0 2 

– KM2 

– KM1 

A1 

– KM2 

A2 

A2 

1 

– Q1 

2 

1 

4 

3 

6 

5 

1 

3 

5 

– KM2/1 – KM2/5 

– T1 

400/24 V 

25 VA 

14 13 

21 

– KM1 

54 22 

53 

– KM1 – KM2 

A1 

– F1 

– S1 

11 

– S2 

1 0 

24 23 

21 12 

– KM2 

54 22 

– KM1 

53 

– S2 

0 2 

– KM2 

A1 

– KM1 

– KM2 

A2 

A2 

A1 

2 

U 

V 

W 

2 

4 

6 

2 

4 

6 

LJ8-K09 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

– Q1 

1 

3 

5 

1 

3 

5 

E1 

– KM1 – KM2 

– KM2/1 – KM2/5 

– T1 

1 

400/24 V 

25 VA 

14 13 

21 

– KM1 

54 22 

U 

V 

53 

W 

2 

4 

6 

D1 

2 

4 

6 

D2 

2 

4 

6 

E2 

References : 


4/43


0 



4 

Contactors 

From6to20A 

Applications 

Simple automation systems 


Ie maxi AC-3 (Ue ≤ 440 V) 6A 9A 

Ie AC-1 (θ ≤ 40 °C) – 20 A 

4 

Rated operational voltage 

690 V 

Number of poles 3 3or4 

Rated 220/240 V 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 

operational 

power in 380/400 V 2.2 kW 4kW 

category 

AC-3 415/440 V 2.2/3 kW 4kW 

500 V 3kW 4kW 

660/690 V 3kW 4kW 

1000 V – – 

Add-on Front Up to 4 N/C or N/O 

auxiliary 

contact Side – 

blocks 

Front time delay 

1N/C 

Front dust and damp 

protected – 

Associated manual-auto thermal 

overload Class 10 A 0.11…16 A 

relays Class 20 A – 

Suppressor modules 

Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit 

Contactor type 

references 

a 

LC1 or LC7-K06 


c LP1-K06 LP1-K09 

Reversing contactor a 



with mechanical 

interlock type 

reference 

c LP2-K06 LP2-K09 

Pages 

Please consult our catalogue “Motor starter solutions”. 

4/44

0 

4 

l 

12 A 16 A 

– – 

3or4 

3or4 

4 

3kW 

3kW 

5.5 kW 7.5 kW 

5.5 kW 7.5 kW 

4kW 

4kW 

5.5 kW 

4kW 

– – 


LC1-K16 

LP1-K12 – 


LC2-K16 

LP2-K12 – 

4/45


0 



4 

TeySys contactors 

From9to200A 

Applications 

All types of control system 


le max AC-3 (Ue ≤ 440 V) 9A 12 A 18 A 25 A 32 A 38 A 

Ie AC-1 (θ ≤60 °C) 20/25 A 25/32 A 25/40 A 50 A 

4 

Rated operational voltage 

690 V 

Number of poles 3or4 3or4 3or4 3or4 3 

Rated 220/240 V 2.2 kW 3kW 4kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9kW 

operational 380/400 V 4kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 

power 415/440 V 4kW 5.5 kW 9kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 

in AC-3 500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 

660/690 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 

1000 V – – – – – – 

Auxiliary contacts 

1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole 

Compatible manual-auto thermal 

overload relays Class 10 A 0.10…10 A 0.10…13 A 0.10…18 A 0.10…32 A 0.10…38 A 0.10…38 A 

Class 20 2.5…10 A 2.5…13 A 2.5…18 A 2.5…32 A – 

Suppressor modules 

(d.c. and low Varistor p p p p p p 

consumption Diode – – – – – – 

contactors have RC circuit p p p p p p 

built-in suppress- Bidirectional peak p p p p p p 

ion as standard) limiting diode 

Interfaces Relay p p p p p p 

Relay + override function p p p p p p 

Solid state p p p p p p 

Contactor 

type references 

Reversing 

contactor 


a or c 3-pole 

a 4-pole 

c 4-pole 

a 3-pole 

c 3-pole 

a 4-pole 

c 4-pole 

LC1-D09 LC1-D12 LC1-D18 LC1-D25 LC1-D32 LC1-D38 

LC1-DT20/ LC1-DT25/ LC1-DT32/ LC1-DT40/ – – 

LC1-D098 LC1-D128 LC1-D188 LC1-D258 – – 



LC2-DT20 LC2-DT25 LC2-DT32 LC2-DT40 – – 

LC2-DT20 LC2-DT25 LC2-DT32 LC2-DT40 – – 

Pages Contactors Please consult our catalogue “Motor starter solutions” 

Reversing contactors 

4/46

0 

4 

40 A 50 A 65 A 80 A 95 A 115 A 150 A 

60 A 80 A 125 A 200 A 

1000 V on a supply, 690 V on c supply 

3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 

4 

11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25 kW 30 kW 40 kW 

18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW 

22 kW 25/30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 45 kW 59 kW 80 kW 

22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 55 kW 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW 



range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals 

17…50 A 17…70 A 17…80 A 17…104 A 17…104 A 60…150 A 60…150 A 

17…40 A 17…65 A 17…70 A 17…80 A 60…150 A 60…150 A 

p p p p p p p p p p – 

p p p p p p p p – – – 

p p p p p p p p p p p 

p p p p p p p p – – – 



p p p p p p p p p p – 

LC1-D40 LC1-D50 LC1-D65 LC1-D80 LC1-D95 LC1-D115 LC1-D150 

LC1-D40 – LC1-D65 LC1-D80 – LC1-D115 – 

LP1-D40 – LP1-D65 LP1-D80 – LC1-D115 – 

LC2-D40 LC2-D50 LC2-D65 LC2-D80 LC2-D95 LC2-D115 LC2-D150 

– – – – – – – 

LC2-D40 – LC2-D65 LC2-D80 – LC2-D115 – 

– – – – – – – 

4/47


0 



4 

Contactors 

From 115 to 2750 A 

Applications 

Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications 

Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits: heating, lighting, power factor correction, transformers, 

normal-standby 


current Ie max AC-3 115 A 150 A 185 A 225 A 265 A 330 A 

(Ue ≤ 440 V) 

4 

Ie max AC-1 200 A 250 A 275 A 315 A 350 A 400 A 

(θ ≤40 °C) 


voltage 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 

Number of poles 3or4 3or4 3or4 3or4 3or4 3or4 


power 220/240 V 30 kW 40 kW 55 kW 63 kW 75 kW 100 kW 

in AC-3 

380/400 V 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 132 kW 160 kW 

415 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 180 kW 



660/690 V 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 220 kW 


Add-on auxiliary 

contact blocks 

Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1-D contactors 

(contacts: instantaneous LA1-DNpp, time delay LA2-DT or LA3-DR, dust and damp protected LA1-DX or DY or DZ) 

Associated thermal 

overload relays 

Manual-auto. 

Electronic 

LR9-F 

LT6 

Interface 

Specific 

Universal 

LA4-FWB 

With or without, depending on the control circuit 

Contactor type 

references 

LC1-F115 LC1-F150 LC1-F185 LC1-F225 LC1-F265 LC1-F330 

Reversing contactor 


LC2-F115 LC2-F150 LC2-F185 LC2-F225 LC2-F265 

For customer 

assembly 

Pages 

Please consult our catalogue “Motor starter solutions”. 

4/48

0 

4 

400 A 500 A 630 A 780 A 800 A 750 A 1000 A 1500 A 1800 A 

500 A 700 A 1000 A 1600 A 1000 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A 

4 

1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 

2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 3or4 3 1to4 1to4 1to4 1to4 

110 kW 147 kW 200 KW 220 kW 250 kW 220 kW 280 kW 425 kW 500 kW 

200 kW 250 kW 335 kW 400 kW 450 kW 400 kW 500 kW 750 kW 900 kW 






4 instantaneous contact compositions: 

2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O 

LR9-F 

LT6 

LC1-F400 LC1-F500 LC1-F630 LC1-F780 LC1-F800 LC1-BL LC1-BM LC1-BP LC1-BR 

– 

– 

For customer assembly 

4/49

3 - 

5 

5/0

Contents 

5-General 

b Industrial accidents: the hard facts ............................. page 5/2 

b Safe operation: a global concept ............................... page 5/3 

b Hazards, dangerous phenomena .............................. page 5/4 

b Danger zones: definitions, examples. ........................... page 5/5 

b Machine safety ............................................ page 5/6 

b Categories of parts of control systems relating to safety ............ page 5/8 

b Risk evaluation ........................................... page 5/10 

b Examples of safety power circuits ............................ page 5/12 

b Examples of typical applications .............................. page 5/14 

b The Machinery Directive .................................... page 5/16 

b The Health and Safety Directive .............................. page 5/18 

b European standards ....................................... page 5/20 

b Dangerous machines and safety components ................... page 5/23 

b Safety techniques ......................................... page 5/24 

b Electrical hazards .......................................... page 5/28 

5 

5/1

5 


solutions using Preventa 5 

Industrial accidents: the hard facts 

Industrial accidents 

What is an 

industrial 

accident? 

An industrial accident causes minor to serious injury, arising through work or whilst at a 

place of work, to a person operating or having to carry out work on a machine (fitter, 

operator, maintenance worker...). 

Factors: causes 

of accidents in 

the workplace 

Man-related factors (designers, users) 

b Poor grasp of machine design. 

b Over-familiarity with danger through habit and failure to take dangerous situations 

seriously. 

b Underestimation of hazards, causing people to ignore safety guards. 

b Relaxed attention to supervisory tasks (fatigue). 

b Failure to comply with procedures. 

b Increased stress (noise, work rates, …). 

b Uncertainty of employment which can lead to inadequate training. 

b Inadequate or bad maintenance, generating unsuspected hazards. 

Machine-related factors 

b Inadequate guards. 

b Sophisticated nature of control and supervisory systems. 

b Inherent machine hazards (reciprocal motion of a machine, sudden starting, 

precarious stopping). 

b Machines not suited to the application or environment (audible alarms deadened by 

the noise of surrounding machinery). 

Plant-related factors 

5 

Consequences 

b Movement of personnel (automated production line). 

b Machinery from different sources and using different technologies. 

b Flow of materials or products between machines. 

b Physical danger to the user (in varying degrees). 

b Production stoppage of the machine involved. 

b Stoppage of similar machine installations for inspection, for example by the Health 

and Safety Inspectorate. 

b Modifications to make machines comply with regulations, if necessary. 

b Change of personnel and training new personnel for the job. 

b Risk of industrial action. 

b Damage to the company brand image. 

Costs 

Direct costs 

b Damages for physical injuries: equivalent to about 20 thousand million Euro's paid 

out each year in the European Union. 

b Increase in the company's insurance premiums. 

Indirect costs 

b Penalties and compensation, cost of bringing up to standard. 

b Lost production and even lost customers. 

Conclusions 

Decisive action is required to reduce the number of accidents in the workplace.The first 

essentials are adequate company policies and strategies. 

This is necessary for: 

- moral reasons (to reduce the number of industrial accidents), 

- economic reasons (cost of industrial accidents), 

- legal reasons (to comply with European legislation). 

Reducing the number of industrial accidents and injuries depends on the safety of 

machines and equipment. 

Safety must be taken into account right from the design stage and must be 

kept in mind at all stages in the life of a machine: manufacture, installation, 

adjustment, operation, maintenance, etc. 

5/2

5 



Safe operation: a global concept 

Safe operation: 

a global concept 

Design and 

production 

Installation and 

implementation 

Operation 

Maintenance 

5 

Safe operation 

involves two 

main concepts: 

safety and 

reliability of 

operation 


The ability of a device to limit, to an acceptable level, the risks incurred by 

persons. 

Reliability of operation 

The ability of a system or device to perform its function at any given moment in 

time or for a specified duration (reliability, ease of maintenance, ...). 

5/3

5 



Hazards, dangerous phenomena 

Hazards 

Capable of causing injury or 

damaging health 

Mechanical 

hazards 

Puncturing, stabbing, shearing, 

severing, cutting 

Catching, wrapping, drawing in, 

trapping 

5 

Impact 

Crushing 

Electrical 

hazards 

1 2 3 N 

Electrocution 

Physico-chemical 

hazards 

Discharge of dangerous 

substances 

Burns 

5/4

5 



Danger zones: definitions, examples 

Danger zones: 

definitions 

Danger zone 

Exposed person 

Safety distance 

Danger zone 

Safety distance 

Any space inside and/or around a machine in which a person is 

exposed to the risk of injury. 

Access to the danger zone may be necessary for: 

- adjustment, 

- changing a manufacturing process (programming), 

- learning (training), 

- cleaning, 

- maintenance, 

- normal operation. 

The minimum distance at which a safety guard must be placed in relation to 

the danger zone to prevent entry into this zone. 

5 

Exposed person 

Person fully or partially in a danger zone. 

Danger zones: 

examples 

8 

3 

1 2 

5 7 6 4 

8 

1 Mould zone 

2 Moving injection unit zone and in 

particular nozzle zone 

3 Closing mechanism zone 

4 Feed zone movement zone 

5 Core and ejector (if any) 

movement zone 

6 Plasticizing cylinder heating ring 

zone 

7 Parts clearing zone 

8 Hydraulic circuit zone (pressure 

side) 

Horizontal injection moulding machine 

1 

2 

3 

1 

1 Tool zone: between the tools, piston 

and slide (hazard: crushing, 

shearing, impact) 

2 Associated zones: moving pads, 

part ejectors (hazard: impact, 

catching) 

3 Hydraulic circuit zone (hazard: 

ejection of fluid under pressure, 

burns) 

Hydraulic press 

Mechanical press 

5/5

5 



Machine safety: 

risk evaluation conforming to EN 1050 

Risk evaluation Objective b To reduce or eliminate the risk 

b To choose an adequate level of safety 

b To ensure protection of personnel 

Stages 

b Familiarity with the machine environment and application 

b Overall evaluation of the risk 

b Reduction of the risk (does not form part of risk evaluation) 

Stage 1 

Familiarity with the 

machine environment 

and application 

Level of training 

and experience of 

operatives 

From design ... 

to maintenance 

5 

Identification of 

dangerous 

phenomena 

Mechanical hazards 

Electrical hazards 

Operating phases 

b Design, production 

b Transport, assembly 

b Adjustment, implementation 

b Operation 

b Maintenance 

b Disassembly 


components not 

suitable for 

safety circuits 

Contact A 

open 

Contact B 

closed 

Contact with non positive opening 

operation 

Non mechanically linked contacts and 

relays 


component failures 

affecting safety 

Contact A 

closes 

Contact B 

welded 

Broken spring, welded contacts: 

the machine continues to operate 

Non mechanically linked contacts: 


5/6

5 



Machine safety: 

risk evaluation conforming to EN 1050 

and risk reduction conforming to EN 292 

Stage 2 

Overall evaluation 

of the risk 

(conforming to EN 1050) 

Factors affecting 

the risk to be 

taken into 

consideration 

b Seriousness of possible injury (consequence of the risk) 

b Duration and frequency of exposure to risk in the danger zone 

b Probability of the risk occurring 

b Possibility of overriding safety measures 

The risk associated with a specific safety measure depends on the ease with 

which this measure can be overridden or evaded to gain unauthorised access. 

The temptation to override a safety measure is increased by the following 

factors: 

- if the safety measure slows down production or interferes with any of the users' 

other activities or preferences, 

- if the safety measure is difficult to implement, 

- if persons other than the operator are involved, 

- if the safety measures are not recognised as such. 

b Reliability of safety functions 

Risk evaluation must take into account the reliability of the components and 

principles used. 

The evaluation must identify the circumstances which could lead to injury (for 

example: failure of a component, mains power failure, electrical interference, 

…). 

b Method of operating the machine 

b Complexity of dangerous situations 

Overall evaluation of the risk is the result of balanced consideration of all the 

above factors. 

Stage 3 

Reduction of the risk 

(conforming to EN 292) 

Eliminating 

the risk 

Whenever possible (objective: “0” accident and “0” breakdown). 

Only intrinsic accident prevention allows total elimination of the risk. 

5 

Reducing 

the risk 

Objective: to make the risk “acceptable” when impossible to eliminate it. 

Individual and collective protection, safety measures. 

General procedure 

for accident 

prevention 

Evaluating 

the risk 

(conforming to 

EN 1050) 

Start 

Risk analysis 

• determination of machine 

limits (article 5) 

• identification of dangerous 

phenomena (article 6) 

• estimation of risk (article 7) 

Risk evaluation 

Risk 

adequately 

reduced? 

Yes 

End 

No 

Risk reduction 

(intrinsic prevention, protection, instructions for application) 

article 5 of EN 292 

From intrinsic prevention to protection 

5/7

5 



Categories of parts of control systems relating to 

safety conforming to EN 954-1 

Preparation of a safety 

circuit 

The main aim of the designer is to ensure that a dangerous situation cannot be created on the machine by the failure 

of parts of a control system relating to safety or by external factors. 

The chart below makes it possible to determine the categories of parts of control systems. 

Categories Basic safety principle Control system 

requirements 

Behaviour in the 

event of a fault 

B 

Selection of components 

that conform 

to relevant standards 

Control in accordance 

with good correct 

practice. 

Possible loss of safety 

function. 

1 Selection of 

components and basic 

safety principles 

Use of tried and tested 

components and proven 

safety principles. 

Possible loss of safety 

function, but with less 

probability of this than 

with B. 

5 

2 Selection of 

components and basic 

safety principles 

Cycle testing. The test 

intervals must be suited 

to the machine and its 

applications. 

Fault detected at each 

test. 

3 Structure of the safety 

circuits 

A single fault must not 

cause loss of the safety 

function. 

This single fault must be 

detected if reasonably 

practicable. 

Safety function ensured, 

except in the event of an 

accumulation of faults. 

4 Structure of the safety 

circuits 

A single fault must not 

cause loss of the safety 

function. 

This fault must be 

detected at or before the 

next call on the safety 

function. 

An accumulation of faults 

must not cause loss of 

the safety function. 

Safety function always 

ensured. 

5/8

5 

5 

The more the components relating to safety in a control system are required to reduce the risk, the higher the level of safety of these components 

must be. Comments: 

b Self-monitoring is one of the methods which can be used to create a category 2 control system. 

b Redundancy is one of the methods which can be used to create a category 3 control system. 

b The combination of redundancy and self-monitoring is one of the methods which can be used to create a category 4 control system. 

b Redundancy and self-monitoring are described in detail on page 5/26. 

b It is recommended that the N/C auxiliary contacts 21-22 , present on K and D range contactors, be used in the feedback loop of the safety modules. 

These auxiliary contacts are in fact mechanically linked with the power contacts of the contactor and consistency of state is guaranteed in the event of welding 

(see coordination of protective devices, page 5/27) of the power poles following a short-circuit. 

Typical structure of a safety circuit in the 

event of a fault 

Practical examples of safety circuits 

Comments 

– – – 

Input 

b No redundancy on the 

input (control). 

Processing 

unit 

b No internal 

redundancy provided 

by the relay with 

mechanically linked 

contacts. 

Output 

b No redundancy on the 

output. 

Input 

Inputs 

KM1 

b Redundancy or no 

redundancy on the 

inputs. 

5 

Processing 

unit 

Output 

Periodic 

check 

Safety circuit 

processing 

KM1 

KM1 

Periodic test 

b The feedback loop 

allows a cyclic test to 

be carried out on the 

output (interval to be 

determined according 

to the application). 

Input 1 

Input 2 

Inputs 1 and 2 

1 2 

b Redundancy on the 

inputs. 

Processing 

unit 1 

Processing 

unit 2 

Safety circuit 

processing 

KM1 

KM2 


outputs. 

Output 1 

Output 2 

KM2 

KM1 

Dangerous movement 

Input 1 

Processing 

unit 1 

Output 1 

Input 2 

Processing 

unit 2 

Output 2 

Inputs 1 and 2 

1 2 

KM1 KM2 

Preventa 

safety 

module 

KM2 

KM1 

KM1 

KM2 

Periodic 

test 

Dangerous movement 


inputs. 


outputs. 

b The feedback loop 

allows a cyclic test to 

be carried out on the 

outputs. 

5/9

5 



Risk evaluation, selection of control system 

category 

Example based on standards EN 1050 and EN 954-1 

Table linking risks and 

recommended 

categories 

(Table attached as appendix to 

standard EN 954-1) 

Practical method for recommending a category for components in a control system according to previously estimated 

factors: S, F, P. 

S 

Result of the accident 

S1 

Slight injury 

Categories 

S2 

Serious and permanent injury to 

or death of the person 

S1 

B 1 2 3 4 

F 

F1 

F2 

P 

Presence in the danger zone 

Rare to fairly frequent 

Frequent to permanent 

Possibility of preventing the 

accident 

S2 

F1 

F2 

P1 

P2 

P1 

P2 

P1 

P2 

Possible in certain 

circumstances 

Virtually impossible 

Preferred category 

Measures exceeding min. requirements for risk involved 

Possible category requiring additional measures 

5 

Example based 

on standards 

EN 1050 and EN 954-1 

Practical method for: 

b determining the risks levels of a machine according to previously estimated factors: S, F, P, 

b selecting an appropriate control system category (categories B, 1, 2, 3 or 4). 

S 

Result of the accident 

S2 

F 

F2 

Serious and permanent injury 

Presence in the danger zone 

Frequent to permanent 

S1 

Categories 

B 1 2 3 4 

P 

P2 

Possibility of preventing the 

accident 

Virtually impossible 

S2 

F1 

F2 

P1 

P2 

P1 

P2 

Risque evaluation leads to selection of a category 4 control 

system (see table on page 5/8). 

5/10

5 



Selection of type of protection, conforming to 

standard EN 292 

Differents types of 

protection 

The application of standard EN 292 may lead to the selection of: 

- individual type protection 

(for example, two-hand control), 

-orcollective type protection 

(for example, safety light curtain). 

Individual 

protection device 

Example: use of a two-hand control station 

5 

Collective 

protection device 

Example: use of a safety light curtain 

Access to the danger zone round the machine is denied to all persons 

approaching it, and not just the operator. 

5/11

5 



Practical examples of safety power circuits 

according to machine categories and application 

requirements 

Single-motor starters Categories B, 1 and 2 

1 circuit breaker + 1 contactor 

Categories 3 and 4 

5 

A2 

T1/2 

T2/4 

T3/6 

A1 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

A1 

A2 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

A2 

T1/2 

T2/4 

T3/6 

A1 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

1 integral contactor breaker 

Multiple-motor starters Categories 3 and 4 

– KM1 

– KM1 

– KM2 

To Preventa 

module 

feedback 

loop 

– KM2 

M1 M2 

2 line contactors in redundant mode 

5/12

5 

5 

OR 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

OR 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

A1 

A2 

– Q1 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

2 

4 

6 

– KM1 

U2 

V2 

W2 

U1 

V1 

W1 

1 

3 

5 

2 

4 

1 

3 

5 

– KM1 

6 

2 

4 

1 

3 

5 

–KM3 

2 

4 

6 

6 

1 

3 

5 

M1 

3 

– F1 

2 

4 

6 

1 integral contactor breaker 1 circuit breaker + 1 star delta starter 

OR 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

OR 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

– Q1 

A1 

2/T1 

1/L1 

4/T2 

3/L2 

6/T3 

5/L3 

– KM1 

1 

3 

2 

4 

5 6 

1 

–KM3 

3 

5 

1 

3 

5 

– KM1 

5 

A2 

A1 

T1/2 

1/L1 

T2/4 

3/L2 

T3/6 

5/L3 

U1 

V1 

M1 

3 

W1 

– F1 

A2 

T1/2 

1 

3 

T2/4 

T3/6 

U2 

V2 

W2 

2 

4 

6 

2 

4 

5 

2 

4 

6 

2 

6 

4 

6 

1 circuit breaker + 2 contactors in series 1 circuit breaker + 1 star delta starter (1) 

OR 

– KM 

– KM To Preventa 

module 

– KM1 feedback 

loop 

– KM2 

OR 

– KM1 

– KM11 

– KM2 

To Preventa 

module 

feedback 

loop 

– KM22 

– KM1 

– KM2 

– KM1 – KM2 

– KM11 

– KM22 

M1 M2 

M1 M2 

1 line contactor and 1 subsidiary contactor in redundant mode 2 subsidiary contactors in redundant mode 

(1) For this type of starting, redundancy does not require the installation of an additional contactor because: 

- there are already, in principle, 2 contactors in series, 

- the 3 contactors are of identical rating, 

- protection has been selected so as to achieve type 2 coordination. 

5/13

5 



Examples of typical applications 

Emergency Stop 

Monitoring 

(Example of Emergency Stop 

function in category 3 conforming 

to EN 954-1) 

L (+) 

F1 

S1 

K3 

KM1 

KM1 

K3 

Start 

S2 

KM2 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

K3 

N (–) 

KM2 

KM2 

M1 

3 

Motor control 

(Example of heterogeneous 

redundancy for a safety Stop in an 

application with several motors and 

one PLC) 

L (+) 

F1 

S1 

KM1 

K1 

+ 24 V 

F2 

S3 

S4 

K2 

5 

K3 

A1 S11 B1 S12 S21 S22 S31 S32 Y1 Y2 13 23 Y34 Y34 

XPS-ASF 

Inputs 

1 

2 3 

4 

5 A1 

PLC 

S2 

Start 

N (–) 

A2 

PE S33/S41 S42 Y3 Y4 S34 14 

KM1 

24 Y33/Y43 

0 V 

Outputs 

1 2 3 4 5 A2 

K1 K2 K3 

PE 

KM1 

Q1 

Q2 

Q3 

K1 

K2 

K3 

M1 

3 

M2 

3 

M3 

3 

5/14

5 



Examples of typical applications 

Control with variable 

speed controller 

(Example of safety circuit 

combining an Emergency stop 

module controlled conforming to 

standard EN 418 (category 1) and a 

variable speed drive) 

L1 

L2 

L3 

F1 

F2 

T1 

F3 

+ 24 V 

(–) (+) 

S1 

A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 13 23 33 41 57 67 

Q1 

ATV 

XPS-AT 

0…30 s 

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 

FW 

RV 

A2 PE S33 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 14 24 34 42 58 68 

KM1 

R1 

K1 

(1) 

PLC 

S2 

K2 

KM2 

K1 

K2 

KM1 

KM2 

KM1 

U 

V 

W 

M1 

3 

PE 

KM2 


S1: Emergency Stop button with 2 N/C contacts (recommended application) 

5 

5/15

5 



Obligations of the machine manufacturer: 

the Machinery Directive 

Requirements of the Machinery Directive 

Machinery Directive: 

98/37/CE 

The machine 

manufacturer is obliged 

to conform to the 

Machinery Directive 

The main purpose of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE is to guarantee a 

minimum safety level for machinery and equipment sold on the European 

Community market. 

The harmonised European safety standards (see page 5/20) establish 

technical specifications which comply with the minimum safety 

requirements defined in the corresponding directive. 

Requirements of the 

Machinery Directive 

All manufacturers must 

produce safe machines, 

complying with safety 

requirements 

b General machines 

The manufacturer affixes the e mark and prepares a self-certification 

dossier for his machine. 

Compliance with European standards harmonised with the Machinery 

Directive is a method for establishing conformity with the directive. 

Example : harmonised standard EN 418 for Emergency stop functions. 

b Dangerous machines and safety components (appendix IV of the 

Machinery Directive) 

The manufacturer must have his machine and/or the safety 

components listed in appendix IV of the Machinery Directive certified by 

a third party before he can affix the e mark. 

The authorised body (see page 5/20) will refer to the harmonised 

standards when issuing its type approval certificate. 

5 

The Machinery Directive 

as applicable to 

manufacturers 

The law 

As from January 1995, anyone marketing machinery or equipment on the 

European Community market must guarantee conformity with the 

directives. Since January 1997, this requirement has applied to the safety 

components defined in Appendix IV. 

Countries 

The Machinery Directive applies in all European Community countries. 

Machinery and safety 

components 

New machines: sale, hire, loan, transfer. 

Used machines: sale, hire, loan, transfer. 

5/16

5 



Obligations of the machine manufacturer: 

the Machinery Directive 

Examples of reference standards 

5 

Examples of reference 

standards 

These standards give 

presumed conformity 

with the minimum 

requirements of the 

Machinery Directive. 

Basic notions 

General 

design 

principles 

EN 292 

Locking 

devices 

associated 

with guards 

EN 1088 

Risk 

evaluation 

EN 1050 


distances 

to prevent 

upper limbs 

from 

entering 

danger zones 

EN 294 

Electrical 

equipment 

in industrial 

machines 

EN 60204-1 


distances 

to prevent 

lower limbs 

from 

entering 

danger zones 

EN 811 

Emergency 

Stop 

devices 

Functional 

aspects 

EN 418 

Minimum 

distances 

to prevent 

crushing 

EN 349 

Prevention 

of sudden 

starting 

EN 1037 

Approach 

speed of 

parts of 

the human 

body 

EN 999 

Two-hand 

control 

stations 

EN 574 

Electrosensitive 

protection 

devices 

EN 6149 

Parts of 

control 

systems 

relating 

to safety 

EN 954-1 

Pressuresensitive 

protection 

devices 

EN 1760 

5/17

5 



Obligations of the machine user: 

the Health and Safety Directive 

Requirements of the Health and Safety Directive 

Health and Safety 

Directive: 

89/655/CEE 

Theuserisobligedto 

make his machine 

installation comply with 

the Health and Safety 

Directive 

Health and Safety Directive 89/655/CEE is aimed at setting minimum 

standards of protection in the workplace and in particular concerns the use 

of products. 

Requirements of the 

Health and Safety 

Directive 

The directive defines the 

general framework of 

preventive measures to 

betakeninthe 

workplace 

b Compulsory risk analysis. 

b Accident prevention programme. 

b Principle of employer and worker responsibility. 

b Compulsory training and information. 

b Participation of worker representatives in defining safety measures. 

b Principle of priority of collective protection over individual protection. 

5 

The Health and Safety 

Directive as applicable 

to workers 

The law 

As from January 1997, the Health and Safety Directive alone is applicable 

in all countries of the European Union. 

Obligations 

As from January 1997, machine installations must conform to the minimum 

requirements of the Health and Safety Directive. 

Each country has its own regulations which must be at least as strict as the 

Health and Safety Directive. 

Countries 

Legally, the European Union only. 

Note: Norway and Switzerland are adopting equivalent regulations. 

Work equipment 

Machine installations. 

5/18

5 



Obligations of the machine user: 

the Health and Safety Directive 

Subjects dealt with 

5 

Subjects dealt with 

For each of the subjects 

dealt with, we shall 

suggest a series of 

actions and 

recommendations, 

based on Health and 

Safety Directive 

89/655/CEE, which you 

should implement in 

order to help make your 

machine installation 

conform. 

Control 

devices 

Lighting 

Control 

systems 

relating to 

safety 

(safe systems) 

Signalling 

Deliberate 

starting 

Disconnection 

from energy 

sources 

Stops 

Fire risks, 

risks of 

explosion 

Moving 

transmission 

components 

Guards and 

protection 

devices 

Electrical 

risks 

Moving parts 

of work 

equipment 

Protection 

devices 

Bursting, 

breakage, 

falling parts, 

splashing 

5/19

5 



European standards 

Authorized bodies 

European 

standards 

There are several 

stages involved in 

creating a 

European standard 

b Setting up a Working Group (WG) to deal with a specific subject. 

b Preparation of a draft standard (prEN) which is circulated for reading 

and comments, then voted by the national committees. 

b Writing of the final text for the standard (EN). 

Harmonized European 

standards 

Standards closely 

linked with one or 

more “new approach” 

directives (low 

voltage machinery, 

electromagnetic 

compatibility), 

adopted by 

European Union and 

EFTA countries 

Mandated by the European Commission, they are prepared on the basis of 

the directives to which they relate. 

Their preparation initially goes through the same stages as any non 

harmonized European standard; their harmonization then requires: 

- publication in the Official Gazette of each country in the European Union, 

- publication in the European Community Official Gazette. 

Compliance with a harmonized European 

standard assumes conformity with the 

corresponding Directive 

5 

European standards relating to safety are split into three types: 

b Type A 

Basic standards: general aspects, design principles. 

Machine safety, basic notions, general design principles: EN 292 

b Type B 

Group standards: 

B1 : specific safety aspect 

- electrical safety: EN 60204-1 

B2 : associated with safety devices 

- two-hand control: EN 574 

- Emergency stop: EN 418 

b Type C 

Safety instructions for a family of machines: 

- handling equipment and systems: prEN 616 to 620 

- hydraulic presses, safety: prEN 693 

Authorized bodies Examples Authorized bodies, appointed by decree, proceed with e type tests and 

issue e type certificates for dangerous machinery (see list page 5/23). 

A list of authorized bodies can be obtained from the Ministry of Employment 

in each country, and from the European Commission in Brussels. 

5/20

5 



Classification conforming to type of European 

harmonized standard 

Classification 

conforming to type of 

European harmonized 

standard 

EN 931 

EN 1114-1 

EN 1037 

EN 61496-1 

EN 692 

EN 746 

EN 60947-5-3 

EN 418 

EN 294 

EN 1088 

EN 60204-1 

EN 60947-5-1 

EN 292 

EN 953 

EN 954-1 

EN 1050 

EN 972 

EN 574 

EN 1760 

EN 1974 

5 

EN 999 

EN 693 

EN 415 

EN 292 

EN 294 

EN 954-1 

EN 1050 

EN 60204-1 

EN 418 

EN 574 

EN 953 

EN 999 

EN 1037 

EN 1088 

EN 60947-5-1 

EN 60947-5-3 

EN 1760 

EN 61496-1 

EN 415 

EN 692 

EN 693 

EN 746 

EN 931 

EN 972 

EN 1114-1 

EN 1974 

Safety of machinery; basic concept, general principles for design 

Safety distances to prevent danger zones being reached by the upper limbs 

Safety-related parts of control systems 

Principles for risk assessment 

Electrical equipment of machines 

Emergency stop equipment, (functional aspects; principles for design) 

Two-hand control devices 

Guards 

The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of the human body 

Prevention of unexpected start-up 

Interlocking devices associated with guards 

Electromechanical control circuit devices 

Proximity devices with an enhanced resistance to failure 

Pressure sensitive protective devices 

Electro-sensitive protective equipment 

Safety of packaging machines 

Mechanical presses 

Hydraulic presses 

Industrial thermoprocessing equipment 

Footwear manufacturing machines 

Tannery machines 

Rubber and plastics machines - Extruders 

Food processing machines - Slicing machines 

The diagram above shows the satellite type relationship between some of the various provisional and finalised 

European Standards (only a small selection of each type are shown). 

The inner orbits comprise A and B Standards. 

The outer orbit represents the C Standards. 

The content matter of the C Standards is formed under the influence of the A and B Standards. 

5/21

5 



Extracts from standards 

Standard EN 292 

Machine safety 

Basic notions 

General design principles 

Standard EN 292 is a type A standard, split into 2 parts. 

The first part contains: definitions of basic concepts, a list and description of the various hazards, the method for 

designing and building safe machines and for risk evaluation. 

The second parts gives advice on using the various techniques available to achieve the 4 stages of this strategy 

(intrinsic prevention, protection, instructions for the user, additional measures). 

Standard EN 60204-1 


Electrical equipment 

in industrial machines 

This standard gives assumed compliance with the minimum requirements of the Machinery and Low Voltage Directives. 

Standard EN 60204-1 is the reference standard for all aspects of electrical equipment in industrial machines: protection 

of personnel, of the machine and of the equipment, man-machine interfaces, control system, connection, cabling, 

documentation, marking. 

Definition of 3 stopping categories: 

b category 0: stopping by immediate cutting off of power to the actuators 

(example : uncontrolled stop), 

b category 1: controlled stop by maintaining power to the actuators until the machine has stopped, then cutting off 

the power when stopping has been achieved, 

b category 2: controlled stop by maintaining power to the actuators. 

Note: not to be confused with the control system categories conforming to standard EN 954-1. 

5 



Locking and interlocking devices 

Principles 

This standard gives assumed compliance with the minimum requirements of the Machinery Directive. 

b Definition of: 

- guard with locking device, 

- guard with interlocking device, 

- autocheck: continuous (immediate stop if a fault occurs), discontinuous (next operating cycle inhibited if a fault 

occurs), 

- positive mechanical action, 

- positive opening operation. 

b Classification of locking systems according to technological aspects. 

b Requirements for the design of locking devices: design and fitting (cam, common failure mode), key switches, cam 

switches, ... 

b Additional technological requirements for electric locking devices: positive mode, N/C contact with positive opening 

operation. 

b Selection criteria: according to the stopping time, the frequency of access. 

b Appendices (informative): principles, advantages, comments, figures. 



Emergency Stop devices 

Principles 


Emergency Stop: 

b Function designed to: 

- avoid hazards which are emerging or which already exist and which could cause injury to personnel (hazards arising 

when faults occur), 

- be tripped by a human action. 

b Safety requirements: 

- the Emergency Stop function must be available and able to operate at all times, 

- the Emergency Stop must operate on the positive action principle (defined in standard EN 292), 

- the Emergency Stop may be category 0 (immediate cutting off of power to the actuator) or category 1 (controlled 

stop; power to the actuators is maintained until they can stop the machine; power is cut off when stopping has been 

achieved). 



Two-hand control stations 


Standard EN 574 defines three types of two-hand control. 

For dangerous machines subject to e type inspection, only type III C is allowed. 

5/22

5 



Dangerous machines and safety components 

subject to e type inspection 

(appendix IV of the Machinery Directive) 

Dangerous 

machines 

1. Single and multi-blade circular saws for sawing wood and similar materials or for sawing meat and similar 

materials. 

1.1 Sawing machines with tool in fixed position when operating, with fixed bed and manual feed of the part, or with 

removable driver. 

1.2 Sawing machines with tool in fixed position when operating, with bench type bed or manually operated, 

reciprocating movement carrier. 

1.3 Sawing machines with tool in fixed position when operating, comprising a factory fitted mechanical driving device 

for the parts to be sawn, with manual loading or unloading. 

1.4 Sawing machines with moving tool when operating, mechanically moved, with manual loading and/or unloading. 

2. Manual feed rough planing machines for working wood. 

3. Single face planing machines, with manual loading or unloading, for working wood and processing meat products. 

4. Band saws with fixed bed or moving carrier and manual loading and/or unloading, for working wood and similar 

materials or meat and similar materials. 

5. Combination machines of the types described in points 1 to 4 and in point 7, for working wood and similar 

materials. 

6. Multi-spindle tenoning machines with manual feed, for working wood. 

7. Vertical spindle moulding machines with manual feed, for working wood and similar materials. 

8. Portable chain saws for working wood. 

9. Presses, including folding machines, for cold working of metal, with manual loading and/or unloading, whose 

moving working components can have a travel greater than 6 millimetres and a speed greater than 30 millimetres 

per second. 

10. Plastic injection or compression moulding machines, with manual loading or unloading. 

5 

11. Rubber injection or compression moulding machines, with manual loading or unloading. 

12. Machines for underground work of the following types: 

- moving machines on rails: locomotives and braking trucks, 

- moving hydraulic props, 

- internal combustion engines designed to be fitted on machines used for underground work. 

13. Domestic refuse collection trucks, with manual loading and comprising a compression mechanism. 

14. Removable universal joint type power transmission shafts and protective devices as described in points 3.4.7. 

15. Vehicle lifting ramps. 

16. Devices designed for lifting persons, with risk of vertical falls greater than 3 metres. 

17. Machines for making pyrotechnic articles. 

Safety components 1. Electro-sensitive devices designed for the detection of persons (safety light curtains, sensitive mats, 

electromagnetic sensors). 

2. Logic blocks performing safety functions for two-hand control units. 

3. Automatic moving guards for protection of the machines described in points 9, 10 and 11 above. 

4. Roll over protection structures (ROPS). 

5. Falling object protection structures (FOPS). 

5/23

5 



Safety techniques: 

Negative, positive and combined modes 

Operation in negative 

mode and in positive 

mode 

The mechanical 

system for 

machine 

protection must 

be properly 

designed 

For this, it is recommended that the protection system should work in positive mode, as 

described below. 

The two dangerous faults represented in positive mode can be cleared by preventive 

maintenance; this is not the case with those represented in negative mode (the negative 

mode faults are internal and therefore difficult to detect). 

Operation in 

negative mode 

Contacts welded 

Broken spring 

Machine 

operating 

Machine stopped 

Dangerous faults: 


Operation in 

positive mode 

5 

Worn roller 

Incorrect 

cam alignment 

Machine 

operating 

Machine stopped 

Dangerous faults: 


If there is only one sensor, it must be wired in positive mode 

Operation in combined 

mode 

To clear faults 

due to positive 

mode, use 

combined mode 

Combined mode makes it possible to clear faults due to use of positive mode 

only. 

Negative mode is only acceptable if it is combined with a sensor in positive mode; 

combination of the two modes by means of a positive mode sensor used in conjunction 

with a negative mode sensor avoids the risk of common mode failures (same failure on 

both sensors). 

Combined positive and negative mode 

Moving 

guard 

S2 

S2 

S1 

S2 

S1 

S1 

Negative mode 

Positive mode 

Machine operating 

Guard closed: 

machine operating 

Guard open: 

machine stopped 

Combined mode provides a higher level of safety than positive mode alone. 

5/24

5 




Mechanically linked electrical auxiliary contacts 

Mechanically linked 

electrical auxiliary 

contacts 

Definition 

Mechanically linked contacts are contacts which have: 

b a mechanical link between the contacts, 

b a minimum distance between the points of a normally closed contact in the event of 

a normally open contact being welded, and vice versa, 

b control relays CApK and CAp-D meet these requirements and their use is 

particularly recommended in all safety applications. 

Linked contacts are 

contacts which are 

mechanically linked in 

such a way as to ensure 

that normally closed and 

normally open contacts 

can never be closed at 

thesametime. 

Mechanical link 

Linked contacts 

Mechanical guiding (forced guiding) makes it impossible to close the normally closed 

and normally open contacts simultaneously. 

If a normally closed 

contact becomes welded, 

it must be impossible for 

the normally open 

contacts to close when 

the coil is energised. 

Contact B 

(1) 

5 

If a normally open contact 

becomes welded, it must 

be impossible for the 

normally closed contacts 

to close when the coil is 

de-energised. 

Contact A welded 

(1) Distance required to ensure isolation of the circuit. 

If a failure occurs: contact A welded; then contact B stays open. 

Electrical auxiliary 

contact, mechanically 

linkedtothepower 

poles 

Definition 

An electrical auxiliary contact mechanically linked to the power poles is an N/C auxiliary 

contact which can never be closed at the same time as the power poles. 

If one of the power pole 

contacts becomes 

welded, the mechanical 

link prevents the N/C 

auxiliary contact from 

closing when the coil is 

de-energised. 

Welded 

pole 

1/L1 

2/T1 

3/L2 

4/T2 

5/L3 

6/T3 

21/NC 

22/NC 

(1) 

(1) Distance required to ensure isolation of the circuit. 

The N/C auxiliary contact present in KandDrange contactors meets this definition. 

5/25

5 




Redundancy and autocheck 

Redundancy and 

autocheck 

Redundancy 

Consists of compensating for the failure of one component by correct operation of 

another, based on the assumption that both will not fail simultaneously. 

Cause of the first fault: 

- break, 

-crushing, 

- disconnection, 

- shorting, 

- failure of a component. 

If an initial fault is not noticed, there is no incentive to make repairs and a second fault 

may eventually occur, jeopardizing safety. 

5 

Autocheck 

(cyclic) 

Consists of automatically checking the operation of each of the components which 

change state at each cycle. 

Consequence: the next cycle may be inhibited or allowed. 

Redundancy 

+ 

autocheck 

An initial fault in the safety circuit is infallibly detected before a second fault 

occurs (next cycle inhibited). 

5/26

5 




Coordination 

Motor starter 

Comprises a set of equipment 

which can provide: 

Isolation Isolate the upstream circuit Safety of personnel 

Protection 

against short-circuits and 

overloads 

Detect and break high currents 

Safety of motor and 

cables 

Power switching Start and stop the motor Safety and comfort of 

personnel 

Approvals 

We offer modular combinations conforming to standard IEC 947, so making 

selection easier. Furthermore, having been tested and approved by ASEFA 

and LOVAG laboratories and certified by the LCIE, they ensure safe operation. 

The term used in the starter standard to define the quality of the combination 

is: coordination. The coordination classes determine the permissible degree 

of damage to the equipment after a short-circuit. 

Type 2 

coordination 

Type 1 

coordination 

5 

Total 

coordination 

Coordination Type 1 Damage to the starter components is permissible. 

Type 2 

Welding of the contactor or starter contacts is permissible, provided that they 

are easy to separate. 

Type 2 coordination has the advantage of improving the safety of personnel 

and equipment. 

Total 

No damage or risk of welding are permissible: example integral contactor 

breakers LD. 

Examples 

Electro-mechanical 

combination 

b Motor circuit breaker GV2-M + contactor LC1-K or LC1-D 

b integral contactor breaker LD 

b Switch-disconnector-fuse GS1 + contactor LC1-D or LC1-F + relay LR2- 

D, LR9-F or LT7 

Circuit breaker NS + contactor LC1-F + relay LR9-F or LT7 

Please consult our catalogues “Motor starter solutions” n° 27501. 

Electronic 

combination 

For certain applications, the motor starter may include electronic equipment 

which allows great operating flexibility for asynchronous motors: 

- either Altistart soft start/soft stop units, 

- or Altivar variable speed drives with frequency converter. 

Please consult our catalogue “Soft starters and variable speed drives” 

n° 86175. 

5/27

5 



Safety techniques: electrical hazards 

Protection against electric shocks and overcurrent 

Disconnection from energy sources 

Objective Safe operation Installations must be designed and built so as to ensure satisfactory operation 

and safety levels. 

(conforming to standards IEC 364) 

Protection against 

electric shocks 

Direct contact 

1 2 3 N 

b Complete protection: 

- equipment installed in enclosures, 

- minimum degree of protection: IP ..., 

- closure using a tool or a key, 

- metal enclosures must be connected to the protective earth conductor. 

b Special protection: use of very low power voltage or very low safety voltage. 

b Additional protection: use of high sensitivity residual current devices (RCD) 

(< 30 mA). 

5 

Indirect contact 

b Protection by automatic cutting off of the power supply at the 1st or 2nd fault, 

in accordance with the earth connection scheme. 

b Use of double insulated equipment (class II) 

conforming to standards IEC 536. 

Protection of live 

conductors against 

overcurrent 

Use of an 

automatic breaking 

device against 

overload and shortcircuits 

(fuses or circuit breakers) 

The device must be installed on the incoming supply of each circuit (change of 

conductor c.s.a.). Selection is determined by: 

- the rating (c.s.a. of the cable to be protected), 

- the breaking capacity: short-circuit current at the point in question (Icu), 

- the operational voltage (Ue), 

- the type of circuit to be protected: cable lengths, type of load ..., 

- the required auxiliary functions: signalling, remote control or tripping, etc., 

- the required installation or operating accessories: rotary operators, inter-locking 

and locking, terminal shrouds, etc. 

Disconnection from 

energy sources 

Principle of 

padlocking 

Isolation of a machine or of a short-circuit must be achieved by the use of devices 

and means which ensure that operators can work safely when carrying out 

maintenance operations. 

Positive break 

indication 

A circuit breaker always performs isolation and breaking 

functions. It meets specifications for positive break 

indication. 

5/28

5 



Safety techniques: electrical hazards 

Protection against insulation faults 

Protection against 

insulation faults 

Earth connection 

type TN-C 

PEN 

Tripping always occurs at the first fault. A phase-to-earth fault causes a shortcircuit. 

Protection is provided by the magnetic trips of the circuit breaker. 


type TN-S 

N 

PE 

The addition of a residual current device may be necessary. 

5 


type TT 

N 

PE 

Tripping always occurs at the first fault. A residual current device must be fitted 

on the incoming supply of the installation. The use of one protection device for 

each starter improves uptime. 


type IT 

N 

PE 

CPI 

The mains supply is monitored by a continuous insulation monitor. The first fault 

(not dangerous) is signalled by the monitor. The second fault causes tripping 

(magnetic trips in the circuit breakers or residual current devices). 

5/29

6/0 

3 -

Contents 0 

6-Services 

b Index 

v Product reference index. ................................... page 6/2 

b Technical information 

v Protectivetreatmentaccordingtoclimaticenvironment ........... page 6/4 

v Product standards and approvals ............................ page 6/6 

v Degrees of protection provided by enclosures .................. page 6/8 

b Schneider Electric worldwide 

v Addresses ............................................. page 6/10 

6 

6/1

6/2

6 

0 

Product reference index 0 

A 

App 4/40 

AB1 AC 4/31 

AB1 VV 4/31 

ABE 7CPA 1/170 

ABL 7RP 1/19 

ASI SAFEMON 1/154 

ASI SCM 1/154 

ASI SCPC 1/154 

ASI SMONDOCA 1/154 

ASI SSLB 1/158 

ASI SSLC 1/158 

ASI SSLLS 1/158 

ASI SWIN 1/154 

ASI TERp 1/154 

D 

DE9 RA 3/24 

and 3/42 

DE9 RI 1/158 

DE9 RP 3/34 

DL1 AA 3/34 

DL1 B 3/59 

DL1 BR 3/63 

DL1 CE 3/34 

DL1 GA 3/34 

G 

GV2-CP 4/31 

GV2-E 4/31 

GV2-K 4/31 

GV2-MC 4/31 

GV2-ME 4/28 

GV2-MP 4/31 

GV2-SN 4/31 

GV2-V 4/31 

GV-AD 4/29 

GV-AE 4/29 

GV-AM 4/29 

GV-AN 4/29 

GV-AX 4/29 

K 

KCC 4/13 

KCD 4/13 

KCE 4/13 

KCF 4/13 

KZ 4/14 

and 4/15 

L 

LG1-D 4/35 

LG1-K 4/35 

LG7-D 4/34 

LG7-K 4/34 

LG8-K 4/36 

LJ7-K 4/40 

LJ8-K 4/41 

Q 

Q99900911 3/34 

S 

SIS CD 2/83 

T 

TSX CPP 1/170 

TSX DPZ 1/164 

TSX PAY 1/170 

TSX PCX 1/19 

V 

V 4/11 

and 4/17 

VCCD 4/10 

VCCDN 4/8 

VCCF 4/10 

VCD 4/10 

VCDN 4/8 

VCF 4/10 

and 4/16 

VCFN 4/16 

VCFX 4/17 

VN 4/9 

and 4/17 

VVE 4/10 

VZ 4/11, 4/14 

and 4/18 

VZN 4/9, 4/14 

and 4/19 

X 

XAL K 3/15 

and 3/16 

XB4 BS 3/7 

XB4 BT 3/7 

XB5 AS 3/11 

XB5 AT 3/11 

XBT Z 1/19 

XBY 3/59 

XCK P 2/72, 2/74 

and 2/76 

XCK T 2/72 

and 2/74 

XCO M 3/23 

and 3/32 

XCS A 2/20, 2/22 

and 2/24 

XCS B 2/20, 2/22 

and 2/24 

XCS C 2/20, 2/22 

and 2/24 

XCS D 2/66 

XCS DMC 2/56 

XCS DMP 2/56 

XCS DMR 2/56 

XCS E 2/21, 2/23 

and 2/25 

XCS M 2/62 

XCS MP 2/32 

XCS P 2/68 

XCS PA 2/36, 2/38 

and 2/40 

XCS PL 2/48, 2/50 

and 2/52 

XCS PR 2/48, 2/50 

and 2/52 

XCS TA 2/36, 2/38 

and 2/40 

XCS TE 2/37, 2/39 

and 2/41 

XCS TL 2/48, 2/50 

and 2/52 

XCS TR 2/48, 2/50 

and 2/52 

XCS Z 2/20, 2/22, 

2/24, 2/26, 

2/32, 2/36, 

2/38 

and 2/40 

XCS ZC 2/56 

XCS ZP 2/56 

XCS ZR 2/56 

XE2S P 3/42 

XES P 3/45 

XPE A 3/45 

XPE B 3/45 

XPE G 3/45 

XPE M 3/41 

and 3/42 

XPE R 3/41 

and 3/42 

XPE S 3/45 

XPE Z 3/42 

and 3/45 

XPS AC 1/64 

XPS AF 1/75 

XPS AFL 1/79 

XPS AK 1/89 

XPS AR 1/83 

XPS AT 1/68 

XPS AV 1/68 

XPS BA 1/102 

XPS BC 1/102 

XPS BF 1/102 

XPS CM 2/96 

XPS DA 1/133 

XPS DMB 1/115 

XPS DME 1/115 

XPS ECM 1/107 

XPS ECP 1/107 

XPS FB 1/98 

XPS LMR 1/122 

XPS LMS 1/122 

XPS MC 1/19 

XPS MP 1/6 

XPS NS 1/135 

XPS OT 1/146 

XPS PVK 1/141 

XPS PVT 1/137 

XPS TSA 1/111 

XPS TSW 1/111 

XPS VC 1/94 

XPS VN 1/127 

XSZ B 2/56 

XSZ SMK 2/105 

XSZ TCR 2/105 

XSZ TCT 2/105 

XU2 S 2/97 

XUS LTQ 2/103, 

2/106 

and 2/108 

XUS LTR 2/104 

and 2/107 

XUS LTY 2/104 

and 2/107 

XUS LZ 2/105 

XUS ZA 2/105 

XUS ZM 2/105 

XUS ZWS 2/109 

XVB C 3/55 

to 3/59 

XVB L 3/52 

to 3/54 

XVR 3/63 

XVS B 3/65 

XVS G 3/65 

XVS M 3/65 

XY2 AU 3/19 

XY2 AZ 3/19 

XY2 CB 3/29 

XY2 CE 3/29 

XY2 CH 3/29 

XY2 CZ 3/32 

to 3/34 

XY2 SB 3/23 

and 3/24 

XY2 TP 2/83 

XY2 TZ 2/83 

XZC PTP 2/84 

XZC RTPA 2/84 

Z 

Zp 4/15 

ZA2 B 3/34 

ZB2 B 3/34 

ZB4 B 3/24 

ZB4 BS 1/158 

and 3/8 

ZB4 BT 3/8 

ZB4 BZ 3/8 

ZB5 A 3/12 

and 3/16 

ZB5 AS 1/158 

ZBY 3/7, 3/11 

and 3/17 

ZEN L 3/16 

6 

6/3

0 


6 


according to climatic environment 

Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is placed, Schneider Electric can offer 

specially adapted products to meet your requirements. 

In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be remembered : 

p The prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion. 

p Only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be considered. 

All climates treatment “TC” 

This is the standard treatment for the Telemecanique brand equipment and is suitable for the vast majority of 

applications. 

It is the equivalent of treatments described as “Klimafest”, “Climateproof”, “Total tropicalisation” or “Super tropicalisation” 

and meets the same requirements, in particular : 

p Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at : 

+ 40 °C and 95 % relative humidity. 

p DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber : 

+ 23 °C and 83 % relative humidity, 

+ 40 °C and 92 % relative humidity. 

It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification authorities : BV-LROS-GL-DNV-RINA. 


p Steel components are usually treated with zinc chromate and, when they have a mechanical function, they may 

also be painted. 

p Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical characteristics. 

p Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. 

some prefabricated busbar trunking components). 

Limits for use of “TC” (All climates) treatment 

6 

p “TC” treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity : 

Temperature (°C) 20 40 50 

Relative humidity (%) 95 80 50 

p It may also be used where the above limits are only exceeded accidentally or for very short periods, or where 

temperature variations are not sufficient or fast enough to cause heavy condensation or dripping water on the 

equipment. 

“TC” treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes, including tropical and equatorial regions, where the equipment is 

mounted in normal, ventilated industrial locations. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature 

variations are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is virtually non-existent. 

Extension of use of “TC” (All climates) treatment 

In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described above, where the equipment, in 

tropical regions, is mounted outdoors, or where it is placed in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam 

rooms, etc.), “TC” treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken : 

p The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a “TH” finish (see next page) and must be 

well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers). 

p Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a “TC” finish. 

p If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided (0.2 to 0.5 kW per square 

decimetre of enclosure), switched on automatically when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside 

of the enclosure at a temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby avoiding any 

risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the equipment itself in normal running is sufficient to 

provide this temperature difference). 

p For pilot devices, the use of “TC” treatment can be extended to outdoor use provided the enclosure is made of light 

alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this case, it is essential to ensure that the degree of protection against 

penetration of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved. 

6/4

0 


6 


according to climatic environment 

“TH” treatment for hot and humid environments 

This treatment is for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are subject to condensation, dripping water and the 

risk of fungi. 

Plastic insulating components are also resistant to attacks from insects such as termites and cockroaches. These 

properties have led to this treatment being described as “Tropical Finish”, but this does not mean that all equipment 

installed in tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone “TH” treatment. On the other hand, certain 

operating conditions in temperate climates may well require the use of “TH” treated equipment (see limitations for use 

of “TC” treatment). 

Special characteristics of “TH” treatment 

p All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi or treated with a fungicide, and which 

have increased resistance to creepage (Standards IEC 112, NF C 26-220, DIN 5348). 

p Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat. 

Components with “TH” treatment may be subject to a surcharge (1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office. 

(1) A large number of the Telemecanique brand products are “TH” treated as standard and are, therefore, not subject 

to a surcharge. 

Protective treatment selection guide 

Location Environmental Duty Internal Type Protective treatment 

conditions cycle heating of of of of 

enclosure climate components enclosure 

when not in use 

Indoors No dripping Unimportant Unnecessary Unimportant “TC” “TC” 

water or 

condensation 

Presence Frequent No Temperate “TC” “TH” 

of dripping switching off Equatorial “TH” “TH” 

water 

for periods of 

or more than 1 day Yes Unimportant “TC” “TH” 

condensation 

Continuous Unnecessary Unimportant “TC” “TH” 

Outdoors No dripping Unimportant Unnecessary Temperate “TC” “TC” 

(sheltered) water Equatorial “TH” “TH” 

or dew 

6 

Exposed Frequent and Frequent No Temperate “TC” “TH” 

outdoors regular presence switching off Equatorial “TH” “TH” 

or of dripping water for periods of 

near the or dew more than 1 day Yes Unimportant “TC” “TH” 

sea 

Continuous Unnecessary Unimportant “TC” “TH” 

These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of guide UTE C 63-100. 

Special precautions for electronic equipment 

Electronic products always meet the requirements of “TC” treatment. A number of them are “TH” treated as standard. 

Some electronic products (for example : programmable controllers, flush mountable controllers CCX and flush mountable 

operator terminals XBT) necessitate the use of an enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined 

by the standards IEC 664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental conditions requiring a 

“TH” treatment. 

These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree of protection to at least IP 20 (either 

provided by the enclosure itself or following installation) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution does 

not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing activities, for example). 

Special treatments 

For highly corrosive industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer special protective treatments. 


6/5

0 


6 

Product standards and approvals 

Standardisation 


The Telemecanique brand products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great Britain, NF in 

France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or international (IEC) standards. These product standards 

precisely define the performance of the designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment). 

When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and correct practices, these 

products will allow assembled equipment, machine systems or installations to conform to their appropriate standards (for 

example: IEC 60204, relating to electrical equipment used on industrial machines). 

Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has chosen to comply with, 

through its quality assurance system. 

On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following: 

- a declaration of conformity, 

- a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG), 

- an approval certificate or agreement, in the countries where this procedure is required or for particular specifications, 

such as those existing in the merchant navy. 

Code Standards body Country 

Name 

Abbreviation 

ANSI American National Standards Institute ANSI USA 

BS British Standards Institution BSI Great Britain 

CEI Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano CEI Italy 

DIN/VDE Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker VDE Germany 

EN Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique CENELEC Europe 

GOST Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov GOST Russia 

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Worldwide 

JIS Japanese Industrial Standard JISC Japan 

NBN Institut Belge de Normalisation IBN Belgium 

NEN Nederlands Normalisatie Institut NNI Netherlands 

NF Union Technique de l'Electricité UTE France 

SAA Standards Association of Australia SAA Australia 

UNE Asociacion Española de Normalizacion y Certificacion AENOR Spain 

European EN standards 

6 

These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the relative bodies within the 

various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free Trade Association and many central and 

eastern European countries having «member» or «affiliated» status). Arrived at through the principle of consensus, the 

European standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated into the 

national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn. 

The European standards are now incorporated within the French standards and carry the prefix NF EN. Under the 

“Technical Union of Electricity” (UTE), the French version of the corresponding European standard carries a double 

notation: European reference (NF EN …) and classification (C …). 

Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively constitutes the French 

version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE classification C 63-110. 

This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN EN 60947-4-1. 

Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC). 

With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to complying with the requirements 

of French NF standards, Telemecanique brand components conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries. 

Regulations 

European Directives 

Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each member country of the 

European Union. 

The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of goods within the European 

Union, and it applies to each member country. Member countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their 

national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of 

a technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved and are referred to as “essential 

requirements”. 

The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each 

Directive applicable to his production. 

As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the Directive(s) for his product 

by affixing a e mark. 

The e mark is affixed to Telemecanique brand products, as defined by French and European regulations. 

Significance of the e mark 

-Thee mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to the relevant 

European Directive(s) which concern him ; this condition must be met to allow free distrubition and circulation within the 

countries of the European Union of any product subject to one or move of the E.U. Directives. 

-Thee mark is intended solely for national market control authorities. 

-Thee mark must not be confused with a conformity marking. 

6/6

0 


6 

Product standards and approvals 

European Directives (continued) 

For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its designated function, and 

only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high level of quality assurance. 

For Telemecanique brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable, depending on the product, in 

particular: 

- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC: the e mark relating to this Directive has 

been compulsory since 1st January 1997. 

- the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: the 

e mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1996. 

ASEFA-LOVAG certification 

The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations d'Essais Française d'Appareils électriques - Association of French 

Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry out tests of conformity to standards and to 

issue certificates of conformity and test reports. ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation 

committee (COFRAC). 

ASEFA is now a member of the European accord group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group). This means that any 

certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the authorities forming the membership of the group and 

carry the same validity as those issued by any of the member authorities. 

Quality labels 

When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes recommended that a “Quality label” 

be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity. 

Code Quality label Country 

CEBEC Comité Electrotechnique Belge Belgium 

KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands 

NF Union Technique de l'Electricité France 

ÖVE Österreichischer Verband für Electrotechnik Austria 

SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden 

Approvals 

In some countries, the approval of certain electrical equipment is required by law or by the market. In this case, an approval 

certificate is issued by the official test authority. 

Each approved component must bear the relevant quality label when this is mandatory: 

Code Approval authority Country 

CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada 

UL Underwriters Laboratories USA 

Note on approvals issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of approval: 

6 

“Recognized” ( ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a workshop, where the 

operating limits are known by the equipment manufacturer and where its use within such limits 

is acceptable by the Underwriters Laboratories. 

The component is not approved as a “Product for general use” because its manufacturing 

characteristics are incomplete or its application possibilities are limited. 

A “Recognized” component does not necessarily carry the approval symbol. 

“Listed” (UL) The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification applicable to it and may 

therefore be used both as a “Product for general use” and as a component in assembled 

equipment. 

A “Listed” component must carry the approval symbol. 

Marine classification authorities 

Prior approval by certain marine classification authorities is generally required for electrical equipment which is intended 

for use on board merchant vessels. 

Code Classification authority Country 

BV Bureau Veritas France 

DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway 

GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany 

LROS Lloyd's Register of Shipping Great Britain 

NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyokaï Japan 

RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy 

RRS Register of Shipping Russia 

Note 

For further details on a specific product, please refer to the “Characteristics” pages in this catalogue or consult your 

Regional Sales Office. 

6/7

0 


6 

Degrees of protection provided by enclosures 

Degrees of protection 

against the penetration 

of solid bodies, water 

and personnel access 

to live parts 

The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529 (2nd edition - November 1989), defines a 

coding system (IP code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against 

accidental direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water. 

This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gasses, 

fungi or vermin. 

Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute towards achieving the required 

degree of protection (example : control devices mounted on an enclosure). 

Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example : enclosure with an opening in the 

base). 

Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various 

degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according 

to external factors. 

Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment 

(including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed. 

IP ppp code 

The IP code comprises 2 characteristic 

numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may 

include an additional letter when 

the actual protection of personnel 

against direct contact with live parts 

is better than that indicated by the 

first numeral (e.g. IP 20C). 

1 st characteristic numeral : corresponds to protection of the 

equipment against penetration of solid objects and protection 

of personnel against direct contact with live parts. 

0 

Protection of the equipment 

Non-protected 

Protection of 

personnel 

Non-protected 

2nd characteristic numeral : corresponds to 

protection of the equipment against 

penetration of water with harmful effects. 

0 

Non-protected 

6 

Any characteristic numeral which is 

unspecified is replaced by an X 

(e.g. IP XXB). 

1 

2 

Protected against 

the penetration of 

solid objects having 

a diameter 

greater than or 

equal to 50 mm. 


the penetration 

of solid objects 

having a diameter 


equal to 12.5 mm. 


direct contact with 

the back of the 

hand (accidental 

contacts). 


direct finger contact. 

1 

2 

3 

15˚ 

60˚ 


vertical dripping water, 

(condensation). 


dripping water at an 

angle of up to 15°. 


rain at an angle of 

up to 60°. 

3 

4 

5 






equal to 2.5 mm. 





> 1 mm. 

Dust protected 

(no harmful deposits). 



a Ø 2.5 mm tool. 



aØ 1mmwire. 



aØ 1mmwire. 

4 

5 

6 


splashing water in 

all directions. 


water jets in all directions. 


powerful jets of water 

and waves. 

6 

Dust tight. 



aØ 1mmwire. 

7 

8 

1m 

m 

15 cm 

min. 


the effects of temporary 

immersion. 


the effects of prolonged 

immersion 

under specified conditions. 

6/8

Degrees of protection 

against mechanical 

impact 

The European standard EN 50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding 

system (IK code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical 

equipment enclosures against external mechanical impact. 

Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides 

a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental 

conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment 

according to external factors. 

Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics 

required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), 

according to the locations in which they are installed. 

Additional letter : corresponds to 

protection of personnel against 

direct contact with live parts. 

IK pp code 

The IK code comprises 2 characteristic 

numerals (e.g. IK 05). 

2 characteristic numerals : corresponding to a value of impact energy. 

A 

With the back of the hand. 

h (cm) 

Energy (J) 

B 

With the finger. 

00 

Non-protected 

C 

WithaØ2.5mmtool. 

01 

02 

0,2 kg 

h 

7.5 0.15 

10 0.2 

D 

WithaØ1mmwire. 

03 

17.5 0.35 

04 

25 0.5 

6 

05 

35 0.7 

06 

0,5 kg 

20 1 

07 

h 

40 2 

08 

1,7 kg 

30 5 

h 

09 

5 kg 

20 10 

10 

h 

40 20 

6/9

Safety solutions using Preventa - Elmatik AS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?